Vdocuments - MX 1651sm 1661smc Operator Handbook r251 r151

QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE
THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
COD.MANUALE HDBK P/N: 955.100.562 K Ed.07 3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07

1651SM Rel. 2.5.1
1661SM-C Rel.1.5.1
Version ’C2’ on TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ORIGINALE INTERLEAF: FILE ARCHIVIAZIONE: cod ANV (PD1-PD2)
– No PAGINE TOTALI PER ARCHIVIAZIONE: 442
– DIMENSIONE BINDER SORGENTE (du –ks): 14.260 kBytes
INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA - ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

– STAMPARE FRONTE/RETRO RECTO-VERSO PRINTING
– COMPOSIZIONE ED ASSIEMAGGIO DEL MANUALE:
HANDBOOK COMPOSITION AND ASSEMBLY:
No pagine numerate
(facciate) numbered
No pages da from a to
TARGHETTE - LABELS
frontespizio
2
front
955.100.562 K Ed.07 3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07
manuale
436 1/436 436/436
manual
Vedere lista da pagina: No documenti MSZZQ

ALLEGATI DI UNITÀ (MSZZQ) See list from page: No documents MSZZQ
UNIT PRESETTING DOCUMENTS (MSZZQ)
433 33
TOTALE PAGINE A4 (FACCIATE) TOTAL A4 PAGES: 438
TOTALE FOGLI A4 TOTAL A4 SHEETS: 219
WARNING FOR A-UNITS OTHER THAN A-ITALY
• The documents MSZZQ cited in section ’UNIT DOCUMENTATION LIST’ are stored in PDAS.
• Labels are done according to A-Italy binder format.
• Source file: ALICE 6.10
• PDF file retrieved from PD1 must be opened with ACROBAT Reader Version 4.0 at least.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07 RELEASED
955.100.562 TQZZA 3AL 36668 AAAA TQZZA Y 1/ 4
4
QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE
THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK

Dislocazione
VIMERCATE ALCATEL OPTICS GROUP
Autori 1651SM2.5.1&1661SMC1.5.1
C.FAVERO
VERSION ’C2’ ON
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
Dominio : TND
Divisione : LINE TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS SDH
Rubrica : SYNCHRONOUS HIGH ORDER MUX/LINE
Tipo : 1651SM 2.5.1&1661SM–C 1.5.1 TECH.HDBK
Codici di Distribuzione Interno : Esterno :
Approvazioni
Nome G.CAPRIOLI E.CORRADINI

App.
Nome
App.
INFORMAZIONI EDITORIALI
– ORIGINALE SU FILE: ALICE 6.10

• sistemazione ’toc’ e ’figlist’
955.100.562 K Ed.07 3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07

3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07
07
1651SM Rel. 2.5.1
1661SM-C Rel.1.5.1
Version ’C2’ on
622 Mbit/s Add–Drop Multiplexer
2.5 Gbit/s Compact Add–Drop Multiplexer
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07 RELEASED
4
1651SM Rel. 2.5.1
1661SM-C Rel.1.5.1
Version ’C2’ on

TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
955.100.562 K Ed.07 3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07
VOL.1/1
1651SM Rel. 2.5.1

1661SM-C Rel.1.5.1
Version ’C2’ on
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
955.100.562 K Ed.07 3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07
VOL.1/1
1651SM Rel. 2.5.1
1661SM-C Rel.1.5.1
Version ’C2’ on
622 Mbit/s Add–Drop Multiplexer 2.5 Gbit/s Compact Add–Drop Multiplexer
955.100.562 K Ed.07 3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK VOL.1/1
1651SM Rel. 2.5.1

1661SM-C Rel.1.5.1
Version ’C2’ on
622 Mbit/s Add–Drop Multiplexer 2.5 Gbit/s Compact Add–Drop Multiplexer
1651SM Rel. 2.5.1

1661SM-C Rel.1.5.1
Version ’C2’ on
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07 RELEASED
4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
RELEASED
955.100.562 TQZZA
4
3AL 36668 AAAA TQZZA
Y
FINE DEL DOCUMENTO INTERNO – END OF INTERNAL DOCUMENT
4/ 4
Technical Handbook
Alcatel
1651SM & 1661SM-C
1651SM Rel.2.5.1
1661SM-C Rel.1.5.1
Version ’C2’ on
955.100.562 K Ed.07 3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07

955.100.562 K Ed.07 3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07
1651SM 2.5.1 & 1661SM–C 1.5.1 TECH.HDBK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
HANDBOOK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.2 Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.3 Product-release handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.4 Handbook Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.5 Handbook configuration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.5.1 List of the editions and modified parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.5.3 Notes on Ed.02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.5.4 Notes on Ed.03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.5.5 Notes on Ed.04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.5.6 Notes on Ed.05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.5.7 Notes on Ed.06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.5.8 Notes on Ed.07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2 COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

2.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

3.1 First aid for electric shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.2 Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.2.1 General Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.2.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.2.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.2.4 Harmful Optical Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.2.5 Risks of Explosions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.2.6 Moving Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.2.7 Heat–radiating Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.2.8 Specific safety rules in this handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4 OTHER NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
07 001016 SC00100201 G.CAPRIOLI ITAVE C.FAVERO ITAVE

E.CORRADINI
06 000316 SC00031602 G.CAPRIOLI ITAVE F. MAZZARELLA ITAVE
E.CORRADINI
01 971006 G.CAPRIOLI ITAVE S. SCANABISSI ITAVE
E.CORRADINI
ED DATE CHANGE NOTE APPRAISAL AUTHORITY ORIGINATOR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
1651SM2.5.1&1661SMC1.5.1
VERSION ’C2’ ON
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 1 / 436
436
4.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.1.1 General Norms – Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.1.2 General Norms – Turn–on, Tests & Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.1.3 General Norms – Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

4.2 Electrostatic Dischargers (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

4.3 Suggestions, notes and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.4 Labels affixed to the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
6 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

6.1 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
6.2 Handbook supply to Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
6.3 Aims of standard Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
6.4 Handbook Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
6.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N) . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
6.4.2 Changes due to a new product-release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
6.5 Customer documentation supply on CD–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
6.5.1 Contents, creation and production of a CD–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
6.5.2 Use of the CD–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
6.5.3 CD–ROM identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
6.5.4 CD–ROM updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
1.1 Introduction to the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
1.2 Insertion of the Equipment into the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
1.2.1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
1.2.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
2 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.1 Equipment front view (New Mechanical Practice) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
2.2 Equipment part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
2.3 Units Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
2.4 Access Module front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
3.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
3.1.1 STM–4 Aggregates sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.1.2 STM–16 Aggregate sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3.1.3 Connection sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3.1.4 Tributary Sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
3.1.5 Automatic Protections Sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
3.1.6 Synchronizing sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
3.1.7 Auxiliary and Overhead Sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
3.1.8 Control sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
3.1.9 Power Supply Sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
3.2 Unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
3.2.1 2 Mbit/s Tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
3.2.2 21x1.5 Mbit/s Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
3.2.3 3x34Mbit/s TRIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3.2.4 34/2 Tran. Mux and 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

3.2.5 3x45Mbit/s TRIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
3.2.6 DVB Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 2 / 436
436
3.2.7 140/STM1 Switch Tributary Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
3.2.8 Optical STM1 Tributary units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
3.2.9 Connection Card unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
3.2.10 Matrix unit: Full Matrix Unit & 16x16 Matrix Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
3.2.11 STM4 Aggregate unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

3.2.12 STM–16 Aggregate unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

3.2.13 AUX/EOW Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
3.2.14 Clock Reference Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
3.2.15 Equipment Controller SMEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
3.2.16 Power Supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
3.2.17 DS Futurebus Termination sub–unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
3.2.18 Alarm Interface Access Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
3.2.19 Qx & Synchronism Access Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
3.2.20 Qx 10 BT & Synchronism Access Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
3.2.21 Power and Housekeeping Access Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
3.2.22 Power and Housekeeping Access Module/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
3.2.23 Auxiliary Access Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
3.2.24 Tributary Access Module sub–unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

4.1 General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
4.1.1 Electrical and optical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
4.2 Unit Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
4.2.1 STM–4 Aggregate units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
4.2.2 STM–16 Aggregate units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
4.2.3 Example of a link specification using 1661 SMC with L–16.2 JE3 Aggregate , a 15 dBm
Booster and a Preamplifier unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
4.2.4 Optical Tributary units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
4.2.5 140/STM1 Switch Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
4.2.6 3x34 Mbit/s TRIB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
4.2.7 3x45 Mbit/s TRIB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
4.2.8 DVB TRIB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
4.2.9 21x2 Mbit/s Trib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
4.2.10 21x1.5 Mbit/s TRIB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
4.2.11 Clock Reference Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
4.2.12 AUX/EOW units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
4.3 Power Supply Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
4.4 Alarm Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
4.5 Mechanical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
4.6 Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
4.6.1 Climatic for operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
4.6.2 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
4.6.3 Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
5 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
5.1 Unpacking and Warehousing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
5.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
5.1.2 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
5.1.3 Warehousing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
5.2 Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

5.2.1 Subrack insertion into the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
5.2.2 Mounting the Union Duct for the fiber–guide duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 3 / 436
436
5.2.3 Mechanical Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
5.3 Electrical and Optical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
5.3.1 Protection ground connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
5.3.2 Electrical Tributary connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

5.3.3 Qx & Synch. Interface Access Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

5.3.4 Alarm Interface Access Module Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
5.3.5 Auxiliary Data Channel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
5.3.6 DVB Tributaries Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
5.3.7 STM4, STM1 Optical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
5.3.8 STM–16 Optical Connections and pass–through connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
5.3.9 IECB connection to/from DROP SHELF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
5.3.10 Interface F connections for local P.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
5.3.11 Power and Housekeeping Access Module Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
TURN–ON, TEST AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

6 INITIAL TURN–ON, TESTS AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
6.1 General safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
6.2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
6.3 Setting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
6.4 Instruments and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
6.5 Local Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
6.5.1 Check on Protection Ground Connections and Optical Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
6.5.2 Power supply checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
6.5.3 Lamp Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
6.5.4 Aggregate Tx optical power check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
6.5.5 Multi–demultiplexing check and AIS forwarding to the electrical Tributaries . . . . . . . . . 374
6.5.6 Multi–demultiplexing check and AIS forwarding to the DVB Tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
6.5.7 Check on the receiver sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
6.5.8 Check on the efficiency of the optical protection (ALS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
6.5.9 Test on Tx optical power transmitted by the Optical 155Mbit/s Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
6.5.10 Multi–demultiplexing and AIS tests on the optical 155Mbit/s tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
6.5.11 Check on the 64 Kbit/s auxiliary channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
6.5.12 Check on the V11 auxiliary channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
6.5.13 STM–4 Aggregate APS Protection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
6.5.14 Tributary EPS Protection Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
6.5.15 CRU’s EPS Protection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
6.5.16 Full Matrix EPS protection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
6.5.17 Check on External free running synchronism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
6.5.18 Remote Alarms check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
6.6 Check on the Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
6.6.1 Multi–demultiplexing check on the link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
6.6.2 Transit (pass–through) check on the link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
6.6.3 TU path–protection check on a ring connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
6.6.4 Check on the EOW channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
6.7 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
6.7.1 Engineering Order Wire channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
6.7.2 Download of the equipment software release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
6.7.3 Craft terminal–managed equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
7 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
7.1 General safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 4 / 436
436
7.2 Maintenance Aspects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
7.3 Instruments And Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
7.4 Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
7.4.1 Routine Maintenance every year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
7.5 Corrective Maintenance (Trouble/Shooting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

7.6 Set of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

7.6.1 Suggested Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
7.6.2 General rules on spare parts management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
7.6.3 Particular rules on spare parts management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
7.7 Repair Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

UNIT DOCUMENTATION LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 5 / 436
436
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
FIGURES

Figure 1. Labels for units with stiffening bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Figure 2. Labels for units without stiffening bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Figure 3. Labels for units with heat–sink. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Figure 4. Labels for units with optical interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Figure 5. Labels for units with no speces on the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Figure 6. Subrack labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Figure 7. Modules’ labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Figure 8. Label identifying label on catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Figure 9. Label specifying serial No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Figure 10. ETSI mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Figure 11. SDH network structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Figure 12. ALCATEL Synchronous System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Figure 13. Terminal multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Figure 14. Dual terminal multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Figure 15. Add/Drop Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Figure 16. Point–to–point links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Figure 17. Linear drop–insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Figure 18. ”HUB” STM–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Figure 19. WDM applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Figure 20. Ring structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Figure 21. Unidirectional broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Figure 22. Front view of the 1651 SM/1661 SM–C – (New Practice Shelf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Figure 23. Access points : 2/1.5 MBit/s and Tran Smux Tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Figure 24. 34, 45 MBit/s, Switchable and DVB Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Figure 25. Access points :Optical Tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Figure 26. Access points: Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Figure 27. Access points: STM–4 Aggregates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Figure 28. Access points: STM–16 HM1 Aggregates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Figure 29. Access points: CRU, AUX–EOW, DS Future bus Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Figure 30. Access Points: Power Supply and Equipment Controller SMEC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Figure 31. Access Module front cover plate – Auxiliary, Battery, Alarm Access Modules . . . . . . . . . 90
Figure 32. Access Module front cover plate – Qx Interface & Sync. Access Module. . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Figure 33. Access Module front cover plate – Qx 10BT Interface & Sync. Access Module. . . . . . . 92
Figure 34. Access Module front cover plate – 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary Access Module. . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Figure 35. Access Module front cover plate – 34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary Access
Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Figure 36. Access Module front cover plate – 3x34/45 Mbit/s Tributary Access Module. . . . . . . . . 95
Figure 37. Access Module front cover plate – 140/155 Mbit/s Tributary Access Module. . . . . . . . . 96
Figure 38. General Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Figure 39. Block diagram of the Tributary and Aggregate units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Figure 40. Connection with STM–4–Aggregate (1651 SM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Figure 41. Connection with Connection Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Figure 42. Cross–connection with Full Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Figure 43. Cross–connection with STM–16 Aggregate (1661 SM–C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Figure 44. 1+1 EPS connection for 140 Mb/s or STM1 electrical trib. 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Figure 45. 1+1 EPS connections for 3x34 Mb/s trib. 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Figure 46. 1+N EPS connections for 2/1.5 Mb/s trib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 47. 1+N EPS connections, 140 Mbit/s or electrical STM1 trib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Figure 48. 1+N EPS connections, 34 Mb/s trib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Figure 49. 1+N EPS connections, 34/2 Trans.Mux & 5x2M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 6 / 436
436
Figure 50. Tributary EPS operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Figure 51. Full Matrix EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Figure 52. Single Ended MS Trial Protection (SL–APS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Figure 53. Typical ring network with SNCP (PPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Figure 54. Drop and Continue D/C W INS W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Figure 55. Drop and Continue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Figure 56. Drop and Continue – 1st failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Figure 57. Drop and Continue – 2nd failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Figure 58. 2F MS SPRING Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Figure 59. Effect of a BRIDGE EAST operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Figure 60. Effect of a BRIDGE WEST operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Figure 61. Effect of SWITCH EAST operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Figure 62. Effect of SWITCH WEST operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Figure 63. Line break recovering operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Figure 64. 2F MS–SPRING example of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Figure 65. Squelching on isolated Node connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Figure 66. MS SPRING Drop and Continue, Insert Continues (protected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Figure 67. D/C IC Connection used for the SNCP/MS SPRING Interworking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Figure 68. Synchronizing sub–system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Figure 69. Auxiliaries / Overheads block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Figure 70. Controller subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Figure 71. 1651–SM/1661 SM–C General Management Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Figure 72. Connection Mode for TMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Figure 73. VC–12 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Figure 74. TU–12 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Figure 75. Block diagram: 21x2 Mbit/s trib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Figure 76. 21x1.5 Mbit/s Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Figure 77. VC–3 structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 78. TU–3 structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 79. Block diagram : 3 x 34 Mbit/s Trib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Figure 80. 34/2 Trans Mux and 5 x 2 Mbit/s tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Figure 81. Schema funzionale 3 x 45Mbit/s TRIB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Figure 82. Block diagram : DVB TRIB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Figure 83. VC–4 Structure and POH byte contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Figure 84. STM–1 structure and SOH byte contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Figure 85. Block diagram: 140/STM–1 Switch tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Figure 86. Block diagram: Optical Trib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Figure 87. Block diagram: Optical Trib. S/L–1.1 600 FC/SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Figure 88. AU4 structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Figure 89. Block diagram: Full Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Figure 90. SOH structure of STM–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Figure 91. STM–4 structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Figure 92. Block diagram: STM–4 Aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Figure 93. SOH structure of STM–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Figure 94. STM–16 structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Figure 95. Block diagram : STM–16 Aggregate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Figure 96. Block diagram: SL/SM AUX/EOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Figure 97. Block diagram: Clock Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Figure 98. Block diagram : Equipment Controller SMEC 2A8R + 16F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Figure 99. Block Diagram: Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 100. Block diagram: Futurebus Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Figure 101. Block diagram: Alarm Interface Access Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Figure 102. Block diagram: Qx & Synch. Access Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Figure 103. Block diagram: Qx 10–BT & Synch. Access Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 7 / 436
436
Figure 104. Power Access Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Figure 105. Power Access Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Figure 106. 21x2 Mbit/s Access Module block diagram (one of the 21 switch functions performed) 275
Figure 107. TRMUX +5x2 Mbit/s block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Figure 108. 34 Mbit/s Access Module – Switch block diagram (one of three switch function

performed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Figure 109. 140 Mbit/s Access Module – Switch block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Figure 110. Climatogram for Class 3.2 : Partly temperature controlled locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Figure 111. Climatogram for Class 3.1: Temperature–controlled locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Figure 112. Climatogram for Class 1.2: not temperature controlled storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Figure 113. Subrack insertion into the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Figure 114. Subrack insertion into Optinex rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Figure 115. Mounting the union duct for the fiber–guide duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Figure 116. Mechanical structure of the subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Figure 117. Connection points for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Figure 118. Protection ground connections for N3 –LC racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Figure 119. Tributary units and Access Module subunits relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Figure 120. 1.5 Mbit/s (100 Ohm) Tributary Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Figure 121. 2 Mbit/s (75 ohms) Tributary Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Figure 122. 2 Mbit/s (120 Ohm) Tributary Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Figure 123. 34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary connections – 120 Ohm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Figure 124. 34 or 45 Mbit/s Tributary connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Figure 125. 140/155 Mbit/s Tributary connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Figure 126. Management of Qx & Sync Access Module Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Figure 127. Management of Access Module Connectors Qx 10 BT & Synch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Figure 128. Q2 Interface connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Figure 129. Synchronism Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Figure 130. 10 – BT connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Figure 131. Management of Alarm Interface access module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Figure 132. Remote Alarms Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Figure 133. RAB – Rack Lamps Interface connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Figure 134. Management of Auxiliary Data Channel Access module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Figure 135. EOW extension connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Figure 136. V11 auxiliary channels connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Figure 137. 64 KBit/s auxiliary channels connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Figure 138. DVB Tributary Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Figure 139. STM–4 Optical connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Figure 140. ETSI Optical Connector dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Figure 141. STM–16 Optical Connection and pass–through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Figure 142. HM1 STM–16 pass–through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Figure 143. IECBS BUS Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Figure 144. Management of Battery & Houskeeping Access Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Figure 145. Housekeeping Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Figure 146. Power Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Figure 147. Tx optical power check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Figure 148. Test on multi–demultiplexing and AIS for electrical tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Figure 149. Test on multi–demultiplexing and AIS for DVB tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Figure 150. Receiver sensitivity check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Figure 151. Check on the optical power transmitted by the Optical Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Figure 152. Test on multi–demultiplexing and AIS for optical tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 153. Kbit/s auxiliary channels check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Figure 154. V11 auxiliary channels check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Figure 155. Test on Aggregate Protection (APS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Figure 156. Test on 21 x 2 Mbit/s trib. N+1 EPS protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 8 / 436
436
Figure 157. Test on 34 or 140/STM1 trib. N+1 EPS protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Figure 158. Test on 34 or 140/STM1 trib. 1+1 EPS protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Figure 159. Test on CRU EPS protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Figure 160. Test on Full Matrix EPS protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Figure 161. Check on External free running synchronism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Figure 162. Test on remote alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Figure 163. Multi–demultiplexing tests on the link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Figure 164. ”Transits” check on the link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Figure 165. TU cross–over check on a ring–connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Figure 166. Repair form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
TABLES
Table 1. Handbooks related to the product’s hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Table 2. Handbooks related to the management software / local product control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Table 3. Documentation on CD–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Table 4. Handbook Configuration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Table 5. IEC 950 –Table 16: Overtemperature limits, Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Table 6. Label references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Table 7. List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Table 8. Main Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Table 9. Part List : Connection Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Table 10. Part List: Accessories of the 1651 SM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Table 11. Part List : Explanatory notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Table 12. Connection options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Table 13. Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Table 14. Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Table 15. Parameters specified for STM–4 Optical Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Table 16. Parameters specified for STM–16 Optical Interfaces (Single Channel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Table 17. Parameters specified for STM–16 Optical Interfaces (Multi Channel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Table 18. Parameters specified for STM–1 Optical Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Table 19. Transportation climatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Table 20. Numbering, functions and paragraphs referred to the Connection Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Table 21. Parts making up the installation set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Table 22. Suggested cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Table 23. Instruments and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Table 24. Remote Alarms activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Table 25. Example of correspondence between CS and ’suffix + ICS’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Table 26. Hardware presetting documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 9 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
10 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
HANDBOOK GUIDE
11 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
12 / 436
1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK
1.1 General information

WARNING
ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable
for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or
special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
NOTICE
The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information
purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the
part of ALCATEL.
COPYRIGHT NOTIFICATION
The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied,
reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
1.2 Handbook applicability
This handbook applies to the following product-releases:
PRODUCT ANV P/N FACTORY P/N

1651SM & 1661SM-C 3AL 34643 AAAA 521.200.100
PRODUCT RELEASE VERSION ANV P/N FACTORY P/N

1651SM 2.5.1
’C2’ on 3AL 34623AEAB 521.574.200
1661SM-C 1.5.1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 13 / 436
436
1.3 Product-release handbooks
The list of handbooks given here below is valid on the issue date of this Handbook and
can be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL to update it in this Handbook.

The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whose
product-release-version is stated in para.1.2 on page.13 consists of the following handbooks:
Table 1. Handbooks related to the product’s hardware
FACTORY THIS
REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No.
Part No. HDBK
1651SM Rel.2.5.1
[1] & 1661SM–C Rel.1.5.1 3AL 36668 AAAA 955.100.562 K
Technical Handbook
1641 SMD Rel. 1.0

[2] 3AL 34434 AAAA 955.100.182 F
Technical Handbook
Table 2. Handbooks related to the management software / local product control
FACTORY THIS
REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No.
Part No. HDBK
1651SM Rel.2.5
& 1661SM–C Rel.1.5 .1
&
[3] 3AL 36566 AAAA 957.120.732 A
1651SM Rel.2.5.1
& 1661SM–C Rel.1.5.1
Operator’s Handbook
Table 3. Documentation on CD–ROM

See para.6.5 on page 51
REF CD–ROM TITLE ANV Part No. FACTORY Part No.
1651SM Rel.2.5.1 CD–ROM–DOC EN 3AL 37765 AAAA 417.100.005

[4]
Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF.[1] to [3]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 14 / 436
436
1.4 Handbook Structure
This handbook has been edited according to the suggestions given by the ”Code of Practice” for Instruction
Handbooks issued by the European Broadcasting Union (EBU RECC. R29/82).
This handbook is divided into the following main topics as described in the table of contents:
HANDBOOK GUIDE: It contains general information on safety norms, EMC and type
of labels that might be affixed to the equipment.
DESCRIPTION: It contains all the equipment’s general and detailed system

features including its application in the telecommunication
network. Furthermore, it supplies the equipment description and
specifications (i.e., system, mechanical,electrical and/or
optical).
INSTALLATION: It contains all the information (mechanical, electrical and/or

optical) needed to install the equipment
TURN–ON, TESTS AND It contains information covering presettings and turn–on

OPERATION: procedures as well as guiding measurements related to checks
(to ensure correct operation) and operational changes (*)
MAINTENANCE: It contains all the details for periodic checks, fault location and
repair procedures and restore to normal operation through the
withdrawal of faulty units and their replacement with spares (*)
APPENDICES: Section included (but not necessarily utilized) to describe

possible alternative unit.
HARDWARE SETTING It encloses the documents related to unit hardware setting

DOCUMENTATION: operations, if envisaged.
ANNEXES: Section envisaged (but not necessarily included) containing

additional documentation or general information on other topics
not inherent to the chapters making up the handbook.
(*) If the equipment is software integrated and man–machine interfaced (through a PCD, PC, Work
Station or other external processing/displaying system) the turn–on, operation and maintenance
carried out with such system is described in the Operator’s Handbook (see para.1.3 on page 14 )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 15 / 436
436
1.5 Handbook configuration check
1.5.1 List of the editions and modified parts

Legenda
n = new part
m = modified part
Table 4. Handbook Configuration check
EDITION 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
DESCRIPTIONS n
1. GENERAL n m m m m
2. CONFIGURATION n m m m m m
3. FUNCTIONAL OPERATION n m m m m
4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION n m m m m m
INSTALLATION n
5. INSTALLATION n m m m m m
TURN–ON, TEST AND OPERATION n
6. TURN–ON, TEST AND OPERATION n m m m
MAINTENANCE n
7. MAINTENANCE n m m
APPENDICES n
Nothing envisaged n
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION n
Unit documentation list n m m m m m
ANNEXES
Nothing envisaged
Note: the edition of the enclosed documents (sections HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION
and ANNEXES) is not subjected to configuration check.
1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01
Ed.01 created on October 06 ,1997 is the first validated and officially released issue.
Ed.02 created on August 27, 1998 is the second validated and officially released issue and it has been
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
introduced to add new items, Units and Accessories.

The Unit Documentation List Section has modified to apply the latest internal Standard.
The revision bars point out the changes from Ed01 to Ed.02
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 16 / 436
436
Ed.03 created on September 29, 1998 is the third validated and officially released issue and it has been
introduced to add new items and Units .
The revision bars point out the changes from Ed02 to Ed.03
Ed.04 created on June 04, 1999 is the fourth validated and officially released issue and it has been
introduced to add new items and Units in order to align this manual to the C2 SW Version.
An example of interworking with Booster +17dBm has been added in the Technical Specification Chapter.
Correction of errors and editing improvements has been carried out.
The revision bars point out the changes from Ed.03 to Ed.04
Ed.05 created on January 24, 2000 is the fifth validated and officially released version of handbook.
Changes are relevant to 1.5 Mbit/s Tributary unit adding and some Aggregate units elimination.
Ed.06 created on March 16, 2000 is the sixth validated and officially released version of the handbook.
Changes are relevant to change in MSZZQ documents list in section HARDWARE SETTING
DOCUMENTATION.
Ed.07 created on October 16, 2000 is the seventh validated and officially released version of the
handbook.
Changes are relevant to the insertion of the “optinex rack installation kit”, to the technical characteristics
updating, to the instructions for safety as well the improving of the documentation information.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 17 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
18 / 436
2 COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS.
2.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

The CE markings printed on the product denote compliancy with the following Directives:
• 89/336/EEC of May 3rd, 1989 (EMC directives), amended:
– by the 92/31/EEC Directive issued on April 28th, 1992
– by the 93/68/EEC Directive issued on July 22nd, 1993
Compliancy to EMC Norms is declared in that the equipment satisfies standardized Norms :
• Issue requisites : EN 55022 ”Limits and methods and measurement of radio disturbance
characteristics of information technology equipment” , August 1994 edition.
Compliancy Class : A
• Immunity requisites : EN 50082–1 ” Electromagnetic compatibility–Generic immunity standard,

Part 1 : Residential, commercial and light industry” , January 1992 edition
The equipment operates in the following environment :

Telecommunication center
WARNING
This is a class A product. In domestic, residential and light industry environments, this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
2.2 Safety
The product is in compliance with the following Directives:
• 92/59/EEC Directive issued on June 29th, 1992
Compliancy to Safety Norms is declared in that the equipment satisfies standardized Norms :
• IEC 60950 (1991) +A1 +A2 +A3 +A4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 19 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
20 / 436
3 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS
3.1 First aid for electric shock

Do not touch the patient with bare hands until the circuit has been opened.
Open the circuit by switching off the line switches. If that is not possible, protect yourself with dry
material and free the patient from the conductor.
ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION
It is important to start mouth to mouth resuscitation at once and seek medical help immediately.
TREATMENT OF BURNS
This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed while
the artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).
WARNING:
• Do not attempt to remove his clothing from the burnt parts;
• Apply dry gauze on the burns;
• Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 21 / 436
436
Mouth to mouth resuscitation method
Lay the patient supine with his arms parallel with the body, if the patient is laying

on an inclined plane, make sure that his stomach is slightly lower than his chest.

1
Open the patient’s mouth and check that there are no extraneous bodies in his
mouth (dentures, chewing–gum etc.),
Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Put

a hand under the patient’s head and one under
2
his neck (see fig.) Lift the patient’s head and let
it recline backwards as far as possible
Shift the hand from the patient’s neck to is chin:

place your thumb between his chin and his
mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep the
3 other fingers closed together (see fig.). While
performing these operations take a good supply
of oxygen by taking deep breaths with your
mouth open.
With your thumb between the patient’s chin and

4 mouth keep his lips together and blow into his
nasal cavities (see fig.)
While performing these operations observe if the

patient’s chest rises (see fig.) If not it is possible
that his nose is blocked: in that case open the
patient’s mouth as much as possible by pressing
on his chin with your hand, place your lips around
5 his mouth and blow into his oral cavity. Observe
if the patient’s chest heaves. This second
method can be used instead of the first even
when the patient’s nose is kept closed by
pressing the nostrils together using the hand you
were holding his head with. The patient’s head
must be kept sloping backwards as much as
possible.
6 Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of twelve/fifteen

expirations per minute. Go on like this until the patient has regained
consciousness, or until a doctor has ascertained his death.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 22 / 436
436
3.2 Safety Rules
3.2.1 General Rules

• Before carrying out any installation, turn–on, tests & operation and maintenance operations
carefully read the Technical Handbook, in particular chapters:
– Installation
– Turn–on, Tests & Operation
– Maintenance
• Observe safety rules
– When equipment is operating nobody is allowed to have access inside on the equipment
parts which are protected with Cover Plate Shields removable with tools
– In case of absolute need to have access inside, on the equipment parts when it is operating
this is allowed exclusively to service personnel, where for Service Personnel or Technical
assistance is meant :
”personnel which has adequate Technical Knowledge and experience necessary to be

aware of the danger that he might find in carrying out an operation and of the necessary
measurements to reduce danger to minimum for him and for others”.
The Service Personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare parts.
The Service Personnel is not allowed to repair: hence the access to the parts no specified
is not permitted.
The keys and/or the tools used to open doors, hinged covers to remove parts which give
access to compartments in which are present high dangerous voltages must belong
exclusively to the service personnel.
– For the eventual cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, absolutely do not use any
inflammable substance or substances which in some way may alter the markings,
inscriptions ect.
– It is recommended to use a slightly wet cleaning cloth.
• The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations and/or precautions to observe
to safeguard service personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety,
i.e., not exposing persons, animals, things to the risk of being injured/damaged.
• Whenever the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE POWER.
To cut off power proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station
upstream (rack or station distribution frame).
• The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following symbol and
statement:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
SAFETY RULES
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 23 / 436
436
3.2.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command
It is of utmost importance to follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and assemblies.

The labels are fully compliant with International Norms ISO 3846–1984. The symbols or statements are

enclosed in geometric shapes: ISO 3864–1984.
CONTAINS A SYMBOL STATEMENT

INDICATES FORBIDDANCE (WHITE BACKGROUND
WHIT RED RIM–BLACK SYMBOL OR STATEMENT)
IT IS A COMMAND (BLUE BACKGROUND–WHITE
SYMBOL OR STATEMENT).
CONTAINS A SYMBOL
INDICATES WARNING OR DANGER (YELLOW
BACKGROUND–BLACK SYMBOL AND RIM)
CONTAINS A STATEMENT PROVIDING INFORMATION

OR INSTRUCTION.
(YELLOW BACKGROUND–BLACK STATEMENT AND RIM)
The labels have been affixed to indicate a dangerous condition. They may contain any standard–known
symbol or any statement necessary to safeguard users and service personnel against the most common
ones, specifically:
• dangerous electrical voltages
• harmful optical signals
• risk of explosion
• moving mechanical parts
Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 24 / 436
436
The symbols presented in para.3.2.3 through 3.2.7 are all the possible symbols that could be
present on Alcatel equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the equipment this
handbook refers to.
3.2.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages
3.2.3.1 Labelling
The following warning label is affixed next to dangerous voltages (>42.4 Vp; >60 Vdc).
If it is a Class 1 equipment connected to mains, then the label associated to it will state that the equipment
will have to be grounded before connecting it to the power supply voltage, e.g.:
WARNING !
Ground protect the equipment before
connecting it to manins
Make sure that power has been cut off
before disconnecting ground protection.
3.2.3.2 Electrical safety: general rules
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury: carefully observe the specific

procedures for installation / turn–up and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where a.c. or
d.c. power is present, described in the relevant installation / turn–up and commissioning / maintenance
documents and the following general rules:
a) Personal injury can be caused by –48 V dc (or by 220 V ac if envisaged in the equipment). Avoid
touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body.
b) Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in
burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with
primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
3.2.3.3 Electrical safety: equipment specific data
Refer to para.4.1.1 on page 282.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 25 / 436
436
3.2.4 Harmful Optical Signals
3.2.4.1 Labelling

If the assembly or unit is fitted with a LASER, the labels must comply with the IEC 825–1–1993

International Norms.
The symbol indicates the presence of a LASER beam. Danger level is stated within a rectangular label:
If the LASER is a class 1 product, the label depicting the symbol within a triangle is not compulsory.
The rectangular shaped label bears all the information needed, i.e.:
• LASER class
• Power emitted
• Wave length
• Ref. Norm
• Precautionary measures taken depend on LASER class
• Indications given on openings, panels and safety interlockers
LASER RADIATION
CAUTION DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW
LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW CLASS 3A LASER PRODUCT
DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS P.MAX=31m...... =1300mm. IEC 825 1993
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
exemple of power and lenght values
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 26 / 436
436
3.2.4.2 Optical safety: general rules
On handling optical equipments or units or cables always check that laser labels are properly affixed and
that the system complies with applicable optical standards.
DANGER! Possibility of eyes damage: invisible infrared radiations emitted by

the fiber optic transmitters can cause eyes damages. Carefully observe the specific procedures for
installation / turn–up and commissioning / maintenance of units containing laser devices or cables
transporting optical signals, described in the relevant installation / turn–up and commissioning /
maintenance documents and the following general rules:
a) Laser radiation is not visible by the naked eye or with laser safety glasses. Although it cannot be seen,
laser radiation may be present.
b) Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable,
unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
c) Never look at an optical fiber splice, cable or connector, unless it is absolutely known that no laser
radiation is present.
d) All optical connectors, terminating either fibers and transmitters/receivers, are provided with
protective covers that must always be used, as soon as possible, when any optical link is
disconnected for installation/test/maintenance purposes or whatever operation.
e) Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable by
means of magnifiers/microscopes, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. A
magnifier/microscope greatly increases the damage hazard to the eyes.
f) Never point an unterminated optical fiber splice, cable or connector to other persons, unless it is
absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
g) Always remove electrical power from near and far optical transmitters before disconnecting optical
links between the transmitter and the receiver.
h) Wearing of laser safety goggles or eyes shields is recommended for every person working on optical
devices, whenever the above listed rules cannot be followed.
3.2.4.3 Optical safety: equipment specific data
Refer to para.4.1.1 on page 282.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 27 / 436
436
3.2.5 Risks of Explosions
3.2.5.1 Labelling and safety instructions

This risk is present when batteries are used, and it is signalled by the following label:

Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and allow dangerous gasses to down flow
(battery–emitted hydrogen). A 417–IEC–5641 Norm. compliant label is affixed next to it indicating that the
openings must not be covered up.
3.2.6 Moving Mechanical Parts
The following warning label is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical parts:
Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical parts have been
stopped.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 28 / 436
436
3.2.7 Heat–radiating Mechanical Parts

The presence of heat–radiating mechanical parts is indicated by the following warning label in compliancy
with IEC 417 Norm, Fig.5041:
As stated by IEC 950 Norm., para.1.4.7 the touchable mechanical parts are those whose temperature T
exceeds the limits established by the following formula (temperatures in °C ):
(T–Tamb) (DTmax + 25° – Tmra)

where:
T Temperature of the mechanical part measured at ambient temperature Tamb.

Tamb Ambient temperature during the test.
DTmax Value defined by IEC 950 Norm, Table 16 part 2a, para.5.1, and specified in the
table below.
Tmra The maximum room ambient temperature permitted by the equipment
specification or 25°C, whichever is greater.
Table 5. IEC 950 –Table 16: Overtemperature limits, Part 2
Maximum overtemperature
Operator–accessible parts
Glass, Plastic,
Metal
porcelain rubber
Handle knob, ect., held or touched

35 45 60
for short periods
Handles, knobs, ect., regularly held 30 40 50
Outer surface of the equipment that

45 55 70
can be touched
Inner surface of the equipment that

45 55 70
can be touched
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury: carefully observe the specific

procedures for installation / turn–up and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where
heat–radiating mechanical parts are present, described in the relevant installation / turn–up and
commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rule:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
a) Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of
your body.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 29 / 436
436
3.2.8 Specific safety rules in this handbook
Specific safety rules are specified in the following chapters:

– Chapter 5 on page 311.

– Chapter 5 para 5.1 on page 312.
– Chapter 5 para 5.2.1.2 on page 314.
– Chapter 5 para 5.3.1 on page 328.
– Chapter 5 para 5.3.11.2 on page 361.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 30 / 436
436
4 OTHER NORMS AND LABELS
4.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility

The equipment’s EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out (cable termination,
grounding etc.,) and on the operating conditions (equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronical
units, presence of dummy covers, etc.).
• Before starting any installation, turn–on, tests & operation and maintenance work refer to the
Technical Handbook, specifically to chapters:
– Installation,
– Turn–on, Tests & operation
– Maintenance
• The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are distinguished inside this handbook
by the symbol and term:
ATTENTION EMC NORMS.
4.1.1 General Norms – Installation
• All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables use
only cables and connectors suggested in this technical handbook or in the relevant Plant
Documentation, or those specified in the Customer’s ” Installation Norms.” (or similar
documents)
• Shielded cables must be suitably terminated
• Install filters outside the equipment as required
• Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper dia. and impedance
• Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the installation phase, but not before
having cleaned and degrease it.
• Before inserting the shielded unit proceed to clean and degrease all peripheral surfaces
(contact springs and connection points, etc.)
• Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
• To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions given.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 31 / 436
436
4.1.2 General Norms – Turn–on, Tests & Operation
• Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility

• Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers,

ESD connector protections, etc.)
• To properly use EMC compatible equipment observe the information given
4.1.3 General Norms – Maintenance
• Before inserting the shielded unit, which will replace the faulty or modified unit, proceed to clean
and degrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.)
• Clean the dummy covers of the spare units as well.
• Screw fasten the units to the subrack.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 32 / 436
436
4.2 Electrostatic Dischargers (ESD)
Before removing the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors etc., observe the precautionary
measures stated. Make sure that the ESD protections have been replaced and after having terminated
the maintenance and monitoring operations.

Most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic dischargers, to this concern the following warning
labels have been affixed:
Observe the precautionary measures stated when having to touch the electronic parts during the
installation/maintenance phases.
Workers are supplied with antistatic protection devices consisting of:
ELASTICIZED BAND
COILED CORD
• an elasticized band worn around the wrist
• a coiled cord connected to the elasticized band and to the stud on the subrack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 33 / 436
436
4.3 Suggestions, notes and cautions
Suggestions and special notes are marked by the following symbol:

Suggestion or note....

Cautions to avoid possible equipment damage are marked by the following symbol:
TITLE...
(caution to avoid equipment damage)

statement....
4.4 Labels affixed to the Equipment
This chapter indicates the positions and the information contained on the identification and serial labels
affixed to the equipment.
Figure 1. thru’ Figure 7. illustrate the most common positions of the labels on the units, modules and
subracks.
Figure 8. and Figure 9. illustrate the information (e.g., identification and serial No.) printed on the labels.
The table below relates the ref. numbers stated on the figures to the labels used.
Labelling depicted hereafter is for indicative purposes and could be changed without any notice.
Table 6. Label references
Ref. No. Name of Label
1 label specifying item on catalogue (P/N.)
2 serial number of item specified on catalogue
3 label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N.)
4 Final Test certificate
5 Unit ESD mark
6 CE mark
7 ESD mark for packaged subunits
8 Subrack ESD mark
9 Factory use only code
On contract basis, customized labels can be affixed to the equipment.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Standard labels can be affixed to any position on the equipment, as required by the Customer.
However, for each of the above are applied the rules defined by each individual Customer.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 34 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
Figure 1. Labels for units with stiffening bar
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Table 6. on page 34
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
35 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
Figure 2. Labels for units without stiffening bar
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
36 / 436
NB. = Affix labels to p.c.’s components side on the empty spaces.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 3. Labels for units with heat–sink.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 37 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
Figure 4. Labels for units with optical interfaces
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
38 / 436
NB = Affix labels to p.c.b.’s components side on the empty spaces.
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Table 6. on page 34. The components shown
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
on the front–cover are merely indicative showing that there is no space left for the labels
Figure 5. Labels for units with no speces on the front cover
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 39 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
6
8
1
2
Figure 6. Subrack labels
436
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Table 6. on page 34.
3AL 36668 AA AA
40 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
Figure 7. Modules’ labels
436
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Table 6. on page 34.
3AL 36668 AA AA
41 / 436
FACTORY P/N + CS

ANV + ICS P/N
Bar code of the ANV + ICS P/Ns

(format ALFA39 ; Module = 0,166mm. ; Ratio =2
Figure 8. Label identifying label on catalogue
Serial No.
Bar code of the serial No.

(format ALFA39 ; Module = 0,166mm. ; Ratio =2
Figure 9. Label specifying serial No.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 42 / 436
436
5 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
Table 7. List of Abbreviations

ABBREVIATION MEANING
ABN Abnormal
ACO Alarm cut–off (alarm storing)
AD Assembly drawing
ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer
AIS Alarm indication Signal
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
AMI Alternate Mark Inversion
APD Avalanche Photo–diode
ASI Asynchronuos Serial Interface
ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
ATTD Attended (alarm storing)
AU EUA and UP sum alarm
AUI Attachement Unit Interface
AUG Administrative Unit Group
AUOH AU Pointer
AU4 Administrative unit – level 4
BATT Battery
BER Bit Error Rate
BIP Bit Interleaved Parity
C Storing command
CAND All power supply units units are faulty
CAREM Unit extraction alarm
CKA/B Clock from CRU A/B
CKL Clock for LIECB
CKMSTOFF Clock failure

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
CKN Network clock for NIECB
CK16ALL 16 MHz clock failure
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 43 / 436
436
CK38ALL 38 MHz clock failure

CMI Code Mark Inversion

COAX Coaxial
CPI Incoming parallel contacts
CPO Outgping parallel contacts
Central Processing Unit (refereed to Controller equipment unit

CPU
or Microprocessor)
CRU Clock Reference Unit
CTYPE Unit Identification signals
C12/C3/C4 1st, 3rd and 4th level container
D Data
DAC Digital/Analog Converter
DC Direct Current
DCC Data Communication Channel
DCE Data Circuit Terminating Equipment
DE Received date
DEN Incoming negative data
DEP Incoming positive data
DPLL Digital Phase Locked Loop
DT Transmitted data
DTE Data Terminating Equipment
DTMF Dual tone multifrequency
DUN Outgoing negative data
DUP Outgoing positive data (Digital Video Broadcasting)
DVB Digital Video Broadcasting
E East
EACT Equipment Assisted Configuration Tool
ECC Embedded Control Channel

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ECT Equipment Craft Terminal
EEPROM/E2PROM Electrically erasable programmable read only memory
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 44 / 436
436
EM Part List
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility

EMI Electromagnetic interface
EOW Engineering Order Wire
EPS Equipment Protection Switching
ESCT Enhanced Shelf Controller Telettra
ESD Electrostatic discharges
ETSI European Telecomunication Standards Istitute
EUA Equipment Controller extraction unit alarm
EX–BER Excessive Bit Error Rate
EXT EXternal alarms
F Interface F (for Craft Terminal) or Fuse
FEBE Far End Block Error
FEPROM Flash Eprom
FERF Far End Receive Failure
GA Gate Array
HDB3 High Density Bipolar Code
HIGHREFL High Optical reflections
HP High Power
HPA Higher Order Path Adaptation
HPOM Higher order Path Overhead Monitoring
HUG Higher order Unequipped Generator
HW Hardware
ID Identification signals
IEC International Electrotechnical Committee
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering
IN Input
IND Indicative alarm

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
INT Internal Local Alarms
ISW/OSW Switching commands
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 45 / 436
436
International Telecommunication Union–Telecommunication

ITU–T (*)
Sector

JE Joint Engineering
LAN Local Area Network
LD DEG Laser Degrade
LD FAIL Laser Transmitter local failure
LDSSHUT Command for ALS
LIECB Local Intra Equipment Control Bus
LOF Loss of alignment
LOS Loss of signal
LPA Lower order path adaption
LPC Lower order path connection
LPM Loop–back line side (remote)
LPOM Lower order Path Overhead Monitoring
Lower order path termination or Loopback equipment side

LPT
(local)
M Tagblock or Alarm storing
MNE Master Network Element
MFSALL Loss of multiframe synchronism
MGMT Management
MITL Loss of Tx pulses from Laser
MLM Multi Longitudinal mode
MS–AIS AIS of the Multiplexer section
MS–FERF FERF of multiplexer section
MSP Multiplexer section protection
MSA Multiplexer section adaptation
MST Multiplexer section termination
MS SPRING Multiplexer section Shared Protection Ring
MSW Switching command

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
NIECB Network Intra Equipment Control Bus
NRZ No return to zero
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 46 / 436
436
NURG Not urgent alarm

OH–BUS Dedicated housekeeping stream

OKKO Switching request signals
ORALIM OR’ing of station power supply alarm
OS Operative system
OSNR Optical Signal to Noise Ratio
OUT Output
P/S Parallel/Serial converter
PC Personal Computer
PFAIL Power supply failure
PG (SA) Pointer Generator of Section Adaptation
PI Physical interface
PI (SA) Pointer interpreter of section adaptation
POH Path Overhead
PPS Path Protection Switching
PWALM Power supply alarm
PWANDOR ANDOR/2 failure
TMN Interface with B2 protocol. Interface towards plesiochro-

Q2/QB2
nous equipment
Q3/QB3 TMN Interface with B3 protocol. Interface towards TMN
RURG Urgent Alarm command. Lights up the relative rack red LED
RAM Random Access Memory
RCK Received clock
REF Reference
REL Release
RMS Root Mean Square
Not urgent Alarm command. Lights up the relative rack red

RNURG
LED
RST Regeneration Section Termination

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
S/SE Electrical schematic
S/P Serial/Parallel Converter
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 47 / 436
436
SA Section Adaptation

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SETG Synchronous Equipment Timing Generation function
SLM Single Longitudinal Mode
SM Single Mode/Synchronous Mux
SMEC Synchronous Multiplexer Equipment Controller
SNC–P Subnetwork Connection Protection, Substitutes PPS
SOH Section Overhead
SSMB Synchronous Status Message Byte
STM–1/STM–4/STM–16 Synchronous Transport Module, levels 1,4,16
SW Software
SYNC A/B Synchronism from CRU A/B
TANC Remote alarm due to failure of all power supply units
TD Layout drawing
TMN Telecomunication Management Netwoek
TORC Remote alarm due to a faulty/missing power supply unit
TRIB Tributary
TUG2/3 Tributary unit group, level 2,3
TUOH TU pointer
TUP/UP Equipment Controller remote alarm
TU12/TU3 Tributary unit
URG Urgent
VCXO Voltage controlled oscillator
VC12/VC3/vc4 Virtual Container, levels 1.3.4
VSERV Auxiliary voltage
W West
WKCH Working channel
NOTE –
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Owing to change of name, all documents issued by the two ITU committees (CCIR ND CCITT)
in 1992 (and in some cases even before then) are classified as ITU–R and ITU–T, respectively.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 48 / 436
436
6 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION
6.1 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation

A ”product” is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole of
performance and services for which it is meant.
A ”product” evolves through successive ”product-releases” which are the real products marketed for
their delivery at a certain ”product-release” availability date.
So, a ”product–release” defines a set of hardware components and a software package which, as a whole,
identify the possible network applications and the equipment performance which the specific
”product-release” has been designed, engineered and marketed for.
In some cases a ”product-release” has further development steps, named ”versions”, that are born to
improve or add some performance (mainly software) with respect to the previous version, or for bug fixing
purposes.
A ”product-release” has its own standard Customer Documentation, composed by one or more
handbooks.
A new ”version” of a ”product-release” may or may not produce a change in the status of the Customer
Documentation set, as described in para. 6.4 on page 50.
6.2 Handbook supply to Customers
Handbooks are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer to.
The number of handbooks per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level.
6.3 Aims of standard Customer Documentation
Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as plant-independent.

Plant-dependent documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to commercial criteria as far
as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned (plant-dependent documentation is not
described here).
Standard hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel the possibility
and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating and maintaining the equipment
according to Alcatel–Telecom Laboratory design choices.
In particular: the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the
explanation of the man-machine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it; maintenance is
described down to faulty PCB location and replacement.
Consequently, no supply to the Customers of design documentation (like PCB hardware design and
production documents and files, software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is envisaged.
The handbooks concerning hardware (usually the ”Technical Handbook”) and software (usually the
”Operator’s Handbook”) are kept separate in that any product changes do not necessarily concern their
contents.
For example, only the Technical Handbook might be revised because of hardware configuration
changes (e.g., replacing a unit with one having different P/N but the same function).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
On the other hand, the Operator’s Handbook is updated because of a new software version but which
does not concern the Technical Handbook as long as it does not imply hardware modifications.
However, both types of handbooks can be updated to improve contents, correct mistakes, etc..
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 49 / 436
436
6.4 Handbook Updating
The handbooks associated to the ”product–release” are listed in para.1.3 on page 14.

Each handbook is identified by:

– the name of the ”product-release” (and ”version” when the handbook is applicable to the versions
starting from it, but not to the previous ones),
– the handbook name,
– the handbook P/N,
– the handbook edition (usually first edition=01),
– the handbook issue date. The date on the handbook does not refer to the date of print but to the date
on which the handbook source file has been completed and released for the production.
6.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N)
The edition and date of issue might change on future handbook versions for the following reasons:
– only the date changes (pointed out in the Table of Contents) when modifications are made to the
editorial system not changing the technical contents of the handbook.
– the edition, hence the date, is changed because modifications made concern technical contents. In
this case:
• the chapters modified with respect to the previous edition are listed in Table 4. on page 16;
• in affected chapters, revision bars on the left of the page indicate modifications in text and
drawings.
Changes concerning the technical contents of the handbook cause the edition number increase (e.g. from
Ed.01 to Ed.02). Slight changes (e.g. for corrections) maintain the same edition but with the addition of
a version character (e.g. from Ed.02 to Ed.02A).
NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS
Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operator’s Handbooks) are not
modified unless the new software ”version” distributed to Customers implies man–machine
interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of the
explained procedures.
Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product-release’s
”version” marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version, if
the screen contents are unchanged.
6.4.1.1 Supplying updated handbooks to Customers
Supplying updated handbooks to Customers who have already received previous issues is submitted to
commercial criteria.
By updated handbook delivery it is meant the supply of a complete copy of the handbook new issue
(supplying errata–corrige sheets is not envisaged).
6.4.2 Changes due to a new product-release

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
A new product-release changes the handbook P/N and the edition starts from 01.
In this case the modified parts of the handbook are not listed.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 50 / 436
436
6.5 Customer documentation supply on CD–ROM
In the following ’CD–ROM’ means ’Customer Documentation on CD–ROM’

6.5.1 Contents, creation and production of a CD–ROM
In most cases, a CD–ROM contains the documentation of one product–release(–version) and for a certain
language.
In some other cases, the same CD–ROM can contain the documentation of different
product–release(–version)s for a certain language.
As a general rule:
– CD–ROMs for Network Management products do not contain:
• the Installation Guides
• the documentation of system optional features that Customers could not buy from Alcatel
together with the main applicative SW.
– CD–ROMs for Network Elements products do not contain the documentation of system optional
features (e.g. System Installation Handbooks related to racks that Customers could not buy from
Alcatel together with the main equipment).
A CD–ROM is obtained collecting various handbooks and processing them by

Interleaf–World–View–Press after the manual addition of some hyperlinks which make the navigation
through the various handbooks easier. No additional information is added to each handbook, so that the
documentation present in the CD–ROMs is exactly the same the Customer would receive on paper.
The files processed in this way are then transferred on a PC where the viewer (Interleaf–World–View) is
added and a master CD–ROM is recorded.
Suitable checks are made in order to have a virus–free product.
After a complete functional check, the CD–ROM image is electronically transferred to the archive of the
Production Department, so that the CD–ROM can be produced and delivered to Customers.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 51 / 436
436
6.5.2 Use of the CD–ROM
The CD–ROM can be used both in PC and Unix WS environments.

The minimum configuration for World View (rel.2.2.2) utilization on a PC is:

– Operative System: Windows 95 or Windows NT (3.51 and 4.00)
– Processor: Intel 486
– RAM: 16Mbyte
– Disk space: 20Mbyte
The set–up procedure is present in the booklet included in the CD–ROM box.
After the set–up procedure, which installs the viewer in the PC or Unix WS environment, the Customer
is allowed to read the handbooks on the PC/WS screen, using the navigation and zooming tools included
in the viewer, and to print selected parts of the documentation through a local printer.
N.B. Copyright notification
WorldView: Copyright 1981–1996

INTERLEAF Inc.
All rights reserved.
The use of WorldView is permitted only in association with the files contained
in the CD–ROMs officially supplied by Alcatel.
Alcatel documents: All rights reserved.
Passing and copying of documents and files contained in the CD–ROMs
officially supplied by Alcatel, use and communication of its contents are not
permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
6.5.3 CD–ROM identification
Each CD–ROM is identified:
1) by the following external identifiers, that are printed both on the booklet and the CD–ROM upper
surface:
– the name of the ”product–release(s)” (and ”version” when the CD–ROM is applicable to
the versions starting from it, but not to the previous ones),
– a writing indicating the language(s),
– the CD–ROM P/N (Factory P/N 417.xxx.xxx x and ANV P/N),
– the CD–ROM edition (usually first edition=01)
2) and, internally, by the list of the source handbooks and documents (P/Ns and editions) by whose
collection and processing the CD–ROM itself has been created.
6.5.4 CD–ROM updating
The list of source handbook/document P/Ns–editions indicated in previous para.6.5.3 point 2 ) , in

association with the CD–ROM’s own P/N–edition, is also loaded in the Alcatel–Information–System as a
structured list.
Whenever a new edition of any of such handbooks/documents is released in the Alcatel archive system,
the Alcatel–Information–System automatically rises a warning toward the Customer Documentation
department, indicating the list of CD–ROMs that must be updated to include the new editions of these
handbooks/documents.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
This causes the planning and creation of a new edition of the CD–ROM.
Updating of CD–ROMs always follows, with a certain delay, the updating of the single handbooks
composing the collection.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 52 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
DESCRIPTIONS
53 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
54 / 436
1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction to the Equipment

Two distinct equipment are described in this handbook:
• 1651 SM: add/drop synchronous multiplexer defined as a Synchronous Transport Module,

level 4 (STM–4).
• 1661 SM–C: add/drop synchronous multiplexer defined as a Sync. Transport Module, level 16
(STM–16). This equipment is defined as ”Compact” (c)because the same mechanical structure
of the STM–4 equipment can house up to a 2Mbit/s STM–16 equipment with add/drop.
The 1661 SM–C equipment can be considered an up–grading of the 1651 SM in that it has been
designed by simply replacing two aggregates STM–4 units (equipped in the 1651 SM) with the
aggregate STM16 ones.
The equipment establishes a 622/2488 Mbit/s transmission system whose high flexibility allows to set up
various configurations, mainly Line Terminal Drop/Insert Multiplexer with various protections including
operation in ring networks.
The equipment can also operate without Tributaries as a regenerator.
Tributaries are multiplexed and mapped according to the ETSI Recs. (see Figure 10. on page 56)
Tributaries can be both plesiochronous (at 1.5, 2, 34, 45 and 140 Mbit/s) and synchronous
(155 Mbit/s STM–1), in the latter case electrical and optical.
Moreover a DVB (Digital Video Broadcasting) Tributary is available. This unit receives or transmits the
DVB coded TV channels at 270 Mb/s and maps this signals on 45 Mb/s unidirectional frames to be
transported on the SDH network at VC–3 level.
The Unit carries three independent channels at 45 Mb/s .
Transmitting and receiving function is selectable by an hardware jumper on the board.
The equipment can accommodate different and mixed types of configured tributaries.
In this release the equipment can manage an extension shelf , named 1641 SM–D ” Drop shelf ”, containing
up to 10 (9+1 protected) 21 x 2 Mbit/s tributaries. With regard to this performance the use of the SMEC
as Equipment Controller Unit is mandatory.
This ” DROP SHELF” is not a new Network Element but it is completely supervised and configured by the
Main 1651 SM / 1661 SM–C Equipment.
It is a way to extend the capacity of our NE that rises up to 252 2 Mbit/s streams.
Various types of aggregate optical interfaces are available, (see chapter 4 on page 279) in order to fit in
different applications, such as:
• links in G.652 fibres

• links in G.653 fibres (dispersion–shifted)
• links with optical amplifiers (boosters)
• links with optical preamplifiers
• links with WDM equipments (in this case 16 optical interfaces, ”coloured” at different
wavelengths in the WDM range, are available).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The Aggregate units interface the STM–4/STM–16 signal and when drop/insert configured can interface
the EAST and WEST sides.
The equipment has been designed to supply protection functions.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 55 / 436
436
This release features:
• Path protection switching (SNC–P)

• 2 F MS SPRING

• EPS for electrical tributaries (1+1, N +1, in compliancy with the tributary utilized).

• EPS for Clock Reference unit (synchronism functions) and Full Matrix unit (routing functions)
• 1+1 MS Linear Trail Protection (APS) single–ended switching for STM–4 Aggregate units and
STM–1 optical and electrical tributary units. (Not operative for the STM–16Aggregate).
• Power supply protection: Line Shelf ”2+1” and ”1+1” for the Drop Shelf .
The above functions are described in this Technical Handbook.
The equipment of future releases will also carry out bidirectional Linear APS (MS Linear Trail
protection)functions (1+1) for STM4 and STM1.
The frame allocation of the signals can be changed. The CONNECTION function for the high–level and
low–level VC’s is of utmost importance for network management.
The equipment provides access to a wide range of services through the dedicated bytes of the SDH
structure thus facilitating link maintenance and operation.
The equipment interfaces:
• Personal Computer (Local Craft Terminal, F Interface)

• Network Management System (Interface Q2, Q3)
This allows to analyze the alarm conditions, configure equipment software and execute management
operations.
The alarm status of the equipment is indicated by the front cover LEDs.
Software downloading follows product evolution.

Power supply is delivered by two DC/DC Converters and a stand–by.
The subrack’s mechanical structure is compliant with the ETSI standard.
The structure and units accommodated inside it are described in ”Chapter 2. CONFIGURATION
on page 65
x3
TUG–2 TU–12 VC–12 C–12 2048
Kbit/s
x7
TUG–3 TU–3 VC–3 C–3 44736

34368
Kbit/s
x3
x4
STM–4 AUG AU–4 VC–4 C–4 139264
Kbit/s
STM–16 x16
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 10. ETSI mapping
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 56 / 436
436
1.2 Insertion of the Equipment into the Network
The 1651 SM/1661 SM–C equipment belong to the ALCATEL family products and are compliant with the
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) defined by ITU–T Recs. G.707, G.708, G.709, G.781, G.782, G.783,
G.803, G.957, G.958.

A typical SDH network structure is shown in Figure 11. on page 57.

The range of Alcatel synchronous systems is shown in Figure 12. on page 58
Some of the 1651 SM/1661 SM–C units are also employed in the 1641 SM equipment (155 Mbit/s
add/drop Multiplexer) to simplify spares and network capacity.
The equipment can be utilized in interurban, regional and metropolitan networks configured for standard
plesiochronous or synchronous systems.
The product can be suitably employed on linear, ring and hub networks and on protected or unprotected
line links.
The modes of utilizing the equipment depend on the different types of networks available.
ATTENTION: The equipment of Figure 12. on page 58 to Figure 21. on page 62 is defined as ”ADM”
(Add Drop Multiplexer).
The ”Spare Line”, in the terminal configured 1661 SM–C is not allowed.
NNI NNI NNI NNI
TR SM SM TR
SM LINE/RADIO DCS/EA LINE/RADIO SM
SYSTEM SYSTEM
TR TR
TR
TR SM SM TR
DCS = DIGITAL CROSSCONNECT SYSTEM

EA = EXTERNAL ACCESS EQUIPMENT
SM = SYNCHRONOUS MULTIPLEXER
TR = TRIBUTARIES
NNI = NETWORK NODE INTERFACE
Figure 11. SDH network structure

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 57 / 436
436
ALCATEL
2488 1666 SR
ALCATEL
1664 SL
ALCATEL ALCATEL
1661SMC 1664 SM
ALCATEL
622 1655 SR
ALCATEL
1654 SL
ALCATEL ALCATEL
1651 SMC 1651 SM
155 ALCATEL
1641 SMT
ALCATEL ALCATEL
1641 SM 1641SMC
ALCATEL ALCATEL
1641 SX 1644 SX
155
140
51
45
34
0.064
ADD / DROP
TRANSMISSION
CROSS–CONNECT
REGENERATOR
Figure 12. ALCATEL Synchronous System

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 58 / 436
436
1.2.1 Configuration
• Terminal multiplexer (see Figure 13. ).

The multiplexer is provided with an STM–4 /STM–16 station interface (eventually stand–by too)
to be connected to a Digital Electronic Cross–Connect or to a higher hierarchical line system.

LINE
TRIBS NE
SPARE
Figure 13. Terminal multiplexer
• Dual multiplexer (see Figure 14. )

A subrack can house up to two multiplexing terminals (fully or partially equipped)
LINE
TRIBS
SPARE
NE
LINE
TRIBS
Figure 14. Dual terminal multiplexer
• Add/Drop Multiplexer ( see Figure 15. )

The multiplexer can be programmed to drop (insert) signals from (into) the STM4/STM16
stream.
Part of the signal pass–through between the line sides, defined West and East.
LINE LINE
WEST NE SPARE
EAST
SPARE
TRIBS
Figure 15. Add/Drop Multiplexer

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 59 / 436
436
1.2.2 Application
In the following there are the possible applications of the equipment:

• Point–to–point link (see Figure 16. )

In this case the multiplexer can be connected to another multiplexer through the line
LINE
TRIBS NE NE TRIBS
SPARE
Figure 16. Point–to–point links
• Linear Drop–insert (see Figure 17. )

The multiplexer can be programmed to drop (insert) tributaries from (into) the STM–16 stream.
This configuration, but with no tributaries and matrices, sets up a Regeneration equipment. Only
one Connection Card unit is inserted.
LINE LINE LINE
NE ADM ADM NE TRIBS
SPARE SPARE SPARE
TRIBS TRIBS
Figure 17. Linear drop–insert
• ”HUB” STM–1 (see Figure 18. )

The multiplexer permits to drop/insert 155 Mbit/s STM–1 tributaries into a line stream and then
branch them off in HUB structures.
LINE LINE
ADM
SPARE SPARE
STM1 TRIBS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 18. ”HUB” STM–1
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 60 / 436
436
• WDM applications (see Figure 19. )
In this case the 1661SM–C is used as a ”coloured STM–16 tributary” for the 1686 WM (WDM
multiplexer). Up to 16 different aggregate wavelengths (λ) can be used.
COLOURED COLOURED
STM–16 STM–16
1661 1661
...
...
TRIBS SM–C #1 SM–C TRIBS
#1
#1 l1 l1 #1
1661 1661
...
...
TRIBS SM–C #2 #2 SM–C TRIBS
#2 l2 l2 #2
........
........
1686 16 x STM16 1686
WM WM
1661 1661
SM–C ...
...
TRIBS SM–C #16 #16 TRIBS

l16 #16
#16 l16
Figure 19. WDM applications

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 61 / 436
436
• Ring structure (see Figure 20. )
The drop–insert function permits to realize ring structures.
The VC can be automatically rerouted if the optical splice breaks down or one of the equipment
nodes fails

TRIB.
ADM
TRIB. ADM RING ADM TRIB.
ADM
TRIB.
Figure 20. Ring structure
• One–way broadcasting (see Figure 21. )

This function permits to extract data from the same VC over several physical tributaries.
Such data can also be made to pass–through to the stations downstream.
1xVCn 1xVCn
••••
TRIBUTARY PORTS
Figure 21. Unidirectional broadcasting
• Cross– Connection function

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The various CROSS–CONNECTION possibilities offered by the equipment enables it to be

used as a small cross–connection node with a maximum capacity of sixteen STM–1 ports.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 62 / 436
436
Other functionalities of this Release:
• Regenerator
The equipment can operate in STM–16 regenerator–like mode when the tributaries are not
equipped; one Connection Card unit must however be inserted.

The ADM performances don’t allow us to consider it a true Regenerator: Byte B2 is terminated,
evaluated and reinserted instead in the Reg. B2 is transparent. Furthermore the ADM is
synchronized by a unique clock chosen by a specific algorithm, instead in the Reg. each
regeneration section is synchronized by the clock extracted from its Receiving side.
• Optical Amplifier
The 1651SM/1661SM–C can be connected with an external Optical Amplifier 1610 OA and
1664 OA, to overcome longer span. The O.A. Alarm criteria are managed by the 1651/1661
Equipment using the Housekeeping criteria.
• Bidirectional Transmission
For the STM 16 optical interface a bidirectional transmission on single fiber function is
implemented, using an external passive optical coupler.
• Drop Shelf extension

The 1651SM/1661SM–C equipped with a new SMEC Equipment Control Unit and a new DS
Future Bus Termination, is able to completely manage an external equipment named
1641SM–D Drop Shelf.
This extension Equipment provides access at up to 189 2Mbit/s Tributaries, so the 1651SM
plus a Drop Shelf can give the access to 252 2Mbit/s, that means the capacity of a complete
STM4.
• Remote Equipment Control

This function allows a centralized management system for small SDH networks, similar to that
offered by an 0S.
That means that it is possible to perform management functionalities , from one of the NEs of
the network, toward the other NEs (up to 31), like configuration modification and remote
control.
• Dual OS
O.S. Spare is foreseen to protect the Main one and the switch–over and the switch–back
between these functions, can be automatic or manual at the Operator’s option.
• Year 2000
The Equipment is compliant with the year 2000 features.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 63 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
64 / 436
2 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION
This chapter illustrates the physical structure, layout, and composition of the equipment.
All the units and various parts making up the equipment are illustrated at para 2.1 on page 66 .
The main parts, the accessories parts and the explanatory notes are listed at para 2.2 on page 67 .
Para 2.3 on page 82 illustrates the interconnection points that can be accessed on the front wiring panel
of the subrack together with relevant legenda and meaning.
Para 2.4 on page 90 shows the access points (LED’s switches ect.) present on each unit together with
relevant legenda and meaning.
For further information see Chapter 5 on page 311.
The Personal Computer (Craft Terminal) utilized for Initial Turn–on and Maintenance operations is not
listed as an item of the equipment, but it can be supplied by ALCATEL. See Operator’s Handbook for
PC hardware configuration.
N.B.
The Hw configuration listed in the following Main Part List on Table 8. on page 68, is that
managed by the current Craft Terminal SWP Release.
The current Craft Terminal Release can also manage Hw configurations other than the
current one, sold with previous Craft Terminal SWP, e.g. by means of a download
procedure bringing up to date the previous SW Release.
These last HW configuration Main Part Lists are listed in the relevant Technical
Handbooks.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 65 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
L
T
A
S
O
DS FUTUREBUS TREMINATION AUXILIARY CHANNEL ACCESS MODULE SLOT F
NOT USED
AUX/EOW TRIBUTARY
2
L
T
S
O
17
2/1.5 MBIT/S ACCESS MODULE SLOT G
3
TRIBUTARY
18
955.100.562 K
STM4 W1 TRIBUTARY
4
2/1.5 MBIT/S ACCESS MODULE SLOT G
5
TRIBUTARY
STM4 E2 or
19
6
TRIBUTARY SPARE 1
STM16 E 2/1.5 MBIT/S ACCESS MODULE SLOT G
7
FULL MATRIX MAIN
CRU SPARE 34, 45, 140, 155 MBIT/s ACCESS MODULE SLOT H
20
NOT USED
FULL MATRIX SPARE 34, 45, 140, 155 MBIT/s ACCESS MODULE SLOT H
21
CRU MAIN
34, 45, 140, 155 MBIT/s ACCESS MODULE SLOT H

NOT USED
STM4 E1
22
TRIBUTARY
9
TRIBUTARY 34, 45, 140, 155 MBIT/s ACCESS MODULE SLOT H
10
STM4 W2 or
23
STM16 W 34, 45, 140, 155 MBIT/s ACCESS MODULE SLOT H
2.1 Equipment front view (New Mechanical Practice)
11
TRIBUTARY
The front view of the equipment is indicated in the following Figure 22.

12
EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER TRIBUTARY
L
T
B
S
O
13
TRIBUTARY SPARE 2
L
T
S
436
O
3AL 36668 AA AA
L
T
S
O
C
DC – DC CONVERTER QX & SYNCH. INTERFACE SLOT I
NOT USED
ALARM INTERFACE SLOT L
Figure 22. Front view of the 1651 SM/1661 SM–C – (New Practice Shelf)
DC – DC CONVERTER
L
L
T
T
S
E
S
O
O
D
DC – DC CONVERTER
POWER & HOUSEKEEPING ACC. MOD. SLOT M
66 / 436
2.2 Equipment part list
In the following tables are listed, named and coded any item and unit of the equipment. Furthermore, for
any item the slot position and the maximum quantity that can be allocated inside the equipment are
indicated too.
Such tables report the following information:
• Name of item
• Part No. – Alcatel Factory Part Nos. (e.g. 411.xxx.xxx x) and corresponding NV
(e.g. 3AL xxxxx xxxx) ones are given.
• Maximum quantity.
• Position of the unit inside the equipment. Use is made of the same ”Slot + number” indication
(slot 1,2 etc.) of the ”Alarm Status and Remote Control ” application of the Craft Terminal
management.
Where the unit slot number is not assigned in the aforesaid application, it is indicated here with
”slot + letter” (slot A,B, etc.)
• Number of explanatory notes.
The explanatory notes are reported in Table 11. on page 79.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 67 / 436
436
Table 8. Main Part List
Max

NAME PART No. SLOT NOTES
Qty.

MECHANICAL STRUCTURES
593.155.033 L
1651SM / 1661SM–C Shelf–NP – 1
(3AL 35792 AB––)
299.701.004V
KIT – 19”/21” DS Adapter – 2
(3AL 34328 AA––)
STM–4 AGGREGATE UNITS 3
411.100.154 H
S–4.1 STM–4 AGGREGATE PORT
(3AL 34729 AA––)
411.100.153 G
L–4.1 STM–4 AGGREGATE PORT
(3AL 34291 AA––)
411.100.134 V
L–4.2 STM–4 AGGREGATE PORT
(3AL 34069 AA––)
411.100.302 N
L–4.2 JE AGGREGATE PORT
(3AL 34733 AA––)
411.100.168 P
S–4.1 AGGREGATE PORT DIN
(3AL 34293 AA––)
411.100.169 Q
L–4.1 AGGREGATE PORT DIN 4 18,19,22,23
(3AL 34294 AA––)
411.100.170 M
L–4.2 AGGREGATE PORT DIN
(3AL 34295 AA––)
411.100.390 J
L–4.2 JE AGGREGATE PORT DIN
(3AL 34733 AA––)
411.100.243 J
S–4.1 AGGREGATE PORT SC
(3AL 34652 AA––)
411.100.244 K
L–4.1 AGGREGATE PORT SC
(3AL 34653 AA––)
411.100.406 F
L–4.2 AGGREGATE PORT SC
(3AL 34069 AB––)
411.100.431 X
L–4.2 JE AGGREGATE PORT SC
(3AL 34733 AC––)
table continue
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 68 / 436
436
Max
Qty.
STM–16 AGGREGATE (UP GRADING 1661 SM–C) 4

411.100.349 U
L–16.1 HM1 AGGREGATE
(3AL 35810 AA––)
411.100.361 Q
L–16.2 HM1 AGGREGATE
(3AL 35811 AA––)
411.100.372 K
S–16.1 HM1 AGGREGATE
(3AL 35853 AA––)
411.100.373 L
L–16.2 JE1 HM1 AGGREGATE
(3AL 35854 AA––)
411.100.374 M 18+19
L–16.2 JE2 HM1 AGGREGATE 2
(3AL 35855 AA––) 22+23
411.100.643 K
L–16.2 JE3 HM1 AGGREGATE
(3AL 36561 AB––)
411.100.458 J
S–16.1 HM1 AGGREGATE SC
(3AL 35853 AB––)
411.100.459 K
L–16.1 HM1 AGGREGATE SC
(3AL 35810 AB––)
411.100.460 Q
L–16.2 HM1 AGGREGATE SC
(3AL 35811 AB––)
411.100.461 D
L–16.2 JE1 HM1 AGGREGATE SC
(3AL 35854 AB––)
411.100.462 E
(3AL 35855 AB––)
411.100.520 C
(3AL 36561 AA––)
411.100.507 C
S–16.1 ID FC AGGREGATE
(3AL 36516 AA––)
411.100.508 M
L–16.1 ID FC AGGREGATE
(3AL 36517 AA––)
411.100.509 N
L–16.2 ID FC AGGREGATE
(3AL 36518 AA––)
411.100.510 A
L–16.2 JE1 ID FC AGGREGATE
(3AL 36519 AA––)
411.100.511 X
S–16.2 JE2 ID FC AGGREGATE
(3AL 36520 AA––)
411.100.512 Y
L–16.2 JE3 ID AGGREGATE
(3AL 36521 AA––)
411.100.513 Z
S–16.1 ID AGGREGATE SC
(3AL 36516 AB––)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
table continue
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 69 / 436
436
Max
Qty.
411.100.514 S
L–16.1 ID AGGREGATE SC

(3AL 36517 AB––)

411.100.515 T
L–16.2 ID AGGREGATE SC
(3AL 36518 AB––)
411.100.516 U
L–16.2 JE1 ID AGGREGATE SC
(3AL 36519 AB––)
411.100.517 V
(3AL 36520 AB––)
411.100.518 E
(3AL 36521 AB––)
411.100.969 J
S16.1 AGG.61 ENHANCED
(3AL 36516 BA––)
411.100.970 P
L16.1 AGG.61 ENHANCED
(3AL 36517 BA––)
411.100.971 C
L16.2 AGG.61 ENHANCED
(3AL 36518 BA––)
411.100.972 D
L16.2 JE1 AGG.61 ENHANCED
(3AL 36519 BA––)
411.100.973 E
(3AL 36520 BA––)
411.100.974 F
(3AL 36521 BA––)
411.100.975 G
S16.1 AGG.61 ENHANCED SC
(3AL 36516 BB––)
411.100.976 H
L16.1 AGG.61 ENHANCED SC
(3AL 36517 BB––)
411.100.977 A
L16.2 AGG.61 ENHANCED SC
(3AL 36518 BB––)
411.100.978 K
L16.2 JE1 AGG.61 ENHANCED SC
(3AL 36519 BB––)
411.100.979 L
L16.2 JE2 AGG.61 ENHANCED SC
(3AL 36520 BB––)
411.100.980 A
(3AL 36521 BB––)
411.100.710 J
L–16 AGG. 192.3 SC 6400
(3AL 37615 AA––)
411.100.711 F
L–16 AGG. 192.5 SC 6400
(3AL 37615 AB––)
411.100.712 G
L–16 AGG. 192.7 SC 6400
(3AL 37615 AC––)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
table continue
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 70 / 436
436
Max
Qty.
411.100.713 H
L–16 AGG. 192.9 SC 6400
(3AL 37615 AD––)

411.100.714 A
L–16 AGG. 193.1 SC 6400
(3AL 37615 AE––)
411.100.715 B
L–16 AGG. 193.3 SC 6400
(3AL 37615 AF––)
411.100.716 C
L–16 AGG. 193.5 SC 6400
(3AL 37615 AG––)
411.100.717 D
L–16 AGG. 193.7 SC 6400
(3AL 37615 AH––)
411.100.718 N
L–16 AGG. 194.3 SC 6400
(3AL 37615 AL––)
411.100.719 P
L–16 AGG. 194.5 SC 6400
(3AL 37615 AM––)
411.100.720 L
L–16 AGG. 194.7 SC 6400
(3AL 37615 AN––)
411.100.721 H
L–16 AGG. 194.9 SC 6400
(3AL 37615 AP––)
411.100.722 A
L–16 AGG. 195.1 SC 6400
(3AL 37615 AQ––)
411.100.723 B
L–16 AGG. 195.3 SC 6400
(3AL 37615 AR––)
411.100.724 C
L–16 AGG. 195.5 SC 6400
(3AL 37615 AS––)
411.100.725 D
L–16 AGG. 195.7 SC 6400
(3AL 37615 AT––)
411.100.981 X
STM16 AGG. 61 – 192.3/ 6400 ENH. SC
(3AL 37615 BA––)
411.100.982 Y
STM16 AGG. 61 – 192.5/ 6400 ENH. SC
(3AL 37615 BB––)
411.100.983 Z
STM16 AGG. 61 – 192.7/ 6400 ENH. SC
(3AL 37615 BC––)
411.100.984 S
STM16 AGG. 61 – 192.9/ 6400 ENH. SC
(3AL 37615 BD––)
411.100.985 T
STM16 AGG. 61 – 193.1/ 6400 ENH. SC
(3AL 37615 BE––)
411.100.986 U
STM16 AGG. 61 – 193.3/ 6400 ENH. SC
(3AL 37615 BF––)
411.100.987 V
STM16 AGG. 61 – 193.5/ 6400 ENH. SC
(3AL 37615 BG––)
411.100.988 E
STM16 AGG. 61 – 193.7/ 6400 ENH. SC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
(3AL 37615 BH––)
table continue
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 71 / 436
436
Max
Qty.
411.100.989 F
STM16 AGG. 61 – 194.3/ 6400 ENH. SC

(3AL 37615 BL––)

411.100.990 C
STM16 AGG. 61 – 194.5/ 6400 ENH. SC
(3AL 37615 BM––)
411.100.991 Z
STM16 AGG. 61 – 194.7/ 6400 ENH. SC
(3AL 37615 BN––)
411.100.992 S
STM16 AGG. 61 – 194.9/ 6400 ENH. SC
(3AL 37615 BP––)
411.100.993 T
STM16 AGG. 61 – 195.1/ 6400 ENH. SC
(3AL 37615 BQ––)
411.100.994 U
STM16 AGG. 61 – 195.3/ 6400 ENH. SC
(3AL 37615 BR––)
411.100.995 V
STM16 AGG. 61 – 195.5/ 6400 ENH. SC
(3AL 37615 BS––)
411.100.996 W
STM16 AGG. 61 – 195.7/ 6400 ENH. SC
(3AL 37615 BT––)
298.701.604 A
SOC COAXIAL JUMPER KIT 1 – 5
(3AL 34543 AA––)
table continue
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 72 / 436
436
Max
Qty.
TRIBUTARIES 6
411.100.129 G
140/STM–1 SWITCH TRIBUTARY 10
(3AL 34066 AA––)
411.100.120 B 2–6
3 x 34 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY 10 7
(3AL 34065 AA––) 9–13
411.100.162 H
3 x 45 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY 10
(3AL 34080 AA––)
411.100.236 B
34/2 TRANS.MUX & 5 x 2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY
(3AL 34474 AA––)
21 x 2 Mbit/s 120 ohm TRIBUTARY 411.100.330 M
(3AL 34075 AC––) 4 2,3,4,6 8
21 x 2 Mbit/s 75 ohm TRIBUTARY 411.100.331 A

(3AL 34075 AB––)
411.100.657 R
21 x 2 MB/s 120 OHM RETIMING TRIB.
(3AL 35905 AC)
411.100.656 Q
21 x 2 MB/s 75 OHM RETIMING TRIB.
(3AL 35905 AB)
411.100.871 G
21 x 1.5 MB/s TRIBUTARY
(3AL 37718 AA)
411.100.171 A 2–5
S–1.1 TRIBUTARY 8
(3AL 34277 AA––) 9–12
411.100.174 D 2–5
L–1.1 TRIBUTARY 8
(3AL 34280 A––) 9–12
411.100.325 C 2–5
L–1.2 TRIBUTARY 8
(3AL 34918 A––) 9–12
411.100.185 Z 2–5
S–1.1 TRIBUTARY 600 8
(3AL 34296 AA––) 9–12
411.100.247 N 2–5
L–1.1 TRIBUTARY 600 8
(3AL 34437 AA––) 9–12
411.100.358 V 2–5
L–1.2 TRIBUTARY 600 8
(3AL 35714 AA––) 9–12
411.100.245 L 2–5
S–1.1 TRIBUTARY 600 SC 8
(3AL 34804 AA––) 9–12
411.100.246 M 2–5
L–1.1 TRIBUTARY 600 SC 8
(3AL 34805 AA––) 9–12
411.100.158 M
L–1.1 TRIBUTARY SC
(3AL 34077 AA––)
411.100.160 K 2–5
S–1.1 TRIBUTARY SC 8
(3AL 34324 AA––) 9–12
411.100.172 B
S–1.1 TRIBUTARY DIN
(3AL 34278 AA––)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
table continue
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 73 / 436
436
Max
Qty.
411.100.173 C 2–5
L–1.1 TRIBUTARY DIN 8

(3AL 34279 AA––) 9–12

411.100.788 M 2–5
8
L–1.2 TRIBUTARY SC (3AL 34918 AC––) 9–12
411.100.641 R 2–5
DVB TRIBUTARY 8 9
(3AL 37450 AA––) 9–12
MATRICES UNITS 10
474.156.305 K
CONNECTION CARD 2 11
(3AL 34043 AA––)
411.100.142 D
FULL MATRIX 2 7,8 12
(3AL 34072 AA––)
411.100.500 R
16x16 MATRIX Unit 2 13
(3AL 36451 AA––)
CONTROLLER
411.100.301 M
SMEC 2 A 8R + 16F 1 B 14
(3AL 34732 AA––)
487.156.367 E
DS FUTUREBUS TERMINATION 1 16 15
(3AL 34024 AA––)
POWER SUPPLY
478.120.804 L
POWER SUPPLY UNIT 3 C.D,E 16
(3AL 34963 AA––)
TIMING
411.100.306 J
ENHANCED CRU 0.37ppm 2 20,21
(3AL 34787 AA––)
17
411.100.363 J
ENHANCED CRU 2 20,21
(3AL 35808 AA––)
AUXILIARIES 18
411.100.483 U
AUX/EOW / 2 1 17
(3AL 34453 AE––)
19
411.100.484 V
AUX/EOW EXTENSION / 2 1 17
(3AL 34453 AF––)
013.200.016 A
TELEPHONE HANDSET 1 – 20
(1AF 00398 AA––)
SOFTWARE 21
end table
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 74 / 436
436
Table 9. Part List : Connection Module
Max

Qty.
Access Connection Module 22

487.156.432 Q
(3AL 36153 AA––) 3
21x2MB/s PROT. ACC. MODULE 120
487.156.433 R
21x2MB/s PROT. ACC. MODULE 120 – K20 3
(3AL 36153 AB––)
487.156.435 K
21x2MB/s PROT. ACC. MODULE 75 – 1.0 3
(3AL 36154 AA––)
487.156.436 L
21x2MB/s PROT. ACC. MODULE 75 – T43 3
(3AL 36154 AB––)
487.156.438 W G 23
21x2MB/s UNPR. ACC. MODULE 75 – T43 3
(3AL 36154 AD––)
487.156.434 J
21x2MB/s UNPROT. ACC. MODULE 120 3
(3AL 36153 AC––)
487.156.437 M
21x2MB/s UNPROT. ACC. MODULE 75 3
(3AL 36154 AC––)
487.156.550 A
TRMUX+5X2MB/s PROT. ACC. MOD. 1.0/2.3 3
(3AL 36158 AB––)
TRMUX+5X2MB/s PROT. ACC. MOD. 120 487.156.440 C
3
OHM (3AL 36158 AA––)
487.156.444 U
3X34/45MB/s PROT. ACC. MODULE 1.6 8
(3AL 36155 AB––)
487.156.448 G
3X34/45MB/s PROT. ACC. MODULE 1.0 8
(3AL 36155 AA––)
487.156.449 H
3X34/45MB/s PROT. ACC. MODULE T43 8
(3AL 36155 AC––)
H 24
487.156.445 V
140/STM1 PROT. ACC. MODULE 1.0 8
(3AL 36156 AA––)
487.156.446 W
140/STM1 PROT. ACC. MODULE 1.6 8
(3AL 36156 AB––)
487.156.447 X
140/STM1 PROT. ACC. MODULE T43 8
(3AL 36156 AC––)
487.156.441 Z
AUX CONNECTION ACC. MOD. 1 F 25
(3AL 36159 AA––)
487.156.443 T
ALARM INTERFACE ACC. MOD. 1 L 26
(3AL 36162 AA––)
487.156.442 S
POWER ACCESS MODULE 1 M 27
(3AL 36160 AA––)
487.156.563 T
POWER ACCESS MODULE /2 1 M 28
(3AL 37480 AA––)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
table continue
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 75 / 436
436
Max
Qty.
487.156.450 E
QX & SYNCH 120 ACCESS MODULE 1

(3AL 36161 AA––)

487.156.451 T
QX & SYNCH ACC. MOD. 1.0/2.3 1 I 29
(3AL 36161 AB––)
487.156.452 U
QX & SYNCH T43 ACC. MOD. 1
(3AL 36161 AC––)
487.156.560 C
QX 10BT & SYNCH 120 ACCESS MODULE 1
(3AL 37462 AA––)
487.156.561 Z
QX 10BT & SYNCH ACC. MOD. 1.0/2.3 1 I 30
(3AL 37465 AA––)
487.156.562 S
QX 10BT & SYNCH T43 ACC. MOD. 1
(3AL 37465 AB––)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 76 / 436
436
Table 10. Part List: Accessories of the 1651 SM
Max

Qty.
DUMMY PLATES 31
299.701.560 A
6U 4TE DUMMY PLATE / N 2 –
(3AN 41001 AA––)
299.701.564 S
6U 4TE ACCESS DUMMY PLATE 10 –
(3AN 43031 AA––)
299.701.565 T
6U 12TE ACCESS DUMMY PLATE 3 –
(3AN 43032 AA––)
299.701.562 Y
(3AN 41002 AA––)
299.701.563 Z
(3AN 41003 AA––)
RACK INSTALLATION SET
299.701.475 Z
ETSI INSTALL. SET – 32
(3AN 34258 AA––)
299.701.454 U
S9 INSTALL. SET – 33
(3AN 34259 AA––)
299.701.598 V
OPTINEX INSTALL. KIT 1 34
(3AL37983AA––)
ACCESSORIES
284.901.808 J
CUST. NO–ETSI OPTIC COVER FOR STM1 8 – 35
(3AN 44550 AA)
284.901.525 V
CUST. NO–ETSI OPTIC COVER FOR STM4 4 – 36
(3AN 44922 AA)
001.700.121 J
16A CIRCUIT BREAKER 2 – 37
(1AB 02428 0012)
001.791.356 L
CIRCUIT BREAKER (15 A 72 Vdc) 2 38
(1AB162710006)
FOR ELECTRICAL WIRING 39
543.159.606 Z
KIT – 120 ohms CONNECTOR (9 PINS) 3 – 40
(3AL 34257 AA––)
299.701.407 W
KIT – 120 ohms CONNECTOR (15 PINS) 23 – 41
(3AL 34521 AA––)
040.144.001 N
1.0/2.3 (3 mm) MALE COAX CONNECTOR 177 – 42
(1AB 06122 0003)
040.144.002 P
1.0/2.3 (6 mm) MALE COAX CONNECTOR 177 – 43
(1AB 06122 0004)
040.142.080 P
1.6/5.6 (8.5 mm) MALE COAX CONNECTOR 51 – 44
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
(1AB 00987 0005)
table continue
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 77 / 436
436
Max
Qty.
040.142.067 M
1.6/5.6 (5.9 mm) MALE COAX CONNECTOR 51 – 45

(1AB 00987 0004)

040.152.048 U
MALE COAX CONNECTOR BNC 3 – 46
(1AB 006420051)
FOR OPTICAL WIRING 47
041.897.045 S
SM FC–PC SINGLE FIBER SPLICE (15 M) 24 –
(1AB 07983 0001)
041.897.043 Y
SM JUMPER FC/PC (20 M) 24 –
(1AB 07984 0001)
041.897.012 R
SM SPLICE WITH FC/PC CONN. (10 M) 24 –
(1AB 07894 0002)
SPECIAL TOOLS
245.701.833 R
HOOK/UNHOOK TOOL 1 – 48
(1AD 02412 0001)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 78 / 436
436
Table 11. Part List : Explanatory notes
DESCRIPTION
No.
The abbreviation ” NP ” stands for ”New Practice” equipment. The Old Practice /New Practice
alternative qualifier is SW managed and shown on the local CT interface and allowable via QB3*
1
interface; see the Operator Handbook. For further information on the structure see ” Chapter 5
INSTALLATION” on page 311.
2 Mechanical Adapter utilized to insert the subrack into 21” ETSI racks (S9, N3, Optinex)
Alternative unit – Mixed configurations are possible – Slot 19=WEST1, 20=EAST2, 23=EAST1,
24 =WEST2 – Unit number depends on equipment configuration:
Unprotected Line terminal : 1 unit
Protected Line terminal : 2 units
3
Unprotected Drop–Insert : 2 units
Protected Drop–Insert : 4 units
Unless otherwise specified the connectors are FC/PC. Options are illustrated in ”Chapter 3.
FUNCTIONAL OPERATION ” on page 97
Alternative unit for up–grading STM–16. Mixed configurations are possible.
Each STM–16 Aggregate unit replace two STM–4 Aggregate units (dashed indication in
Figure 22. on page 66):
Agg East slot 19 and 20
Agg West slot 23 and 24
Unit number depends on equipment configuration:
4 Unprotected Line terminal : 1 unit

Unprotected Line Terminal and Drop–Insert : 2 units
Unless otherwise specified the connectors are FC/PC.
The suffix ID, ENH and ENHANCED , identify aggregate units

that can carry out new features but only for future network
evolution. In the current Release these Units are managed like
the previous ones.
Coaxial cables to perform the ”Pass–Through Aggregate to Aggregate”. Mandatory only for
5
STM–16 Aggregates.
6 Alternative unit – Options are illustrated in ”Chapter 3. FUNCTIONAL OPERATION ” on page 97
7 Slots 6, 13 are occupied by spare units only
8 Slot 6 is occupied by a spare unit only
Unit mapping three Unidirectional DIGITAL VIDEO BROADCASTING signals. By Hw straps it
9
can be used as transmitting or receiving item.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
10 Alternative Matrix unit
table continue
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 79 / 436
436
DESCRIPTION
No.

Slot 8 is occupied by a Full Matrix spare unit. When Connection Card is utilized both unit must

11

be inserted.
12 Slot 8 is occupied by a Full Matrix Spare Unit .
Alternative of the previous unit. The Unit is predisposed to provide future new features. In This
13 Release it carries out the same performances of the Full Matrix Unit. Slot 8 is occupied by a 16x16
Matrix Spare Unit .
Mandatory Unit. Needed specifically to manage the 1641SM–D DROP SHELF extension. If the
14 Drop Shelf is not required it is possible to use the ESCT equipment controller (411.100.163) and
MEMORY EXPANSION (487.156.610) instead of SMEC 2A 8R+16F.
15 Mandatory unit. Used to provide voltage logical reference to all Control and auxiliary BUS
16 One of the units is optionally supplied as 2+1 standby
17 Alternative unit. Slot 20 contains spare (1+1).
18 Alternative Auxiliary unit (Auxiliary channel interfaces and Order Wire interfaces) , .
19 These items guarantee the interworking with Line equipment.
20 Optional telephone handset associated to the AUX/EOW unit of slot 17.
21 Details concerning the software P/Ns are given in the Equipment Operator’s Handbook
22 Alternative modules, utilized for tributary connection.
Bidirectional 21x2/1.5 MB/s Access Modules. They allow the physical access of the 2/1.5 MB/s
23 signals and their 1+N protection
For details see ”Chapter 3. FUNCTIONAL OPERATION ” on page 97 and ”Chapter 5.
INSTALLATION” on page 311
3x34 Mb/s, 3x45,140 Mb/s, STM1 electrical Access Modules.
They allow the physical access of the relevant signals and their 1+N and 1+1 protection
24
For options details see ”Chapter 3. FUNCTIONAL OPERATION ” on page 97 and ”Chapter 5.
INSTALLATION” on page 311
25 Physical access for V11, 64 Kb/s G703 Data Channel and 4 wire external EOW
Housed Circuits: ANDOR, Futurebus Termination, Remote Inventory Data, IECB Bus (when Drop
26 Shelf Is managed). Access available: Remote Alarms and R/M interface connection (Rack
Lamps)
27 Station Battery access and Housekeeping I/O signals
Station battery access and Houskeeping I/O signals ; to be used for potential free applications.
28
(AND/OR function available by strap).
Housed Circuits: AUI / B2 Adapter. Access available: Q2 Interface, 2MHz I/O Station
29
synchronization signals and LAN connection (QB3 10 base 2 interface)
Alternative Unit. This Subunit converts the generic AUI interface to the Twisted Pair ethernet
30
interface: the 10Base–T option of the IEEE 802.3 standards.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
table continue
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 80 / 436
436
31 To be utilized for the unequipped slot; necessary for EMC performances.
Set of connectors needed to install the ETSI (N3–LC) (power supply, remote alarms) and cable
32
to actuate rack lamps, see ”Chapter 5. INSTALLATION” on page 311.
Set of connectors needed to install the S9 racks, (power supply, remote alarms) and cable to
33
actuate rack lamps, see ”Chapter 5. INSTALLATION” on page 311.
Set of connectors needed to install the Optinex rack (power supply, remote alarms) and cable to
34
actuate rack lamps, see ”Chapter 5. INSTALLATION” on page 311.
Over–dimensioned optical protection to cover STM1 tributary optical connectors which
35
dimensions exceed the recommended (ETSI) ones. Optional item.
Over–dimensioned optical protection to cover STM4 aggregate optical connectors which
36
dimensions exceed the recommended (ETSI) ones. Optional item.
37 Station power–supply patch points to mount at the Top Rack Unit of the S9 rack.
38 Station power–supply patch points to mount at the Top Rack Unit of the Optinex rack.
39 Detailed in ”Chapter 5. INSTALLATION” on page 311.
To be utilized as an alternative to interface wiring for 2 MHz external clock balanced signal
40
connection
To be utilized with 120 ohms interface wiring for 2 Mbit/s Tribs. and 2 MHz external clock balanced
41
signal connections
To be utilized with 75 ohms unbalanced interface wiring for 2 Mbit/s Tribs., electrical connection
42
on 3mm dia. cable. Also used for 34 Mb/s and 140/Mb/s/STM–1 electrical.
To be utilized with 75 ohms unbalanced interface wiring for 2 Mbit/s Tribs., electrical connection
43
on 6mm dia. cable. Also used for 34 Mb/s and 140 Mb/s/STM–1 electrical.
To be utilized with 34/140 Mbit/s interface wiring, STM–1 electrical connection on 8.5mm dia.
44
cable.
To be utilized with 34/140 Mbit/s interface wiring, STM–1 electrical connection on 5.9mm dia.
45
cable.
46 To be utilized with DVB Trib.
47 Alternative use for optical connections
Tool to be used to hook/unhook the coaxial cables carrying out the pass–through function on
48
STM-16 aggregates.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 81 / 436
436
2.3 Units Front View
This paragraph shows the access points (LED’s switches etc.) present on each unit together with relevant
legenda and meaning.

SLOT 2,3,4
34 / 2 TRAN. MUX AND

21 x 2/1.5 MBIT/S TRIB. 5 x 2Mbit/s TRIB.
CMI
* *
*2, 1.5, 34 o 45
1 1
LEGENDA
(1) Red LED indicating local unit alarm
Figure 23. Access points : 2/1.5 MBit/s and Tran Smux Tributaries
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 82 / 436
436
SLOT 2,3,4,5 ,6 & 9,10,11,12,13 SLOT 2,3,4,5 & 9,10,11,12
140 / STM1 3 x 34Mbit/s TRIB.

SWITCH TRIB. 3 x 45Mbit/s TRIB. DVB TRIBUTARY
*
CMI
*
* * DVB
* 140
or
STM1 *2 34 or 45
1 3
2
1 1 1
LEGENDA LEGENDA
(1) Red LED – local unit
alarm
(2) Green LED – In Service unit
(2) Rx electrical connector
Tributary output
(3) Tx side electrical connector

Tributary input
Figure 24. 34, 45 MBit/s, Switchable and DVB Tributary

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 83 / 436
436
SLOT 2,3,4,5 & 9,10,11,12

S–1.1 TRIB. FC S–1.1 TRIB. 600 FC/SC
L– 1.1 TRIB. FC L– 1.1 TRIB. 600 FC/SC
*155
STM1
155
*S 1,1 or L *L 1,1 or S
5 5
4 4
laser laser
R 3 3
ON
1 1
LEGENDA

(3) LASER manual reset button
(4) Tx optical connector –Tributary Input
((5) Rx optical connector – Tributary Output
Figure 25. Access points :Optical Tributaries

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 84 / 436
436
SLOT 7,8
CONNECTION FULL 16 x 16
CARD MATRIX MATRIX
FULL FULL
1 1
LEGENDA
(1) Red LED – local unit alarm
(2) Connector only for internal use
Figure 26. Access points: Matrices

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 85 / 436
436
SLOT 18,19, 22,23

* 622
*
S 4,1
or L 4.1
L 4.2
5 L 4.1 JE
4 L 4.2 JE
ON
Tx
laser
3
Rx
LEGENDA

(3) Rx optical connector – AGG. Input
(4) Tx optical connector – AGG. Output
((5) Manual LASER reset pushbutton
Figure 27. Access points: STM–4 Aggregates

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 86 / 436
436
SLOT 18+19, 22+23
*L–16.2 or S–16.1
Rx1 L– 16.1
L–16.2 JE1
Rx2 L–16.2 JE2
Rx3
Rx4
6 Tx1
Tx2
Tx3
Tx4
2
ON
3 Rx Tx 1
4 LASER
LEGENDA

(3) Rx optical connector – AGG. Input
(4) Tx optical connector – AGG. Output

((5) Manual LASER reset pushbutton
(6) Rx/ Tx pass–through connectors ( from/to other side STM–16 Aggregate)
Figure 28. Access points: STM–16 HM1 Aggregates

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 87 / 436
436
SLOT 21,20 SLOT A SLOT 17

CLOCK REFERENCE DS FUTUREBUS AUX EOW

UNIT TERMINATION UNITS
I/O
7
L
I
6
N
E
CKL 4 5
DL
3 J 4
CKN 2 R 3
DN 1
2
1 1
LEGENDA LEGENDA LEGENDA
(1) Red LED indicating (1) Network (1) Red LED indicating local
local unit alarm IECB Data unit alarm
(2) Network (2) Tph. handset insertion point
IECB Clock
(3) Reset line command key
(3) Local IECB
Data (4) Line seizure key
(4) Local IECB
(5) Yellow LED indicating
Clock conference call
(6) Yellow LED :
glowing = line busy
flashing = selective call received
(7) Green LED indicating free line
Figure 29. Access points: CRU, AUX–EOW, DS Future bus Termination

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 88 / 436
436
SLOT C,D,E SLOT B
EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER
POWER SUPPLY
SMEC2
CPU
12
11
10
2
9
CRAFT 8
TERMINAL
7
URG 6
NURG
ATTD
5
ABN
IND
4
1 3
2
1
LEGENDA LEGENDA
(1) GREEN LED : (1) Red LED – local unit alarm

ON = correct operation
(2) ON ( I ) or OFF ( O ) switch (2) Green LED – In service unit
(3) Yellow LED – Indicative alarm
(4) Yellow LED – Abnormal condition
(5) Yellow LED – Alarm storing ( attended )
(6) Red LED – Not urgent alarm
(7) Red LED – Urgent alarm
(8) Connector for factory use
(9) Personal Computer connector (interface F)
(10) Alarm storing pushbutton
(11) Lamp test pushbutton
(12) Unit reset pushbutton
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 30. Access Points: Power Supply and Equipment Controller SMEC2
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 89 / 436
436
2.4 Access Module front view

SLOT F

SLOT L SLOT M
AUX ALARM POWER
HK
RA
3 5 8
V11
2 BATT1
R/M
4 7
64 K
BATT2
1
6
LEGENDA
(1) (2) (3) Connector for Auxiliary Cahannels
(4) Connector for RM interface (Rack Lamps)
(5) Connector for Remote Alarms
(6) (7) Connector for Power Supply
(8) Connector for Housekeeping indications
Figure 31. Access Module front cover plate – Auxiliary, Battery, Alarm Access Modules
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 90 / 436
436
SLOT I
Qx & SYNC
Q INT Q INT
5 5
SYNC
I1 SYNC
4 I2
3
OUT
2 2
10 – B2 10 – B2
1 1
LEGENDA
(1) (2) Connectors for QB3 Ethernet connection
(3) Connector for synch. signals, 120 Ohm connector
(4) Connector for synch. signals, Coax. 1.0/2.3 connector
(5) Connector for Q2LTS Interface connection
Figure 32. Access Module front cover plate – Qx Interface & Sync. Access Module.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 91 / 436
436
SLOT I

QX 10BT & SYNCH QX 10BT & SYNCH
120 OHM CONN. COAX. CONN.
QINT
QINT
4 4
SYNC
I1
SYNC
3 I2
2
OUT
10–BT 10–BT
1 1
LEGENDA
(1) Connector for Twisted Pair LAN connection
(2) Connector for synch. signals, 120 Ohm connector
(3) Connector for synch. signals, Coax. 1.0/2.3 connector
(4) Connector for Q2LTS Interface connection
Figure 33. Access Module front cover plate – Qx 10BT Interface & Sync. Access Module.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 92 / 436
436
SLOT G
21x2/1.5 Mbit/s Ohm bidirectional 21x2 Mbit/s 75 Ohm bidirectional
8
1 15
1 1
7 7
8
1 15
14 14
15 15
21 21
Figure 34. Access Module front cover plate – 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary Access Module.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 93 / 436
436
SLOT G
34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s 75 ohm 34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s 120 Ohm

5 6
1 1
Rx Tx
1 2
5 5 7 8
3 4
LEGENDA LEGENDA
(1) Rx 75 ohm connectors for (5) Rx 120 ohm connector for

2Mbit/s Channels 2Mbit/s Channels
(2) Tx 75 ohm connectors for (6) Tx 120 ohm connector for

2Mbit/s channels 2Mbit/s channels
(3) Rx connector for (7) Rx connector for

34Mbit/s channel 34Mbit/s channel
(4) Tx connector for (8) Tx connector for

34Mbit/s channel 34Mbit/s channel
Figure 35. Access Module front cover plate – 34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary Access Module.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 94 / 436
436
SLOT H
3 x 34 /45 MBIT/S ACCESS MODULE
LEGENDA
(1)–(3) Tx connectors for 34Mbit/s Trib. connection
(4)–(6) Rx connectors for 34Mbit/s Trib. connection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 36. Access Module front cover plate – 3x34/45 Mbit/s Tributary Access Module.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 95 / 436
436
SLOT H
140/155 Mbit/s Trib. Access Module
LEGENDA
(1)–(2) Connectors for 140/155 Mbit/s

Trib. Connection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 37. Access Module front cover plate – 140/155 Mbit/s Tributary Access Module.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 96 / 436
436
3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
3.1 General description

Figure 38. on page 98 illustrates, in block diagram form, the units employed and the general operating
functions.
The functions carried out by the equipment can be split into the following sub–systems:
• STM–4 Aggregate sub–system (when 1651–SM is involved)
• STM–16 Aggregate sub–system (when 1661–SM–C is involved)
• Connect sub–system
It is indicated by the Matrix units and connection circuits of the Tributary and Aggregate units.
• Tributary sub–system
In this release the 1651 SM or 1661 SM–C equipment tributary sub–system is provided with an
extension only for the 2 Mbit/s management, thus increasing their number up to 252. This
extension is provided by the 1641 SM–D (Drop Shelf) equipment.
These 252 2Mit/s streams are subdivided into three 21 x 2 Mbit/s units housed in the Line Shelf
Equipment, as regards the 63 2 Mbit/s streams and into nine 21 x 2 Mbit/s units housed the
Drop Shelf Equipment, as regards the 189 2 Mbit/s streams.
The latter are multiplexed into three STM–1 electrical units (assigned to slots 5,6,7) housed in
the Line Shelf as can be seen from Figure 38. on page .98
The Drop Shelf equipment is totally managed by the Line Shelf, hence it is not a NE but it is part
of Line Shelf as far as the Network Management is concerned.
• Protection sub–system
It is obtained with the spare units and the functional units circuitry.
• Synchronizing sub–system (Clock Reference unit)
• Auxiliary and Overhead sub–system

It is achieved with the AUX unit, and with the OH–BUS connections obtained with the functional
units.
• Control and management sub–system

It is achieved through the Equipment Controller unit, which interfaces the Card Controller
subunits inside all the units (except for the Power Supply unit), the Craft Terminal (Interface F)
and the Management Center (Interface QB3*) and the non SDH Alcatel equipment (Interface
Q2).
The Remote Equipment Craft Terminal (R–ECT) feature is provided and through the QECC
protocol it allows the operator to perform a set of management operations and display the Alarm
synthesis information of all the subnetwork NE’s .
• Power Supply sub–system
The sub–systems are thoroughly explained in the following.
The Aggregate and Tributary sub–systems cross–refer to Figure 39. on page 99.
Functions that are not operative in this release are nonetheless mentioned to better define the system
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
aspects. However, the reader is informed as to their non–use.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 97 / 436
436
WHEN
1661 STM–16 AGGREG AGGREG STM–16
SM–C STM–16 STM–16
W E

IS USED

STM–4 AGGREG AGGREG STM–4
WHEN STM–4 STM–4
1651 SM AGGREG AGGREG STM–4
W E
STM–4 STM–4
IS USED
W E
SPARE SPARE
OH BUS
MATRIX
UNIT MATRIX
UNIT EOW
SPARE AUX/EOW 3x64Kbit/s
3xV11
TRIBUTARIES
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (10 SLOTS)
CONTROL & DCC BUS
2Mbit/s SPARE
1+N
F
EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
1.5 Mbit/s SPARE Q B3
1+N
34/2 TRAN. MUX SPARE

5x2Mbit/s 1+N
CLOCK DISTRIBUTION
3 x 63 2Mbit/s SPARE
FROM DROP SHELF 1+N
CLOCK
(#) REF CLOCK
STM–1 OPT STM–1 OPT REF
SPARE
(*)
34,45,140Mbit/s SPARE 34,45,140Mbit/s SPARE 2MHz
STM–1 EL 1+N STM–1 EL 1+N EXT
DVB DVB
3
(#) These Units can be APS (1+1) protected POWER 2
SUPPLY
(*) These Units can be EPS (1+1) protected 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 38. General Block diagram
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 98 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
STM–16 AGGREGATE STM–16 AGGREGATE
PASS–THROUGH
(Jumper kit)
07
STM–16 STM–16
SPI MUX RST MST SA HPC HPC SA MST RST MUX SPI
WEST EAST
955.100.562 K
STM–4 AGGREGATE STM–4 AGGREGATE
PASS–
THROUGH
STM–4 STM–4
SPI MUX RST MST SA HPC HPC SA MST RST MUX SPI
WEST EAST
MATRIX
4 x 38 Mbit/s 4 x 38 Mbit/s
LPC LPC LPC LPC MSP LPC MSP

SNCP SNCP
1 16 1 5 HPA
HPA HPA HPA HPA HPA HPA HPA HPA HPA HPA HPA HPA PG HPT
SA (SA) SA
SA
LPT LPT LPT LPT LPT LPT LPT LPT LPT
140/STM1 SWITCH TRIB.
LPT LPT LPT
DVB TRIB
MST
MST HPT
155
MST
LPA LPA LPA LPA LPA LPA LPA LPA LPA LPA LPA LPA RST
436
RST
RST LPA
3AL 36668 AA AA
140
34/2 TRAN. MUX and 5x2 Mbit/s
1 16
3x34 Mbit/s TRIB. or 3x45 Mbit/s TRIB.
Figure 39. Block diagram of the Tributary and Aggregate units

PI PI PI PI PI PI PI PI DEMUX/MUX PI PI PI PI
2 Mbit/s TRIB or 1.5 Mbit/s TRIB

PI PI
ACCESS MODULE
ACCESS MODULE ACCESS MODULE ACCESS MODULE ACCESS MODULE 155 Mbit/s 155 Mbit/s
OPTICAL OPTICAL – 600
1 21 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 5 140/155 Mbit/s
TX OR RX DVB 34 Mbit/s ELECTRICAL
2/1.5 Mbit/s UNIDIRECTIONAL PORT or 45 Mbit/s 34 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s
99 / 436
3.1.1 STM–4 Aggregates sub–system
This subsystem is present when 1651 SM equipment is used. The equipment allows a max. of four STM–4
Aggregate units to be used.

The aggregate operates as a bidirectional interface (Tx/Rx) between the optical fiber and the Tributary

signals (connected through the Matrix unit and the opposite side Aggregate).
The STM–4 signal (622 Mbit/s) is interconnected with:
• WEST side, regular (1 unit)

• WEST side, spare (1 unit)
• EAST side, regular (1 unit)
• EAST side, spare (1 unit)
The allowed configurations are:
• Unprotected terminal (1 unit)

• Unprotected Add/Drop (2 units)
• APS Protected terminal (2 units)
• APS Protected Add/Drop (4 units)
The description is applicable to all the STM–4 Aggregate units of this release listed in chapter 2 on page
65.
The units can be distinguished by letters L and S defining their dependance on optical components used
for Long distance or Short distance.
The Tx/Rx unit optical connectors can be accessed from the unit’s front coverplace. The units which
operate in the second window are indicated with 4.1, those operating in the third window with 4.2.
The units are identified by the type of connector used, FC/PC or SC/PC or DIN connectors.
The unit identified by JE (Joint engineering) have better optical characteristics, typically for the dispersion
values (see chapter 4 ”Technical Specifications”on page 279).
The bidirectional functional circuits are:
SPI (Synchronous Physical Interface)

It interfaces the STM–4 signal and the optical fiber, by extracting timing (in Rx).
MUX (Multidemultiplexing function)

It serial/parallel converts from STM–4 to STM1 and viceversa.
RST (Regeneration Section Termination)

It manages the section overhead bytes for the Regeneration section (R–SOH)
MST (Multiplexer Section Termination)

It manages the section overhead bytes for the Multiplexing section (M–SOH)
SA (Section Adaptation)
Processes the pointer to synchronize the sub–system and the line frequency
HPC (Higher order Path Connection)

Allows selection and grooming of the sixteen AU4 streams to utilize in the STM–4
frame.
The AU4 streams can belong to the STM–4 Aggregate of the opposite side
(pass through) or to the Tributaries (add/drop) connected through the Matrices.
Each signal is split over a 38 Mbit/s 4–wire bus.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
This HPC function is not operative when Full Matrix is used (if is realized in the same
Full Matrix).
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 100 / 436
436
3.1.2 STM–16 Aggregate sub–system
This subsystem is present when 1661SM–C equipment is used. The equipment allows a max of two
STM–16 Aggregate units to be used.
The Aggregate operates as a bidirectional interface (Tx/Rx) between the optical fiber and tributary signals
(connected through the Matrix unit) and opposite side Aggregate.

The STM–16 signal (2488 Mbit/s) is interconnected with:
• WEST side (1 unit)
• EAST side (1 unit)
The allowed configurations are
• Unprotected terminal (1 unit)
• Unprotected Add/Drop (2 units)
The description is applicable to all the STM–16 Aggregate units of this release listed in chapter 2 on page
65.
Th Tx/Rx unit optical connectors can be accessed from the unit’s front coverplate. The units which
operate in the second window are indicated with 16.1, those operating in the third window, with 16.2.
The units are identified by the type of connector used, FC/PC or SC/PC or DIN connectors.
Some Units are marked by the ”ID” or “ENH” abbreviation or named ”Enhanced”. These items are preset
in order to supply additional ITU–T management functions for the future Releases of the 1661SM–C
Equipment. In current release these new functions are not operative and all the Aggregates have the same
performances.
The same units cannot work with previous kind of Aggregate placed on the other side of the optical span.
Previous kind of Aggregate (with different optical interface) are no more supplied in this release but can
have been upgraded from previous release.
The AU4 East/West connection (pass–through) are realized by means front connection using the cables
of the ”Coaxial Jumper Kit”, see chapter 2 on page 65..
For structured (VC12, VC3) Pass–through Full Matrix Unit is used.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 101 / 436
436
The bidirectional functional circuits are:
SPI (Synchronous Physical Interface)

It interfaces the STM–16 signal and the optical fiber, by extracting timing (in Rx).

MUX (Multidemultiplexing function)
It serial/parallel converts from STM–16 to STM1 and viceversa.
RST (Regeneration Section Termination)

It manages the section overhead bytes for the Regeneration section (R–SOH)
MST (Multiplexer Section Termination)

It manages the section overhead bytes for the Multiplexing section (M–SOH)
SA (Section Adaptation)
It processes the pointer to synchronize the sub–system and the line frequency
HPC (Higher order Path Connection)

Allows selection and grooming of the 16 AU4 to utilize in the STM–16 frame.
The AU4 streams can belong to the STM–16 Aggregate of the opposite side (pass
–through) or to the Tributaries (add/drop) connected through the Matrices.
The AU4 pass–through with opposite side Aggregate is realized through four 622 Mbit/s
signals; in the connection with Matrices each AU4 signal is split over 38 Mbit/s 4–wire
bus. These connections are used for tributary drop–insert, TU pass–through and
Aggregate cross–connections.
The STM–16 Aggregate units can be connected to an eventual external Optical Amplifier to implement
spans of the link.
The Optical Amplifier alarm report is performed via discrete contacts (Housekeeping incoming pins).
A bidirectional transmission on a single fiber is allowed by using an external optical passive coupler.
The transmission direction is set by using not assigned bits of S1 byte.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 102 / 436
436
3.1.3 Connection sub–system
This sub–system allows all tributaries and Aggregates connections.

When STM–4 Aggregates are used the Tributary and Aggregate sub–systems provide 16 STM–1
payloads which can be managed by the Connection sub–system, i.e., 4 for the Agg. EAST, 4 for the Agg.
WEST, 8 for the TRIBUTARIES (see Figure 40. ).
When STM–16 Aggregates are used the VC4 connection can be 8 for Aggr., distributed in every manner
and not 4 East and 4 West (see Figure 43. on page 108).
STM–16 Agg. differences are indicated in para.3.1.3.1 on page 107.
To this concern, the MATRIX units have been assigned besides the Tributary and Aggregate units circuitry
used.
Different MATRICES can be chosen depending on the connections needed:
• CONNECTION CARD
• FULL MATRIX and 16x16 MATRIX (NB 1)
The following table illustrates the connections for each unit:
Table 12. Connection options
UNIT CONNECT OPTION
VC4 VC3/VC12 ACROSS 16 STM–1
AGG–TR AGG–AGG TR–TR AGG–TR AGG–AGG TR–TR
CONNECTION CARD YES YES NO NO NO NO
FULL MATRIX (NB1) YES YES YES YES YES YES
AGG = Aggregate
TR = Tributary
NB1
As indicated in chapter 2 on page 65. in the current release a new Matrix Unit has been introduced: ”16x16
Full Matrix”. This new Unit is an hardware upgrade for the present Full Matrix Unit and it is preset to
support, in the future release, the new standard ITU–T management functions (J1/J2, TIM, POM,
SNCP/N). In current release these new features are not performed, therefore the ”16x16 Full Matrix Unit”
and the Full Matrix Unit carry out the same functions.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 103 / 436
436
AGG. AGG.
SPARE SPARE
4 x AU4
AGG. ( + 4 Spare ) AGG.
STM–4 STM–4
WEST EAST
4 x AU4 4 x AU4
( + 4 Spare ) ( + 4 Spare )
MATRICES
8 x AU4
( + 2 Spare )
TRIB.
Figure 40. Connection with STM–4–Aggregate (1651 SM)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 104 / 436
436
• Connection Card (see Figure 41. )
Creates a simple extension between the Tributaries and the Aggregates.

The connection functions are carried out only on the VC4’s by the Aggregates’ dedicated
circuits.
The following Tributary units can be utilized:
– 140/STM–1 SWITCH TRIBUTARY
– STM–1 optical. This unit can also contain VC12 or VC3 structures, that will not be
managed but only transferred.
The Connection Card doesen’t perform any Cross– connection.
Two Connection Cards must be utilized.
SPARE SPARE
AGG. AGG.
WEST AU4 PASS–THROUGH EAST
(*) AGG. AGG. (*)
WEST EAST
CONNECTION CARD 2
*
CONNECTION CARD 1
AU4 DROP/INSERT
TRIB TRIB TRIB

1 2 10
140 Mbit/s
STM1 (VC4 MANAGED)
(*) NOT ALLOWED WITH STM–16

* BOTH CONNECTION CARDS MUST BE INSERTED. THE CONN. CARD 2 IS NOT A SPARE
FOR THE FIRST ONE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 41. Connection with Connection Card
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 105 / 436
436
• Full Matrix and 16x16 Matrix (see Figure 42. )
All the Aggregate and Tributary connection options are possible.

Same sided VC Aggregate connections are also possible.

The selection of circuits mapping signals into the SDH structures depend on the type of
connection involved.
VC12 and VC3 structures of STM1 signal are processed
An additional Matrix unit can be utilized as spare.
SPARE * SPARE *
AGG. WEST AGG. EAST
AGG. AGG.
WEST EAST
STM–16 AGG. AU4 PASS–THROUGH
SPARE FULL MATRIX
16 STM–1
AU/VC MANAGEMENT CROSS
CROSS
CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS
AGG. WEST AGG. EAST
PASS–THROUGH
AGG. WEST–AGG. EAST
TRIB–TRIB
CROSS–CONNECTIONS
DROP–INSERT
TRIB–AGG.
FULL MATRIX
TRIB TRIB
1 10
2Mbit/s
34Mbit/s
140Mbit/s
OPTICAL/ELECTRICAL STM–1
* NOT ALLOWED WITH STM–16
WITH STM–16 AGG. THE AU4 PASS–THROUGH ARE REALIZED
BETWEEN AGG. UNIT BY MEANS DIRECT CABLING.
Figure 42. Cross–connection with Full Matrix

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 106 / 436
436
3.1.3.1 STM–16 Aggregate differences (1661 SM–C)
See Figure 43. on page 108.

When using the STM–16 Aggregates, while needing only the VC–4 connection, the eight VC–4 connected
Aggregates (connecting the subsystem) will be distributed in any direction and not only 4 East + 4 West
as for the STM–4.
With SNCP, up to 8 VC–4 connected to one side will be protected by the other.
There are two ways of implementing cross–connection when needing lower–order cross–connection with
STM–16 Aggr.. Both will use the Full Matrix unit:
1) Linear links.
In this case lower order VC grooming can be implemented inside 8 VC4 distributed in every direction (not
only 4 East + 4 West).
2) SNCP ring.
In this case lower order VC grooming can be implemented inside 4 VC4 from/to East and 4 from/to West.
3) Enhanced Connectivity In SNCP Ring.
It is possible to activate the Enhanced Connectivity Function that allows to protect up to 8 VC–4 with
Low–order cross–connection on condition that all the LO VC were connected with the same Connection
Configuration Mode. If instead is necessary to manage each single TU in different manner the connection
comes back under the previous constraint.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 107 / 436
436
AGG. 16 max AU4 AGG.
STM–16 STM–16
WEST EAST
Pass–through (P.T)
ADD–DROP * E
W
8 max AU4 ( +8 Spare) A/D*
*A/D
MATRICES
8 x AU4
( + 2 Spare )
TRIB.
*: By A/D (Add/Drop indication) it is generally meant all the connections with Aggregates managed by
the MATRIX (drop–insert, TU pass–through, cross–connection aggregate).
NUMBERS OF AU4 USED

TYPE OF
CONNECTION
WA/D E A/D W+E A/D P.T
16–
LINEAR 8 8 8
(max 8)
= W
VC4 SNCP RING 8 W+E 16–W
A/D
= W
VC12/VC3 SNCP RING 4 W+E 16–W
A/D
VC12/VC3 ENHANCED = W
8 W+E 16–W
SNCP RING A/D
Figure 43. Cross–connection with STM–16 Aggregate (1661 SM–C)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 108 / 436
436
3.1.4 Tributary Sub–system
The Tributary Subsystem consists of a set of Units and functions housed and managed in the main Shelf
1651 SM /1661 SM–C ( Line Shelf Tributary Subsystem) and one optional extension named ”Drop Shelf
Tributary Subsystem” housed in the 1641 SM–D Equipment. The latter is wholly managed by the Line
Shelf as regards the alarms, configurations and control hence as far as the Network management is
concerned the Drop Shelf is part of the 1651 SM / 1661 SM–C NETWORK ELEMENT and it is not
distinguishable from the former.
The first control level on the units is performed by the Card Controller Subunit mounted on it that manages
the unit and interfaces the Equipment Controller as far as concern Alarms, Configuration, Performance
Monitoring etc.
3.1.4.1 Line Shelf Tributary Subsystem
The line shelf can house the following types of Tributaries:
1.5 Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s
34 Mbit/s Plesiochronous
45 Mbit/s
140 Mbit/s
155 Mbit/s, STM1 electrical

Synchronous
155 Mbit/s, STM1 optical
Digital Video Broadcasting Asyncronous Serial

Interface
The 21x2/1.5 Mbit/s TRIB. and 2/34 Trans. Mux units can be inserted only in the first 3 slots of the first
group, besides the spare of slot 5.
Besides the basic 21*2Mb/s Tributary, a specialized unit with additional feature named Retiming, is
allowable (see para 3.2.1.2 on page 162).
Three signals per 34 Mbit/s or 45 Mbit/s unit are managed. While for the 2 Mbit/s unit, 21 signals are
managed on the same card.
Three DVB (Digital Video Broadcasting ) unidirectional signals per unit are managed. The Unit can work
as transmitting or receiving by HW presetting selection. The Unit transmits or receives three 270 Mbit/s
coded TV channels with a resulting effective bit–rate ranging from 1–40 Mbit/s. Inside the Unit this signal
is put on 45 Mbit/s unidirectional frames to be transported on the SDH network at VC–3 level.
The DVB tributary is equivalent to a standard 34/45 Tributary under the Craft Terminal point of view and
also regarding the Network Management perspective.
The 140/STM–1 Switch Tributary unit operates as a tributary for a 140 Mbit/s or a 155 Mbit/s electrical
signal by SW selection.
The 140/STM–1 Switch Tributary unit and the STM–1 optical unit (S–1.1 TRIB. , L–1.1 and L–1.2 )
manage only one signal.
The 21x2/1.5 Mbit/s Trib. can be EPS N+1 protected.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The 3x34, 3x45 Mbit/s Trib. can be EPS 1+1 and N+1 protected .
The DVB Trib. can’t be EPS neither N+1 nor 1+1 protected.
The 140/155 Mbit/s Switchable Tributary electrical unit can be EPS 1+1 and N+1 protected .
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 109 / 436
436
The 155 Mbit/s electrical unit and the STM–1 optical unit are APS 1+1 Single Ended protected .
The equipment is provided with 10 tributary slots split into two groups of 5 units each. The 5th slot of each
group is only assigned to the spare unit (1+N protection).

The rest of the units can occupy any position as long as they are configured as follows (except spares):
• 8 per STM1 optical or 140/STM–1 electrical (8 streams)

• 8 per 3x34 Mbit/s TRIB (24 streams)
• 8 per 3x45 Mbit/s TRIB (24 streams)
• 8 per DVB TRIB (24 unidirectional streams)
Heterogeneous tributary configuration is allowed.
The electrical Tributary physical access are the ”Access Modules” subunit that interface the tributary
signals with the external source.
These modules differ in termination (75 or 120 ohms) and type of connector (Siemens or Type 43 or Sub
–D).
The DVB phisical access are on the front cover plate by means 3 pairs of BNC connectors.
If the DROP SHELF is present the first three slots of the second set are dedicated to house as many
STM–1 electrical units. On these units convey the 3 x 63 2Mbit/s flows coming from the Drop Shelf by
means three pairs of coaxial cables that have to be connected to the Access Modules relevant to the Units
inserted in the Line Shelf slot # 5,6,7. Refer to the Table 14. on page 112.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 110 / 436
436
3.1.4.2 Line shelf Tributary Subsystem
Table 13. Configuration

1651 SM/1661 SM–C
SPARE SPARE
STM–1 EL STM–1 EL
(1+N) (1+N)
STM–1 OPT. STM–1 OPT.
SPARE SPARE
140 Mbit/s 140 Mbit/s
(1+N) (1+N)
SPARE SPARE
3x34 Mbit/s 3x34 Mbit/s
(1+N) (1+N)
SPARE SPARE
3x45 Mbit/s 3x45 Mbit/s
(1+N) (1+N)
DVB DVB
SPARE
21x2 Mbit/s
(1+N)
SPARE
21x1.5 Mbit/s
(1+N)
SPARE
34/2 and 5x2Mbit/s
(1+N)
STM–1 ELECT.
Unit carrying SPARE
3 x 63 2Mbit/s from Drop (1+N)
Shelf
TRIB. TRIB.
TRIB.1 TRIB.2 TRIB.3 TRIB.4 TRIB.5 TRIB.6 TRIB.7 TRIB.8
Spare 1 Spare 2
SET # 1 SET # 2
This table summarizes the configuration options used and indicates the units assigned to each tributary
slot.
The Access Module subunits interface the electrical tributary signals with the external source, except the
DVB physical access that is reached directly on unit front cover plate .
The Access Module subunits differ in bit–rate, termination (75 or 120 ohms) and K20 standard protection
(if any).
Local market Access Module can be supplied.
With reference to Figure 39. on page 99 the main functional block of each unit employed is defined in the
following.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
NOTE: Some functions can be present in both of the connected units (e.g., in the tributaries and in the
Full Matrix), because the units can work with different equipment and configurations.
In this case the sole duty of the LPC function (e.g., when using the trib. with Full Matrix) is of
establishing the position of the tributary flow in the first of the three relevant slots TUG3.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 111 / 436
436
3.1.4.3 Drop Shelf Tributary Subsystem
The Drop Shelf trib subsystem provides up to 189 x 2048 Mbit/s streams using nine 21 x 2 Mb/s tributaries.
The 1641 SM–D provides a ”9 +1” equipment protection scheme for these tributaries.

Table 14. Configuration
1641 SM–D
SPARE
21 x 2 Mbit/s 21 x 2 Mbit/s
1+N
TRIB. TRIB. TRIB. TRIB. TRIB. TRIB. TRIB. TRIB. TRIB. TRIB.
1 2 3 4 5 6 SPARE 8 9 10
21x2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY unit
The following are the main bidirectional functional circuits:
– PI (Physical Interface) It interfaces the 2 Mbit/s signal with the external source by extracting timing
(on the Tx side).
– LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation) Extracts/inserts the 2 Mbit/s plesiochronous signal from/to the
C12 synchronous container
– LPT (Lower order Path termination) Manages the overhead byte (POH) thus structuring the virtual
container (VC12).
– HPA (High order Path Adaptation) Processes the TU12’s pointer
– LPC (Lower order Path Connection) Cross–connects any position of the STM–1 interfacing the
aggregates through matrices.
3x34 Mbit/s TRIB. unit
• PI (Physical Interface) It interfaces the 34 Mbit/s signal with the external source by extracting
timing (on the Tx side)
• LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation) Extracts/inserts the 34 Mbit/s plesiochronous signal from/to
the C3 synchronous container
• LPT (Lower order Path termination) Manages the overhead byte (POH) thus structuring the
virtual container (VC3).
• HPA (High order Path Adaptation) Processes the TU3’s pointer
• LPC (Lower order Path Connection) Cross–connects any position of the STM–1 interfacing the
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 112 / 436
436
3x45 Mbit/s TRIB. unit

• PI (Physical Interface) It interfaces the 45 Mbit/s signal with the external source by extracting
timing (on the Tx side)

DVB TRIB. unit
Used for video signal that comes in the unit through an ASI interface. The Unit manages a range of
frequencies from 1 Mbit/s to 40 Mbit/s. Each DVB video stream is mapped over a VC3 (45Mbit/s
plesiochronous stream.
A part from the ASI physical interface that follows the CENELEC EN 50083–9 Recommendations, the
main functional circuits, under the ITU–T point of view, are the same as 3x45 Mbit/s TRIB. unit:
34/2 Trans Mux and 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary
The unit interfaces a 34 Mbit/s framed plesiochronous signal, and five 2 Mbit/s plesiochronous signals.
The 34 Mbit/s stream is demultiplexing into sixteen 2 Mbit/s signals.
• PI (Physical Interface)It interfaces the 34 Mbit/s (2 Mbit/s) signal with the external source by
extracting timing (on the Tx side)
• MUX/DEMUX (for the 34 Mbit/s signal only
It demultiplexes (in Tx) the 34 Mbit/s signal into sixteen 2 Mbit/s ones.
It multiplexes (in Rx) the sixteen 2 Mbit/s streams into one 34 Mbit/s signal.
• LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation)
Drops/Adds the 2 Mbit/s plesiochronous signal from/to the C12 synchronous container
• LPT (Lower order Path termination)
Manages the overhead byte (POH) thus structuring the virtual container (VC12).
• HPA (High order Path Adaptation)
Processes the TU12’s pointer
• LPC (Lower order Path Connection)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Cross–connects any position of the STM–1 interfacing the aggregates.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 113 / 436
436
140/STM1 SWITCH TRIBUTARY
The unit can be utilized for one 140 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributary or for one 155 Mbit/s electrical
synchronous tributary (this facility is SW selectable).

• PI (Physical Interface).
It interfaces the tributary signal with the external source by extracting timing (on the Tx side)
The circuit is utilized by both types of tributaries.
The following circuits have been defined:
• 140 Mbit/s
– LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation)

Inserts the 140 Mbit/s plesiochronous signal into the C4 synchronous container
– HPT (Higher order Path termination)

– PG (SA) Pointer Generator of section Adaptation.

Insert a fixed pointer value in AUOH.
• 155 Mbit/s
– RST (Regenerator Section Termination)

Manages the first three lines of the SOH.
– MST (Multiplexer Section termination)

Manages the last 5 lines of the SOH
– SA (Section Adaptation)
Processes the AU4 pointer
• MSP (Multiplex Section Protection) and SNCP (Path Protection Switching)

This circuit is applicable to both types of Tributaries. Its function is to choose between the
main/standby paths (MSP) of the same side Aggregate and the East/West side (SNCP) of the
signals received (through the matrix) from the Aggregates.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 114 / 436
436
155 Mbit/s Optical Tributary unit (S–1.1 TRIB. F.C., L–1.1 TRIB. F.C., L–1.2 TRIB. F.C.)
S and L letters define the Short or Long distance unit.

FC defines the connector used.
• SPI (Synchronous Physical Interface)

It E/O interfaces the external source by extracting timing from Rx
• RST (Regenerator Section Termination)

Manages the first 3 lines of the SOH
• MST (Multiplexer Section termination)

Manages the last 5 lines of the SOH.
• SA (Section Adaptation)
Processes the AU4 pointer to synchronize timing.
• HPT (Higher order Path termination)

• HPA (Higher order Path Adaptation)

It synchronizes (in the Rx direction only) the AU4 pointer and the TU pointers that might be
inside the VC4.
• LPC (Lower order Path Connection)

Cross–connects any position of the STM–1 interfacing the aggregates through matrices.
155 Mbit/s Optical Tributary unit (S–1.1 TRIB. 600, L–1.1 TRIB. 600, L–1.2 TRIB. 600)
S and L letters define the Short or Long distance unit.

FC defines the connector used.
• SPI (Synchronous Physical Interface)

It E/O interfaces the external source by extracting timing from Rx
• RST (Regenerator Section Termination)

Manages the first 3 lines of the SOH
• MST (Multiplexer Section termination)

Manages the last 5 lines of the SOH.
Processes the AU4 pointer to synchronize timing.
• MSP (Multiplex Section Protection)

Its function is to choose between the main/standby paths (MSP) and the East/West side (SNCP)
of the signals received (through the matrix) from the Aggregates.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 115 / 436
436
3.1.5 Automatic Protections Sub–system
The equipment is provided with automatic switching protections managed by the Equipment Controller
unit. The protections are activated following alarm detection, thus guaranteeing system availability.

To switch, the equipment is provided with spare unit and suitable circuitry and devices.

The operative protections of this release are:
– Equipment protection
• 1+1 and 1+N EPS (Equipment protection Switching) for electrical tributaries
• 1+1 EPS (Equipment Protection Switching) for Clock Reference and Full Matrix unit
• Power Supply Protection. If three power supply units are utilized, one of these will be considered
as spare.
– Network protection
• 1+1 Single ended MS Linear Protection (APS) for STM–4 Aggregate and synchronous
tributary unit
• SNCP at TU12, TU3, VC4 level, utilized in ring networks.
• Drop and Continue implemented through a SNC–P single ended connection between the NEs
that are involved in the dual node architecture.
• TWO–FIBER MS–SPRING (Multiplex Section Shared Protection Rings) for STM–16
Aggregate only.
The switching information is also indicated on the Craft Terminal screen.
Protections are defined in the following.
3.1.5.1 General description of the terms and definitions used in this paragraph
The types of protection are:
– Equipment protection
• EPS
– Network protection
• MS Linear Trail Protection (APS)

• SNCP
• Drop and Continue
• TWO–FIBER MS–SPRING
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 116 / 436
436
EPS (Equipment protection switching)
With EPS a spare unit fully replaces a faulty unit.

EPS is the action taken as a consequence of the detection of a permanent hardware fault (internal)
in a unit. EPS is applicable only to units that are electrically interfaced. For EPS management, the units
used as spare must store a copy of the configuration of the protected units.
MS Linear Trail Protection ( Simplified APS)
Purpose of this protection is to use a spare connection if the working one is no longer available.
Switching might be caused by line failure or faulty hardware on another system connected to the one being
considered ( SF switching criteria) or by the B2 Signal Degrade alarm (SD switching criteria). For this
latter the Equipment provisioning supports the definition of the SD threshold value and the choice to
include or not the SD in the single–end APS.
The MS Linear Trail Protection is also used as protection against hardware faults on the SDH line interface
(Aggregates or Synchronous Tributaries); in this case it is assumed that the line interface is part of
the line.
The MS Linear Trail Protection applies to the synchronous interface only and it allows two Operating
Modes:
• bidirectional (not operative in this release)
• unidirectional
In the bidirectional operating mode the failure of one line, in one direction, determines the use of the spare
connection for both directions.
While in the unidirectional operating mode, the spare connection is used only in the direction where faults
have occurred.
The protection is non revertive and the Manual switch mode and lock–out are available
SNCP (Subnetwork Connection Protection) (PPS)
SNCP is used on ring networks and the switching type supplied is only dedicated (1+1)
This protection can be forced on single LO and HO VC by means the Remote Control option of Alarm
Status and Control function.
Switching occurs on the path, selecting (Rx side) the signal transmitted to both Tx West and East sides.
SNCP is active on VC4, TU12 or TU3 path based on fail indications like: Ex Ber(B3), AU AIS, AU LOP,
TU AIS, TU LOP respectively.
The use of the Connection Card does not allow SNCP function on the optical STM–1 Tributary named S
1.1 Trib. F.C., L 1.1 Trib. F.C. and L 1.2 Trib. F.C., but this protection is provided by the Optical Trib 600
type.
Drop and Continue
Drop and Continue is an architecture to connect sub–networks, in order to improve traffic availability.
The traffic can be dropped at two nodes on the ring . The continue signal is forwarded like a pass–through
signal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 117 / 436
436
2F MS–SPRING (STM–16 system only)
Two fiber Multiple Section–Shared Protection Ring supports network topology only.
It requires only two fibers for each span of the ring.

Switch occurs on AU4, looped–back from the working to the spare AU4, carried on the same fiber.

The switching operation is dual ended, using K1,K2 bytes of SOH and an appropriate algorithm.
Each span of the ring requires only two fibres. Each fibre carries both working channels and protection
one; the AU4 # 9 to #16 of the STM–16 streams work as spare for the other main AU4 # 1 to #8.
”Architecture types” and protection ”mode” are:
–1+1 : 1 spare line / unit is present for 1 working line / unit. Both in APS and EPS.
Spare carries the same amount of traffic as the working one.
–1:1 : 1 spare line / unit is normally used for lower priority traffic and can replace 1
working line / unit with high priority traffic. Both for APS and EPS.
Not operative in this release.
–1:N : 1 spare line / unit is normally used for low priority traffic and can replace one out
of N line / unit with high priority traffic.
Not operative in this release
–1+N : 1 spare line / unit can replace one out of N working line / units.
MS Linear Trail 1 + N is not operative release
When N is greater than 1 each working line can be prioritized. This to decide which working line to protect
in case of double failure.
• Two operating modes can be selected for these protection architecture:
– revertible
– not revertible
In the revertive operation the original switching configuration is automatically restored when the failure is
removed.
At this regard the following performances are allowable:
• CRU EPS 1+1 : Only Not revertible
• TRIBUTARIES and MATRIX EPS 1+1: Not revertible (suggested)
• 1+1 MS Linear Trail Protection : Not revertible
• 1 + N TRIBUTARY EPS : Revertible as the relevant definition states.

In this case a suitable ”Wait time to restore” must be specified and it must be the same for all
Tributaries.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 118 / 436
436
3.1.5.2 EPS for electrical tributaries
Types of protection:
a) 1+N
b) 1+1
Refer to Table 13. on page 111
1 + N : – Trib. spare 1 protects trib 1 to 4.

This group of 5 trib. is defined SET1.
– Trib. spare 2 protects trib. 5 to 8.

This group of 5 trib. is defined SET2.
This protection applies to all the electrical trib (2 Mb/s, 34 Mb/s, 45 Mb/s, 34/2 Trans Mux, 140 Mb/s, STM1
electrical)
When an n+1 EPS protection group is composed by 21*2Mb/s cards with and without Retiming function,
the Spare card should have Retiming capability in order to guarantee the full features protection to every
main traffic card.
2 Mb/s 1+N protection is possible only in the first Tributary SET and trib. 4 cannot be used (N max 3).
EPS 1+N is only ”revertive”.
1 + 1 : – The tributaries are paired (4):

Trib1–Trib2, Trib3–Trib4, Trib5–Trib6, Trib7–Trib8.
– Within each pair, the highest Trib. is the spare one.

Trib spare 1 and 2 are not used.
The 2 Mb/s 1+1 protection is a 1+N prot., when N=1.
The tributary electrical connections are realized on the Access Module Subunits mounted at the top of the
subrack.
Access Module differs for bit rate and type of connection and they are used in the protection configuration
for 34 Mb/s, 45 Mb/s and 140 Mb/s trib. and 155 Mbit/s.
The DVB tributary unit is not EPS protected.
N.B. In order to correctly set EPS for 3x34 Mbit/s, 3x45 Mbit/s and 140 Mbit/s Tributaries refer
to para 3.2.18 on page 263, para 3.2.24.3 on page 277, para 3.2.24.4 on page 278.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 119 / 436
436
c) 1+1 Connections
Figure 44. shows the example for 1+1, 140 Mb/s or electrical STM1 trib. Only the signal for trib 1 and
2 is indicated.

The tributary signal is connected to the Access module of the working trib. unit (1). The same signal is

connected with the switch module of the spare trib unit (2) through the backpannel.
The command MSW coming from the Equipment Controller, activates the Switch Driver inside the Access
Modules selecting the connection with trib.1 or 2 by means of two relays (one for transmitter side and one
for receiver side) that switches the I/O customer signals towards working tributary or towards spare
tributary.
The same configuration applies to trib. pairs 3 and 4, 5 and 6, 7 and 8.
MSW1
TRIB.
140Mb/s 1
OR
STM–1
ELECTRICAL TRIB.
TRIB
2
SPARE
MSW2
ACCESS MODULE
Figure 44. 1+1 EPS connection for 140 Mb/s or STM1 electrical trib. 1 and 2
Figure 45. shows the example for 1+1, 3x34 Mb/s Trib. or 3x45 Mb/s Trib.. Only the signals for trib 1 and
2 are indicated. The operating mode is as that of the 140 Mb/s.
ACCESS MODULE
1
34Mbi/s TRIB.
45Mb/s 2
1
TRIBS.
3
MSW1
MSW2
TRIB.
2
SPARE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 45. 1+1 EPS connections for 3x34 Mb/s trib. 1 and 2
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 120 / 436
436
d) 2 Mb/s 1+N connections
Figure 46. shows these connections.

The 21x 2/1.5 Mbit/s signals are transmitted to the relevant tributary units (1 to 3) through an Access
Module.
The same Access Modules can switch the signals towards the Spare 1 tributary. When the switch is active
(MSW command), all the 21 signals of the faulty Tribs. are managed by the spare 1 trib..
ACCESS MODULE
21
1
2/1.5 Mbit/s TRIB.
–1 1
–21
MSW1
ACCESS MODULE
42
22
2/1.5 Mbit/s TRIB.
–22 2
–42
MSW2
ACCESS MODULE
63
43
2/1.5 Mbit/s TRIB.
–43 3
–63
1
TRIB.
SPARE 1
MSW3 21
Figure 46. 1+N EPS connections for 2/1.5 Mb/s trib.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 121 / 436
436
e) 140 Mb/s and STM1 electrical trib. 1+N connections
Figure 47. shows this connection.

The 140 Mb/s or electrical STM1 signals are connected to the relevant tributary through the Access

Modules.
The Modules can switch (commands MSW 1:4 and 5:8) signals 1 to 4 towards the tributary spare 1 and
the signals 5 to 8 towards the tributary spare 2.
It is possible to protect a mixed composition of 140 Mb/s and STM–1 electrical Trib. by selecting the
relevant option for the Trib. Spare 1 or 2 Configuration (refer to Operators Handbook – Subrack
Configuration).
ACCESS MODULE
MSW1
TRIB.
140Mb/s 1
OR ELECTRICAL
STM–1
MSW2
TRIB.
140Mb/s 2
OR ELECTRICAL
STM–1
MSW3
TRIB.
140Mb/s 3
OR ELECTRICAL
STM–1
MSW4
TRIB.
140Mb/s 4
OR ELECTRICAL
STM–1
TRIB.
SPARE 1
ACCESS MODULE
MSW5
TRIB.
5
140Mb/s
OR ELECTRICAL
STM–1
MSW6
TRIB.
6
140Mb/s
OR ELECTRICAL
STM–1
MSW7
TRIB.
7
140Mb/s
OR ELECTRICAL
STM–1
MSW8
TRIB.
8
140Mb/s
OR ELECTRICAL
STM–1
TRIB.
SPARE 2
Figure 47. 1+N EPS connections, 140 Mbit/s or electrical STM1 trib.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 122 / 436
436
f) 34 Mbit/s trib. and 45 Mbit/s 1+N connections.
Figure 48. on page 124 showns this connections.

The Access Modules connect the proper 3x34 Mb/s (3x45 Mb/s) signals to each tributary.
The Modules can switch (commands MSW 1:4 and 5:8) the signals towards the 3 Switch Units in the
following way:
– trib. 1 to 4, the first two 34 Mb/s (45 Mb/s) signals to the Spare Trib. 1
– trib 5 to 8 the first two 34 Mb/s (45 Mb/s) signals to the Spare Trib. 2.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 123 / 436
436
MSW1
34Mb/s 1
or 45Mb/s

MSW1
34Mb/s 2 TRIB.
or 45Mb/s 1
MSW1
34Mb/s 3
or 45Mb/s
TRIB.
2
TRIB.
MSW4 3
34Mb/s 10 TRIB.
or 45Mb/s 4
MSW4
TRIB.
34Mb/s 11 SPARE 1
or 45Mb/s
MSW4
34Mb/s 12
or 45Mb/s
MSW5
34Mb/s 13
or 45Mb/s
MSW5
34Mb/s 14 TRIB.
or 45Mb/s 5
MSW5
34Mb/s 15
or 45Mb/s
TRIB.
6
TRIB.
MSW8 7
34Mb/s 22 TRIB.
or 45Mb/s 8
MSW8
TRIB.
34Mb/s 23 SPARE 2
or 45Mb/s
MSW8
34Mb/s 24
or 45Mb/s
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 48. 1+N EPS connections, 34 Mb/s trib.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 124 / 436
436
g) 34/2 Trans Mux & 5x2Mbit/s 1+N Connections
(See Figure 49. )

The 2 Mbit/s and 34 Mbit/s signals are connected to the relevant tributary through the 21x2 Mbit/s Access
Modules with coaxial connectors (75 Ohm 1:0/2.3).

For the 34 Mbit/s signal we use the 15th Tx and Rx connector. For the 5 2 Mbit/s signals the first 5 Tx
and Rx connectors are used.
For further details refer to the Installation Section ( Chapter 5 on page 311) .
1
34M
34M
TRIB.1
2M 34/2
1 5x2M
2M
2Mb/s
5
MSW1 2
34M
34M
TRIB.2
2M 34/2
1 5x2M
2M
2Mb/s
5
MSW2
3
34M
34M
TRIB.3
2M 34/2
1 5x2M
2M
2Mb/s
5
MSW3
34M
SPARE
2M 1
2M
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 49. 1+N EPS connections, 34/2 Trans.Mux & 5x2M
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 125 / 436
436
h) Operating mode of the trib. EPS switch
The description is referred to Figure 50. on page 127 and is valid for 1+1 and 1+N protections.

The Spare tributary houses the ”EPS Decisor” whose function is to process the alarm status received from

the working tributaries (OK, KO 1 to N),with the proper alarm status.
The EPS decisor takes into account, in case of 1+N protection, of the signals priority. By OK–KO signal
it is meant:
– OK : USE THE SPARE. The spare unit is available and is replacing a faulty working unit
(”PROTECTION condition”)
– KO : DON’T USE THE SPARE. The spare unit has failed or no working unit has failed.
(”IDLE” condition).
The other units concerned with switching receive the OK–KO signal from the spare trib. unit.
The OK–KO signals are also received from the working units used in a priority decisor to detect the working
tributary to substitute with a spare(1+N protection).
The HWP circuits of the connected unit, switches–over to the spare tributary unit.
The OK KO signals are also sent towards the Equipment Controller.

In this way the Equipment Controller sends the MSW1:MSW8 commands to the Access Modules as
described above.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 126 / 436
436
HWP
TRIB. T1
1 T1
OK–K01
TRIB. TN
N TN
OK–K0N PRIORITY
DECISOR
MATRIX MAIN
(AGGREGATE MAIN WITH
CONNECTION CARD)
EPS OK – KO
DECISIOR
INTERNAL FAILURE
TSP
TRIB SPARE
TRIB. SPARE
MATRIX SPARE
(AGGREGATE SPARE WITH
CONNECTION CARD)
OK–K01 OK–K0N
MSW1
EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
ESCT
MSWB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 50. Tributary EPS operation
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 127 / 436
436
3.1.5.3 EPS for Full Matrix (or 16x16 Matrix) and CRU
The protection operates at unit level and allows switching over to a spare unit according to the following
arrangements:

• Full Matrix unit: not revertive or revertive 1+1 switch
• Clock Reference unit: not revertive 1+1 switch
Switching occurs following a failure criteria associated with a unit failure or any internal failure
(Card missing, card or software mismatch, card not responding).
With regard to the Full Matrix the switch operation involves all the units processing the signals swopped
with the Full Matrix (Aggregates, tributaries, AUX/EOW) without intervention of the Equipment Controller
unit.
The spare Full Matrix processes (EPS decisor) the alarm status received from the Main Full Matrix
(OK–KO MAIN signal) with the proper status.
When ”Main” is in service and OK, the status is defined ”IDLE”.
When ”Main” is KO and ”Spare” is OK, the status is defined ”PROTECTION” and the Spare Full Matrix
is set into service.
All the connected units receive the OK–KO command from the spare FULL Matrix to select (HWP)
the signal swopped (bridge–Tx and switch–Rx) with this units. (KO, don’t use SPARE; OK, use SPARE).
In ”revertive” mode, when ”Main” is OK again it returns into service. Figure 51. on page 129 indicates the
Full Matrix switch.
The 1+1 switch (not revertive) of the CRU unit involves all the units processing the synchronisms received
from the same CRU A and B (Tributaries, Aggregates, AUX/EOW), without the intervention of the
Equipment Controller unit.
All units switch upon receiving the unit failure alarm criteria from the same CRU A/B. Signals CKA/B,
(clocks) and CRU A/B ALARM are illustrated in Figure 68. on page 150.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 128 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
BRIDGE A
07
TRIB A AGG
Tx H
A A W
B B P
HWP MAIN
FULL MATRIX
A
Rx
B
955.100.562 K
SWITCH
OK–KO MAIN
OK–KO
B SPARE SPARE B
FULL
MATRIX
EPS
TRIB A DECISIOR A
H H
W W
P B B P
Figure 51. Full Matrix EPS

OK–KO
AGG
A B
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
HWP
AUX/EOW
129 / 436
3.1.5.4 Single Ended MS Trial Protection ( Simplified Linear APS)
This functions represent a 1+1 unidirectional line protection for STM–4 Aggregates, STM1 optical
tributaries and STM1 electrical tributaries.

It operates at line and unit level, software detecting hardware internal and line failures.

The fine switching criteria are : Loss of Signal, Loss of frame, MS–AIS and Signal Degrade.
It is not revertive.
The following description is referred to the Aggregate.
With reference to Figure 52. on page 131, all the units connected to the Aggregate Main A and Spare B of
one side (tributary, Full Matrix and other side Aggregates) with HWP function, must bridge the same signal
on both ”A” and ”B” Aggregate (Tx), while the selection of the signal coming from ”A”and ”B” depends on
the status of OK–KO signal of the Aggregates.
The Spare Aggregate (B) processes (MS Trial Protection decisor) the alarm status received from the Main
Aggregate (A) (OK–KO A signal) with the proper alarm status.
When Main Aggregate is in–service and OK, the status is defined as ”IDLE”.When Main Aggregate is KO
and spare is OK, the status is defined as ”PROTECTION”, and the Spare Aggregate in set into service.
All the connected units receive the OK–KO B command from the Spare Aggregate to select (switch of
HWP) the signal received from this unit (OK, SPARE selected; KO, MAIN selected).
The OK–KO functional signals, when transmitted to the various units, are called OSW meaning OUTPUT,
ISW meaning INPUT.
For Optical and 155Mb/s electrical tributaries MS Trail Protection the same operation is performed with
the following specific indications:
• the tributaries are associated in four pairs: trib1–trib2, trib3–trib4, trib5–trib6, trib7–trib8
• within each pair, the highest trib. is the spare one
• trib. spare 1 and 2 are not used.
Mixed composition of Optical and STM 1 Electrical Tributaries in SL APS protection is allowable.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 130 / 436
436
UNIT 1
BRIDGE A
A
MAIN
B AGGREGATE
HWP A
A
A
B
SWITCH
OK–KO A
MS TRAIL
PROTECTION
OK–KO B DECISOR
B
INTERNAL+ LINE
FAIL
B SPARE
AGGREGATE
B
A
Tx
B
UNIT n
A
Rx
B
OK–KO B
Figure 52. Single Ended MS Trial Protection (SL–APS)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 131 / 436
436
3.1.5.5 SNCP
SNCP is employed on ring networks on which several equipment have been installed. Two operating mode
can be selected for single VC SNCP:

• revertive
• not revertive
In the revertive operation the ”Wait time to restore” is fixed at 5 min.
As stated in the example shown in Figure 53. on page 133 several equipment (numbered 1 to 5) are
ring–connected on a looped path.
Each of the equipment on the node is bidirectionally connected (East and West sides).
One of the two directions represent the main path (clockwise).
The opposite direction will utilize a second fiber line for the spare traffic (counter clockwise).
The automatic protection intervenes upon detecting path failure.

Each transmitting tributary node is permanently connected (bridge) in the main traffic direction (clockwise)
and in the protected traffic direction (counter clockwise).
The Tx signal reaches destination through two different paths thus enabling the node receiving it to select
the best one (switch).
The example of Figure 53. on page 133 illustrates the connection between two tributaries (T1 and T2) and
relevant input/output nodes with associated pass–throughs.
For example, T1 is transmitted by equipment 2 in both directions, but will be extracted from equipment
5 by the main connection (clockwise).
A failure or degrade on the main path causes to switch over to the spare one with subsequent and
simultaneous check on the two paths.
It can be deduced from the above that one–way directions concerns not only ring propagation but
switching as well. When the receiving end switches no information is sent to the corresponding Tx side
to activate the switching operation at the remote end (Single ended).
To manage switching the SNCP architecture utilizes the data inherent to the Path and not to the Line.
Switching is in fact activated by defective operations occurring at the VC4 or TU–12/3 levels.
When the path is no longer available, an AIS signal is transmitted on the same path to activate protection.
In this manner SNCP can protect the paths following cable break–down or failures along the fiber and
nodes.
Cable break–down concerns all the fibers it contains hence it places traffic in both directions out–of–
service, while a failure concerns only one fiber.
The Tributary and Full Matrix units are provided with a path switching circuit (bridge + switch). Its enabling
depends on the equipment configuration.
• Forced switch command
This command belongs to the Remote Control option of the Alarm Status and Control Application and
it activates the switches between the protected and the protecting path, with reference to single Low
order and High order VCs.
This command is prominent as regards the Alarms that activates the SNCP and therefore this command
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
is executed independently from these latter. To recover the previous protection algorithm based on the
Alarms the operator sends from CT, the Clear command.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 132 / 436
436
STM–n 3
T1, T2 PASS–THROUGH
2 4
BRIDGE
T1
T2 PASS–THROUGH T1 PASS–THROUGH
T2
SWITCH
CLOCKWISE COUNTER
CLOCKWISE
1 5
T2
T1 PASS–THROUGH T2 PASS–THROUGH
T1
Figure 53. Typical ring network with SNCP (PPS)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 133 / 436
436
3.1.5.6 Drop and Continue
(see Figure 54. on page 135, Figure 55. on page 136, Figure 56. on page 137, Figure 57. on page137.)

The Drop and Continue architecture has been implemented in the network to improve traffic availability.

Drop and Continue is a way of protecting a path crossing a number of sub–networks, e.g., rings.
The sub–networks should be connected through at least two nodes (so realizing two independent
connections).
The equipment is configured as ”DROP and CONTINUE” on each interconnection node.
The subnetworks’ equipment implement the SNCP 1+1 connection.
The resulting architecture affords protection against multiple failures (evenly distributed one per
subnetwork) tolerated without traffic loss (node failure or single cable cut).
The traffic entities interconnected by the drop and continue feature can be TU12, TU3 and AU–4.
The Drop and Continue feature improves traffic availability as compared with the simple ”end–to–end
SNCP”. More subnetworks are connected the further is availability increased.
The Drop and Continue features simultaneously realizes the following on one node:
• unidirectional pass–through
• protected drop
• insertion in the opposite direction with respect tothe passthrough direction.
The configurations achievable are:
• D/C–W INS–W
• D/C–E INS–W
• D/C–E INS–E
• D/C–W INS–E
D/C stands for ”Drop and Continue”, the letter after it (W=West, E=East) indicates the ”drop protected” side
(e.g., W means West main side, and spare side is the EAST one).
The end letter (INS–E or INS–W) indicates the insert side.
The ”Unidirectional pass–through” is always in the direction opposite to that of the ”insert” side (e.g., when
”INS E” the pass–through is from East to West).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 134 / 436
436
For further information refer to Figure 54. which shows the D/C–W INS–W configuration.
WEST AGGREGATES EAST

Rx Tx
Tx Rx
TRIBUTARY
Tx Rx
Figure 54. Drop and Continue D/C W INS W
The ”Drop and Continue” featuring two connected rings (with dual connection) is indicated in
Figure 55. on page 136.
Nodes 3, 4, 6 and 10 are configured as Drop and Continue.
SNCP protection is enabled throughout the equipment. When in normal condition, the unidirectional way
of traffic from 1 to 8 is supposed to be:1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8.
After a failure on the 1st ring between nodes 2 and 3 (see Figure 56. on page137 ), the link direction is:
1 , 5 , 4 , 3 , 6 , 7, 8.
Pass–through is used between nodes 4 and 3, and switch on node 3.
After a second failure on the 2nd ring between nodes 6 and 7 (see Figure 57. on page 137) the selected
direction on the link is : 1 , 5 , 4 , 10 , 9 , 8.
The operative switch is on node 8 and the previous pass through between nodes 4 and 3 is no more used.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 135 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
2
07
W
W
W
INS
D/CW
D/CW
6
3
955.100.562 K
INSW
INSW
W
INS
TRIB
E
E
8
1
Figure 55. Drop and Continue

W
W
E
INS
D/CE
436
D/CE
3AL 36668 AA AA
4
10
INSE
INSE
E
INS
TRIB
E
E
9
5
136 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
2
2
7
7
6
3
6
3
8
1
1
8
4
10
10
Figure 56. Drop and Continue – 1st failure
Figure 57. Drop and Continue – 2nd failure

9
9
5
5
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
137 / 436
3.1.5.7 Two–Fiber MS–SPRING (Multiple Section – Shared Protection Ring)
(See Figure 58. to Figure 65. page 138 to145 )
This protection is foreseen for the STM–16 Aggregate links in the ring network topology of which it

withstands single failures only in dual ended switching modality (using K1–K2 byte, with appropriate

algorithm). To perform this function the use of Full Matrix Unit is mandatory.
Its operation mode is revertive.
The supported MS–SPRING is compliant to the ITU–T Rec.G.841.
A 2F MS–SPRING consists of a set (from 2 to 16) of Network Elements each equipped with a double
bidirectional (Tx and Rx) aggregate port.
The NEs are connected in a ring by means of two optical fibers, one for the clockwise direction and the
other for the counter–clockwise one.
The MS SPRING protection is an alternative with respect to SNCP. While MS SPRING allows the
connection at the same time on the clockwise and on the counterclockwise direction on the same AU4
that can be inserted and extracted in each span, on the contrary the SNCP connection engages the same
AU4 on both sides for the whole link.
The bandwidth of a 2F MS–SPRING is divided into two halves of equal capacity called respectively
”working” (AU4# 1 to AU4# 8) and ”protection” capacity (AU4#9 to AU4# 16). The AU4# 1 is protected
by AU4#9 up to AU4#8 that is protected by the AU4#16. The ”working ” capacity is used to carry the ”high
priority traffic”, while the ”protection” capacity is used for ”low priority” traffic that is lost in case of failure.
See Figure 58.
The low priority AU4 must not be configured; they must be left in the default status in all connection
configuration tables. The Mode with wich the signal is sent must be always Unprotected.
In this release the ”low priority” connections are not managed.
The MS SPRING algorithm starts as a consequence of the following Section alarms:
– LOS, LOF, MS AIS, EXBER (B2), SIGNAL DEGRADE (B2)
TRIBUTARY
PROTECTED
SIGNAL
e w w
w e
1 2 3
6 5 4
e w
w e w e
WORKING CHANNELS (AU4#1 TO AU4#8) TRIBUTARY

PROTECTED
SIGNAL
PROTECTION CHANNELS (AU4#9 TO AU4#16)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 58. 2F MS SPRING Connection
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 138 / 436
436
APS in 2–fiber MS–SPRING
In case of fibre break the APS for 2F MS–SPRING uses a synchronized sequence of ”bridge” and
”switch” operations that modify the internal connections of the two NEs adjacent to the failure and
displaces ”working” (high priority) AU4s into ”protection” (low priority) AU4s.
Only the NEs adjacent to the failure are interested to the ”switch” and ”bridge” functions while for all other
NEs the final configuration is a ”pass through” of all ”protection” (low priority) AU4s.
The following Figure 59. on page 140 up to Figure 62. on page 141 highlight how the connections are
modified as a consequence of a ”bridge ” or a ”switch” operation.
The Bridge operation is performed on the Tx side while the Switch is performed on the Rx side.
• The ”Bridge” operation on the East side for example in the cited figure, has the effect of routing
the outgoing ”high priority” West traffic also to the outgoing ”protection” East capacity.
The Bridge function adds a connection on the opposite side and on the relevant AU protection.
• When a ”Switch” operation is working on the East side all of the connections that have as a
source an AU4 belonging to the West working capacity are replaced by connections that have
as a source the incoming East protection traffic, maintaining the first destination of the signal.
The Switch function replaces the incoming flow with a protection one, coming form the opposite
side.
In the same way:
• The ”Bridge” operation on the West side for example in the cited figure, has the effect of routing
the outgoing ”high priority” East traffic also to the outgoing ”protection” West capacity.
The Bridge function adds a connection on the opposite side and on the relevant AU protection.
• When a ”Switch” operation is working on the West side all of the connections that have as
a source an AU4 belonging to the East working capacity are replaced by connections that have
as a source the incoming West protection traffic, maintaining the first destination of the signal.
The Switch function replaces the incoming flow with a protection one, coming form the opposite
side.
The diagram of Figure 63. on page 142 depicts the final effect of Bridge and Switch synchronized steps
for traffic restoration in a Network with one fault. Thes steps are carried out via a protocol using the K1 and
K2 bytes. The failed span is replaced by the protection traffic of the span not affected by the failure.
The K1 byte carries information about:
• failure code
• WTR
• the addressee of the message
The K2 byte carries information about:
• the message source Node

• the addresser Node status
The K1 and K2 are exchanged between the Node that are adjacent to the failure, instead the other Nodes
put K1 and K2 in passthrough.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 139 / 436
436
W E W E
W E W E
protection
working
BEFORE AFTER
Figure 59. Effect of a BRIDGE EAST operation
W E W E
W E W E
protection
working
BEFORE AFTER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 60. Effect of a BRIDGE WEST operation
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 140 / 436
436
W E W E
W E W E
protection
BEFORE working AFTER
Figure 61. Effect of SWITCH EAST operation
W E W E
W E W E
protection
BEFORE working AFTER
Figure 62. Effect of SWITCH WEST operation

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 141 / 436
436
SWITCH BRIDGE
WEST WEST
TRIBUTARY SWITCH
PROTECTED EAST BRIDGE
SIGNAL EAST
E W E W
W E
1 2 3
6 5 4
E W
(*) (*)
W E W E
WORKING CHANNELS
TRIBUTARY
PROTECTION CHANNELS PROTECTED
SIGNAL
BRIDGE
SWITCH
(*) All protection AU4 are put in Pass–through in the 5th and 6th NEs
Figure 63. Line break recovering operations

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 142 / 436
436
An example of 2F MS–SPRING is in Figure 64. on page 144.
In the example a ring of four nodes is protected with 2F MS–SPRING

AU4–1 carries the traffic of each span : C–B, B–A, A–D, D–C
AU4–2 carries the traffic D–B (pass–through in C)
AU4–9 protects AU4–1
AU4–10 protects AU4–2
After a failure in the section C–B, the following actions are taken C and B nodes:
– node B : Tributary access 1 and 2, previously drop–inserted on AU4–1 and AU4–2

WEST, are switched respectively on AU4–9 and AU4– 10 EAST.
In this way, by means node A and D, reach nodes C.
– node C: Tributary access 1, previously drop–inserted on AU4.1 EAST, is switched on

AU4–9 WEST
In this way, by means nodes D and A, reaches node B.
Rx AU4–2 WEST, previously in pass–through on Tx AU4–2 EAST, is looped on
Tx AU4–10 WEST. In this way, by means nodes D–A, reaches node B (Signal
transmitted D to B).
Rx AU4–2 EAST is no more received.
So, on Tx AU4–2 WEST is looped the Rx AU4–10 WEST.
In this way, the signal transmitted by the node B flows on nodes A–D–C and here
is looped, reaching again node D.
– nodes A and D have no switching
We can obtain from the example that is possible bandwidth re–use for some traffic patterns (AU4–9
protects four connections on AU4–1) having the same protection for several connections (shared
protection).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 143 / 436
436
A
D A . AU4 1 A B : AU4 1

AU4.9–Prot. AU4.1
AU4.10 Prot. AU4.2
D B
C
D C : AU4 1 C B : AU4 1
D B : AU4 2
E
D B
W
W E
C B
WEST EAST WEST EAST

AU4 AU4 AU4 AU4
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10
1 1 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 64. 2F MS–SPRING example of operation
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 144 / 436
436
SQUELCHING FUNCTION
The Squelching function is activated when a node that carries Tributary Drop/Insert, remains isolated
because of a double failure.
In this case to avoid misconnections on the AU4 involved in MS SPRING protection, an AIS signal will be
inserted on Low Priority streams transmitted from the nodes adjacent to the isolated one. See Figure 65.
Initially before the double failure isolated the Node 2, connections between Trib3 and Trib1 and between
Trib2 and Trib4 were both active on AU4 #1 in the example.
After the second failure and without the Squelch function the MS SPRING algorithm would activate the
Bridge and Switch functions on the nodes adjacent to the Node2 and would act a misconnection between
Trib3 and Trib4 by means the protection AU4#9 in the example. In virtue of Squelching function the Nodes
adjacent to the isolated Node2 send AIS on Low Priority AU4#9 avoiding in this way the misconnection
between Trib3 and Trib4 in this case.
After the failure has been removed, a similar reverse sequence of operations on the NEs adjacent to the
recovered span will be activated. The reverse procedure can start after a step configurable WTR ( 5 sec.,
5 min., 10 min., 15 min.).
TRIB. 3 TRIB. 1 TRIB. 2 TRIB. 4
AU4 #1 AU4 #1 AU4 #1 AU4 #1

E W E W
BRIDGE SWITCH
WEST EAST
1 SWITCH
2 3
WEST BRIDGE
EAST
E
(SF/SD) (SF/SD)
W
AIS ON
AU4 # 9 AIS ON
AU4# 9
5 4
AIS ON AIS ON AIS ON

AU4 # 9 AU4 # 9 AU4 # 9
PASS–THROUGH PASS–THROUGH PASS–THROUGH
6
WORKING CHANNELS
PROTECTION CHANNELS
Figure 65. Squelching on isolated Node connection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 145 / 436
436
When a 2f MS–SPRING is interworked with another ring (either SNCP or MS–SPRING), the
interconnection of the two is performed by connecting two nodes per ring with HVC connections, as shown
in Figure 66. on page146 and as a more detailed example in Figure 67. on page 147.

Each VC4 that has to cross the ring boundary (only HVC level ring interconnections are considered here)

must be output by two nodes, one of which, the Primary Service Node (PSN) drops it and continues to the
Secondary Service Node (SSN). In the opposite direction, the SSN inserts a copy of the VC4 into the ring
and the PSN selects by means the Primary Node Service Selector function, between the VC4 coming
from the SSN and the VC4 that can be locally inserted by means an STM–1 Tributary. The selection is
made on the Path–AIS basis (AU–AIS).
The protection mechanism works on the hypothesis that the other ring selects one of the two versions
of the incoming VC4 and transmits two identical copies of the VC4 towards the PSN and the SSN ( this
is guaranteed if the other ring is an MS–SPRING or an SNCP ring).
Note that the PSN and the SSN need not to be adjacent and need not to be the same for all of the VC4
that cross the ring boudary: i.e. each crossing VC4 has two associated nodes that act as PSN and SSN.
In the Connection Configuration Applications this function is named: D/C IC W(E) that means Drop and
Continue, Interconnection W or E (protected) . The letter (W=West, E=East) indicates the insertion side
of AU4 data stream coming from Tributary (Main) or from Line (Protection).
Using the function: D/C IC Pass–through W or E the Operator can choose the main connection towards
the Line (Main) and for the protection the STM–1 Tributary is used in order to protect the 8 main AU4s.
Note that the D/C IC and the D/C IC Pass–Through connections can be used not only with the MS SPRING
protection but also in the case of SNCP – SNCP interworking.
2F MS – SPRING
D/C IC W D/I BID UNP W
W E W
E Secondary
SS Service
Node
Primary
Service
Node W E W
E
D/I BID UNP W SS
D/C I/C E
2F MS – SPRING
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
SS = Service Selector
Figure 66. MS SPRING Drop and Continue, Insert Continues (protected)
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 146 / 436
436
T1
D/I PROT.W
W E
SNC–P
E W E W
D/C E INS E D/C W INS W
W E W E
D/I BID. UNP.W
D/C IC W
MS SPRING
E W E W
D/C IC E D/I BID. UNP. E
W E W E
D/C E INS. E
D/C W INS. W SNC–P

E W
D/I PROT. E
T1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 67. D/C IC Connection used for the SNCP/MS SPRING Interworking.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 147 / 436
436
3.1.6 Synchronizing sub–system
(see Figure 68. on page 150)

The equipment is mainly synchronized by the Clock Reference unit in compliancy with the ITU–T G.783

Recs. based on Timing Marker management.
The scope of the unit is to supply the other units inside the equipment with a 38 MHz clock and relevant
sync. signal (To), and an external 2 MHz clock (T4).
In this release the following units are available:
• Enhanced CRU
• Enhanced CRU 0,37 ppm
These units have different performances.

The first has a stability in Hold over mode of 1ppm / day.
The second unit Hold over stability is of 0,37 ppm / day. Both have a complete compliance with the G.81s
Recommendation.
The unit operates in three different modes:

• locked
• hold–over
• free–running
1) In the ”locked” operating mode the unit receives the following timing signals:
• Clocks from the 21x2Mbit/s Tributaries (T2)

• 38 MHz clock from the STM–N Aggregates or STM–1 Tributaries (T1)
• 2048 kHz clock (G.703) received from the external source (T3).
A max. of 6 references are software–selected through the Craft Terminal and the commands are sent from
the Equipment Controller towards the Unit Card Controller.
The synch. references can be either manually selected through CT/OS, or automatically through the
algorithm on the CRU unit.
Automatic selection of the timing references (T0 local and T4 external) is principally based on the quality
of each reference derived from the SOH’s byte S1 (SSMB) of the STM–N Aggregates and STM–1
Tributaries.
CT/OS will assign a quality level to permit using the ”SSM Algorithm” to select the ”timing source” when
implementing non STM–N signals or signals coming from equipment not managing byte S1.
When the quality levels are identical the selection criteria is based on the set priority.
The reference quality level utilized to generate T0, or a quality level forced by CT/OS is inserted on the
SSMB of the STM–N signals outputting the equipment.
The QL6 criteria is sent to the ”NEi clock” which had supplied the synch. reference to obtain the T0.
This operation is carried out to prevent the”timing reference” synchronizing the NEi itself (timing loop).
Switching between the references also depends on the alarm conditions detected on the signals.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Other types of operating modes are possible.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 148 / 436
436
2) With regard to ”Hold–over”, the unit holds the last valid reference with a max. shift of 1 ppm/day
(or 0.37 ppm/day for the CRU 0.37ppm unit).
This operating mode is associated with the loss of references selected by the operator.
Dedicated alarms will arise when the node will enter in ”Hold–over” or ”Free–running” mode due to either
quality criteria or signal validity. Loss of synchronism signals on the aggregate and tributary ports are
anyway available as independent alarms (LOS).
3) In the ”Free–running” operating mode the local clock has a ±4.6 ppm accuracy. The unit operates in
this mode when no valid synchronism signals are present nor ”Hold–over” reference values had been
stored.
Selection of the 1+1 protected units receiving the reference clock depends on the CRU alarm conditions.
The unit provides the external equipment (T4) with a 2048 kHz clock. This clock can be obtained either
directly from the T0 output signal, or by processing the T1 timing signals with the selection references
(priority, quality, Timing signals list).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 149 / 436
436
UNIT 1 CK CK UNIT n
CRU B ALARM

CRU CRU

SELECT. SELECT.
CKA CKB CKA CKB
SW SELECT.
CRU A ALARM
EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
CARD CONTROLLER
T1
RECEIVED CLOCKS
FROM 1 CKA
STM–N CLOCK + SYNC. (TO)
T2 FOR ALL UNITS
FROM
2Mbit/s QUALITY PRIORITY
6 CLOCK (T4)
T3 EXT
FROM
EXT
(2MHz)
HOLD OVER
FREERUNNING
CLOCK REFERENCE UNIT A
CK B (TO)
CLOCK REFERENCE UNIT B

CK (T4)
EXT
Figure 68. Synchronizing sub–system

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 150 / 436
436
3.1.7 Auxiliary and Overhead Sub–system
The following description applies to all the AUX/EOW units.

The SDH Standard offers a considerable quantity of service channels in the Section Overhead bytes
(SOH) and Path Overhead bytes (POH) of Synchronous frame. These bytes are used for alignment, parity
check and network management operations etc..
Part of them are also used for user data and speech channels and are interfaced towards the Aggregate,
Matrix and Tributary units through different ”Auxiliary” unit. It is also possible to select both the Spare
Aggregate to convey to the vocal terminations the dedicated byte.
The AUX/EOW unit establishes a digital speech by–pass and can be used on a wide network basis.
The AUX/EOW EXTENSION unit realize the analog speech by–pass between the two aggregate sides,
and can also establish a connection with an external telephone set through the relevant connector. See
Figure 117. on page 322 and Table 20. on page 323.
The AUX unit can be used as required:
• to externally access the service interfaces

• to connect the external access points to the SOH and POH bytes of the units (terminations)
• to allow the SOH and POH bytes to pass through the various units
The external access points of the unit are:
• 1 local operator’s set for speech connections useful for service communication in the link. The
AUX/EOW UNIT permits the speech digital bypass and can be used for wide networks.
• three 64 Kbit/s G.703 data channels
• three V.11 data channels (9600 baud )
The AUX and the various units are wired in the following manner:
• four 5.2 Mbit/s connections, one per four (max.) Aggregates, to manage the SOH’s auxiliary
bytes.
• four 4.86 Mbit/s connection termed OH–BUS to manage the POH and SOH auxiliary bytes of
the Tributaries and Matrices.
The Craft Terminal is utilized to software–select the terminations and pass–through of the SOH and POH.
This type of programming allows to access all the overhead bytes, hence guaranteeing service extension
in compliancy with standard applications, e.g.,for the bytes not yet defined.
Another OH–BUS is also present which wire–connects bytes S (serial alarms) and K1, K2. These latter
between STM–1, STM–4, STM–16 for the Indicative Alarms and STM–16 for MS SPRING management.
Direct interworking between STM–1 interfaces and radio regenerator equipment is fully supported.
Figure 69. on page 152, summarizes the description given and illustrates the POH bytes utilized by each
unit on the OH–BUS streams.
Handling of overhead bytes is described, at various labels in Figure 73. on page 163 , Figure 77. on
page 177, Figure 83. on page202 , Figure 84. on page 203,Figure 90. on page 231 and Figure 93. on
page 240
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 151 / 436
436
AUXILIARY ACCESSES
OW extension
64Kb/s V11
OW
AGGR. INTERFACES AGGR.
W–A E–A
W–B E–B
SOH 5.2 Mb/s SOH 5.2 Mb/s
SOH 5.2 Mb/s SOH 5.2 Mb/s
SOH: E1, E2, F1

and free SOH bytes
OH BUS 4,86 Mb/s
140: F2,Z3,Z4, Z5(POH)
155: E1,E2,F1
and free SOH bytes
21x2 M 3x34 M 140/155 M
TRIB MATRIX TRIB. TRIB.
=1 A =1 =1
=3 B = 10 = 10
Figure 69. Auxiliaries / Overheads block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 152 / 436
436
3.1.8 Control sub–system
(see Figure 70. on page 154).

In this release the User can utilise two different type of Equipment Controller: ESCT or SMEC2 (alternative
units).The main features, common to both of them, are described below.

The Control sub–system residing on the equipment represents the lowest SDH network management
level.
Besides analyzing the operating status of the equipment, it also controls the protections + switching and
carries out management functions (e.g.,configuration).
The control sub–system consists of the Equipment Controller unit and of the Card Controller sub–units
all of which belong to equipment units except for the Power Supply unit. They are connected through the
LIECB and NIECB bus.
The LIECB bus contains all the operating data as well as the unit configuration data. NIECB swops the
DCC bytes data for the TMN (Q ecc*).
The alarm criteria activates the LEDs situated on the decentralized units and on the Equipment Controller,
and also enables the forwarding of data towards a source external to the equipment.
The meaning of each LED indicating alarm condition is explained in the access point figures in chapter
2 on page 65.
The Power Supply unit too forwards its alarm criteria to the Equipment Controller.
An additional function of the Controller sub–system is of interfacing the Equipment Controller with a source
external to the equipment.
These connections and relevant functions are:

• Interface F for local management operations through the Craft terminal.
It carries out operations that allows to activate and service the equipment. Additionally it
updates the local equipment software release through software download operations.
The operations realized are:
– Events and alarms reports
– Operative commands
– Memory events and alarms for maintenance
– Forwarding and checking configurations for equipment, connection, TMN dialog
– Administrative functions with operators enabling and password definition and change
– Performance measurements.
– Updating the equipment software release through software download operations.
The management applications are realized by means of sets of diskettes supplied with the equipment
( see Chapter 2 on page 65 )
For installation, description, etc see the Operator’s handbook.
When Remote Craft Terminal option is used, by means one F interface is possible manage a max of 32
equipment.
• Interface QB3* to connect the Operation System of the TMN network.

In this manner it is possible to carry out network management functions from a Center on
several equipment. The functions realized are as those for Local Management.
• Interface QB2. It is used to connect the external plesiochr. equip. with the TMN network
(Mediation Device operation).
• Commands forwarded towards the rack to light up the relevant lamps
• Equipment remote alarms accessible at the tagblocks
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• Customized parallel contacts to receive/transmit alarms; accessible at the tagblock.
Therefore, the sub–system is of extreme importance for the maintenance and turn–on operations.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 153 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
UNIT 1
CARD CONTROLLER
955.100.562 K
LOCAL
F CRAFT
TERMINAL
QB3*
OPERATION
SYSTEM
LIECB
QB2
UNIT n UNIT EXTERNAL
NIECB INTERFACE MANAGEMENT PESIOCHRONOUS
INTERFACES EQUIPMENT
CARD CONTROLLER
RACK LEDS
REMOTE ALARMS
Figure 70. Controller subsystem

POWER SUPPLY PARALLEL CONTACTS
1
2
3
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
AND OR/ 3
154 / 436
3.1.8.1 Network Management Interfaces
The equipment (defined Network Element, NE) has three operative interfaces: one to manage the local
or remote equipment (Interface F) one to manage the network (Interface QB3*), and the other for the
Mediation Device function (Interface Q2/RQ2).

Interface F establishes connection with the local Craft Terminal.
When Remote Craft Terminal option is used, by means the F interface it is possible to manage a max of
32 equipment.
Interface Q2/RQ2 performs the Mediation Device function. It allows to manage from CT or OS other
ALCATEL non SDH telecommunication equipment ( video, radio, access..). It can avoid the need of a
dedicated mediation device.
The ADM provides the master side of a dedicated RS–485 multipoint and acts as a mediation element
with respect to the connected Q2/RQ2 slave equipment ( max. 32 ). The selection between Q2 interface,
synchronous with a bit rate of 19.2 Kbit/s, and RQ2 interface asynchronous, with a bit rate sw selectable
of 1.2 /2.4 /4.8 /9.6 Kbit/s is provisionable.
Interface QB3* permits to establish connection with the Operative System of the Management System.
In this connection the O.S. is available in a protected version (OS Main and OS Spare).
Figure 71. on page 156 illustrates the general management architecture of the equipment.
The QB3* connected NE is defined as GATEWAY. Connection is made through the QX & SYNC Access
module.
The connection of the other equipment to the TMN is managed through the DCC channels inside the STM
frame with QECC* protocol.
The connection mode is indicated in the following (see Figure 72. on page 156).The Equipment Controller
unit transfers messages between QB3* and DCC.
To forward TMN messages towards other NE’s, the Equipment Controller uses the NIECB connection with
the Card Controller of the East and West Aggregate units (STM–1 tributaries units as well, if any).
In this way the messages are transmitted on D1 ....D12 bytes of STM (DCC).The connected NE extracts
the messages from these bytes and sends them to the Equipment Controller.
In the selected NE the Equipment Controller uses the LIECB connection to exchange data with the card
controller of the various units.
This data is then transferred towards the Operative System via the Aggregates DCC. In all the NE not
involved the Equipment Controller lets through the DCC between the two aggregates.
The 1651–SM indications in Figure 71. on page 156 are valid also for 1661 SM–C.
3.1.9 Power Supply Sub–system
Power to the equipment units is supplied by two Power Supply unit plus a spare. The latter can be removed
without causing trouble to service.
Protection to the station power supply is afforded by 16A circuit breakers at the top of the S9 rack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 155 / 436
436
Q3
OPERATION OPERATION
SYSTEM LAN SYSTEM
BRIDGES

LAN

LAN LAN

BRIDGES DCN BRIDGES
QB3
1651 SM F CRAFT 1651 SM F
GATEWAY TERMINAL GATEWAY 1651 SM F
NE
DCC DCC DCC
F 1651 SM 1651 SM Q2 1651 SM F DCC

LOCAL/
NE NE NE REMOTE
C.T
F
DCN : DATA COMMUNICATION NETWORK
DCC
DCC
ADM DCC
ADM DCC
ADM ADM (up to 31)
Q2
NON NON NON NON NON NON

SDH EQ. SDH EQ. ........ SDH EQ. SDH EQ.
......... SDH EQ. SDH EQ.
(up to 31) (up to 31)
Figure 71. 1651–SM/1661 SM–C General Management Architecture
OPERATION
SYSTEM
LAN
QB3 AUI–B2 ADAPTER/2
AGG. W
STM–N S DCC
T CARD ESCT AGG.
M CONTR. E
NIECB NIECB
NE
AGG. E NE ( 1651 SM– GATEWAY ) LIECB
NIECB
E
S LIECB
C
T
NIECB
AGG. W
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 72. Connection Mode for TMN
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 156 / 436
436
3.2 Unit description
In the following paragraphs are inserted the detailed information of each units and sub–units of the
equipment.
As far as concerns the detailed alarm indications, refer to the Operator’s Handbook, Alarms Status and
Control application description.
3.2.1 2 Mbit/s Tributaries
(See Figure 75. on page 165).

This description is applicable to all 2 Mbit/s tributary units:
• 21 x 2 Mbit/s 75 OHM
• 21 x 2 Mbit/s 120 OHM
• 21 x 2 Mbit/s 75 OHM Retiming
• 21 x 2 Mbit/s 120 OHM Retiming
In the end of the following para 3.2.1.1, it will be given a short account about the new 2 Mbit/s Trib. in which
i has been added the Retiming Function
3.2.1.1 21x2Mbit/s TRIB.
The 21x2Mbit/s TRIB. unit allows a max. of twenty–one 2Mbit/s plesiochronous tributary streams to
access the STM–1 synchronous digital structure. After having synchronized each tributary to the timing
and synchronism signals received from the”Clock reference unit”, the unit transmits the tributary signals
(mapped in the STM–1 structure) to the MATRIX unit to be transmitted towards the EAST/WEST
Aggregate units.
Since the STM–1 structure can carry a max. of sixty–three 2Mbit/s tributary streams, the digital streams
leaving the unit involved result to be equipped with only one third of the general STM–1 frame capacity.
The reciprocal operations are performed on the Rx side. The 2Mbit/s tributary streams are extracted from
the received STM–1 frames and then transmitted towards external equipment of lower hierarchical order.
The Access module subunits, which will be described in the following, interface the 2Mbit/s signals with
the external source.
The regular operation of the unit is controlled through alarm detectors which points out any malfunctions
to the Card Controller sub–unit. The latter informs the ”Equipment Controller” unit through LEDs and other
indications.
The following topics are dealt with in the following:
• Transmission
• Reception
• Card Controller
• Power supply, Remote Inventory

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 157 / 436
436
Transmission
The unit interfaces the 21 plesiochronous tributaries and the STM–1 synchronous digital structure.
The latter is then transmitted, in 38.88Mbit/s4–wire bus format, to the units processing the aggregate

stream.

Two 38.88MHz clocks (CKA and CKB) and the relevant 2kHz synchronizing signals (SYNCA and SYNCB)
are received from the ”Clock reference unit”(CRU) of the equipment.
The selection of one of the two synch. sources, utilized to generate the general unit timing signals depends
on the operating status of the two CRU’s.
The twenty–one 2Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries are received in HDB3 format.

The description deals with only one of the 21 tributaries in that they follow the same procedure.
An electric transformer decouples the line signals. Afterwards, the signal accesses the P.I.
(Physical Interface) consisting of G.703 Interface and Decoder. The G703 interface circuit:
• regenerates the line signal thus recovering a Nyquist attenuation within the 0–6 dB range
• extracts the 2MHz clock from the line signal. This signal is also sent to the CRU.
The Decoder:
• decodes the HDB3 code (HDB3––> data + NRZ clock)
• detects the loss of the signal and hence generates the LOS alarm
• Loops back following the Card Controller commands.
As primary condition, the 2Mbit/s plesiochronous signal is adapted to transit through a synchronous
network. A C–12 container is structured to receive the 2Mbit/s stream (LPA Lower Order Path
Adaptation).
Through the LPT operation (Lower Order Path Termination) the VC–12 container is structured to
distribute its octets within a time interval of 500msec. which corresponds to 4 STM–1 frames period.
The VC–12 consists of a C–12 container and a POH octet (path overhead) assigned to the first position
of the structure.
Figure Figure 73. on page 163shows the structure of a VC–12 and the POH.
The subsequent HPA operation (Higher order path adaptation) permits to structure the TU–12 through the
insertion of TUOH. The TUOH is the pointer which indicates the beginning of VC–12 inside the TU–12
stream. TUOH consists of four bytes (V1, V2, V3, V4) equally distributed within a time interval of 4 STM–1
frames.
Figure 74. on page 164 shows the TU–12 structure.
The operations described are performed on all the twenty–one 2Mbit/s tributaries.
At this point through the Lower Order Path Connection operation (LPC) each n–th tributary (1–21) can be
connected to any of the 63 positions of the STM1 frame thus structuring the connection matrices.
The 38.88Mbit/s 4–row bus structured data is transmitted towards the WEST and EAST aggregate units
via the MATRIX units.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 158 / 436
436
Reception
On the Rx side, the unit receives (through the Matrix units) the four 38.88Mbit/s streams from each
EAST 1,2 and WEST 1,2 aggregate units.
A MSP protection circuit selects the aggregate (Main or Spare) to analyze (1 or 2 in the cited figure) for
each side (WEST and EAST) through commands (PROT WEST, PROT EAST) received from the ”Card
Controller” of the unit.
Full Matrix utilizes only West 1/2.

The protection EPS of the Full Matrix, selects main or spare.
The 21 TU–12’s are chosen and extracted and, according to the indications received from the ”Card
Controller”, the East or West Rx side is selected (SNCP).
The TUOH’s pointer interpreter checks the loss of signal (AIS) on each selected stream.
At this point each VC–12 is individually processed, therefore the description will deal with only one VC–12
but is applicable to all the tributaries.
By means of the LPT (Low order Path Termination) operation the POH is extracted from the VC–12
thus obtaining the C–12 structures.
The POH is processed inside the POH Management circuit.
The following operations are carried out:
• estimate BIP–2. Error counting is utilized to generate the FEBE signal (Tx side).
• control the SIGNAL LABEL. Checks the regular configuration of the signal label bits.
• FEBE check. Checks if errors have been detected on the remote equipment by BIP–2
calculation.
• FERF check.
• Path Trace extraction
All the above operations are processed through the Unit Card Controller.
The 2Mbit/s signal is restructured by processing the C–12 in the LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation) thus
obtaining the 2Mbit/s signal (DATA) and clock.
A DPLL circuit is utilized with time base supplied by an external oscillator.
The tributary signal is HDB3 encoded.
This signal can be replaced by the AIS signal when detecting loss of TU–12.
The G703 interface and the electric transformer adapts the 2Mbit/s tributary signal to ITU–T Rec. G703
and is then sent to an external source.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 159 / 436
436
Card Controller
The Card Controller sub–unit carries out the following main functions:

CRU selection

This interface selects the CRU (clock reference unit) from which the synchronism and timing signals to
be used as reference for the unit are extracted. In order to provide the selection criteria, this interface
processes the alarms received from the two CRU’s, namely:
ISWCAN : internal alarm received from the CRU A;
ISWCBN : internal alarm received from the CRU B;
The interface also supplies the CKMSTOFF alarm criteria in case of loss of the selected timing signal.
Internal dialog for alarms, configuration and performance.

This type of dialog permits to transmit/receive towards the unit the software setting options stored through
the EEPROM. Alarms and performance criteria are received from the unit.
All the internal unit alarms are collected to activate the red alarm LED (1) and the OSW switching criteria
to send to the other units.
Loop Management
Line looping ( Line L ) and Internal looping are possible at the tributary level. They are managed by the
LPT and LPM signals. It is possible to activate them via software .
Through the line loopback the signal received from the tributary external line is looped on the tributary
output rx side.
Through the internal loopback the signal received from the aggregate is looped on the tributary tx side.
Loops are used to test at various level the equipment and the line.
AIS Processing
Detection of the ”need to forward AIS” indication enables the AIS registers to forward the AIS signal to the
G.703 Rx Interfaces.
Dialog with the Equipment Controller unit
Information on setting options, criteria, reset, alarms etc. is exchanged with the Equipment Controller unit
through the LIECB and NIECB connections.
Physical position acknowledgment
Through signals ID 0–4 the Card Controller acknowledges the position of the unit inside the subrack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 160 / 436
436
MSP protection
This function permits to select (PROT WEST commands) one of the two signals received from aggregates
WEST (West Aggregate Main or West Aggregate Spare). The reciprocal operation (PROT EAST
command) is carried out on aggregates EAST.

Selection (performed during the turn–on phase) and switching operations (performed during the operating
phase) are processed by analyzing the ISW switch criteria received from the aggregate units. These
criteria indicate the presence of a failure on the unit or the detection of alarms along the fiber line.
When two Full Matrix are used, this protection acts as EPS between these units. Signals ISW MA, MB
from Full Matrix are used.
EPS Tributary management
This function is used for EPS Tributary protection utilizing the ISWT command received from other
tributaries.
This circuit also operates with the OSW command. The EPS is described in para ”EPS for electrical
tributaries” on page 119.
Unit type acknowledgment
Through the CTYPE signal the Card Controller can acknowledge the unit on which it is mounted.
Power supply, Remote Inventory
The power supply voltages present at the input of the 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary Enhanced Monitoring unit are:
+5.3V 3%
–5.5V 3%
+12.1V 3%
PW ALM alarm is generated in case of malfunction or voltage failure.

The electrical ground and chassis ground strap–connected.
The unit is equipped with an E2PROM (serial protocol) to store the unit inventory data (codes, series, date
of construction).
This store is power supplied with a service voltage and connected to the Equipment Controller unit which
utilizes it for the Remote Inventory.
The CAREM signal indicates the presence of the board (ground contact) and it is directly connected to
the Equipment Controller.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 161 / 436
436
3.2.1.2 21 x 2 Mbit/s Tributary with Retiming
This is a unit managed like the basic 21*2Mb/s Trib described above, but with the additional circuits to
support the 2Mb/s Retiming feature.

The Retiming function applies the Equipment Clock to the outgoing 2Mb/s signal that therefore becomes
synchronized with the SDH network synchronization reference .
The additional circuit that allows this implementation consists in an elastic buffer that is able to absorb
the jitter and wander that is transferred to the PDH signal when SDH pointer justification occurs.
This feature is programmable via SW, in order to include or exclude the Retiming for each single port. The
same 21*2 Mb/s Unit can mix ports that apply or not the retiming.
Two different hardware board options ( Tributary unit part numbers) are needed to provide 75 Ohm and
120 Ohm impedance.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 162 / 436
436
8 bit
G = rrrrrrrr (r = BIT INTERVAL FOR FIXED JUSTIFICATION)
VC–12
POH of VC–12 W = iiiiiiii (i = 2.048 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY BIT)

G
C1, C2 = JUSTIFICATION SIGNALLING BIT
W
o = OVERHEAD BITS
125 us 32 byte S1, S2 = NEGATIVE AND POSITIVE JUSTIFICATION

OPPORTUNITY REFERRED TO SIGNALLINGS C1 AND C2
W POH STRUCTURE :
G – 2 BITS TO ESTIMATE THE BER THROUGH THE BIP–2
ENCODING PROCEDURE PERFORMED ON THE PREVIOUS
G VIRTUAL CONTAINER (THE FIRST AND SECOND BITS OF
C1 C2o o o r r BIP–2 CONSTITUTE THE PARITY BIT OF ODD AND EVEN
ORDER BITS)
W
– 1 BIT TO INDICATE (TO THE REMOTE TERMINAL) THE

RESULT OF THE BER ESTIMATION DETECTED ON THE
125 us 32 byte
OPPOSITE DIRECTION: VALUES 0 AND 1 OF BIT FEBE
(FAR END BLOCK ERROR)
RESPECTIVELY INDICATE ABSENCE OF VIOLATION AND
W PRESENCE OF ONE OR TWO VIOLATIONS OF THE
PARITY LIMITS ESTABLISHED BY BIP–2
G
G
C1 C2o o o r r – 1 BIT TO CHECK THE PATH TRACE THROUGH AN
APPROPRIATE PROTOCOL (NOT UTILIZED WITH THIS
W RELEASE)
125 us 32 byte – 3 BITS PRESETTABLE FOR THE SIGNAL LABEL
– 1 BIT FOR THE FERF (FAR END RECEIVE FAILURE)

W ALARM INDICATION.
G
G
C1 C2r r r r s1
S2 i i i i i i i
W
125 us
32 byte
F F
E PATH SIGNAL E
W BIP–2 B TRACE LABEL R
E F
G
Figure 73. VC–12 Structure

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 163 / 436
436
ÉÉÉÉÉ

TU–12
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
V1
125 us ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
35 byts
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
V2
0
1
125 us
NEGATIVE
34 JUSTIFICATION OPPORTUNITY
V3
35 POSITIVE
JUSTIFICATION OPPORTUNITY
125 us
69
V4
70
125 us
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
104
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ ÉÉ
V1
ÇÇ
BYTES BELONGING TO
105 THE PREVIOUS TU–12
125 us
ÇÇ BYTES BELONGING TO
THE SUBSEQUENT TU–12
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
139
V2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 74. TU–12 Structure
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 164 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
2Mbit/s TRIBUTARY–1
T1TX 4
TO / EAST 1
CRU EAST
CLOCK CONNECTION DT–1Ei
07
D2EN1 MATRIX 4
G703 DATA HDB3–AMI/NRZ 2Mbit/s SIGNAL VC12 TU12 (LPC) /
D2EP1 EAST 2
INTERFACE DECODER INSERTION INTO FORMATTING FORMATTING T21TX DT–2Ei
AND LOOP BACK C12 (LPA) (LPT) (HPA)
PI T1TX 4
POH POH TUOH / WEAST 1
LOS EAST
TO THE MATRIX
MANAGEMENT GENERATION GENERATION CONNECTION DT–1Wi
955.100.562 K
MATRIX 4
DATA (LPC) / WEAST 2
D2UN1 T21TX DT–2Wi
2Mbit/s G703 HDB3–AMI/NRZ
D2UP1 ENCODER 2Mbit/s SIGNAL POH
TRIB. INTERFACE AND LOOP BACK REGENERATION EXTRACTION AIS
( LPA) ( LPA)
PI CLOCK
AIS1
PPS DR–1EI
D2EN21 T1RX 1 4
T21TX TU–12 / EAST 1
D2EP21 G MSP
21 EAST
D2UN21 2Mbit/s TRIBUTARY–21 T21RX EXTRAC. PROTECT. 4
51.8MHz / EAST 2
D2UP21 DR–2EI
PROT EST
1 DR–1WI
+12.1V +12V 4
FROM TU–12 / WEST 1
DYNAMIC MATRIX
+5.3V +5V WEST MSP

POWER FUSES T21RX 21
FROM THE MATRIX
SUPPLY –5.5V –5V T21RX AIS EXTRAC. PROTECT. 4

CONFIGURATIONS / WEST 2
POWALIM
AIS21 DR–2WI
PWALM ALARMS PERFORMANCE PROT WEST
CTYPE 0 :– 3
1
Figure 75. Block diagram: 21x2 Mbit/s trib.

INTERNAL DIALOGUE FOR LOOP–BACK
UNIT TYPE EPS
ALARMS CONFIGURATIONS ACKNOWLEAGMENT AIS TRIBUTARIES
PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT MANAGEMENT
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
CARD CONTROLLER
CK
SYNC
CRU PHYSICAL DIALOG WITH 1+1 PROT EST
SELECTION POSITION EQUIPMENT AGGREGATE
ACKNOWLED CONTROLLER ESCT UNIT PROTECTION PROT WEST
REMOTE
CAREM
INVENTORY
CKB
CKA
ISWT
OSWi
LIECB
ISW1,2E
NIECB
ISW1,2W
ID 0 –: 4
SYNCB
SYNCA
ISWCBN
ISWCAN
EQ. CONTR. TO ALL FROM

CRU THE UNITS CRU EQ. CONTR. AGGR. TRIBS EQ. CONTR.
165 / 436
3.2.2 21x1.5 Mbit/s Tributary
(see Figure 76. on page 171)

The 21x1.5 Mbit/s TRIB unit allows to multiplex up to 21 data streams at 1.544 Mbit/s to be multiplexed

into 21 VC–12 in order to be easily transported into the SDH network.
The unit is an upgrading of the 21x2 Mbit/s unit. Infect it is provided with twenty–one 1.4 Mbit/s external
interfaces (T1 standard) and twenty–one emulators inside the 2 Mbit/s interfaces (E1 standard).
After having synchronized each tributary to the timing and synchronism signals received from the ”Clock
reference unit”, the unit make it possible to transmit the tributary signals (mapped in the STM–1 structure)
towards the EAST1/2 and WEST1/2 Aggregate units.
The reciprocal operations are performed on the Rx side. The 1.5 Mbit/s tributary streams are extracted
from the received STM–1 frames and then transmitted towards external equipment of lower hierarchical
order.
Regular operation of the unit is controlled through alarm detectors which signal any malfunctions to the
Card Controller sub–unit, the latter informing the ”Equipment Controller” unit through LEDs and other
indications.
The following topics are dealt with in the following:
• Transmission
• Reception
• Card Controller
Transmission
The unit interfaces the 21 plesiochronous tributaries and the STM–1 synchronous digital structure.
The latter is then transmitted, in 38.88Mbit/s 4–parallel–stream format, to the units processing the
aggregate stream.
Two 38.88MHz clocks (CKA and CKB) and the relative 2kHz synchronizing signals (SYNCA and SYNCB)
are received from the ”Clock reference unit” (CRU) of the equipment.
The selection of one of the two synch. sources, utilized to generate the general unit timing signals,
depends on the operating status of the two CRUs.
The twenty–one 1.5 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries are received in B8ZS format with 100 ohms bal.
impedance.
The description deals with only one of the 21 tributaries in that they follow the same procedure.
An electric transformer decouples the line signals. The T1/NRZ circuit perform the line signal adaptation,
clock extraction and B8ZS–>NRZ+CK decoding.
The LOS alarm is detected.
Afterwards the signal is sent to the ” 2 Mbit/s Mapping ” circuit. The latter inserts the 1.5 Mbit/s stream
into a proprietary format frame.
The twenty–one 1.5 Mbit/s signals are processed and are added the ”FIXED” appropriate redundancies
to generate twenty–one 2 Mbit/s streams.
In this manner the 1.5 Mbit/s incoming signal frequency information is kept inside the 2 Mbit/s stream
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
allowing to utilze the 1.5 Mbit/s signals for the CRU unit clock synch.source.
Now the NRZ format signal + clock is encoded in a RZ+/RZ–signal with a HDB3 code.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 166 / 436
436
Afterwards the signal accessed the G.703 interface which has to recover the 2 Mhz clock from the line
signal. This clock is also sent to the CRU.
The next circuit performs the code decoding (HDB3–> date + NRZ clock), detects the loss of signal and
hence generates the LOS alarm.

Moreover it performs the loopback on thr Card Controller commands.
network. A C–12 container is structured to receive the 2Mbit/s stream (LPA Lower Order Path Adaptation).
Through the LPT operations (Lower Order Path Termination) the VC–12 container is structured to
distribute its bytes within a time interval of 500 µsec. which corresponds to 4 STM–1 frame period.
The VC–12 consists of a C–12 container and a POH byte (path overhead) assigned to the first position
of the structure.
Figure 73. on page 163 shows the structure of a VC–12 and of the POH.
The subsequent HPA operation (Higher order path adaptation) permits to structure the TU–12 through the
insertion of TUOH. The TUOH is the pointer which indicates the beginning of VC–12 inside the TU–12
stream. TUOH consists of four bytes (V1, V2, V3, V4) equally distributed within a time interval of 4 STM–1
frames. Figure 74. on page 164 shows the TU–12 structure.
At this point through the Lower Order Path Connection operation (LPC) each n–th tributary (1–21) is
switched over to any one of the 63 positions of the STM–1 frame thus structuring the connection matrices
towards the West and/or East aggregates.
The 38.88Mbit/s 4–row bus structured data is transmitted towards the WEST and/or EAST aggregate
units depending from the software configurations.
The main alarms, collected by the Card Controller, indicate (for each tributary):
• LOS: loss of signal

• over/underflow of the elastic store.
Reception
On the Rx side, the unit receives the four 38.88Mbit/s streams from each EAST1/2 and WEST1/2
aggregate unit with protection 1+1.
The MSP protection circuit selects the aggregate to analyze for each side (WEST and EAST) through
commands PROT WEST, PROT EAST received from the”Card Controller” of the unit.
The 21 TU–12s are chosen and extracted from the selected tributaries, through the dynamic connection
matrix ( SNCP/I functions) , according to the indications received from the ”Card Controller”.
The TU–AIS condition and the loss of pointer can be detected by the TUOH’s pointer interpreter.
At this point each VC–12 is individually processed.
The LPT (Low order Path Termination) operation extracts the POH from each of the VC–12s to obtain the
C–12 structure.
The following operations are carried out in the POH MANAGEMENT circuit:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• BIP–2 astimation on the preceding Virtual Container Error counting utilized to generate the
FEBE signal (Tx side).
• SIGNAL LABEL control.It checks the regular configuration of the signal label bits.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 167 / 436
436
• FEBE check.It checks if errors have been detected on the remote equipment through BIP–2
estimation.
• FERF check.
• Path Trace extraction to verify the continuity of the link.

All the above operations are processed through the Unit Card Controller.
The 2Mbit/s signal is regenerated by processing the C–12 (LPA – Lower order Path Adaptation) thus
obtaining the 2Mbit/s signal (DATA) and clock.
A DPLL circuit is utilized with time base supplied by an external oscillator .
The tributary signal is HDB3 encoded. It can be replaced by the AIS signal (all ones) when detecting loss
of TU–12.
Finally through the G. 703 interface circuit the ”Mbit/s signal is forwarded to ”HDB3–>NRZ” decoding
circuit.
The ”Aligner” circuit realizes the signal alignment word and setting the frame counter in such a way to
recover the 1.544 Mbit/s payload.
Thruogh the ”PLL Demapping” circuit is extracted the 1.544 Mbit/s stream from the 2 Mbit/s signal.
A PLL digital circuit with a 51.84 Mhz clock is utilizes.
AIS is detected on the 2 Mbit/s signal, a signal ”all ones” is inserted on the 1.544 Mbit/s outgoing stream.
Finally, through the electrical transformer the 1.5 Mbit/s signal is adapted according to the G.703 Rac. and
then sent to an external source of the unit.
On the outgoing signal the ”Equalizer Control” circuit permits to equalize the signal depending on the cable
length.
This operation can be executed at only one tributary level or simultaneously on all the twenty–one
tributataries.
Card Controller
CRU selection
This interface selects the CRU from which the synchronism and timing signals to be used as reference
for the unit are extracted. To provide the selection criteria, this interface processes the alarms received
from the two CRU’s, namely:
ISWCAN : internal alarm received from CRU A;
ISWCBN : internal alarm received from CRU B;
The interface also supplies the CKMSTOFF alarm criteria when the selected timing signal is lost.
Local dialog for alarms, configuration and performance
This type of dialog permits to transmit/receive to/from the unit the E2PROM–stored software setting
options. The alarms and performance criteria are received from the unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
All the internal unit alarms are collected to activate the red alarm LED (1) and the OSWi switching criteria
to send to all the other units.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 168 / 436
436
Loop Management
Line looping ( Line L ) and Internal looping are possible at the tributary level. The are managed by the LPT
and LPM signals. It is possible to activate them via software .
Through the line loopback the signal received from the external line is looped on the tributary tx side.
AIS Processing
Dialog with the Equipment controller unit
Information on setting options, criteria, reset etc. is exchanged with the Equipment Controller unit through
the local LIECB and NIECB wiring.
MSP protection
This function permits to select (through commands PROT WEST and PROT EAST) one of the signals
received from aggregates WEST and EAST.
phase) are processed by analyzing the ISW switch criteria received from the aggregate units.
These criteria indicate the presence of a failure on the unit or the detection of alarms along the fiber line.
Tributary EPS management
This function is used for EPS Tributary protection utilizing the ISWT command received from the other
tributaries.
This circuit also operates with the OSW command.
The EPS Protection is described in para. ”Automatic Protections Sub–system” in para. 3.1.5 on page116.
Main unit acknowledgment
Through the CTYPE signal the Card Controller Trib. can acknowledge the unit on which it is mounted.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 169 / 436
436
The power supply voltages at the input of the 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary unit are:

• +5.3V ±3%

• –5.5V ±3%
• +12.1V ±3%
Malfunction or voltage failure generates the PWALM alarm.
The unit is provided with an E2PROM (serial protocol) to store the unit inventory data (codes, series, date
of construction).
This store is powered by a service voltage and connected to the Equipment Controller unit which utilizes
it for the Remote Inventory.
The CAREM signal indicates the presence of the board (ground contact) and is directly connected to the
Equipment Controller.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 170 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
1.5 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY – 1 TO
T1TX 4
TO / EAST 1
CRU EAST AGGREGATE
CLOCK CONNECTION DT–1Ei TO
07
NRZ NRZ
D1.5EN1 RZ+ MATRIX 4 EAST 2
MAPPING DATA 2Mbit/s SIGNAL VC12 TU12 (LPC) / AGGREGATE
NRZ G703 HDB3/NRZ
D1.5EP1 T1/NRZ INSERTION INTO FORMATTING FORMATTING
2 Mbit/s INTERFACE DECODER T21TX DT–2Ei
CK HDB3 C12 (LPA) (LPT) (HPA)
RZ–
1.5 CK2
ÅÅ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
PI LOS 51.8MHz LOS T1TX TO
POH 4 WEST 1
POH TUOH /
WEST AGGREGATE
MANAGEMENT
GENERATION GENERATION CONNECTION DT–1Wi TO
955.100.562 K
EQUALIZATION MATRIX WEST 2
CONTROL DATA (LPC) 4
/ AGGREGATE
RZ+ AIS1
D1.5UN1 NRZ NRZ T21TX DT–2Wi
HDB3 NRZ/HDB3
2Mbit/s PLL G703
D1.5UP1 CK ALIGNER CK2 RZ– 2Mbit/s SIGNAL POH
TRIB. DEMAP. INTERFACE ENCODER
NRZ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
REGENERATION EXTRACTION AIS
1.5
( LPA) ( LPT)
Å
51.8MHz
PI CLOCK
DR–1EI
FROM
D1.5EN21 1 4 EAST 1
T21TX T1RX SNCP/I
ÇÇ
TU–12 /
G AGGREGATE
D1.5EP21 MSP FROM
21 EAST
D1.5UN21 1.5 Mbit(s TRIBUTARY – 21 EAST 2
T21RX EXTRAC. PROTECT. 4 AGGREGATE
51.8MHz /
D1.5UP21 DR–2EI
PROT EST
DR–1WI FROM
+12.1V POWALIM 1 4 WEST 1
/
FROM +12V TU–12 AGGREGATE
+5.3V MSP
DYNAMIC MATRIX
WEST FROM
POWER FUSES T21RX 21 WEST 2
–5.5V –5V T21RX EXTRAC. 4
SUPPLY AIS PROTECT. AGGREGATE
CONFIGURATIONS /
+5V
DR–2WI
AIS21
+3.3 ALARMS PERFORMANCE
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
PROT WEST
Figure 76. 21x1.5 Mbit/s Tributary

+2.5 CTYPE 0 :– 3
1
PWALM LOOP–BACK
ÅÅ
INTERNAL DIALOGUE FOR UNIT TYPE EPS

ALARMS CONFIGURATIONS ACKNOWLEDGMENT AIS TRIBUTARIES
PERFORMANCE
MANAGEMENT MANAGEMENT
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
CARD CONTROLLER
CK
SYNC
CRU PHYSICAL DIALOG WITH 1+1 PROT EST
SELECTION POSITION EQUIPMENT AGGREGATE
ACKNOWLED CONTROLLER UNIT PROTECTION PROT WEST
REMOTE
CAREM
INVENTORY
CKB
CKA
ISWT
OSWi
LIECB
ISW1,2E
NIECB
ISW1,2W
ID 0 –: 4
SYNCB
SYNCA
ISWCBN
ISWCAN
TO TO ALL FROM/TO FROM FROM FROM/TO

EQ. CONTR. FROM CRU THE UNITS FROM CRU AGGR. TRIBS
EQ. CONTR. EQ. CONTR.
171 / 436
3.2.3 3x34Mbit/s TRIB
(See Figure 79. on page 178)

The 3x34Mbit/s TRIB unit allows a max. of three 34Mbit/s plesiochronous tributary streams to access the

STM–1 synchronous digital structure.
After having synchronized each tributary to the timing and synchronism signals received from the”Clock
Reference Units”, the unit, by means of the MATRIX units, transmits the tributary signals (mapped in the
STM–1 structure) towards the EAST and WEST Aggregate units.
the received STM–1 frames and then transmitted towards external lower hierarchical equipment. Access
module units interface the 34Mbit/s tributary signals with the external source (see description further on).
The regular operation of the unit is controlled through alarm detectors which signal malfunctions to the
Card Controller sub–unit. The latter informs the ”Equipment Controller” unit through LEDs and other
indications.
The following are dealt with in the following:
• Transmission
• Reception
• Card Controller

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 172 / 436
436
Transmission
The Tx part of the unit interfaces the three 34Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries and the STM–1
synchronous digital structure. The latter is transmitted to the units as a 38.88Mbit/s 4–wire bus structured
stream for processing.

The CKA and CKB 38.88Mbit/s clocks and relative 2kHz SYNA and SYNB synch. signals are received
from the ”Clock Reference Unit (CRU).
The selection of one of the two synch. sources, utilized to generate the unit timing signals depends on the
operating status of the two CRU’s.
The unit receives three HDB3 coded/75 ohms unbal. 34.368 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries.
The description that follows concerns only one of the three tribs. in that they follow the same procedure.
The signal accesses the Physical Interface (P.I.) consisting of the G.703 Interface and the Decoder.
The G.703 Interface circuit:
• Regenerates the line signal by recovering an 0–12 dB attenuation at the Nyquist frequency.
• Extracts the 34 MHz clock from the line signal.
The Decoder:
• Code–decodes, i.e.: HDB3 –> data NRZ + clock.
• Detects signal loss hence generate the LOS alarm
• Loops back following the CARD CONTROLLER commands
Before being sent to a synchronous network the 34 Mbit/s plesiochronous signal is adapted and then
inserted into the C3 structured container (LPA:Lower order Path Adaptation).
Through the LPT (lower order Path Termination) operation the VC–3 is arranged so as to distribute its
octets within a time interval of 125msec. corresponding to the duration of 1 STM–1 frame.
The VC–3 consists of a C3 container and a POH which in turn consists of nine octets equally distributed
within the structure.
Figure 77. on page 177 shows the structure of a VC–3 and the POH bytes functions.
The operation that follows formats the TU–3 structure through TUOH generation and insertion.
The TUOH consists of nine bytes.
The first three bytes (H1, H2 and H3) contain the pointer locating the beginning of the VC–3.
The remaining 6 bytes are stuff bytes.
Figure 78. on page 177 illustrates the TU–3 structure.
The operations described are carried out in each of the three 34 Mbit/s Tributaries.
At this point, through the Lower order Path Connection (LPC), each n–th tributary (1–3) is cross–
connected to one of the three positions assigned to it in the STM–1 frame thus creating a connection matrix
towards the WEST and EAST aggregates.
The 38.88 Mbit/s 4–wire bus structured data is transmitted towards the WEST and EAST aggregates via
the MATRIX units.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 173 / 436
436
Receive side
The unit receives four 38.88 Mbit/s streams from each EAST 1,2 and WEST 1,2 Aggregates through the
Matrix units.

A MSP protection circuit selects the aggregate to analyze (1 Main or 2 Spare) for each side using the PROT
WEST and PROT EAST commands received from the Card Controller unit.
Three TU–3’s are chosen from the selected tributaries and, in accordance with the signalling indications
received from the Card Controller, the East or West Rx side is selected (SNCP).
The Full Matrix uses only West 1 and 2.
The EPS protection of the Full Matrix selects Main or Spare.
The TUOH pointer’s interpreter detects presence of AIS and LOP on each selected stream.
At this point each VC–3 is individually handled. The description that follows deals with one VC–3 but it is
applicable to all of the three tributaries.
The POH is extracted from the VC–3’s thus obtaining the C–3 structures.
The POH Rx processing circuit:
• extracts J1 to check connection continuity( not available in this release).
• compares B3 with the BIP8 parity estimated on the previous VC–3, and if errors are detected
they are sent to the Card Controller.
• extracts C2 to check the VC–3 configuration
• extracts the FEBE indication from the first 4 bits of byte G1, and the FERF indication from the
5th bit; both indications are sent to the Card Controller
The 34 Mbit/s signal is restructured by processing the C–3 in the LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation) thus
obtaining the signal (DATA) and the34 Mbit/s clock.
The regenerated tributary signal is HDB3 encoded. This signal can be replaced by the AIS signal when
loss of TU–3 signal has been detected (see description above).
Finally, the G.703 Interface circuit adapts the 34368 Kbit/s signal to the characteristics specified by ITU–T
Rec.G.703 and then sent to a source external to the unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 174 / 436
436
Card Controller
The Card Controller carries out the following main functions

CRU selection
This interface selects the CRU (Clock Reference Unit) from which the synchronism and timing signals to
• ISW CAN = internal alarm received from CRU–A
• ISW CBN = internal alarm received from CRU–B

All the internal unit alarms are collected to activate the red alarm LED (1) and to generate (together with
all the other alarms detected by the unit) the OSWi criteria to send to all the equipment units.
Information on presettings, criteria, reset, alarms etc. is exchanged with the Equipment Controller unit
Byte J1 interface
This interface transmits and receives the data of byte J1 utilized as path trace for VC3. (Not used in this
release).
Loop Management
output rx side.
AIS Processing
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 175 / 436
436
MSP Protection
This function permits to select (PROT WEST command) one of the two signals received from the
Aggregate WEST, Main or Spare. The reciprocal operation (PROT EAST command) is carried out on

Aggregate EAST.

When two Full Matrix are used this protection acts the EPS between these units.
tributaries.
This circuit also operates with the OSW command. The EPS is described in para ”EPS for electrical
The power supply voltages present at the input of the unit are:
+5.3V ± 3%
–5.5V ± 3%
+12.1V ± 3%
The PW ALM alarm is generated in case of malfunction or voltage failure.
The electrical ground and chassis ground are strap–connected.
of construction).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 176 / 436
436
85 byte
J1
B3
C2
G1
VC–3
F2
C–3
H4
Z3
Z4
Z5
POH STRUCTURE:
• J1 (path trace) utilized to transmit in a cyclic mode a 64–octect configuration in order to check
the connection continuity. Not operative in this release.
• B3 resulting from the BIP–8 performed on the previous VC–3, before the scrambler.
• C2 (signal label) = the configurations are utilized to indicate if VC–3 is equipped or not, or the
payload structure
• G1 (path status) utilized to transmit information on the link status to the remote terminal.
It contains:
– four bits for the FEBE (Far End Block Error) indication, where the decimal numbers 0–8
indicate the number of violations of BIP–8 (the illegal values 9 to 15 indicate absence of
errors);
– one bit for the alarm indication FERF (Far End Receiving Failure) and other three digits
not utilized.
• F2, utilized for the transmission of one channel coming from the AUX unit (OHBUS circuit).
• Z3–Z5 can be accessed via AUX board interface.
• H4 not utilized.
Figure 77. VC–3 structure
86 byte
H1
H2
H3
S VC–3 TU – 3
9 ROWS T PAYLOAD
U
F
F
I
N
G
•
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
H1,H2,H3 TU Pointer (TUOH)
Figure 78. TU–3 structure
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 177 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
T1TX 4
D34E1 / EAST 1
DATA 34Mbit/s SIGNAL VC3 TU3 EAST
07
G703 HDB3/NRZ CONNECTION DT–1Ei
INTERFACE DECODER INSERTION INTO FORMATTING FORMATTING MATRIX 4
C–3 (LPA) (LPT) (HPA) (LPC) / EAST 2
CLOCK T21TX DT–2Ei
PI LOS J1 POH TUOH

B3 GENERATION GENERATION T1TX 4
C2 AND / WEAST 1
PROCESSING EAST
TO THE MATRIX
955.100.562 K
G1 CONNECTION DT–1Wi
OH–BUS MATRIX 4
FUTURE OH–BUS (LPC)
BUS F2, Z3–Z5 / WEAST 2
MANAGEMENT
DRIVER T21TX DT–2Wi
J1
34 Mbit/s TRIB
B3 POH RX
C2 PROCESSING
INS.AIS
G1
D34U1 DATA DR–1EI
G703 HDB3/NRZ 34Mbit/s SIGNAL POH T1RX 1 4
REGENERATION EXTRACT. TU AIS / EAST 1
INTERFACE ENCODER (LPT) DETECTION T2RX 2 EAST MSP
(LPA) EXTRAC.
PI CK T3RX 3 PROTECT. 4
AIS1 / EAST 2
DR–2EI
PROT EST
DR–1WI
OH–BUS G T3RX 1 4
TU AIS WEST / WEST 1
DETECTION 2 MSP
T21TX EXTRAC.
FROM THE MATRIX
34MHz 3 PROTECT. 4
D34E3 / WEST 2
AIS3 PPS
D34U3 34Mbit(s TRIBUTARY–3 T21RX DR–2WI
PROT WEST
CONFIGURATIONS
J1
+12.1V +12V ALARMS PERFORMANCE CTYPE 0 :– 3
1
+5.3V +5V
FUSES
Figure 79. Block diagram : 3 x 34 Mbit/s Trib.

–5.5V –5V
SUPPLY
INTERNAL DIALOGUE FOR UNIT TYPE BYTE J1
POWALIM INTERFACE LOOP–BACK EPS ISWT TRIBS
FROM POWER
ALARMS CONFIGURATIONS ACKNOWLEAGMENT
436
PERFORMANCE TRIBUTARIES
3AL 36668 AA AA
AIS MANAGEMENT
CARD CONTROLLER MANAGEMENT
CK
SYNC
CRU PHYSICAL DIALOG WITH MSP PROT EST
SELECTION POSITION EQUIPMENT PROTECTION
ACKNOWLED CONTROLLER PROT WEST
REMOTE
INVENTORY
OSWi
CAREM
ISW1,2E
ID 0 – 4:
ISW1,2W
SYNCB
SYNCA
ISWCBN
ISWCAN
LIECB
CKB
CKA
NIECB
EQ. CONTR. TO ALL

CRU THE UNITS CRU EQ. CONTR. AGGR. EQ. CONTR.
178 / 436
3.2.4 34/2 Tran. Mux and 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary

The 34/2 Trans Mux and 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary unit allows one 34 Mbit/s and five 2 Mbit/s plesiochronous
stream(s) to access the synchronous digital structure.
The 34 Mbit/s plesiochronous structured stream is demultiplexed into sixteen 2 Mbit/s signals.
The twenty–one 2 Mbit/s streams are then processed until a frame structure has been obtained from/to
which a TU–12 can be either add/dropped.
Since the STM–1 structure can carry a max. of 63 2Mbit/s tributary streams, the digital streams leaving
the unit involved result to be equipped with only one third of the general STM–1 frame capacity.
the received STM–1 frames. The five 2 Mbit/s streams and one 34 Mbit/s stream are obtained by
multiplexing the remaining sixteen 2 Mbit/s signals and transmitting them towards external lower
hierarchical equipment.
The regular operation of the unit is controlled through alarm detectors which signal any malfunctions to
the Card Controller sub–unit. The latter conveys the information to the ”Equipment Controller ESCT” unit
and lights on a local alarm indication (LED).
The description is split into:
• Transmission
• Reception
• Card Controller

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 179 / 436
436
Transmission
The unit interfaces the 34 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributary, the five 2 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries and
the STM–1 synchronous digital structure. The latter is then transmitted, in 38.88Mbit/s 4–wire bus format,

to the units processing the aggregate stream.

Two 38.88MHz clocks (CKA and CKB) and the relative 2kHz synchronizing signals (SYNCA and SYNCB)
are received from the ”Clock reference unit”(CRU) of the equipment.
The selection of one of the two synch. sources, utilized to generate the general unit timing signals depends
on the operating status of the two CRU’s.
The 34 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributary is received in HDB3 format with 75 ohms unbal. impedance
Afterwards the signal accesses the Physical Interface (P.I.) consisting of Interface G.703 and the Decoder.
The G.703 interface circuit:
• Regenerates the line signal.
• extracts the 34MHz clock from the line signal.
The Decoder:
• decodes the HDB3 code (HDB3––> data NRZ + clock)
• detects the loss of the signal hence generates the LOS alarm
• Loops back following the Card Controller commands
The ”Demux” circuit decodes and demultiplexes the 34,368 Mbit/s signal into sixteen 2048 Mbit/s NRZ
streams.
Besides the 34 Mbit/s frame it also acknowledges four 8 Mbit/s frames as requested by the plesiochronous
demultiplexing strategy. It provides access to the 34 Mbit/s service bit (B12) and to the bit slip option.
Plesiochronous alarms are detected.
The 65 MHz X0 oscillator generates sixteen 2,048 MHz clock signals associated to the mapped tributaries
of the 34 Mbit/s incoming frame.
The five 2Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries are received in HDB3 format with 75/120 ohms bal./unbal.
impedance. The termination is strap–set.
The description that follows concerns only one of the five tribs. in that they follow the same procedure.
An electric transformer decouples the line signals. Afterwards the signal accesses the Physical Interface
(P.I.) consisting of Interface G.703 and the Decoder.
The function of the G703 interface circuit is to:
• generate the line signal thus recovering a Nyquist attenuation within the 0–6 dB range
• extract the 2MHz clock from the line signal. This clock signal is also sent to the CRU.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 180 / 436
436
The Decoder:
• decodes the HDB3 code (HDB3––> data NRZ + clock)

• detects the loss of the signal hence generates the LOS alarm
• Loopbacks onto the Card Controller commands
The description that follows is common to all the twenty–one 2 Mbit/s signals.
network. A C–12 container is structured to receive the 2Mbit/s stream (LPA Lower Order Path
Adaptation).
Through the LPT operation (Lower Order Path Termination) the VC–12 container is arranged to distribute
its octets within a time interval of 500 µsec. which corresponds to a period of 4 STM–1 frames.
The VC–12 consists of a C–12 container and a POH octet (path overhead) assigned to the first position
of the structure.
The subsequent HPA operation (Higher order path adaptation) structures the TU–12 through the
generation and insertion of TUOH. The TUOH is the pointer which indicates the beginning of VC–12 inside
the TU–12 stream. TUOH consists of four bytes (V1, V2, V3, V4) equally distributed within a time interval
of 4 STM–1 frames. Figure 74. on page 164 shows the TU–12 structure.
The operations described are performed on all of the twenty–one 2Mbit/s tributaries.
At this point through the Lower Order Path Connection operation (LPC) each n–th tributary (1–21) is
assigned to any of the 63 positions of the STM1frame thus structuring the connection matrices towards
the West and East aggregates.
The 38.88Mbit/s 4–row bus structured data is transmitted towards the WEST and EAST aggregate units.
The main alarms, collected by the Card Controller, indicate (for each tributary):
• LOS: loss of signal
• over/underflow of the elastic store.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 181 / 436
436
Reception
On the Rx side, the unit receives the four 38.88Mbit/s streams from each EAST and WEST aggregate unit.

The MSP protection circuit selects the aggregate Main or Spare to analyze between the two received from

WEST and the two received from EAST, through commands PROT WEST, PROT EAST coming from the
Card Controller.
The 21 TU–12’s (with SNCP functions) are chosen and extracted from the selected tributaries, through
the dynamic connection matrix, according to the indications received from the ”Card Controller”.
The TUOH’s pointer interpreter checks AIS on each selected stream.
At this point each VC–12 is individually processed, therefore the description will deal with only one VC–12
but is applicable to all the tributaries.
To obtain the C–12 structure the POH is extracted from the VC–12 through the LPT (Low order Path
Termination) operation.
The POH MANAGEMENT circuit carries out the following operations:
• BIP–2 estimate. Error counting is utilized to generate the FEBE signal (Tx side).
• SIGNAL LABEL check. Check regular configuration of the signal label bits.
• FEBE check. Check if errors have been detected on the remote equipment by BIP–2
calculation.
• FERF check.
• Path Trace extraction (not available in this release).
All the above operations are managed by the Unit Card Controller.
The 2Mbit/s signal is regenerated by processing the C–12 (LPA – Lower order Path Adaptation) thus
obtaining the 2Mbit/s signal (DATA) and clock. To this concern a DPLL circuit is utilized with time base
supplied by an external oscillator.
The twenty–one 2 Mbit/s streams are split into two blocks (a 16–stream one and a 5–stream one) and sent
to two different paths.
The sixteen 2 Mbit/s signals of the 34 Mbit/s stream (which can be looped back through the Card
Controller) are sent to the ”Mux” circuit to be multiplexed into the 34 Mbit/s structured stream.
The tributary signal is HDB3 encoded and can be replaced by the AIS signal when detecting the loss of
the 34 Mbit/s signal.
The G703 interface and the electric transformer adapt the 34,368 Mbit/s tributary signal to ITU–T
Rec. G.703 characteristics and is then sent to an external source.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 182 / 436
436
Card Controller
CRU selection
ISWCAN : internal alarm received from the CRU A;
ISWCBN : internal alarm received from the CRU B;
The interface also supplies the CKMSTOFF alarm criteria in case of loss of the selected timing signal.

This type of dialog permits to transmit/receive to/from the unit the EEPROM–stored software setting
options. Alarms and performance criteria are received from the unit.
All the internal unit alarms are collected to activate the red alarm LED (1) and generate the OSWi switching
signal to send to all the other units to execute switching.
Loop Management
output rx side.
AIS Processing
Dialog with the Equipment controller ESCT unit
Information on setting options, criteria, reset etc. is exchanged with the ESCT Equipment Controller unit
through the local LIECB and NIECB wiring.

MSP protection (for Aggregate APS)

received from aggregates WEST and EAST , Main or Spare.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 183 / 436
436
This function is used for EPS Tributary protection utilizing the ISWT command received from the other
tributaries.

This circuit also operates with the OSW command. The EPS Protection is described in para. 3.1.5.2 ”EPS

for electrical tributaries” on page119
Through the CTYPE signal the Card Controller Trib. can acknowledge the unit on which it is mounted.
The power supply voltages present at the input of the 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary Enhanced Monitoring unit are:
+5.3V ± 3%
–5.5V ± 3%
+12.1V ± 3%
PWALM alarm is generated in case of malfunction or voltage failure.
The unit is equipped with an E2PROM (serial protocol) to store the unit inventory data (Part Nos., series,
date of construction).
This store is power supplied with a service voltage and connected to the Equipment Controller ESCT unit
which utilizes it for the Remote Inventory.
the Equipment Controller ESCT.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 184 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
TO T1TX
CRU
CLOCK
D2EN1 T5TX EAST 4
CONNECTION
07
DATA 2Mbit/s SIGNAL VC12 TU12
G703 HDB3/NRZ INSERTION INTO FORMATTING FORMATTING T6TX MATRIX
D2EP1 INTERFACE DECODER (LPC) DT–1Ei
TO EAST
C12 (LPA) (LPT) (HPA) T21TX

AGGREGATE
Å
Ç
PI LOS
POH POH TUOH T1TX
GENERATION GENERATION GENERATION
CLOCK
DATA T5TX
T6TX
ÇÇ EAST
CONNECTION
MATRIX
4
TO WEST
D2UN1 (LPC) DT–1Wi
955.100.562 K
T21TX
AGGREGATE
2Mbit/s DATA 2Mbit/s SIGNAL POH

G703 NRZ/HDB3 REGENERATION EXTRAC. AIS
TRIB. D2UN1 INTERFACE ENCODER (LPA) (LPA)
Ç
Å
ÇÇ
AIS1
PI CK T1RX 1
ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ
TU–12 MSP 4
21 EAST PROTEC
D2EN5 CK G EXTRAC.
T5Tx T5RX
AIS21 DT–1Wi
FROM EAST
AGGREGATE
D2EP5
PROT EAST
51,84MHz
PPS
D2UN5 2Mbit/s TRIBUTARY–5 AIS

T5Rx T21RX 1
T6RX
D2UP5 TU–12 4
DYNAMIC MATRIX
MSP
AIS1 T21RX 21 WEST PROTEC
EXTRAC.
D34E–A 2Mbit/s SIGNAL VC12 TU12
34Mb/s INSERTION INTO FORMATTING FORMATTING DT–1Wi
DATA
TRIB. G703
FROM WEST
AGGREGATE
D34E–B HDB3/NRZ C12 (LPA) (LPT) (HPA) T6TX

INTERFACE DECODER PROT WEST
Ç
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
NOT USED
CLOCK
DEMULTIPL.
POH TUOH
LOS GENERATION GENERATION
T21X
PI
D34U–A
34Mb/s 1
TRIB. G703 NRZ/HDB3 POH
D34U–B INTERFACE LOOP CK MANAGEMENT
ENCODER BACK
NOT USED
MULTIPL.
CK
PI
T6RX
2Mbit/s SIGNAL POH
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
CK REGENERATION EXTRAC.
(LPA) (LPA)
+12.1V +12V 16
FROM +5.3V +5V T21X

POWER FUSES
SUPPLY –5V
–5.5V
POWALIM
Figure 80. 34/2 Trans Mux and 5 x 2 Mbit/s tributary

CONFIGURATIONS CTYPE (3:0)
436
1 ALRMS PERFORMANCE
3AL 36668 AA AA
PWALM
CK
ÇÇ
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
SYNC
INTERNAL DIALOGUE FOR LOOP–BACK EPS
ALARMS CONFIGURATIONS MAIN UNIT TRIBUTARIES
PERFORMANCE ACKNOWLED.
AIS MANAGEMENT
REMOTE
INVENTORY CRU PHYSICAL DIALOG WITH MPS PROT WEST
POSITION EQUIPMENT
SELECTION CONTROLLER ESCT UNIT PROTECTION
ACKNOWLED PROT EAST
CAREM
:
ISWT
OSWi
LIECB
ID 0–4
NIECB
CKB
CKA
ISWCAN
ISWCBN
SYNCB
SYNCA
ISW1,2EN
ISW1,2WN
TO ALL FROM / TO EQ. FROM FROM

FROM / TO EQ TO EQ. CONTR. ESCT AGGR. TRIBS
CONTR. ESCT CONTR. ESCT FROM CRU THE UNITS FROM CRU
185 / 436
3.2.5 3x45Mbit/s TRIB

The 3x45Mbit/s TRIB unit allows a max. of three 45Mbit/s plesiochronous tributary streams to access the

STM–1 synchronous digital structure.
After having synchronized each tributary to the timing and synchronism signals received from the”CRU”,
the unit, by means of the MATRIX units,transmits the tributary signals (mapped in the STM–1 structure)
towards the EAST and WEST Aggregate units.
the received STM–1 frames and then transmitted towards external lower hierarchical equipment. Switch
module units interface the 34Mbit/s tributary signals with the external source (see description further on).
indications.
The following are dealt with in the following:
• Transmission
• Reception
• Card Controller

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 186 / 436
436
Transmission
The Tx part of the unit interfaces the three 45Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries and the STM–1
synchronous digital structure. The latter is transmitted to the units as a 38.88Mbit/s 4–wire bus structured
stream for processing.

from the ”CRU” unit.
The selection of one of the two synch. sources, utilized to generate the unit timing signals depends on the
operating status of the two CRU’s.
The unit receives three B3ZS coded/75 ohms unbal. 44.736 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries.
The description that follows concerns only one of the three tribs. in that they follow the same procedure.
The signal accesses the Physical Interface (P.I.) consisting of the G.703 Interface (also compliant with
ANSI T1 102 Rec. – DS3 interface) and the Decoder.
The G.703 Interface circuit:
• Regenerates the line signal by recovering an 0–6 dB attenuation at the Nyquist frequency.
• Extracts the 45 MHz clock from the line signal.
The Decoder:
• Code–decodes, i.e.: B3ZS –> data NRZ + clock.

• Detects signal loss hence generate the LOS alarm
• Loops back following the CARD CONTROLLER commands
Before being sent to a synchronous network the 45 Mbit/s plesiochronous signal at 44.736 Mbit/s is
adapted and then inserted into the C3 structured container (LPA: Lower order Path Adaptation).
Through the LPT (lower order Path Termination) operation the VC–3 is arranged so as to distribute its
octets within a time interval of 125msec. corresponding to the duration of 1 STM–1 frame.
The VC–3 consists of a C3 container and a POH which in turn consists of nine octets equally distributed
within the structure.
Figure 77. on page 177 shows the structure of a VC–3 and the POH bytes functions.
The operation that follows formats the TU–3 structure through TUOH generation and insertion. The TUOH
consists of nine bytes.
The first three bytes (H1, H2 and H3) contain the pointer locating the beginning of the VC–3. The remaining
6 bytes are stuff bytes.
The operations described are carried out in each of the three 45 Mbit/s Tributaries. At this point, through
the Lower order Path Connection (LPC), each n–th tributary (1–3) is cross–connected to one of the three
positions assigned to it in the STM–1 frame thus creating a connection matrix towards the WEST and
EAST aggregates.
The 38.88 Mbit/s 4–wire bus structured data is transmitted towards the WEST and EAST aggregates via
the MATRIX units.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 187 / 436
436
Receive side
The unit receives four 38.88 Mbit/s streams from each EAST 1,2 and WEST 1,2 Aggregates through the
Matrix units.

A MSP protection circuit selects the aggregate to analyze (1 or 2) for each side using the PROT WEST
and PROT EAST commands received from the Card Controller unit.
Three TU–3’s are chosen from the selected tributaries and, in accordance with the signalling indications
received from the Card Controller, the East or West Rx side is selected (SNCP).
The Full Matrix uses only West 1 and 2.
The EPS protection of the Full Matrix selects Main or Spare.
The TUOH pointer is utilized to detect presence of AIS on each selected stream.
At this point each VC–3 is individually handled. The description that follows deals with one VC–3 but it is
• extracts J1 to check connection continuity (not available in this release).
• compares B3 with the BIP8 parity estimated on the previous VC–3, and if errors are detected
they are sent to the Card Controller.
• extracts C2 to check the VC–3 configuration extracts the FEBE indication from the first 4 bits
of byte G1, and the FERF indication from the 5th bit; both indications are sent to the Card
Controller
obtaining the signal (DATA) and the 45 Mbit/s clock.
The regenerated tributary signal is B3ZS encoded. This signal can be replaced by the AIS signal when
loss of TU–3 signal has been detected (see description above).
Finally, the G.703 Interface circuit adapts the 44736 Kbit/s signal to the characteristics specified by ITU–T
Rec.G.703 and then sent to a source external to the unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 188 / 436
436
Card Controller
The Card Controller carries out the following main functions

CRU selection
• ISW CA = internal alarm received from CRU–A
• ISW CB = internal alarm received from CRU–B
Internal dialog for alarms, configuration and performance.
Information on presettings, criteria, reset, alarms etc. is exchanged with the Equipment Controller unit
Byte J1 interface
This interface transmits and receives the data of byte J1 utilized as path trace for VC3. (Not used in this
release).
Loop Management
output rx side.
AIS Processing
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 189 / 436
436
MSP Protection
This function permits to select (PROT WEST command) one of the two signals received from the WEST.
The reciprocal operation (PROT EAST command) is carried out on Aggregate EAST.

When two Full Matrix are used this protection acts as EPS between these units.

tributaries. This circuit also operates with the OSW command. The EPS is described in para 3.1.5.2 ”EPS
for electrical tributaries” on page 119.
+5.3V ± 3%
–5.5V ± 3%
+12.1V ± 3%
of construction).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 190 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
TO
T1TX 4 EAST 1
EAST / AGGREAGTE
D45E1 DATA T2TX CONNECTION DT–1Ei
G703 HDB3/NRZ 45Mbit/s SIGNAL VC–3 TU3 MATRIX TO
ANSI DS3 DECODER INSERTION INTO FORMATTING FORMATTING T3TX 4 EAST 2
(LPC)
07
INTERFACE C–3 (LPA) (LPT) (HPA) / AGGREAGTE
DT–2Ei
CLOCK
J1
ÇÇ
PI LOS POH TX TO
B3 GENERATION TUOH T1TX 4
GENERATION / WEAST 1
C2 AND WEST AGGREAGTE
PROCESSING T2TX CONNECTION DT–1Wi
G1
T3TX MATRIX 4 TO
(LPC) WEAST 2
955.100.562 K
OH–BUS OH–BUS / AGGREAGTE
FUTURE OH BUS DT–2Wi
AUX BUS F2, Z3,–Z5
MANAGEMENT
DRIVER
ÇÇ
J1
B3 POH RX
C2 PROCESSING
G1
D45U1 1 TO
45Mb/s G703 NRZ/HDB3 DATA 45Mbit/s SIGNAL POH TU AIS T1RX 4 EAST 1
TRIB. ANSI DS3 ENCODER REGENERATION EXTRAC. DETECTION / AGGREAGTE
INTERFACE (LPA) (LPT) T2RX 2 EAST MSP DT–1Ei
CK T3RX 3 EXTRAC. TO
PROTECT. 4 EAST 2
PI AIS1 / AGGREAGTE
INS. AIS DT–2Ei
PROT WEST
1 TO
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
OH–BUS G T3RX 4 WEST 1

TU AIS 2 WEST / AGGREAGTE
DETECTION MSP DT–1Wi
D45E3 T3TX 45MHz 3 EXTRAC. PROTECT. 4 TO
AIS3 PPS / WEST 2
DT–2Wi AGGREAGTE
D45U3 34Mbit/s TRIBUTARY–3 T3RX CONFIGURATIONS
J1 PROT WEST
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ALARMS PERFORMANCE CTYPE 0 :– 3

+12.1V 1
+12V
FROM +5.3V
POWER FUSES +5V
INTERNAL DIALOGUE FOR MAIN UNIT BYTE J1 LOOP–BACK
–5.5V EPS ISWT TRIBS
Figure 81. Schema funzionale 3 x 45Mbit/s TRIB.

SUPPLY –5V ALARMS CONFIGURATIONS
PERFORMANCE ACKNOWLEAGMENT INTERFACE TRIBUTARY
MANAGEMENT
436
AIS
PWALM
3AL 36668 AA AA
CK
SYNC
CRU PHYSICAL DIALOG WITH MSP PROT EAST
SELECTION POSITION EQUIPMENT PROTECTION
ACKNOWLED CONTROLLER ESCT UNIT PROT WEST
REMOTE
INVENTORY
CAREM
CKB
CKA
OSWi
LIECB
NIECB
ID 0 –: 4
SYNCB
SYNCA
ISW1,2EN
ISWCBN
ISWCAN
ISW1,2WN
EQ. CONTR. TO ALL EQ CONTR. AGGR.

CRU THE UNITS FROM EQ. CONTR.
CRU
191 / 436
3.2.6 DVB Tributary

The DVB tributary has been introduced to support point to point and broadcast transmission of a Digital

Video stream compliant with DVB specifications.
It supports the following features :
• transmitting and receiving function selectable by hardware jumpers present on the board
• three indipendent TX or RX channels are available on a single board
• ASI (Asynchronous Serial Interface ) supported by means of standard devices ; both distributed
and burst transmission modes are supported
• supported video stream rate between 1.44 and 39.9 Mbit/s automatically detected and
managed by the board
• both 188 and 204 packet lenght are supported
Three independent bidirectional ASI interfaces are availables . As requested by the standard, input and
output are decoupled by a transformer.
Separate BNC connectors are provided for ASI Input and Output .
On the Tx side, each of the three ASI ports are mapped into a 45 Mbit/s plesiochronous stream; then the
45 Mbit/s channels are mapped into a STM–1 synchronous frame.
The reciprocal operations are performed on the Rx side. The 45Mbit/s streams are extracted from the
received STM–1 frames and then processed by a Base Processor to obtain three ASI streams .
indications.
A DSP is responsible for board configuration and programming.
The following deals with:
• Transmission
• Reception
• Card Controller

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 192 / 436
436
Transmission
The following description applies to each of the three input ports.

The Tx side of the board receives an MPEG–TS data packet or data burst stream .The lenght of each
packet is compliant to the ASI –EN 50083–9 Specs. so it can be 188 or 204 bytes lenght .The ASI stream
frequency is 270 Mbit/s.The incoming stream frequency handled ranges from 1.44 Mbit/s up to 39.9 Mbit/s.
By means of an ASI interface the packets are converted into a serial flow and a 27 Mhz clock is recovered
from the data and is locked to a 45 Mhz clock by means of a PLL.
A proprietary solution for MPEG–TS packet mapping into an unframed 45 Mbit/s PDH stream has been
adopted. A DSP processor and an FPGA (programmable device) are used to implement the adaptation
process.
This flow is then mapped into an STM–1 synchronous digital structure. The latter is transmitted to the units
as a 38.88Mbit/s 4–wire bus structured stream for processing.
from the ”Clock Reference unit” (CRU).The selection of one of the two synch. sources, utilized to generate
the unit timing signals depends on the operating status of the two CRU’s.
Before being sent to a synchronous network the 45 Mbit/s plesiochronous signal is adapted and then
inserted into the C3 structured container (LPA:Lower order Path Adaptation).
Then, by means of the LPT (lower order Path Termination) operation the VC–3 is arranged to distribute
its bytes within a time interval of 125 µsec. corresponding to a 1 STM–1 frame period. The VC–3 consists
of a C3 container and a POH which in turn consists of nine bytes equally distributed within the structure.
The operation that follows formats the TU–3 structure through TUOH generation and insertion. The TUOH
consists of nine bytes. The first three bytes (H1, H2 and H3) contain the pointer locating the beginning of
the VC–3. The remaining 6 bytes are stuff bytes.
The operations described are carried out in each of the three 45 Mbit/s Tributaries. At this point, through
the Lower order Path Connection (LPC), each n–th tributary (1–3) is cross–connected to one of the three
positions assigned to it in the STM–1 frame thus creating a connection matrix towards the WEST and
EAST aggregates.
The 38.88 Mbit/s 4–wire bus structured data is transmitted towards the WEST and EAST aggregates
depending on the configurations.
The Card Controller (also concerned with presetting options) gathers the main alarms i.e., Loss of signal
(LOS), elastic store under/overflow, from each Tributary.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 193 / 436
436
Reception
The unit can receive up to four 38.88 Mbit/s streams two from the EAST1/2 and two from WEST1/2
Aggregates.

An MSP protection circuit selects the aggregate (1 or 2) to analyze using the commands received from
the Card Controller unit.
Three TU–3’s are chosen from the tributaries selected through the dynamic connection matrix and, in
accordance with the signalling indications received from the Card Controller.
The TU–AIS condition and the loss of pointer are detected by the TUOH’s pointer interpreter.
At this point each VC–3 is individually handled. The description that follows deals with one VC–3 but is
• extracts J1 to check connection continuity (not operative in this release)
• compares B3 with the BIP8 parity estimated on the previous VC–3, and any detected errors are
sent to the Card Controller.
• extracts C2 to check the VC–3 configuration
• extracts the FEBE indication from the first 4 bits of byte G1, and the RAI indication from the
5th bit; both indications are sent to the Card Controller
obtaining the signal (DATA) and the 45 Mbit/s clock which lock the 27 Mhz clock. A DPLL is implemented
in the DSP processor to guarantee high performance in terms of residual jitter and wander figures.
The 45 Mbit/s signal is then mapped into an MPEG–TS stream by the FPGA. ASI burst or packet data are
generated and are sent to the ASi interface togheter with the clock.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 194 / 436
436
Card Controller
The main functions performed by the Card Controller are:

CRU selection
This interface selects the CRU from which the synch. and timing signals to be used as reference signals
for the unit are extracted.
The interface processes the alarms received from the two CRU’s to supply the selection criteria:
• ISWCAN = internal alarm received from CRU–A
• ISWCBN = internal alarm received from CRU–B
This type of dialog permits to transmit/receive towards the unit the E2PROM stored software setting
options. The alarms and performance criteria are received from the unit.
Dialogue with the Equipment controller unit
Information on presettings, criteria, reset etc. is exchanged with the Equipment Controller ESCT unit
MSP protection
received from aggregates WEST and EAST.
Selection (performed during the turn–on phase) and switching (performed during the operating phase) are
processed by analyzing the ISW switch criteria received from the aggregate units. These criteria indicate
the presence of a failure on the unit or the detection of alarms along the fiber line.
Tributary EPS management
This unit is not EPS protected
Through the CTYPE signal the Card Controller acknowledges the unit on which it is mounted.
Byte J1 interface (Not operative in this release)
This interface transmits and receives the data of byte J1 utilized as path trace for VC3.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 195 / 436
436

• +5.3V ±3%

• –5.5V ±3%
• +12.1V ±3%
The PWALM alarm is generated in case of malfunction or voltage failure.
of construction).
This store is powered by a service voltage and connected to the Equipment Controller unit which utilizes
it for the Remote Inventory.
The contents of the Remote Inventory is fully described in on para. 4 on page 279.
The CAREM signal indicates the presence of the board (ground contact) and is directly connected to the
Equipment Controller.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 196 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
DVB TRIBUTARY
T1TX 4 TO
NRZ–OUT EAST / EAST 1
G 45Mbit/s SIGNAL VC3 TU3
07
T2TX CONNECTION DT–1Ei AGGREGATE
INSERTION INTO FORMATTING FORMATTING MATRIX TO
C–3 (LPA) (LPT) (HPA) T3TX (LPC) 4 EAST 2
/ AGGREGATE
DT–2Ei
J1 POH TX TUOH
ÇÇ
CONFIGURATION DSP
REGISTERS CK45 B3 GENERATION GENERATION T1TX
C2 AND 4 TO
WEST / WEST 1
PROCESSING
955.100.562 K
G1 T2TX CONNECTION DT–1Wi AGGREGATE
MATRIX TO
T3TX (LPC) 4 WEST 2
TX/RX F2, Z3–Z5 / AGGREGATE
DT–2Wi
PLL45 J1
ÇÇ
B3 POH RX
C2 PROCESSING
DATA G1
3
ASI–IN / DVB–ASI
FPGA DATA DR–1EI
PHYSICAL CLOCK 45Mbit/s SIGNAL FROM
3 INTERFACE POH T1RX 1 4
ASI–OUT / REGENERATION EXTRACT. TU AIS / EAST 1
ÇÇ
(LPT) DETECTION T2RX 2 TU–3 MSP AGGREGATE

CK45 EAST FROM
T3RX 3 PROTECT. 4 EAST 2
AIS1 EXTRAC. / AGGREGATE
PLL27 DR–2EI
CK45 PROT EST
DR–1WI
T3RX 1 4 FROM
TU AIS /
OH–BUS OH–BUS DETECTION 2 TU–3 MSP WEST 1
FROM/TO FUTURE OH–BUS AGGREGATE
AUX–CH BUS F2, Z3–Z5 WEST
MANAGEMENT 3 PROTECT. 4 FROM
EOW DRIVER EXTRAC. / WEST 2
AGG. AIS3 SNCP/I AGGREGATE
OH–BUS DR–2WI
DYNAMIC MATRIX
D45E3 T3TX
CONFIGURATIONS
Ç
Ç
ÇÇ
J1
D45U3 45Mbit/s TRIBUTARY–3 T3RX ALARMS PERFORMANCE CTYPE 0 :– 3 PROT WEST
Figure 82. Block diagram : DVB TRIB.

1
+12.1V +3.3 V
INTERNAL DIALOGUE FOR UNIT TYPE BYTE J1
FROM +5.3V INTERFACE
+5V ALARMS CONFIGURATIONS ACKNOWLEDGMENT
436
POWER FUSES PERFORMANCE MSP PROT EST
3AL 36668 AA AA
–5.5V + 4.5 CK SYNC
SUPPLY
–4.5 V CARD CONTROLLER PROTECTION PROT WEST
CRU PHYSICAL DIALOG WITH
PWALM SELECTION POSITION EQUIPMENT
ACKNOWLED CONTROLLER
REMOTE
INVENTORY
OSWi
CAREM
ISW1,2E
ID 0 – 4:
ISW1,2W
SYNCB
SYNCA
ISWCBN
ISWCAN
LIECB
CKB
CKA
NIECB
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
TO TO ALL FROM FROM/TO

EQ. CONTR. FROM CRU THE UNITS FROM CRU FROM/TO AGGR. EQ. CONTR.
EQ. CONTR.
197 / 436
3.2.7 140/STM1 Switch Tributary Unit

The unit bidirectionally interfaces a 140 Mbit/s plesiochronous or 155 Mbit/s STM–1 synchronous

electrical stream towards the aggregate.
The type of tributary required is software selectable. The Tributary units are interfaced with the external
source through switch module units (see description further on).
The Card Controller sub–unit belongs to this unit and also manages it.
The operating description is split into:
• Transmission
• Reception
• Card Controller
The above are now defined as follows.
TRANSMISSION
The description that follows explains the operations carried out to forward the 140 Mbit/s or 155 Mbit/s
Rx external signal to the Aggregates via the Matrices.
The CMI–IN input signal accesses the Physical Interface (P.I.) where the following functions are carried
out:
• G.703 interface compliant operations

• extraction of the incoming tributary clock,
• generation of the LOS N alarm should the signal fail.
The 155 Mbit/s TRIB. clock is sent to the CRU and the CMI/NRZ decoding is carried out.
The EN 140/155 command selects either the 140 Mbit/s or 155 Mbit/s signal to enable either of the two
routes.
140 Mbit/s
The circuits involved are:

The 140 Mbit/s plesiochronous stream is inserted in a C4 container to be adapted so as to be
transported into the synchronous network.
• HPT (Higher order Path Termination)

The Virtual Container (VC4) is formatted.
The VC4 is structured so that its octets are distributed within a 125 msec. interval (i.e., one
STM–1 period), and consists of the C4 container and POH. The latter containing nine octets
equally distributed within the frame. Figure 83. on page 202 depicts the structure of a VC4 and
of the POH bytes: J1, B3. C2, G1, F2, H4, Z3–Z5.Bytes F2, Z3–Z5 contained in the OH–BUS
dedicated stream are utilized by the AUX unit. The OH–BUS can be accessed through the
FUTURE–BUS interface.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• PG (SA) Pointer Generator of the Section Adaptation.

A fixed pointer value is inserted in the AUOH to structure the AU4 signal.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 198 / 436
436
155 Mbit/s
Only VC4 structured streams are managed.

The circuits involved are:
• RST (Regenerator Section termination)

terminates the first three rows of the SOH extracting data from it.
• MST (Multiplexer Section Termination)

terminates the last five rows of the SOH extracting data from it.
Figure 84. on page 203 illustrates the SOH structure and the bytes making it up.
Bytes E1, E2, F1, Z1–Z2 and the spare bytes are utilized by the AUX unit on the OH–BUS dedicated
stream through the FUTURE BUS unit that gives it a logical tension termination .
It synchronizes the Rx timing signal with the internal one received from the selected CRU unit.
Adaptation is carried out by the AU pointer.
• B3 parity control on the VC4’s POH for performance monitoring operations.
At this point the selected signal is sent to the output (towards the Aggregates via the Matrices) split over
a 38.88 Mbit/s 4–wire bus.
RECEPTION
The signal is received from the Aggregate units over the 38.88 Mbit/s 4–wire bus through the Matrices.
The signal is then managed and forwarded towards the Tributary outputs.
The signal is first of all managed by:
• MSP (Multiplex Section Protection)Selects one of the two signals Main or Spare incoming from
EAST (WEST) side Aggregate. Choice is made between the Main or Spare of the same side
Aggregate.
• SNCP (Path Protection Switching)

Protects the ring network configured streams (path) by means of the alarm detected AIS status
and B3 Parity Control (East or West side selection). Choice is made between the Main or Spare
path coming from the opposite side Aggregate.
Hence one of the two following signals can be accessed:
140 Mbit/s
The circuits concerned are:
• HPT (Higher order Path Termination

Extracts the POH bytes from the VC4 structure and manages them accordingly
Bytes F2, Z3–Z5 are sent to the AUX unit over an OH–BUS dedicated stream through the
FUTURE BUS interface.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Restructures the 140 Mbit/s Tributary by extracting it from Container C4.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 199 / 436
436
155 Mbit/s
• MST (Multiplexer Section Termination)

The bytes of the last five rows of the SOH are inserted.

• RST (Regenerator Section termination)

The bytes of the first three rows of the SOH are inserted.
Figure 84. on page 203 illustrates the bytes making up the SOH structure.
Bytes E1, E2, F1, Z1, Z2 are utilized by the AUX unit on the OH–BUS dedicated stream.
At this point one of the two signals is selected from the two received paths.
The circuitry downstream NRZ/CMI encode, and the Physical Interface (P.I.) executes the G.703 Interface
compliant operations.
Afterwards signal CMI–OUT is forwarded to the Tributary output.
OH BUS
In addition to the above OHBUS streams, on which information is exchanged for data and speech
channels, there is another OHBUS stream for the communication of the K1, K2, S bytes between the
aggregates and tributaries.
S is a serial stream carrying the external alarm criteria. These bytes are utilized for switching operations.
The OHBUS’s are interfaced through the FUTURE BUS DRIVER.
Bidirectional switching is not operative in this release.
Card Controller
The following are the main functions carried out by the Card Controller sub–unit:
Dialog with the Equipment Controller unit

Data on setting options, alarms, actions taken, performance, etc., is exchanged through the LIECB
and NIECB connections thereby permitting the Equipment Controller to manage the operations assigned
to it.
Internal dialog for alarms, configuration, performance

This type of dialog permits to transmit/receive to/from the unit the software setting options stored through
the E2PROM. From the unit are received the alarm and performance criteria. The alarms due to unit
failures light up the red LED (1) (LEDN command), and generates the COSW signal which, added to the
EXT ALM (unit external alarms) and to the power supply alarm PW ALM, generate the OSW switching
command.
LED (2) ON means that the unit is working (WK CH).
Unit type acknowledgement

The Card Controller acknowledges the unit on which it is mounted through signals CTYPE 0–3.
Byte J1 interface
It transmits/receives data on byte J1 (VC4 path trace; the digital data structure recurs with a 64 STM –1
frame periodicity).
Loop Management
Drives two unit loops:
LPT = Equipment loopback (local), permits to transmit, towards the Tx side, the signal received from
the aggregates
LPM = Line loopback (remote), permits to transmit, towards the tributary, the signal received from the
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Tributary Line.
It is possible to activate them via software .
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 200 / 436
436
DCC Management
Internally interfaces the 192 Kbit/s (D1–D3) and 576 Kbit/s (D4–D12) channels of the SOH’s TMN stream
whenever managed by the Equipment Controller unit.
140/155
Selects the type of tributary.
CRU Selection
It selects the CRU (Clock Reference Unit) containing the synch. and timing signals to extract as reference
for the unit involved.
The alarms (ISWCA, ISWCB) received from the two units are processed to enable selection.
Physical position acknowledgement

The physical position of the unit inside the subrack is acknowledged by the Card Controller through signals
ID0–4.
MSP protection
This function permits to select (PROT WEST commands) one of the two signal received from aggregates:
WEST MAIN or WEST SPARE. The reciprocal operation (Prot EAST command) is carried out on
aggregates EAST.
phase) are processed by analyzing the ISW switch criteria received from the aggregate units. These
criteria indicate the presence of a failure on the unit or the detection of alarms along the fiber line.
When two Full Matrix are used, this protection acts as EPS between these units. Signal ISW MA, MB from
Full Matrix are used.
tributaries.
This circuit also operates with the OSW command. The EPS is described in para 3.1.5.2 ”EPS for electrical
+5.3V ± 3%
–5.5V ± 3%
+12.1V ± 3%
The PW ALM alarm is generated in case of malfunctions or voltage failure.
of construction).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 201 / 436
436
261 bytes

J1

B3
C2
G1 C–4
or
F2 VC4 PAYLOAD VC–4
H4
Z3
Z4
Z5
POH OF VC–4
• J1 (path trace) utilized to transmit in a cyclic mode a 64–octet configuration in order to check
the connection continuity. Not operative in this release.
• B3 resulting from the BIP–8 performed on the previous VC–4, before the scrambler.
• C2 (signal label) = the configurations are utilized to indicate if VC–4 is equipped or not or the
payload structure.
• G1 (path status) utilized to transmit information on the link status to the remote terminal.
– four bits contain the FEBE Tx (Far End Block Error) signal, where the decimal numbers
0–8 indicate the number of violations of BIP–8 (the illegal values 9 to 15 indicate absence
of errors);
– one bit to carry the FERF Tx alarm signal and three unused bits
• F2, utilized for the transmission of one channel coming from the AUX unit.
• H4, multiframe indicator (utilized for the payloads structured through TUG) which indicates the
subframe of each multiframe.
• Z3–Z5 can be accessed via AUX board interface.
Figure 83. VC–4 Structure and POH byte contents

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 202 / 436
436
9 COLUMNS (Bytes) 261 COLUMNS (bytes)
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0
RSOH B1 E1 F1
D1 D2 D3
AU POINTERS PAYLOAD STM–1
B2 B2 B2 K1 K2 9 ROWS
D4 D5 D6
MSOH D7 D8 D9
D10 D11 D12
S1 Z1 Z1 Z2 Z2 M1 E2
• the 6 octets of type A1 = 11110110 and A2 = 00101000 constitute the alignment word (48 digits)
• C1 indicates the STM–1 Tributary inside an STM–N signal.
• octet B1, resulting from the BIP–8 procedure performed on the previous frame at the scrambler
output, is inserted into the current frame before scrambling. Not operative.
Octet B1 is utilized to support maintenance of the radio regenerator section (performance
monitoring).
• The three B2 octets, resulting from the BIP–24 encoding performed on the previous frame
without the first three rows of SOH, are inserted into the current frame before scrambling; they
are not estimated again in the repeaters because they are utilized to estimate the BER between
multiplexer.
• E1 and E2 are utilized for service telephone communication between regenerators (E1) and
between muldex and muldex (E2).
• D1–D3 are utilized as a 192Kbit/s channel for data communication (DCC=Data Communication
Channel) between Regenerators in the TMN network. To support interworking with radio
regenerator equipment (RRA).
• D4–D12 are utilized as a 576Kbit/s channel for data communication (DCC) between
multiplexers in the TMN network.
• F1 is utilized to transmit a data or Voice channel received from AUX unit.
• K1 and K2 are utilized for MS Linear Trail Protection signalling channel. The last four K2 bits
are used like MS–RDI multiplex section remote indication (FERF) and AIS alarms between the
multiplexers.
• S1 indicates synchronism status.
• Z1 and Z2 are spare bytes for function not yet defined
• M1 byte, indicates MS–REI Far–end Block Errors (FEBE) for the multiplex section.
• X Byte reserved for national use.
• Bytes are reserved for future international standards, additional national use ect.
• ∆ is a Media Dependent byte (only two are accessible). Not operative.
• • Bytes are not scrambled (like the whole 1ts row)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 84. STM–1 structure and SOH byte contents
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 203 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
LPT
LOOP 140
LOSN LPA HPT PG
INSERT VC4 SHAPING (SA) 4
INTO C4 / EAST 1
07
140/155 140 Mbt/s 4
CMI
ÉÉÉ
Mbit/s CMI–IN / EAST 2
PI F2,Z3,Z5 LPT 4
TO
G.703 NRZ J1,B3,C2 / WEAST 1

MATRIX
4
RST SA POH / WEAST 2
LOOP L MST AU
R–SOH M–SOH SYNCHRONIZATION B3
CLOCK TERMINATION TERMINATION CHECK
EN 140/155 155 Mbit/s
OH–BUS
955.100.562 K
OH–BUS B1,D1–D3 E1,F1 LOOP 155 B3,K2
FUTURE
BUS MANAGEMENT
DRIVER
K1,K2,S B2,K2.D4–D12
:
CKL F2,Z3+Z5 B3,J1,C2,G1
EN 140/155 VCX0
140/155 PROT E
140Mbit/s
LPA HPT
LPM LOOP L 140Mbit/s POH LOOP 4
RICONSTRUCTION EXTRACTION 155 / EAST 1
140/155 CK MPS 4
Mbit/s CMI–OUT CMI / EAST 2
PI PPS 4
G.703 / WEAST 1
FROM
NRZ
MATRIX
RST MST MPS 4

R–SOH M–SOH / WEAST 2
INSERT INSERT
EN 140/155 E2,D4–D12 PROT W
ÉÉÉ
B1,D1+D3 K2
D4–D12
CAREM CONFIGURATION
LPM LPT J1 ALARMS PERFORMANCE 1

:
CTYPE0–3 EN 140/155 :
D1–D3 :
D4–D12
LDN
INTERNAL
UNIT TYPE
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
DCC LOOP BYTE J1 DIALOG FOR EXTALM

ACKNOWLEAGMENT 140/155 MANAGEMENT MANAGEMENT INTERFACE PERFORMANCE
SELECTION CONFIGUURATION PWALM
REMOTE
436
Figure 85. Block diagram: 140/STM–1 Switch tributary
CK
INVENTORY ALARMS
3AL 36668 AA AA
SYNC
COMMUNICATION PHYSICAL MSP
>1
= OSW TO
CRU WITH POSITION EPS PROTECTIONS ALL
CONTROLLER ACKNOWLEAGMENT TRIBUTARY MANAGEMENT UNITS
SELECTION MANAGEMENT
+12.1V EQUIPMENT
+12V COSW
+5.3V 2
FUSES +5V
–5.5V
–5V
CKB
CKA
:
PROT E
ID0–4
LIECB
NIECB
WKCK
ISWT
SYNCB
SYNCA
ISWCBN
ISWCAN
PWALM
PROT W
ISW MA,MB
ISW1,2EN
ISW1,2WN
CRU TRIBS FULL AGGR.

CRU EQ CONTR. MATRIX
204 / 436
3.2.8 Optical STM1 Tributary units
3.2.8.1 S–1.1 and L–1.1 Optical Tributary Unit


This description is applicable to all optical STM1 tributary unit of this release:
• S–1.1 TRIB. FC
• L–1.1 TRIB. FC
• L–1.2 TRIB. FC
L and S letters define the Long or Short distance unit. FC and SC denote the type of connectors used.
The STM–1 Tributary unit acts as a bidirectional interface between the STM–1 optical signal and the
signals received from the WEST or EAST Aggregate units via the Matrix unit.
On the Rx side, the unit performs the functions described in ITU–T Rec.G783 thus inserting the 38Mbit/s
signals received from the Matrix units into the STM–1 synchronous tributary frame to be transmitted to the
optical fiber line.
The reciprocal operations are carried out on the Tx side, i.e., convert the optical signal into an electrical
one, and transmit the 38 Mbit/s signal obtained towards the Matrix Units.
Synchronous streams containing VC4, VC3 or VC12 can be managed through the Full Matrix unit.
The SNCP protection on VC4 streams is not available with this unit, using Connection Card unit.
the Card Controller sub–unit. The latter will inform the ”Equipment Controller” unit through LEDs and other
indications.
The description of the unit operation is subdivided as follows:
• Reception
• Transmission
• Card Controller

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 205 / 436
436
Reception
The unit receives:

• the informative data (DTiW and DTiE) structured as 38.88Mbit/s 4–wire bus from the Matrix unit

• the CKA and CKB 38.88Mbit/s clocks with the relative 2kHz SYNCA and SYNCB synch. signals
from the ”Clock Reference” units
depends on the operating status of the two CRU’s.
The selection is performed through a command received from the Card Controller subunit.
The received data is then processed as specified by ITU–T Rec. G.783.

As primary condition, this data is inserted in the assigned positions inside VC4 pay–load (LPC Lower order
path connection). Afterwards the HPT operation (Higher order path termination) structures the higher
order virtual container VC–4 so as to distribute its octets within a time interval of 125msec. which
corresponds to a one STM –1 frame period.
The VC–4 consists of a VC4 payload and a POH which in turn consists of nine octets equally distributed
within the structure. Figure 83. on page 202 shows the structure of a VC–4 and the J1, B3, C2, G1, F2, H4,
Z3–Z5 bytes of the VC–4’s POH.
Bytes F2, Z3–Z5 are utilized by the AUX unit though the OH–BUS dedicated stream accessible through
the Futurebus unit.
Through the SA (Section Adaptation) operation, the line transmission is synchronized to the stream
received from the Aggregate units via the Matrix. This synchronization is obtained by adding the AUOH
to the VC–4 structure.
SOH bytes are added to complete the STM–1 frame structure. This phase of the procedure is enabled
by the MST operation (Multiplexer Section Termination) to terminate the last 5 rows of SOH, and through
the RST operation (Regenerator Section Termination) to terminate the first 3 rows.
Figure 84. on page 203 shows the SOH structure and the description of the bytes making it up as well as
the STM–1 structure.
Bytes E1, E2, F1, Z1, Z2 are utilized by the AUX unit on the OHBUS dedicated stream through the
FUTURE BUS Interface.
The STM1 outgoing signal is parallel–series converted to obtain a 155.52Mbit/s digital stream and relative
synchronism signal (D155T and CK155T). To this concern the VCXO generates a 155.52MHz clock
phase–locked to the reference clock (PLL) received from the CRU.
Loops LPM (line side) and LPT (station) are possible during the turn–on and maintenance phases.
The two loops are processed by the Card Controller.
The STM–1 signal is then converted by the Tx optical module as stated by ITU–T Rec. G.957
requirements.
This signal is transmitted to the line through connector (5) and it is detailed in ”Chapter 4 Technical
Specification” on page 279.
The unit also supplies the ALS criteria, as defined by ITU–T Rec.G.958, and can preset the three different
optical protection algorithms.
The following commands reset the optical protection:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• manual, LASER ON for 2 seconds every time that push–button (3) is pressed
• automatic, LASER ON for 2 secs every 180 secs.
• manual for test, LASER ON for 90 secs. every time that push–button (3) is pressed for more
than 12 secs.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 206 / 436
436
Command HIGHREFL is used as the LOS alarm (loss of pulses received from the optical receiver) for the
optical protection over the bidirectional fiber ALS can be excluded through strapping.
Moreover the Tx optical module processes the following alarms:

LDFAIL failure inside the optical transmitter.

It intervenes when the Tx power decreases (3dB).
LDDEG LD degradation. It intervenes when the bias current of the optical component
increases vs. the initial value (50%).
MITL loss of pulses transmitted from the LASER owing to causes external to the
transmitter (e.g. interruption of data set to ”0”, intervention of the optical protection
ecc.)
All the alarms are collected by the Card Controller.
Transmission
The unit receives the 155Mbit/s signal from the optical fiber line (connector (3)) .
The Rx optical module uses the APD photodiode to regenerate and convert the signal into an electrical
NRZ signal (D155R) with the relative CK155R synchronism.
The Rx optical module processes the LOS alarm, indicating loss of pulses on the Rx optical fiber line, used
on the optical protection circuit.
The 155Mbit/s clocks and data reach the circuit which 1:4 series–parallel converts and then supplies a
38.88Mbit/s 4–wire bus (D38R) with relative synchronism (CK38R). The CK38R synchronism is sent to
the STX1–PR gate–array and to the two CRU units where it is utilized as an external reference clock.
The STX1–PR gate–array uses the D38R data to perform the reciprocal operations as described by
ITU–T Rec. G783.
The SOH bytes are extracted from the descrambled 38.88Mbit/s signals through RST (Regenerator
Section Termination) and MST (Multiplexer Section Termination) operations.
The RST operation extracts and checks the first 3 rows of SOH:
• Bytes A1 and A2; Alignment word. Loss of alignment generates LOF alarm
• Byte B1; check and BIP8 parity counting
• Bytes D1–D3; termination towards the Card Controller for data channels
• Bytes E1, F1, and any remaining bytes; termination towards the OHBUS
The MST operation extracts and checks the last 5 rows of SOH:
• byte B2; check and BIP24 parity counting. The presence of errors generates the SD (Signal
Degrade) or Excessive BER alarms;
• Bytes K1, K2; APS, MS–AIS and MS–FERF signalling;
• Bytes D4–D12; termination towards the Card Controller TMN;
• termination of the E2, Z1, Z2 bytes and other bytes towards the OHBUS
At this point the SA operation (Section Adaptation) synchronizes the CK38R, (38kHz clock) and CK
(internal clock timing signals). Adaptation occurs through AUOH pointer justification.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 207 / 436
436
The HPT circuit (Higher Order Path Termination) extracts the POH bytes from the VC4 structure.
• J1 is extracted to check connection continuity. Not operative in this release.

• B3 is compared with the BIP8 parity estimated on the previous VC–4, and any detected errors

are sent to the Card Controller

• C2 is extracted to check the VC–4 configuration
• the FEBE indication is extracted from the first half of byte G1, while the FERF indication is
contained in another digit; both indications are sent to the Card Controller
All these bytes and all the bytes that have not been mentioned are sent to the Card Controller of the unit
or to the AUX/EOW unit (F2 Byte).
After having extracted the POH bytes, the HPA (Higher Order Path Adaptation) adapts the line multiframe
with the internal multiframe. Adaptation occurs by transferring the AU pointer movement to the TU pointers
housed in VC4 payload. The last operation performed on the Rx side concerns LPC(Lower Order Path
Connection). The LPC operation permits to route the TU’s contained in the STM1 frame. The DRiE and
DRiW data will be sent to the EAST and WEST Aggregate units via the Matrix unit. All the signals are
structured as a 38.88Mbit/s 4–wire bus with the synchronism reference established by the selected CRU.
Card Controller
The Card Controller carries out the following main functions:
CRU selection
Internal dialog for alarms, configuration and performance
the EEPROM. The alarms and performance criteria are received from the unit.
All the internal unit alarms are collected to activate the red alarm LED (1) and generate the COSW signal
which, added to the EXT ALM (unit external alarms) generates the OSWi switching criteria to send to all
the equipment units.
Information on presettings, criteria, reset, alarms etc., is exchanged with the Equipment Controller unit
Through the CTYPE 0–3 signal the Card Controller can acknowledge the unit on which it is mounted.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 208 / 436
436
Byte J1 interface
It transmits and receives the data of byte J1 utilized as path trace for VC4. The data’s format is repetitive
and has a 64 STM–1 frame periodicity.

DCC byte interface
It transmits (and receives) the DCC bytes D1–D3 and D4–D12 towards (from) the processing circuits of
bytes SOH.
LPM/LPT Processing
Remote (station side) and Local looping (line side) can be performed through the LPM/LPT signals.
the aggregates
Trib. Line.
MSP/APS protection
This function allows for APS Aggregate to select (PROT WEST commands) one of the two signal, Main
or Spare, received from aggregates WEST. The reciprocal operation (Prot EAST command) is carried out
on aggregates EAST.
Selection (during the turn–on phase) and switching operations (during the operating phase) are
processed by analyzing the ISW switch criteria received from the aggregate units. These criteria indicate
the presence of a failure on the unit or the detection of alarms along the fiber line.
When two Full Matrix are used, this protection acts as EPS between these units. Signals ISW MA, MB
from Full Matrix are used.
The APS is described in para 3.1.5.2 ”Simplified Linear APS” on page 119.
tributaries.
This circuit also operates with the OSW command. The EPS is described in para 3.1.5.2 ”EPS for
electrical tributaries” on page 119.
+5.3V 3%
–5.5V 3%
+12.1V 3%

The unit is equipped with an E2PROM (serial protocol) which stores the unit inventory data (codes, series,
date of construction).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 209 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
LDFAIL
DT1Ei 4 AUOH MITL LDDEG
/ E GENERATIOIN
DT2Ei 4 MSP
/ TU D155T
FROM
07
DT1Wi 4 ROUTING PPS
MATRIX / (LPC) W LAST FIVE FIRST THREE TX 5
VC4 AU4 SOH (MST) SOH (RST) 4
DT2Wi 4 MSP FORMATTING FORMATTING / P/S OPTICAL
/ ROWS ROWS MODULE
(HPT) (SA) INSERTION INSERTION
CONVERSION CK155T 155Mbit/s
B3 POHTX
POH TX B2 A1–A2
PROCESSING G P CK
J1 B1 SOH TX D1–D3
: L LDSSHUT
955.100.562 K
MANAGEMENT L
K1,K2 D4–D12
:
C2 G1 H4 155.52MHz
ALS
HOBUS FUTURE
AUX BUS OH BUS OPTICAL
DRIVER MANAGEMENT 3 PROTECTION
B2 A1–A2 MANAGEMENT
LOS
C2 G1 B1 SOH RX
POHRX D1–D3
:
B3
POH RX MANAGEMENT
PROCESSING K1,K2 D4–D12
:
J1 HIGHREFL
4 D38R D155R
DR1Ei 4 / 4
/ AU/TU (SA) LAST FIVE FIRST THREE
POINTERS POH SOH (MST) SOH (RST) S/P RX
DR2Ei 4 TU EXTRACTION TIMING ROWS ROWS CONVERSION OPTICAL
TO / SYNCH. (HPT) SYNCH. CK155R
MATRIX ROUTING (HPA) EXTRACTION EXTRACTION MODULE 155Mbit/s
DR1Wi 4 (LPC)
/
DR2Wi 4 CK38R
/ CK
LPT LPM
PERFORMANCE REMOTE
CONFIGURATIONS INVENTORY
LPM LPT CTYPE 0 –: 3 J1 :
D1–D3 :
D1–D12
+12.1V +12V 1 PROT PROT
POWER +5.3V +5V W E
FUSES ALARMS
SUPPLY
Figure 86. Block diagram: Optical Trib.

–5.5V –5V
POWALIM
LPM/LPT UNIT TYPE BYTE J1 BYTE DCC
PWALM MANAGEMENT ACKNOWLED INTERFACE INTERFACE INTERNAL
DIALOG FOR MPS /APS
436
ALARMSÙ PROTECTION
3AL 36668 AA AA
CARD CONTROLLER CONFIGURATIONS MANAGEMENT
SYNC
CK
PERFORMANCE
SELECTION POSITION EQUIPMENT
ACKNOWLED CONTROLLER ESCT UNIT
ISW1,2E
EXT ALM
CKB
CKA
>
= 1 OSW
COSWi
ISWT
LIECB
NIECB
ID 0 –: 4
SYNCB
SYNCA
ISW1,2W
ISWCBN
ISWCAN
ISW MA,MB
CAREM
EQ. CONTR. TO ALL TRIBS. FULL AGG.

CRU EQ. CONTR. CRU THE UNITS MATRIX
210 / 436
3.2.8.2 S–1.1 and L–1.1 Optical Tributary 600

This description is applicable to the following optical STM1 tributary unit:

• S–1.1 TRIB. 600 FC/SC
• L–1.1 TRIB. 600 FC/SC
• L–1.2 TRIB. 600 FC
L and S letters define the Long or Short distance unit. FC and SC denote the type of connectors used.
The STM–1 Tributary unit acts as a bidirectional interface between the STM–1 optical signal and the
signals received from the WEST or EAST Aggregate units via the Matrix unit.
On the Rx side, the unit performs the functions described in ITU–T Rec. G783 to insert the 38Mbit/s
signals, received from the Matrix units, into the STM–1 synchronous tributary frame to transmit to the
optical fiber line.
The reciprocal operations are carried out on the Tx side, i.e., convert the optical signal into an electrical
one, and transmit the 38 Mbit/s signal obtained towards the Matrix Units.
This unit allows SNCP protection on VC4 stream also with Connection Card Unit.
All levels of VC are managed by means of the Full Matrix Unit.
In this unit LPC circuit even present are not utilised.
the Card Controller sub–unit which will signal it through LEDs and other indications to the ”Equipment
Controller” unit.
Unit operation is subdivided into:
• Reception
• Transmission
• Card Controller

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 211 / 436
436
Reception
The unit receives:

• the informative data (DTiW and DTiE), structured as 38.88Mbit/s 4–wire bus, from the Matrix

unit
• the CKA and CKB 38.88Mbit/s clocks and relative 2kHz SYNCA and SYNCB synch. signals
from the ”Clock Reference” units
depends on the operating status of the two CRU’s and is performed through a command received from
the Card Controller subunit.
The received data is then processed as specified by ITU–T Rec. G.783.
The Aggregate and Matrix units are logically connected through the four ”backpanel” physical interfaces.
The Multiplex Section Protection module (MSP) protects the streams extracted from the aggregates.
Path Protection Switching (SNCP) protects the ring–network configured streams extracted from the
Aggregates through the detection of the Path–AIS and parity control (B3).
Bytes F2, Z3–Z5 are utilized by the AUX unit on the OH–BUS dedicated stream through the Futurebus
interface.
Through the SA (Section Adaptation) operation the line transmission is synchronized to the stream
received from the Aggregate units via the Matrix. Synchronization is obtained through the AUOH’s pointer
on the AU–4 structure.
SOH bytes are added to complete the STM–1 frame structure. This phase of the procedure is enabled by
the MST operation (Multiplexer Section Termination) to terminate the last 5 rows of SOH, and through the
RST operation (Regenerator Section Termination) to terminate the first 3 rows. Figure 84. on page 203
shows the SOH structure and the description of the bytes making it up as well as the STM–1 structure.
The MST inserts the following overhead bytes:
• D4/D12 incoming from the Card Controller or from the OH–BUS D (Clear channel)
• E2 incoming from the OH–BUS S/P
• B2 locally calculated
• third byte Z2, contains the number of B2 parity errors detected on the Tx side
• first byte Z1, whose less significative nibble contains the timing marker data processed by the
Card Controller
The RST realizes the scrambler, adds the alignment word and inserts:
• the locally calculated B1 parity
• bytes E1 and F1 coming from the OH–BUS S/P
• bytes D1/D3 coming from the Card Controller
Bytes E1, E2, F1, Z1, Z2 are utilized by the AUX unit on the OHBUS dedicated stream through the
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
FUTURE BUS Interface.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 212 / 436
436
The STM1 outgoing signal is parallel–series converted to obtain a 155.52 Mbit/s digital stream and relative
synchronism signal (D155T and CK155T). To this purpose the VCXO generates a 155.52MHz clock
phase–locked to the reference clock (PLL) received from the CRU.
Loops LPM (line side) and LPT (station side) are performed during the turn–on and maintenance phases.
The two loops are processed by the Card Controller.
The STM–1 signal is then converted by the Tx optical module as stated by ITU–T Rec. G.957.
This signal is transmitted to the line through connector (5) and its characteristics are detailed in Chapter
4 ”Technical Specifications” on page 279 .
The unit also supplies the ALS criteria, as defined by ITU–T Rec.G.958, and can preset the three different
optical protection algorithms.
The following commands reset the optical protection:
• manual, LASER ON for 2 seconds everytime that push–button (3) is pushed
• automatic, LASER ON for 2 secs every 180 secs.
• manual for test, LASER ON for 90 secs. everytime that push–button (3) is pushed for more than
12 secs.
Command HIGHREFL is used as the LOS alarm (loss of pulses received from the optical receiver) for the
optical protection over the bidirectional fiber.
ALS can be excluded through strapping.
Moreover the Tx optical module processes the following alarms:
LDFAIL failure inside the optical transmitter.

It intervenes when the Tx power decreases (3dB).
LDDEG LD degradation. It intervenes when the bias current of the optical component increases
vs. the initial value (50%).
MITL loss of pulses transmitted from the LASER owing to causes external to the transmitter
(e.g. interruption of data set to ”0”, intervention of the optical protection ecc.)
All the alarms are collected by the Card Controller.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 213 / 436
436
Transmission
The unit receives the 155Mbit/s NRZ signal from the optical fiber line (connector (3) ).

The Rx optical module uses the APD photodiode to regenerate and convert the signal into an electrical

NRZ signal (D155R) with relative CK155R synchronism.
The Rx optical module processes the LOS alarm, indicating loss of pulses on the Rx optical fiber line, used
on the optical protection circuit.
The 155Mbit/s clock and data reach the circuit which 1:4 series–parallel converts and supplies a
38.88Mbit/s 4–wire bus (D38R) with relative synchronism (CK38R). The CK38R synchronism is sent to
the STX1–PR gate–array and to the two CRU units where it is utilized as external reference clock.
The STX1–PR gate–array uses the D38R data to perform the reciprocal operations as described by
ITU–T Rec. G783.
The SOH bytes are extracted from the descrambled 38.88Mbit/s signals through RST (Regenerator
Section Termination) and MST (Multiplexer Section Termination) operations.
The RST operation extracts and checks the first 3 rows of SOH:
• Bytes A1 and A2; Alignment word. Loss of alignment generates LOF alarm
• Byte B1; check and BIP8 parity counting
• Bytes D1–D3; termination towards the Card Controller for data channels
• Bytes E1, F1, and any remaining bytes; termination towards the OHBUS
The MST operation extracts and checks the last 5 rows of SOH:
• byte B2; check and BIP24 parity counting. The presence of errors generates the SD (Signal
Degrade) or Excessive BER alarms;
• Bytes K1, K2; APS, MS–AIS and MS–FERF signalling;
• Bytes D4–D12; termination towards the Card Controller TMN;
• termination of the E2, Z1. Z2 bytes and other bytes towards the OHBUS
At this point, the SA operation (Section Adaptation) synchronizes the CK38R, (38kHz clock) and CK
(internal clock timing signals). Adaptation occurs through AUOH pointer justification.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 214 / 436
436
Card Controller
The Card Controller carries out the following main functions:

CRU selection
This interface selects the CRU, Main or Spare (Clock Reference Unit) from which the synchronism and
timing signals to be used as reference for the unit are extracted. In order to provide the selection criteria,
this interface processes the alarms received from the two CRU’s, namely:
Internal dialog for alarms, configuration and performance
the EEPROM. The alarms and performance criteria are received from the unit.
All the internal unit alarms are collected to activate the red alarm LED (1) and generate the COSW signal
which, added to the EXT ALM (unit external alarms), generate the OSWi switching criteria to send to all
the equipment units.
Information on presettings, criteria, reset, alarms etc., is exchanged with the Equipment Controller unit
Through the CTYPE 0–3 signal the Card Controller can acknowledge the unit on which it is mounted.
DCC byte interface
This interface transmits (and receives) the DCC bytes D1–D3 and D4–D12 towards (from) the processing
circuits of bytes SOH.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 215 / 436
436
LPM/LPT Processing
Remote (station side) and Local (line side) looping is performed through the LPM/LPT signals.


the aggregates
Trib. Line.
MSP/APS protection
This function allows for the APS Aggregate, to select (PROT WEST commands) one of the two signal
received from aggregates WEST, Main or Spare. The reciprocal operation (Prot EAST command) is
carried out on aggregates EAST.
When two Full Matrix units are used, this protection acts as EPS between these units. Signals ISW MA,
MB from Full Matrix are used.
The APS Tributary protection utilizes the ISWT command received from other tributaries.
The ISWT also operates with the previously defined OSW command. The APS is described in para 3.1.5.2
”Simplified Linear APS” on page 119.
On a 1+1 configured STM–1 Tributary network (APS) the green LED (2) on the front panel indicates that
the unit is operating. Its activation is handled by the Card Controller.
+5.3V 3%
–5.5V 3%
+12.1V 3%
of construction).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 216 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
PROT E LDFAIL
P–AIS–E MITL LDDEG
DT1Ei 4 D155T
07
/ E FIRST THREE
MSP MSP FIRST THREE TX 5
DT2Ei 4 LAST FIVE SOH (RST) SOH (RST) 4
FROM / SOH (MST) ROWS / P/S OPTICAL
PPS ROWS MODULE 155Mbit/s
MATRIX DT1Wi 4 W ROWS INSERTION INSERTION
CONVERSION CK155T
/ INSERTION
DT2Wi 4 MSP MSP
/
B2 A1–A2
G P CK
B1 SOH TX D1–D3
: L LDSSHUT
955.100.562 K
PROT W P–AIS–W L
K1,K2 MANAGEMENT D4–D12
:
155.52MHz
E2 E1 ALS
Z1,Z2 F1
OPTICAL
3 PROTECTION
HOBUS FUTURE MANAGEMENT
AUX BUS OH BUS LOS
DRIVER MANAGEMENT
B2 A1–A2
B1 SOH RX D1–D3
: HIGHREFL
MANAGEMENT
K1,K2 D4–D12
:
D155R
DR1Ei 4 4
/ 4 D38R S/P RX
DR2Ei 4 LAST FIVE FIRST THREE / CONVERSION OPTICAL
TO / (SA) SOH (MST) SOH (RST) CK155R
MATRIX TIMING MODULE 155Mbit/s
DR1Wi 4 75ohm ROWS ROWS
/ SYNCH EXTRACTION EXTRACTION
MATCHING
DR2Wi 4
/
CK38R
LPT LPM
CK
PERFORMANCE REMOTE EQ.
CONFIGURATIONS INVENTORY CONTR.
LPM LPT CTYPE 0 –: 3 J1 :
D1–D3 :
D1–D12
+12.1V +12V 1 2
PROT PROT
POWER +5.3V +5V W E
FUSES ALARMS
SUPPLY –5.5V –5V
POWALIM
LPM/LPT UNIT TYPE BYTE J1 BYTE DCC
PWALM MANAGEMENT ACKNOWLED INTERFACE INTERFACE INTERNAL
DIALOG FOR MPS /APS
436
ALARMSÙ PROTECTION
3AL 36668 AA AA
CARD CONTROLLER CONFIGURATIONS MANAGEMENT
Figure 87. Block diagram: Optical Trib. S/L–1.1 600 FC/SC

SYNC
CK
PERFORMANCE
SELECTION POSITION EQUIPMENT
ACKNOWLED CONTROLLER ESCT UNIT
ISW1,2E
EXT ALM
CKB
CKA
>
= 1 OSW
COSWi
ISWT
LIECB
NIECB
ID 0 –: 4
SYNCB
SYNCA
ISW1,2W
ISWCBN
ISWCAN
ISW MA,MB
CAREM
EQ. CONTR. TO ALL TRIBS. FULL AGG.

CRU EQ. CONTR. CRU THE UNITS MATRIX
217 / 436
3.2.9 Connection Card unit
This unit physically connects the signals of 10 tributaries max. (38.88 Mbit/s 4–wire bus each) to the
STM–4/STM–16 main WEST/EAST aggregates.

An additional Connection Card must be provided to perform all the connections. This one is not the Spare
of the former. In order to perform the connections towards the Aggregates, both Connection Card Units
are required.
This unit allows the use of the 140/STM1 SWITCH TRIBUTARY and STM–1 optical Tributary only.
The STM–1 signal is managed at VC4 level. If the STM1 signals contain VC12 and VC3 levels they will
not be processed but only transferred.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 218 / 436
436
3.2.10 Matrix unit: Full Matrix Unit & 16x16 Matrix Units

The following description is suitable for both units named in the title. The new 16x16 Matrix Unit is an
hardware upgrade for the present Full Matrix Unit. For the future release this unit is already preset to
support the new standard ITU–T management functions (J1/J2, TIM, POM, SNCP/N). In current release
these new features are not performed, therefore the ”16x16 Full Matrix Unit ” and the Full Matrix Unit carry
out the same functions.
Unit streams VC4, VC3, VC12, corresponding to sixteen STM–1 bidirectional signals, are provided with
an AU4 payload to be cross–connected.
The AU4 interfaces are:
• 10 for the tributaries, i.e.: max. 8 regular + max. 2 spare
• 16 for the aggregates, i.e.: 8 regular (4 for EAST1, 4 for WEST1) and 8 spare (4 for EAST2, 4
for WEST2). When STM–16 Aggregate is used and no VC12/VC3 SNCP rings are present the
connections can be distributed any where, and not only 4 East + 4 West.
When STM–16 Aggregate is used and the Enhanced Connectivity is activated (cfr. Line Shelf
Connection Configuration – Operator’s Manual) and even if VC12/VC3 SNCP rings are
present, the connections can be distributed any where, and not only 4 East + 4 West.
(See para. 3.1.3.1 ”STM–16 Aggregate differences (1661 SM–C)” on page 107).
Each AU4 signal is connected over a 38.88 Mbit/s 4–row bus.
The following connections are established between:
• Aggregates and Tributaries (DROP/INSERT)
• Aggregates and Aggregates (both pass–through between the two sides and Cross Connection
of a VC/AU inside the same side Aggregate)
• Tributaries and Tributaries (CROSS CONNECTION)
The description has been split into:
• cross–connection
• Card Controller and ASIC Controller
• Power Supply and Remote Inventory
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 219 / 436
436
Specifically:
• Cross Connection

The operations required to cross–connect the various units depend on the type of interfacing

unit and on the type of cross–connection to establish.
The following structures can be distinguished:
a) Connection with aggregates or STM–1 synchronous tributaries containing the VC12

and/or VC3 to process. These streams can be terminated towards the plesiochronous
tributaries or rerouted with other STM–1’s trib. or aggregates.
The VC12 and VC3 of the STM1 electrical trib. can also be processed. When using the
optical STM1 trib., the relevant mapping/demapping functions are disabled and performed
on the full matrix.
b) Connection with aggregates or STM–1 synchronous tributaries for which VC4 demapping
has not been requested.
In this case the VC4 can be fully rerouted or, if containing C4, can be terminated onto the
140 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributary.
c) Connection with 2/34/45/140 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries.
The various structures need various functional blocks.
To cross–connect it might be necessary to connect together different structures (e.g., type–a

aggregate signals to connect to type–c synchronous tributaries), hence both are used.
The following Rx streams are indicated for all the cited structures, see Figure 89. on page 225:
• sixteen STM–1 signals from the Rx side of the EAST 1/2, WEST 1/2 Aggregates (MSP circuit)
• ten STM–1 signals from the Tx side of the 10 plesiochronous or synchronous tributaries,
(HWP, Rx side).
The purpose of the MSP is to select, for each EAST/WEST sides, the Aggregate regular operating streams
instead of the spare ones (eight STM–1 streams leaving MSP vs. the 16 incoming ones).
The HWP circuit must select the 8 regular streams from the 10 streams received from the tributaries.
The resulting sixteen STM–1 signals are individually handled by the circuitry down stream.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 220 / 436
436
The above structures are now defined as follows:
• Structure a)
The following circuits are used if the received signals have to be structured:
– PI (SA) – Pointer Interpreter of Section Adaptation. Identifies the AU4 pointer in order to
locate the start of VC4
– HPT – (Higher order Path Termination)

Terminates the POH’s of VC4 by carrying out the proper operations (see Figure 83. on
page 202).
Bytes F2, Z3, Z4 and Z5 are sent towards the AUX unit via the OH–BUS dedicated stream
(Futurebus interface)
– HPA – (Higher order Path Adaptation)

Processes the TU pointers of VC12 and VC3 to generate the TU pointers from position
”0” of VC4 (as if AUOH pointed at ”0”).
– LPOM – (Lower order Path Overhead Monitoring)

One of the POH’s of VC12 and VC3 are checked to count and control the BIP of POH
(B3 for the POH of VC3, or BIP2 for the POH of VC12).
– LPC – (Lower order Path Connection)

This circuit space/time switches the TU12s and TU3s (max. of 1008 TU12) and chooses
the structure (a, b or c) towards which the signals will be sent.
The following circuits are implemented to transmit towards the STM–1 signals (aggregates or
synchronous tributaries):
– HPT – (Higher order Path Termination)

Inserts the POH of VC4 to fill up the Higher Order Virtual Container (see Figure 83. on
page 202).
Bytes F2, Z3, Z4 and Z5 are received from the AUX unit via the OH–BUS dedicated stream
(Futurebus Interface)
– PG (SA) – Pointer Generator of Section Adaptation.

It generates the new pointer AUOH for the VC4 (AU4 structure of Figure 88. on page 222).
It is set at ”0”.
• Structure b)
– PI (SA) – Pointer Interpreter of Section Adaptation.

Identifies the AU4 pointer to locate the beginning of VC4.
– HPOM – (Higher order Path Overhead Monitoring)

Monitors the POH of VC4 by checking bytes J1, B3, C2, G1 only (see Figure 83. on page
202).
– HPC – (Higher order Path Connection)

This circuit switches the AU4 structure by selecting the structure towards which the signals
will be sent.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The following circuits are implemented to transmit towards the STM–1 signals (aggregates
or synchronous tributaries):
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 221 / 436
436
– HUG – (Higher order Unequipped Generator)
This circuit is active only when the VC4 are not equipped, by setting default configurations
for the AUOH pointer and payload of VC4 (the structure is AU4, see Figure 88. on page
222).

AUOH
Figure 88. AU4 structure
• Structure c)
In this case the information received from the tributaries is directly sent to the
cross–connection circuit.
Two possibilities can be distinguished:
– For the 2 and 34 Mbit/s Tributaries: the relevant TU12 and TU3 are sent to the LPC with
complete cross–connection like that of structure a).
– For the 140 Mbit/s Tributaries: the relevant AU4 are sent to the HPC with signals
cross–connected like that of structure b).
The signals exiting the cross–connection will be directly routed towards the interface circuits
to be transmitted to the plesiochronous tributaries.
The interface circuits utilize the signals of structure a), b), c). Therefore:
– Sixteen STM1’s can be connected to the Tx side of the EAST/WEST Aggregates towards
the regular and spare (1, 2) paths of both sides.
– Eight STM1’s can be connected to the Rx side of 10 Tributaries (max.)

This function enables the use of the Rx side of the HWP circuit to transmit eight STM1’s
towards 10 possible tributaries (8 regular + 2 spare).
The unit is timed by two 38.88 MHz clocks (CKA, CKB) and relevant synch. signals SYNCA,
SYNCB received from the two CRU units.
The selection of one of the two synch. sources depends on the state of the two CRU’s.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 222 / 436
436
• Card Controller and ASIC Controller
The Card Controller carries out the following functions:


Information on setting options, criteria, reset, alarms, etc., is exchanged with the ESCT
Equipment Controller unit through the LIECB and NIECB connections.
Unit Configuration storing
Through signals ID 0–4 the Card Controller acknowledges the position of the unit inside the
subrack.
Dialog with ASIC Controller
This function allows the Equipment Controller to dialog with the ASIC Controller.
Led and switch commands
The signals exchanged with the ASIC Controller light up the red LED (1) to indicate local unit
alarms, and activate the switching command OSW to be sent to the other units.
OSW is also operated by ISWM received from other Matrixes for the Matrix EPS. This function
is described in para. 3.1.5.3 ”EPS for Full Matrix and CRU” on page 128.
The ASIC Controller carries out the following operations:
Dialog with the Card Controller
Through this dialog the ASIC controller executes the operations required by the Equipment
Controller.
Internal/External Alarm Detection
Performance Monitoring
Command and reading of Software Settings
Generation of SNCP switch commands and AIS

Commands generated internally for alarms detection
CRU selection
This interface selects the CRU (clock reference unit) from which the synchronism and timing
signals to be used as reference for the unit are extracted. In order to provide the selection
criteria, this interface processes the alarms received from the two CRU’s, namely:
ISWCA : internal alarm received from the CRU A;

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ISWCB : internal alarm received from the CRU B;
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 223 / 436
436
Byte J1 interface
This interface transmits and receives the data of byte J1 utilized as path trace for VC4.
Data structure recurs with a 64 STM – 1 frame periodicity.

Not operative in this release

MSP and HWP Protection
The PROT signal are generated to protect the Aggregate or tributaries streams when receiving
ISW from the Aggregate or Trib..
The power supply voltages present at the input of the Full Matrix unit are:
+5.3V 3%
–5.5V 3%
+12.1V 3%
The unit is equipped with an E2PROM ( serial protocol) to store the unit inventory data
(codes, series, date of construction).
This store is power supplied with a service voltage and connected to the Equipment Controller
unit which utilizes it for the Remote Inventory.
The CAREM signal indicates the presence of the board (ground contact) and it is directly
connected to the Equipment Controller.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 224 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
OH BUS FUTURE OH–BUS * F2
(AUX) BUS DRIVER INTERFACE Z1,Z2,Z3
07
STRUCTURE C (2,34 Mbit/s) EAST1
PROT
W1–4
: 1–4
:
4 AGG.E * * EAST2
/
EAST1 / 1–4
: 1–4
: 1–4
:
/
/
MSP WEST1
955.100.562 K
EAST2 : SELECT PI (SA) LPC
AGG.O STRUCT.A LPOM PG (SA) E1–4
: 1–4
:
AU4 VC4 HPT HPA CHECK TU HPT
WEST1 : 1–4
: BEGIN POH–VC4 TU CONNECTION AUOH
BIP–POH POH–VC4 WEST2
TO Tx AGG. SIDE
CHECK EXTRACTION POINTER OF VC3 SELECTION INSERT. POINTER

WEST2 : –VC12 INSERT I 1–4
:
FROM Rx AGG. SIDE

STRUCT.B 1 N
TRIB. T
FROM HWP–Rx 1–8
: 16 E
Tx 1–10
: SELECT R
TRIB. AU4 F
SIDE A
C TRIB.
PI (SA) E 1–8
:
VC4 HPOM
BEGIN MONITOR HWP
:
PROT HPC
CHECK POH–VC4 AU4 Tx
TO Rx TRIB. 1–10
FROM ISW CONNECTION

AGG. AND 1 SELECTION
TRIBS.
SIDE
16
STRUCTURE C ( 140 Mbit/s)
PROT
CKA CK
CK ISWT
1 TRIB.
SYNCA SYNC OSW
TO ALL
SYWB MSP–HWP UNITS
FROM CRU
PROT PROTECTIONS
LED AND
BYTE J1 SWITCH
Figure 89. Block diagram: Full Matrix

INTERFACE COMMANDS LIECB
C C
REMOTE O DIALOG
EQ. ALARMS O WITH
INVENTORY N N
CONTR. INTERNAL DIALOG DIALOG A T EQUIPMENT
PERFORMANCE A T WITH CONTROLLER
UNIT S R WITH S R
CARD
436
CONFIGURATIONS MANAGEMENT I O ASIC I O
CONTROLLER
3AL 36668 AA AA
+5,3V +5V C L CONTROLLER C L
PPS SWITCHINGS L L
–5,3V FUSES –5V E E
AIS R R
+12V PHISICAL
+121,1V CTYPE UNIT POSITION ID0
CRU : ACKNOWLED.
SELECT. 0–3 TYPE
PWALM ACKNOWLEDGE
CKSEL
EQ. CAREM
CONTR.
ISWCA
ISWCB
FROM CRU
225 / 436
3.2.11 STM4 Aggregate unit

This description is applicable to all the STM–4 Aggregate units of this release.

The units can be distinguished by letters L and S defining their dependence on optical components used
The Tx/Rx unit optical connectors can be accessed from the unit’s front coverplate.
The units identified by DIN or SC denote type of connector used, the other units use FC–PC connectors.
The units which operate in the 2nd window are indicated with 4.1, those operating in the third window with
4.2.. For the ”JE” Aggregate some optical interface characteristics are improved.
The STM4 Aggregate unit acts as a bidirectional interface between the STM–4 signal and the AU4
structured signals (Tx/Rx matrix–connected signals and the STM4 aggregates of the opposite side).
The Card Controller subunit belongs to the cited unit and, upon interfacing the Equipment Controller unit
executes management functions, i.e., alarms checks, configuration commands, cross–connections etc..
• Transmission
• Reception
• OH bus
• Card Controller

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 226 / 436
436
Transmission
When using the Connection Card the unit receives:

• 10 signals (DTT1–10) from the connection card unit. These signals concern the Tributary units,
including spares
• 8 signals (DTB1–4A and DTB1–4B) from the two STM4 Aggregate units of the opposite side.
These signals are the streams transiting from the opposite Rx side.
Each of the above signals are 38.88 Mbit/s 4–wire bus structured and represent an AU4–mapped signal.
The MSP–HWP block selects the main or spare Trib. and Aggregate of the opposite side. Since the STM–4
signal contains four AU4 structures the HPC circuit selects 4 signals from those available.
When using the Full Matrix the unit receives:
• Four signal (DTT 1:4) from Matrix A and four (DTT 6:9) from Matrix B, already selected and
managed by the Full Matrix unit.
The function of MSP is to select between A or B Full Matrix.
The HPC circuit is not used (function performed in the Full Matrix).
Bytes SOH (9 rows and 36 columns) are inserted into circuits MST, RST as shown in Figure 90. on page
231.
The Multiplexing section bytes are inserted into MST, i.e.:
• D4–D12, K1–K2, B2, S1, M1
The Regeneration section bytes are inserted into RST, i.e.:
• D1–D3, B1, C1
• alignment bytes A1, A2.
Circuits MST, RST also contain the SOH bytes of the speech, data, service channels etc., received from
the AUX unit via the 5.2 Mbit/s bus.
The circuits that follow scramble the signal but not the first line of SOH.
At this point the signals are Parallel/Serial converted to obtain the STM–4 stream. To do this two
consecutive operations are necessary:
• the first – obtains eight 77.76 Mbit/s streams from the sixteen 38.88 Mbit/s ones;
• the second – serializes them at 622.08 Mbit/s (signal D622T).
Note that the four AUG structures are byte–interleaved in the STM–4 structure (see Figure 91. on page
232) with fixed phase relationship vs. the same multiple signal.
Serialization takes place through the clock extracted from the 622.08 MHz VCO. The latter is
phase–locked to the 38.88 MHz clock coming from the two Clock Reference 150/600 units
(CKA,B and relevant synchronism SYA,B).
The selection of one of the two synch. sources, utilized to generate the unit timing signals (CK38T),
depends on the operating status of the two CRU’s.
The end operation is the electro/optical conversion achieved through the Tx Optical Module, and the
resulting signal can be accessed at connector (4) on the front cover.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) facility is also provided in compliancy with ITU–T Rec. G.958
through the Card Controller’s software settings and management.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 227 / 436
436
Reception
The unit receives the 622 Mbit/s signal from the optical line. This signal can be accessed at the front cover
connector (3).

The Rx optical module electrically converts the signal (D622R) by regenerating it and extracting the
CK622R clock.
The S/P circuit splits the four streams of the STM–4. Each stream is represented by a 38.88 Mbit/s 4–wire
bus (16 in all). This operation is achieved by intermediate paralleling a 77.76 Mbit/s 8–wire bus.
The CK38R clock is generated through further subdivisions and sent to the two CRU units. The circuit that
follows checks alignment (byte A1, A2) and synchronism.
After Descrambling, circuits RST and MST extract the SOH bytes.
RST D1–D3, C1, B1 Byte extraction from the regeneration section (BIP8 estimate and
comparison with the received bytes)
MST D4–D12, S1, M1, K1–K2, B2 Byte extraction from the regeneration section (BIP96
estimate and comparison with the received bytes)
Additionally, the SOH bytes are also extracted from both of the above circuits and sent to the AUX unit via
the 5.2 Mbit/s SOH bus.
The SA circuit synchronizes the extracted timing (CK38R) with the local clock received from the selected
CRU.
Adaptation is through justification of the AU4’s pointer (pointer interpretation and generation).
Hence byte B3 is extracted from the POH of each VC4.
When using the Connection Card unit the HPC circuit cross–connects the four AU–4’s towards the
tributaries and/or towards the Aggregates on the opposite side.
The MSP–HWP block selects the tributaries (DRT 1–10) or aggregate main/spare on the opposite side
(8 transit signals DRBA1–4 and DRBB1–4) toward swich information will be sent. Each AU–4 is a 38.88
Mbit/s 4–row bus structured signals.
When Full Matrix is used the DRT 1:4 and DRT 6:9 connect the signals AU–4 towards matrix A and B.
MSP and HPC functions are performed in the Full Matrix.
OH bus
A 4.86 MHz OHBUS stream is generated to achieve bidirectional APS between aggregates and
tributaries. The STM4 Aggregate unit transmits/receives the K1, K2 and S bytes over such stream.
S is a serial stream containing the LOS, LOF, EX–BER, MS–AIS, MS–FERF alarms. tributaries. The
OH–BUS is interfaced by the Future Bus Driver.
Bidirectional switching is not operative in this release.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 228 / 436
436
Card Controller
The Card Controller sub–unit carries out the following operations:

• Dialog with the Equipment controller unit

Information on setting options, criteria, loop, reset, switching is exchanged with the Equipment
Controller unit through the LIECB and NIECB connection.
• Alarms, Configuration, Performance Internal dialog
This dialog permits to transmit/receive the E2PROM stored unit software settings. Alarms and
performance are received from the unit.
The alarms indicating local unit failure activate the red LED (1) (LEDN command). Signals
COSW, added to EXT ALM (sum of external alarms LOS, LOF, MS–AIS, MS–FERF, EXBER),
generate the OSW switching command.
LED (2) ON denotes that the unit is in–service (command WK CH).
CRU selection
This interface selects the CRU (clock reference unit) from which the synchronism and timing
signals to be used as reference for the unit are extracted. In order to provide the selection
criteria, this interface processes the alarms received from the two CRU’s, namely:
• Loop Management
Enables two loop commands on the unit:
L622, line side loop The STM4 Rx signal (D622R) and relevant clock (CK622R) can be
simultaneously transmitted towards the line and AU–4 Rx side.
L77, station side loop The 77 Mbit/s Tx data (inside the P/S Converter) can be simultaneously
sent back over the Rx side towards the AU–4 side and the Tx line side.
• DCC Management
Locally interfaces the 192 Kbit/s channels (D1–D3) and 576 Kbit/s channels (D4–D12) of the
SOH’s TMN stream.
• Unit type acknowledgment
Through the CTYPE 0–3 signal the Card Controller can acknowledge the unit on which it is
mounted.
• Optical Protection Management
This facility enables the ALS performance as specified by ITU–T Rec.G.958, i.e., shuts down
Laser when no optical signal is received.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 229 / 436
436
Laser can be reset through the following commands:
– manual, Laser ON for 2 secs. every time push–button (5) is pressed.

– automatic, Laser ON for 2 secs. every 180 secs.

– manual for test: Laser ON for 9 secs. every time push–button (5) is pressed for more than

12 seconds.
• Protection Management
The Protection function is enabled through the ISW commands which cause switching between
regular and spare units.
The ISW commands are received from:
1) the other Aggregate on the same side (to know the alarm conditions, not operative in this
release)
2) the two full matrixes (to select the one to use)
3) the trib. (to select the one to use).
The protection signals (PROT) are generated.
This function is used for APS Tributary protection utilizing the ISW command received from the
aggregates of the same side
This circuit also operates with the OSW command. The APS is described in para 3.1.5.4
”Simplified Linear APS” on page 130.
Through signals ID 0–4 the Card Controller acknowledges the position of the unit inside the
subrack.
+5.3V 3%
–5.5V 3%
+12.1V 3%
The voltages are protected through fuses.
The unit is equipped with an E2PROM (serial protocol) to store the unit inventory data (codes,
series, date of construction).
This store is power supplied with a service voltage and connected to the Equipment Controller
unit which utilizes it for the Remote Inventory.
The CAREM signal indicates the presence of the board (ground contact) and it is directly
connected to the Equipment Controller.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 230 / 436
436
36 Bytes
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 C1 C1 C1 C1
RSOH
B1 E1 F1
D1 D2 D3
9 Bytes
B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
MSOH
D4 D5 D6
D7 D8 D9
D10 D11 D12
S1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z2 Z2 M1 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 E2
LEGENDA
A1–A2 Alignment word A1=11110110, A2=00101000. Utilizes all slots of the four STM–1
C1 Indicates the STM–1 stream inside STM4.
B1 BIP8 calculation result on the previous frame (after scrambling). Utilized to assess error
rate between regenerators. Uses slot of 1st STM–1.
E1 EOW operations between regenerators. Uses slot of 1st STM–1.
F1 Available for the user (data from AUX unit). Uses slot of 1st STM–1.
D1–D3 192 Kbit/s channel for DCC on TMN network. Uses slot of 1st STM–1.
B2 Result of BIP4x24 calculation on previous frame exempt of three RSOH rows. Used to
assess error rate between multiplexers. Uses all slots.
K1,K2 For MS Trail Linear Protection indications and MS–RDI (FERF), AIS alarms. Uses slot of
1st STM–1
D4–D12 576 Kbit/s channel for DCC on TMN network. Uses slot of 1st STM–1
S1 Indicates synchronism status. Uses slot of 1st STM–1. Bits 1:4 set Transmission direction.
Z1,Z2 Spare bytes for function not yet defined. Uses all slots.
E2 For EOW operations between multiplexers. Uses slot of 1st STM–1.
M1 Indicates section MS–REI (FEBE) STM4. Uses slot of 3rd STM–1.
X For national use
O Bytes not specified for future international use.
Media Dependent byte (only two accessible). Not operative
Bytes not scrambled (like the whole first row)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 90. SOH structure of STM–4
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 231 / 436
436
1 261 1 261 1 261 1 261
1...9 1...9 1...9 1...9
1 2 3 4
AUG–4 AUG–4 AUG–4 AUG–4
SOH 123412341234.............
12341234.............
SOH
4 x 261
4x9 STM–4
Figure 91. STM–4 structure

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 232 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
DTT1 4 TEMP
/
* LF LD
DTT10 /
4 4 4 S 4
/ / / / C /
/
07
DTBA1–4
: / HPC 4 4 4 R 4 MUX
MSP/ / MST / RST / A / TX 4
/ HWP SELECT. OF M–SOH R–SOH PARALLE/
FROM 4 4 4 M 4 SERIES OPTICAL
4 AU4 / INSERTION / INSERTION / B / MODULE
AGG. OF CONVERSION
/ 4 4 4 L 4 STM–4
OPPOSITE / / / /
SIDE DTBB1–4
: / E
/ R
(WHEN /
CONNECTION
CARD SI D4–D12
: D1–D3
:
USED) K1 K2 B1,C1, L622
PROT B2 A1,A2
955.100.562 K
S1,M1 ALS
AUX 5.2 Mbit/s SOH

INTERFACE
DTT1 L77
/
* D
DTT10 / 4 4 E A D622R
4 4
/ / / S / L /
DTBA1–4
: / B3 OF SA 4 MST /4 RST 4 C 4 I 4
FROM / MSP/ HPC / /4 / R / G / DEMUX
AGG. OF / AU4 POH–VC4 POINTERS M–SOH R–SOH RX
HWP DROP AU4 4 EXTRACTION 4 EXTRACTION 4 A 4 N SERIES/ OPTICAL
OPPOSITE CROSS– / / / M / M /
4 PARALLEL
SIDE CONN. 4 4 4 4 MODULE
/ B E 4 CONVERSION
(WHEN / / / L / N /
CONNECTION / STM–4
DTBB1–4
: / E T CK 622R
CARD SI / R
USED)
B3 MS AIS CK38R LOS
PROT :
STM1–4
LOF
TO/FROM FUTURE OH–BUS
ALL BUS INTERFACE K1,K2,S CONFIGURATIONS
UNITS OH BUS DRIVER ALARMS > OSW TO ALL
PERFORMANCE EXTALM =1
CK A WKCH 2 : UNITS
D4–D12
CK B CK 38T :
D1–D3 CTYPE 0 –: 3
1 L77 L622
CRU SY A ALS
SY B SYNC LEDN
5
Figure 92. Block diagram: STM–4 Aggregate

DIALOG P
CK38 PULS OPTICAL FOR ALARMS DCC LOOP UNIT R
PROTECT. CONFIGURATION MGMT MGMT TYPE O
+12 PERFORMANCE ACKNOWLED M PROT
T
436
MGMT
EQ. CONTR. E G
3AL 36668 AA AA
CAREM CARD CONTROLLER M
C
PWALM T T
CRU DIALOG WITH PHYSICAL I
+12.1V POSITION O
+12V SELECTION EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER ACKNOWLED N
POWER +5.3V ELECTRONIC +5V
SUPPLY –5.5V FUSE
–5V
ISW
REMOTE
LIECB
NIECB
ISWCB
ISWCA
ID 0 –: 4
EQ. CONTR. INVENTORY
EQ. CONTR. AGGR.

* = FROM TRIB (WITH CONNECTION CARD) or FROM CRU
TRIB + AGG. OPPOSITE SIDE (WITH FULL MATRIX) FULL MATRIX/TRIB
233 / 436
3.2.12 STM–16 Aggregate unit

The description is applicable to all the STM–16 Aggregate units of this release.

The Tx/Rx unit optical connectors can be accessed from the unit’s front coverplate. The units which
operate in the second window are indicated with 16.1, those operating in the third window with 16.2.
The units identified by DIN or SC denote type of connector used, the other units use FC–PC connectors.
Some Units are marked by the ”ID” or “ENH” abbreviation or named ”Enhanced”. These items are preset
in order to supply additional ITU–T management functions for the future Releases of the 1661SM–C
Equipment. In current release these new functions are not operative and all the Aggregates have the same
performances.
The same units cannot work with previous kind of Aggregate placed on the other side of the optical span.
Previous kind of Aggregate (with different optical interface) are no more supplied in this release but can
have been upgraded from previous release.
The units identified by ”JE” (Joint Engineering) have better optical characteristics, typically for the
dispersion values (see para.4 on page 279). In some cases also the sensitivity value is indicated.
The STM16 Aggregates with ”192.3” to ”195.7” indication, are used when interfaced with 1686 WDM
equipment.
These sixteen units are independently characterized by different wavelength.

The 1686 WDM equipment must receive up to sixteen different wavelength signals from sixteen different
STM16 Aggregates.
The ”New Aggregate” units contain new generation gate–arrays which permit evolution towards new
network features.
The STM–16 Aggregate unit bidirectionally interfaces the STM–16 signal and the AU4 structured signals:
the Tx/Rx matrix–connected signals multiplexed in a proprietary frame and the STM–16 aggregate of the
opposite side are coaxially connected on the front coverplate.
Each unit is made up of:
• STM16 Aggregate unit (Main Board)
• Expansion sub–unit
• DC/DC converter sub–unit
• O/E converter sub–unit
• E/O converter sub–unit
• Card Controller sub–unit
The Main Board performs the RST, MST, SA, HPC functions.
The ”Expansion” performs an additional HPC function (four x AU4 for tributary subsystem).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The DC/DC converter is used to obtain a 15+V power supply for the O/E and E/O sub–units.
The O/E and E/O sub–units perform the optical/electrical line conversion and viceversa.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 234 / 436
436
The Card Controller sub–unit executes management functions (alarms check, configuration commands,
etc.) when interfacing the Equipment Controller unit.

• Transmission
• Reception
• Card Controller
• Power Supply, Remote inventory
Tx and Rx sections describe the functions of the unit and sub–units making up the STM–16 Aggregate.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 235 / 436
436
Transmission
The unit receives:

• 4 x 622 Mbit/s signals (direct cabling) from the opposite side Aggregate (pass–through).

• 10 signals via Matrix units on the ”Expansion Tx” circuit and on the ”Expansion sub–unit”, always
mounted on the unit.
Each Matrix signal is 38.88 Mbit/s 4–wire bus structured and represent an AU4–mapped signal.
When using the Connection Card, the 10 signals are connected with tributaries and access the
HWP and HPC circuits.
The HWP block selects the main or spare trib. signals.
The HPC block selects 4 trib. signals from the ones available.
The use of the Full Matrix excludes the HWP and HPC blocks. The same functions are
performed in the Full Matrix connecting each of the 4 ”Expansion” signals. These signals can
contain tributary information or VC12/VC3 pass–through information.
Each Expansion block transmits four AU4 signals to the HPC 24 x 16.
The following is carried out on the four 622 Mb/s coming from the Aggregate of the opposite side:
• 622 MHz Clock extraction
• Demultiplexing, to obtain the 16 STM1
• Alignment check on STM–16 frame (A1, A2 bytes)
• Descrambler
• Section Adaptation, to synchronize the extracted clock to the local clock received from the CRU.
In this way further sixteen AU4 are presented to the HPC 24 x 16.
Sixteen AU4 are selected from the HPC block to pass to:
• MST: insertion of the Multiplexing SOH byte
• RST: insertion of the Regeneration SOH byte

The SOH byte are indicated in Figure 93. on page 240 The SOH byte received from the AUX unit
are interfaced with the OH BUS at 5.2 Mb/s through the FUTURE BUS DRIVER.
• Scrambler (except the first SOH line)
• Multiplexer: the 2488Mbit/s stream is obtained through parallel/serial conversion. To multiplex,

the 16 signals are byte interleaved in the STM–16 (see Figure 94. on page 241).
The CK 2488 MHz clock is obtained through a VCO synchronized to the CK 38T received from
CRU.
• Electro/optical conversion, achieved through a sub–unit always mounted on the Aggregate,

permits to access the resulting signal at the connector(4) on the front converplate.
The E/O Converter is power supplied at +15V, derived from a DC/DC converter sub–unit
mounted on the Aggregate.
The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) facility provided through the Card Controller software
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
setting and management complies with ITU–T Rec G.958.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 236 / 436
436
Reception
The unit receives the 2488 Mbit/s Signal from the optical line. This signal can be accessed at the front
coverplate connector (3).
The Optical/Electrical sub–unit converts the signal (D 2488 R) by regenerating it and extracting the
CK 2488 R clock.
The Serial/Parallel circuit demultiplexes the 16 streams of the STM–16.
The CK 38 R clock is generated through subdivision and sent to the CRU units.
The circuits that follow are:
• Alignment check (A1, A2 bytes)
• Descrambler
• RST: extraction of the regeneration SOH bytes
• MST: extraction of the multiplexer SOH bytes.

The use of the terminated SOH byte is indicated in Figure 93. on page 240. The auxiliary SOH
byte terminated on the AUX units, are transmitted on an SOH BUS at 5.2 Mb/s through a
FUTURE BUS DRIVER.
• Section Adaptation to synchronize the extracted timing CK 38 R to the local clock received from
the CRU selected.
Adaptation is through AU4 pointer justification (pointer interpretation and generation).
At this point the AU4’s follow different directions, towards the Aggregate opposite side (AU4
Pass–Through and the Matrix (for tributaries and VC12/VC3 pass–through).
The following are the circuits towards the opposite side aggregate:
• Alignment (A1, A2 bytes insertion)
• Scrambler
• Multiplexing the 16 streams in four 622 Mb/s.
The 4 x 622 Mb/s are coaxially connected to the opposite side aggregate via the front coverplate.
Towards the Matrix, the HPC 16 x 16 block selects four AU4 max signals to send to the ”expansion block”
circuit and 4 AU4 max. signals to send to the expansion sub–unit.
On the Expansion, the HWP + HPC chooses the tributaries (10) to which the AU4’s will be transmitted via
the Matrices.
This operation is performed on the same Full Matrix unit, therefore the HWP + HPC block is not used.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 237 / 436
436
Card Controller
The Card Controller sub–unit carries out the following operations:

• Dialog with the Equipment controller unit

Information on setting options, criteria, loop, reset, switching is exchanged with the Equipment
Controller unit through the LIECB and NIEBC connection.
• Alarms, Configuration, Performance, Internal dialog

This dialog permits to transmit/receive the E2PROM stored unit software settings. Alarms and
performance are received from the unit.
The alarms indicating local unit failure activates the red LED (1) (LEDN command). Signals
COSW, added to EXT ALM (sum of external alarms LOS, LOF, MS–AIS, MS–FERF, EXBER),
generate the OSW switching command.
LED (2) ON denotes operating unit (command WK CH).
CRU selection

• DCC Management
Allows to locally interface the 192 Kbit/s channels (D1–D3) and 576 Kbit/s channels (D4–D12)
of the SOH’s TMN stream.
• Unit type acknowledgment
Through the CTYPE 0–3 signal the Card Controller can acknowledge the unit on which it is
mounted.
• Optical Protection Management

This facility enables the ALS performance as specified by ITU–T Rec. G.958, i.e., shuts down
Laser when no optical signal is received.
Laser can be reset through the following commands:
– manual, Laser ON for.2 secs. every time push–button (5) is pressed.
– automatic, Laser ON for 2 secs. every 180 secs.
– manual for test: Laser ON for 9 secs. every time push–button (5)is pressed for more than
12 seconds.
• Protection Management
The Protection function is enabled through the ISW commands which cause switching between
regular and spare units.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 238 / 436
436
The ISW commands are received from:
1) the other Aggregate on the same side (to know the alarm conditions, not operative in this
release).
2) the two full matrixes (to select the one to use)
3) the trib. (to select the one to use).
Protection signals (PROT) are generated.
+5.3V 3%
–5.5V 3%
+12.1V 3%
The voltages are protected through fuses.

As before indicated, a DC/DC converter sub–unit obtains a +15V to power the E/O and O/E sub–units.
of construction).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 239 / 436
436
144 BYTES
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 C1 C1
RSOH
B1 E1 F1

D1 D2 D3

9 Bytes
B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
MSOH
D4 D5 D6
D7 D8 D9
D10 D11 D12
S1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 E2
Z2 M1 Z2 Z2
LEGENDA
A1–A2 Alignment word A1=11110110, A2=00101000. Utilizes all slots of the 16 STM–1
C1 Identifies the STM–1 stream inside the STM–n.
B1 BIP8 calculation result on the previous frame (after scrambling).Utilized to assess error
rate between regenerators. Uses slot of 1st STM–1.
E1 EOW operations between regenerators. Uses slot of 1st STM–1.
F1 Available for the user (data from AUX unit). Uses slot of 1st STM–1.
D1–D3 192 Kbit/s channel for DCC on TMN network. Uses slot of 1st STM–1.
B2 Result of BIP16x24 calculation on previous frame except for three RSOH rows. Used to
assess error rate between multiplexers. Uses all slots.
K1,K2 For MS Linear Trail Protection indications (not operative) and MS–RDI (FERF), AIS
alarms. Uses slot of 1st STM–1
D4–D12 576 Kbit/s channel for DCC on TMN network. Uses slot of 1st STM–1
S1 Indicates synchronism status. Uses slot of 1st STM–1. Bits 1:4 set Transmission direction.
Z1,Z2 Spare bytes for function not yet defined. Uses all slots.
E2 For EOW operations between multiplexers. Uses slot of 1st STM–1.
M1 Indicates section MS–REI (FEBE) STM4. Uses slot of 3rd STM–1.
X For national use
O Bytes not specified for future international use.
Media Dependent byte (only two accessible). Used to perform the Bidirectional Working
on Single Fibre.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Bytes not scrambled (like the whole first row)
Figure 93. SOH structure of STM–16
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 240 / 436
436
1 261 1 261 1 261 1 261

1...9 1...9 1...9 1...9
1 n n 16
AUG–4 AUG–4 AUG–4 AUG–4
SOH 123456789101111213141516. 12345...........

123....16, 123.... 16.
SOH
16 x 261
16 x 9
STM–16
Figure 94. STM–16 structure

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 241 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
CK CK38T VCO
EXTR CK 2488 TEMP
MHz
4x622 LF LD
07
FROM AGG. Mbit/s SA CK2488
OPPOSITE DEMUX ALIGN. DESCRAMBLER POINTER
SIDE 6 AU4 S 2488T
C
10 R MUX SUB–UNIT 4
EXPANSION 4 x AU4 HPC MST RST A PARALLE/ E/O
Tx 24x16 M–SOH R–SOH M SERIAL Tx
HWP+HPC 4 x AU4 AU4 INSERTION INSERTION B CONVERSION CONVERSION STM–16
L
E
955.100.562 K
R
EXPANSION M–SOH R–SOH
SUB–UNIT +15V ALS
10 Tx
TO/FROM HWP+HPC OH–BUS 5,2Mbit/s
FUTURE BUS
TRIB. DRIVER
(VIA M–SOH AUX
MATRIX) 10 Rx 4 x AU4 R–SOH
HWP+HPC A D2488R
L
I DEMUX SUB–UNIT 3
HPC SA MST RST PARALLE/ E/O
16x16 POINTER M–SOH R–SOH G
4 x AU4 AU4 AU4 EXTRACTION EXTRACTION N SERIAL CK2488R Tx
PROT M CONVERSION CONVERSION STM–16
E
10 N
EXPANSION T
Tx
HWP+HPC S A
C L
4x622 R I
Mbit/s A G
TO AGG. M N
OPPOSITE MUX STM1–4
SIDE B M
L E
6 E N CONFIGURATIONS
R T OSW TO ALL
ALARMS PERFORMANCE EXTALM >
=1
CK A WKCH 2 : UNITS
D4–D12
CK B CK 38T :
D1–D3 CTYPE 0 –: 3
1
SY A ALS
CRU SYNC LEDN
SY B
DIALOG P
Figure 95. Block diagram : STM–16 Aggregate

CK38 PULS OPTICAL FOR ALARMS DCC UNIT R
PROTECT. CONFIGURATION MGMT TYPE O
PERFORMANCE ACKNOWLED M PROT
T
436
MGMT
E G
3AL 36668 AA AA
+–5,3V +5V CARD CONTROLLER C M
POWER –5,5V +5V DC/DC +12V T T
ELECTRONIC DIALOG WITH PHYSICAL I
SUPPLY FUSE CONVERTER CRU POSITION
+12,1V +12V SUB–UNIT O
SELECTION EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER ACKNOWLED N
CAREM
EQ. CONTR.
ISW
REMOTE
LIECB
NIECB
ISWCB
ISWCA
ID 0 –: 4
EQ. CONTR. INVENTORY
EQ. CONTR. AGGR.

CRU
FULL MATRIX/TRIB
242 / 436
3.2.13 AUX/EOW Unit

This description is applicable to all the different Auxiliary unit.

The Auxiliary units process all the overhead streams of the 1st STM–1 frame of stream STM4/STM16 not
terminated onto the gate–array of the aggregate and tributary units. It is also possible to select both the
aggregates spare to convey to the vocal terminations the dedicated byte (E1).
The streams involved are:
• aggregate SOH (side WEST and side EAST)

• Tributary SOH
• POH of VC–3 (not operative)
• POH of VC–4
Byte transit and termination operations are performed on the above streams.
The streams and bytes being managed depend on the software program (see Operator’s Manual).
To utilize the terminated bytes the unit makes available:
• 6 data channels: 3 with 64 Kbit/s codirectional G.703 Interface and 3 with ITU–T Rec.
V11 interface (RS422 A)
• 1 order–wire for selective call, local operator’s telephone set and hybrid circuit
• 1 analog EOW extension (for the SL/SM AUX/EOW EXTENSION unit only) to set up external
telephone connections.
Speech connection differentiates the units:
– The AUX/EOW EXTENSION unit realizes the analog speech by–pass between the two aggregate
sides, and establishes a connection with an external telephone set.
The external connection is realized through the Voice channel connector on the front cover of the
Auxiliary Access Module (see Figure 22. on page 66 ).
– The SL/SM AUX/EOW unit allows digital speech by–bass and can be used on wide networks.
ORDER WIRE CHANNEL
A user can establish three types of connections:
• call another ADM

• call a Line Terminal
• setting up a conference call (omnibus)
When establishing a call the two users must take account of:
• the green LED (7) : indicating free line

• the yellow LED (6) : glowing indicates busy line; flashing indicates incoming selective call
• the yellow LED (5) : indicating incoming conference call
• key J (4) : line seizure
• Key R (3) : line reset
• Socket (2) for telephone handset connection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 243 / 436
436
Before starting a call the user checks the state of the line, inserts the telephone handset into socket (2).
Presses key J (4) to seize the line and dials the subscriber number.
The connection between two subscribers is established through dialling i.e., the calling party dials the

number identifying the called subscriber.

The identification number consists of two digits within 10 and 99 and is DTMF encoded.
The called subscriber identifies the incoming call through the lighting up (flashing) of the relevant LED and
the activation of the buzzer. The call starts when the called party lifts the handset. This operation will inhibit
the buzzer.
The conversation in progress is private, i.e., upon lifting the telephone handset, all the other connected
subscribers receive the busy tone. A third subscriber can cut in by pressing key ”J” (4).
Subscriber presence is indicated through an inclusion tone.
Moreover any subscriber can set up a conference–call by dialling the number 00. In this case all the
connected subscribers can hear the conversation and can intervene by keeping key ”J” (4) pressed.
The ”back call” tonality is not received.
If You want to silence the buzzer of people who are not interested on the conference call and have not
answered, You have to select number ”0”.
The call terminates when the calling or called party hangs up the telephone handset thus releasing the
line. Should the line continue to be engaged because the telephone handsets of both subscribers have
not been positioned correctly, the subscriber will send the RESET (R) command (3) to release it.
When calling a Terminal Line from an ADM , the two users must take account of these two differences :
• key ”*” on the telephone keyboard: line seizure
• key ” #” on the telephone keyboard: line reset
• the omnibus call is not supported
• a third Terminal line can not intervene into a private conversation
N.B. Be careful that if You push the # key on the telephone keyboard , You will reset the line even
if You are calling another ADM .
For details on the behavior of the Line Terminal refer to the proper Manual.
The Hybrid circuit section connects the ”selective call” circuits and the local operator’s set to the COMBO
to encode the speech channel.
At this point the signals are exchanged between the AUX and MATASSA gate arrays.
Data Channels
The 64 Kbit/s and V11 data channels transit through the Interface circuits to be then sequentially
connected to the AUX and MATASSA Gate Arrays.
Gate Array AUX
The AUX gate array multiplexes and demultiplexes the local overheads to/from the MATASSA gate array
(multiplexing/demultiplexing circuits) and arranges them in the required order.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
If properly programmed it can transmit the 64Kbit/s bytes in a codirectional or contradirectional mode
through the G703, V11 and COMBO interfaces.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 244 / 436
436
Gate Array MATASSA
The MATASSA gate array interfaces the SL/SM AUX/EOW unit with the aggregates, matrices and
tributaries.
The gate array processes the 5.2Mbit/s frames connected with aggregate A and B and the frame of the
4.86Mbit/s overhead bus (OH–B) connected with the tributary and matrix unit.
Therefore the gate array can be considered as a component which branches signals over four bidirectional
ports:
• Aggregate A
• Aggregate B
• OH BUS (tributaries and matrices)
• Local (data and voice accesses)
This function is performed through matrices.

Since all the incoming signals have to be synchronized before being processed through the local clock,
a 5.184MHz PLL must be utilized to synchronize the local clock to the incoming 38.88MHz clock.
Moreover the Gate array MATASSA interfaces, as master, the AUX gate array with its synchronism and
clock.
Bytes A1 and A2, B1, B2 and the AU pointer are not handled by the unit (see Figure 6.53 on page 146,
and Figure 6.59 on page 188).
All cross–connected bytes can be addressed, starting from any incoming frame, towards any outgoing
one.
Selection is referred in the Operator’s Handbook.
Futurebus driver
The Futurebus driver is an electrical interface which increases the rate and integrity of the data processed
by the gate array MATASSA with OH BUS.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 245 / 436
436
Card Controller
The Card Controller sub–unit carries out the following functions:

CRU selection

Information on presettings, criteria, reset etc. is exchanged with the Equipment Controller unit through the
LIECB and NIECB connections.
Internal dialog for Alarms, Configuration and Performance
This type of dialog permits to transmit/receive the unit SW settings stored through the EEPROM, define
all the OH bytes and define the matrices for POH and SOH bytes routing (to this purpose the interface
processes the switching signals ISW received from the units). Alarm and performance criteria are
received from the local unit.
The local unit alarms light up red LED (1).
+5.3V 3%
–5.5V 3%
+12.1V 3%
of construction).
The contents of the Remote Inventory is fully described in para 4.1 on page 279.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 246 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
D64TN/P1 2
/ D–CK–S 5.2T1E 3
D64TN/P2 2 G.703 /
/ Tx
D64TN/P3 2 INTERFACE D–CK–S 5.2T2E 3
07
/ /
POH/SOH
BYTE D–CK–S 5.2T1W
MATRIX 3
V11TN/P1 2 /
/
V11TN/P2 2 V11 D–CK–S 5.2T2W 3
/ Tx /
V11TM/P3 2 MUX
INTERFACE OH
/
Access 2 TIME OH–BUS
955.100.562 K
/ FUTUREBUS
GENERATION PLL DRIVER
D64RN/P1 FROM/TO
Module / UNIT
D64RN/P2 2 G.703 GATE
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
/ Tx ARRAY AUX CK38 SY38
D64RN/P3 2 INTERFACE
/
D–CK–S 5.2R1E 3
V11RN/P1 2 /
/
V11RN/P2 2 V11 D–CK–S 5.2R2E 3
/ Tx POH/SOH /
V11RN/P3 2 DEMUX
INTERFACE OH D–CK–S 5.2R1W
/ MATRIX 3
/
2 D–CK–S 5.2R2W
/ 3
/
GATE ARRAY MATASSA
ÉÉ
2 REMOTE EQ. CONTR.
INVENTORY
LOCAL PARTY COMBO

OP. SET LINE ANALOG EOW 4
/ Access Module
EXTENSION
SELECTIVE LINE
STATUS ISW 1E
Access CALL CHECK
BUZZER PERFORMANCE ISW 2E
1 CONFIG. ISW 2E FROM
Module AGGREGATES
J R
Figure 96. Block diagram: SL/SM AUX/EOW

ISW 2W
5 6 7
4 3
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
436
PWALM
3AL 36668 AA AA
CAREM INTERNAL DIALOGUE FOR
EQ. CONTR. ALARMS CONFIGURATIONS PHYSICAL ID 0 –: 4
+12V F CHFAIL PERFORMANCE POSITION ACKNOW
ISWCA
+5.3V
+5V DIALOG WITH ISWCB
POWER ELECTRONIC –5V UNIT TYPE EQUIPMENT CRU
–5.5V FUSE ACKNOW SELECTION CKA
SUPPLY PW ALM. CONTROLLER CK
CKB
SZ SYNC SYNCA CRU
SYNCB
CTYPE 0 –: 3
IECB
247 / 436
3.2.14 Clock Reference Unit

The clock reference unit (CRU) is supplied in the ”Enhanced” versions, distinguished by the compliance

with ITU–T Rec.G81s. and by different hold–over stability.
In this release the following Clock Reference units are available:
• Enhanced CRU
• Enhanced CRU 0,37 ppm.
The first have a stability in Hold over mode of 1 ppm / day and and the second of 0,37 ppm / day.
The CRU delivers synch. signals to all units of the equipment (T0). and to the external source to
synchronize other equipment (T4).
For this purpose the CRU unit is able to:
• select the reference involved
• change the reference (or mode) when loosing synchronism locking another reference available
or the local oscillator.
• operate in a Hold–Over/Free Running mode.
A max. of 16 references are available at the input:
• ten references received from the 21x2Mbit/s Units (2.048MHz) as T2, or STM–1 Tributary Units
as T1 (38.88MHz).
• four references received from the 38.88MHz Aggregate units (T1)
• two 2.048 MHz external synchronism references received from connector M150 (T3).
Operation
The 16 input references are named:
• RCKT1–5 A and B received from the 10 tributary units
• RCK381, 2 E – RCK381,2 W received from the four aggregate units
• CKIN A,B received from the external source
A 16.364MHz CK16R clock can be received from a Local Oscillator mounted on the card or from one of
the VCO’s utilized in the PLL’s (SETG). Loss of clock generates the CK16ALL alarm.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 248 / 436
436
All the references received from the aggregate and tributary units are associated to:
• a signal indicating integrity

• a reference command or mode switch (ISWi)

Afterwards the duplicated signals are sent to the inputs of two different selection circuits (SELA, SELB).
This condition creates two independent paths:
• the 2MHz path towards the outside of the equipment (T4)
• the 38MHz path to send to all the units of the equipment (T0)
Different references and/or operating modes can be selected for each path.
The Equipment Controller configures the CRU to use twelve of the input signals, arranged in any
combination, as synch. signals, i.e., up to six for the internal reference (38.88 MHz), and up to six for the
external reference (2.048 MHz).
The selected reference (REF) is processed by SETG and digitally compared with the 38.88 and 2048 MHz
clocks (generated by the relative VCO’s).
The LOS and DRIFT 1–6 alarm roots are detected on those reference signals configured by E.C.
Synch. reference selection is principally based on quality (byte S1) and also on the priorities assigned
through the CT.
Having to select among signals with the same quality level, the one with the highest priority will be
chosen. The selection algorithm relates the alarms to the inputs (LOS, LOF AIS, BER and DRIFT).
The use of the SSM is fully described in the Configuration Application of the Operator’s Manual.
LOCKED the SETG output is frequency–locked to the reference

selected through the algorithm among those chosen by the
operator.
HOLD OVER/FREE RUNNING These operating modes are enabled if the references selected
are absent. If a previous reference has been selected and has
worked for at least half an hour, the unit will work in the
”hold–over” operating mode.
In the hold–over mode this stored reference lasts for an
unlimited period of time.
The free–running operating mode is determined by absence
of reference or the impossibility of using the ”Hold–over
mode”.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 249 / 436
436
A CK38i reference clock (38.88MHz) and the S38i multiframe synchronism (2kHz) are generated on the
38 MHz path by SETG and sent to all the equipment units.
Loss of the above signals generates the MFSALL and CK38ALL alarm roots.

The CKOUT synchronism clock (2048 MHz) is generated on the 2MHz path by SETG and sent to the
external source through the G703 interface.
The 2MHz clock is enabled by the SWCKMN signal received from the Equipment Controller.
SELC is preset through the CT/OS when wanting to obtain T4 for the selection of the T1 inputs, or directly
from the T0 criteria.
Squelch Criteria
Two CT/OS configured squelch functions are available at the output:
T4 = T1 can select only the SQ threshold
T4 = T0 can enable/disable the SQ, and selects a SQ threshold. Output T4 can be squelched through
CT/OS.
Card Controller
The Card Controller sub–unit carries out the following functions:
Internal dialog for Alarms, Configuration, Performance
This type of dialog permits to transmit/receive the SW settings stored through the EEPROM; receive alarm
and performance criteria from the unit.
The LEDN (loss of +5) and SWALL (unit alarm) alarms are also generated, and their OR’ing with the
CK16ALL, MFS ALL and CK38ALL alarms activates the red alarm LED (1) and the OSWC switch criteria.
The OSWC criteria is then sent to all the equipment units.
References and operations are SW settable.
Information on presettings, criteria, reset etc. is exchanged with the Equipment Controller unit through the
LIEC, NIECB connections.
Unit Type acknowledgment
Through the CTYPE signal 0–3 the Card Controller can acknowledge the unit on which it is mounted.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 250 / 436
436
+5.3V 3%
–5.5V 3%
+12.1V 3%
The PWALM alarm is generated following malfunction or failure of the –5V voltage.
of construction)
The CAREM CR Tx signal indicates the presence of the unit (ground contact) and it is directly connected
to the Clock Reference unit and the Equipment Controller.
The equipment can be provided with two Clock Reference units.
The CAREM CR Rx signal indicates if the other Clock Reference unit is present (or not).
Both units deliver the SYNCHRONISM signal and the relative INTEGRITY (or SWITCH) signal (OSWC).
CRU selection depends on the OSWC signal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 251 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ISWi
ED
ISWi LOS
DRIFT 1
&
07
RCK T1A
REF (TO)
SETG CK38I/SY38
LOS TO ALL UNITS
ISWi DRIFT N SY38i
& SELB
2048KHz or RCK TNA/B SQUELC

38880KHz RIV RIV
955.100.562 K
FROM TRIBS. LOS MFS CK38 T0 – T4
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ISWi DRIFT 1
&
MFS ALL CK38 ALL
RCK38 1E/W
CK OUT
REF SQUELC SEL (T4)

SETG INT 2048KHz
T1 –T4 C G703 TO EXT
M150
LOS SELB
ISWi DRIFT N
&
ÉÉ
EQ. CONTR.
RCK 38 NE/W CKOUT SWCKMN
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
LOS
DRIFT A
CKINA INT
G.703
CAREMCRRX LOS –: 16 PWALM CK16ALL
LOS
DRIFT B
CKINB INT PWALM MFSALL
G.703
G
CONFIGURATIONS
16,384MHz CK16R
PERFORMANCE CK16ALL
Figure 97. Block diagram: Clock Reference

<
DET ALARMS MFSALL =1
CKOUT CK16 OSWC
CK38ALL
TO ALL
436
SWALL
ISWi OTHER UNITS
3AL 36668 AA AA
INTERNAL DIALOGUE FOR LEDN
CAREMCR RX ALARMS CONFIGURATIONS PERFORMANCE
CARD CONTROLLER
CAREMCR Tx
EQ. CONTR. PWALM PHYSICAL UNIT TYPE DIALOG WITH PWALM
+5.3V POSITION ACKNOWLED EQUIPMENT
VC5V ACKNOWLED. CONTROLLER
ELECTRONIC
POWER –5.5V FUSE REMOTE
SUPPLY –VC5V INVENTORY
+12,1V F CTYPE 0 –: 3
VC12V
ID 0 –: 4 LIECB NIECB EQ. CONTR.
252 / 436
3.2.15 Equipment Controller SMEC
(See Figure 98. on page 259.)

The ”Equipment Controller SMEC” must manage:

• dialog with the units housed in the subrack through interface S0 relevant to alarm collection,
performance monitoring, execution and check of the software presettings.
• equipment alarm interfacing through interface A and P with:
– front cover LED

– Remote alarms
– alarm criteria towards the rack lamps
– parallel contacts to/from external source
As well as interfacing for:
– unit type and presence checks

– protection management
– ANDOR management (on Alarm interface subunit)
– Power supply alarms processing
– Remote Inventory
• local dialog with a personal computer through interface F
• dialog with the Operation System for Network Management operations through Interface Q3
• dialog with the external equipment for Network Management operations through Interface Q2
(Mediation Device function. )
The interfaces and relevant functions are mainly carried out through:
• Microprocessor with Control BUS logic
• Memories
Interface S0
As previously mentioned this interface manages dialog between the Equipment Controller and the Card
Controller subunits inside the various equipment units.
The ALARM COLLECTION, PERFORMANCE MONITORING, SOFTWARE SETTING

CONFIGURATION operations are dialogued.
Interface S consists of two serial buses defined as INTRA EQUIPMENT CONTROL BUS (IECB):
LIECB, CKL this channel represents the message exchange link between the Equipment
Controller and the Card Controllers for the information flow pertaining to the
internal equipment control operation (local).
NIECB, CKN this channel is used by the equipment controller and the card controller as a
dedicated path to TMN messages that require access to the DCC channels
(network).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 253 / 436
436
Interface S1
This interface manages dialog between the Equipment Controller and the Drop–Shelf units (external
equipment).

The function realized are the same of the S0 interface, using in this case the L1–IECB, Ck1–L, N1–IECB,
CK1–N signals.
Interfaces A and P
Interfaces A and P permit to activate the equipment alarm signalling (i.e. parallel contacts, remote alarms,
LEDs) by processing the unit alarm indications
Additionally, they carry out management and switching operations.
Interface A mainly supports the following features:
– Led and access point of the unit front coverplate
– alarm signalling
Interface P mainly Supports
– Protection Switching
– Card presence and Card type
– Remote Inventory
The detail of the features is presented in next points.
The following generated remote alarms can be accessed at the relevant terminal tagblock:
• INT : indicates the internal alarm condition
• URG : indicates the urgent alarm condition
• NURG : indicates the not urgent alarm condition
• IND : indicates the indicative alarm condition
• EXT: indicates the external aggregate alarm condition
• TORC : indicates that one of the Power supply units is faulty or absent. It is the OR’ing of PFAIL
1, 2, 3 alarm
• TANC : indicates the faulty condition of two or all the Power supply units through a relay contact
• LOS–Q2 :indicates that there is no connection with the TMN system, interface Q3
• TUP : indicates the alarm of the Equipment Controller unit through a relay contact.
The alarm condition is indicated with ground contact except for the TUP (open contact).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 254 / 436
436
The following are the alarms utilized to activate the rack LEDs:
• RURG indicates the urgent alarm condition and lights up the relative rack red LED
• RNURG indicates the not urgent alarm condition and lights up the relative rack red LED
• M indicates the storing status of the RURG+RNURG alarms and lights up the rack yellow LED
and yellow ATTD LED (5) on the front coverplate.
• C is the storing command of the alarms activated by pressing push–button (10) on the unit front
coverplate
The C command is also sent to the Alarm interface access module (ANDOR circuit) together with:
• CAND indicates the faulty condition of all POWER SUPPLY units through a relay contact
(usually open)
• UP indicates the alarm of the Equipment Controller through a relay contact (usually open)
The EUA contact is used to inform the Alarm interface subunit on the presence/absence of the unit
involved.
Moreover, the ”LED Processing” circuit activates the following LEDs of the unit:
• red LED (7) URG indicates the presence of an urgent alarm. When it is ON together with the
red LED (1), it indicates unit reset activation.
• red LED (6) NURG indicates the presence of a not urgent alarm
• yellow LED (4) ABN indicates the ”Abnormal” condition (type: active loopbacks, forcing units
into service, laser forced ON or OFF, try to restore after ALS)
• yellow LED (3) IND indicates the presence of an indicative alarm
• red INT LED (1) indicates the presence of an alarm inside the unit or, when red LED (7) is ON
too, it indicates the activation of the unit reset
• yellow ATTD LED (5) indicates the URG/NURG alarm storing status when pressing
push–button (10) on the unit’s front coverplate or when sending a command from the Craft
Terminal or Operation System, or through the Remote Alarms Connection .
• green LED (2) indicates in Service Unit. Always on.
By pressing push–button (11) on the unit’s front coverplate ( LAMPTEST ) the operator checks if all the
LEDs light up (except the LEDs on the AUX/EOW unit and Power Supply) without having to generate
alarms.
The Parallel Contacts Management circuit supplies six configurable alarms criteria (CP01–3 and
CPO5–7) to external sources (not operative in this release). The circuit also receives 8 criteria (CPI1–8)
from the external source to be used for the Housekeeping criteria 3 of witch (CPI1–3) are available for
any kind of purpose and the remaining 5 (CPI4–8) are fixed as follows:
• SSU FAIL – Fault on the external ”Synchronous Supply Unit”

• OFA URG – Urgent Alarm on external OFA (Optical Fibre Amplifier)
• OFA ABN – Abnormal Condition indication on external OFA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• OFA NURG – Not Urgent Alarm on on external OFA

• AND BATT EXT – OFA Station Battery Alarm ( or Batt. Alarm of Drop Shelf extension
equipment)
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 255 / 436
436
The Interface also processes the following alarms coming from the Alarm Interface module:
• PWANDOR – indicates failure or absence of Alarm interface module and Service Battery
absence.

• ORALIM – Battery OR’ing indicating failure or absence of one of the two station batteries.
The Power Supply unit is managed through the PFAIL1/2/3 alarms.
The Interface analyzes the unit’s status, and provides protection through switchings inside the equipment.
The operating Clock Reference unit is selected by analyzing the OSWCA/B signals which represent the
operating status of the two units, and by generating the SWCKMN selection command, used in the CRU
to transmit the 2MHz clock to the external source.
The OSW 1–10 signal are received from the tributaries. This criteria generates the MSW 1–8 command
(sent to the Access modules ) to activate tributaries EPS Switching.
The Detection circuit:
• checks the presence/absence of the units through the CAREM 1–26 command.
• checks the type of unit Matrices.
• checks the type of presetting on the SWITCH unit.
The Remote Inventory circuits dialogs with the units and Bus termination sub–unit of the equipment to
receive the inventory data respectively of units and equipment.
From the Bus termination is also received the Equipment Mac Address.
The Inventory data (also that of Equipment Controller itself) can be accessed from local Craft Terminal
(interface F) or Operation system (interface QB3)
The Clock/Calendar circuit provides to the Equipment Controller unit the following features:
– full time/data features : seconds, minutes, hours
– day–of–week, month, years, auto–leap year.
This is permitted by an internal oscillator at 32.768 KHz.

The circuit maintain correct time/date updating for at least 24 hours during power loss.
Interface D
This interface is used for debugging purposes

To access this interface dedicated 8 pin RJ 45 is present (8)
Only for internal factory use.
Interface I (Not operative in this release)
This interface is interface to manage the signal of a second Equipment Controller, when a protected 1+1
configuration is present.
The purpose is to provide the information exchange in order to define the active/standby unit and decide
the relevant command toward the alarm interface.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 256 / 436
436
Interface F
Interface F connects the equipment to a personal computer through the front panel connector (9).
This connection allows a local operator to software–handle the equipment.
Specifically:
• display the current and stored alarms and status of the equipment units,
• send operative command (example: alarm attention, restant equipment, loop backs etc.
• performance monitoring
• display and configure software settings
• administrative selections (password and operator profile)
• download the equipment software for installation and updating following the equipment
evolution.
These operations are fully described in the Operator’s Manual.
Interface Q2
Interface Q2/RQ2 implements a standard RS485 serial channel suitable for multipoint link synchronous
(Q2) or asynchronous (RQ2) communication at a max. speed of 64K baud.
The interface is accessed through the relevant terminal tagblock on the QX & Sync access panel.
It permits to establish a connection between external equipment (non–SDH Alcatel equipment, max. 32)
and the TMN.
In this manner the Equipment Controller executes a Mediation Device function.
Interface Q3
Interface Q3 connects the equipment to an Operation System of local networks as specified by IEEE802.3
Standards.
Connection to the network is established via the QX & SYNC access module that permits the connection
to the thin Ethernet cable (10 base 2 ) or to 10 BT interface.
Other equipment can be connected via the DCC channels provided by the SOH bytes of the synchronous
frame (D1–D12).
In this manner management operations can be carried out from a Center (Operation System) towards
several and different configured equipment. This facilitates initial turn–on and maintenance operations on
the network equipment (see the functions of interface F).
The operations are detailed in the Operation System Handbook.
R–ECT Remote network management
If the R–ECT Craft Terminal SW Package has been loaded it is possible to perform a remote management
on up to 31 NEs trough the F interface . The Management operations are those carried out from an OS,
exception made for the SW Download.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 257 / 436
436
Unit Management
This operation is carried out by a microprocessor (CPU) which acquires data and makes it available to all
the interfaces. To carry out these functions CPU acts also as a BUS CONTROL LOGIC and use

MEMORIES.

CPU use a 2MHz clock internally generated .
The Bus Control Logic handles the data exchange modes between the unit devices. It also handles the
RESET logic of the unit devices (CPU included). The Reset logic is enabled:
• by pressing push–button (12)
• after software command from Craft Terminal or Operation System
• after having turned on the equipment
• when unit power decrease below a fixed threshold
• when unit internal alarm is detected.
The local alarm lights up the red alarm indicating LED (1).
The reset command activates LEDs (1) and (7).
Various types of memories reside on the unit:
• Boot Memories , 1 Mbytes FEPROM
• Pluggable Memories, 16 Mbytes FEPROM, 8 Mbytes RAM
Connectors are also provided to install the MEMORY EXPANSION modules.
The FLASH (FEPROM) memories are used to load software during the installation, operation and
maintenance phases. In this manner the equipment’s software release is updated in accordance with
product evolution.
The power supply present at the input (+5.3V, –5.5V, +12.1V) are protected by fuses.
The +V and –V distributed to the internal circuit are controlled and when decrease below the threshold,
the detection contribute to generate the internal Local alarm.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 258 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
EUA 25MHz
ALARM INT. 7 CLOCK SOURCE
PLUGGABLE BOOT
MEMORIES MEMORIE CPU WITH
L1–IECB 16Mbyte FEPROM 1Mbytes FEPROM 12 RESET
BUS CONTROL
8Mbytes RAM
07
CK1–L INTERFACE LOGIC
N1–IECB S1
DROP–SHELF RESET 9
CK1–N DIALOG
O–IECB INTERFACE
TO/FROM INTERFACE
UNITS AND CKO–L F
EQUIPMENT SO
FUTUREBUS NO–IECB UNITS LOCAL
TERMINATION DIALOG INTERFACE INTERFACE TERMINAL
CKO–N
955.100.562 K
I D
SPI–CPE–ACT 1+1 SMEC DEBUGGER
NOT OPERATIVE
FROM/TRIB. OSWi 1–10 INTERFACE
TO SWITCH TRIBUTARIES SWITCH P Q2 QX & SYNC
MODULES MSWi 1–8 MANAGEMENT R MEDIATION
AND UNITS O INTERFACE DEVICE (NOT OPERATIVE)
OSWCA T A/P
TO/FROM OSWCB CRU SWITCH E
CRU MANAGEMENT C
SWCKMN T INTERFACE
Q3 QX & SYNC
FROM PFAIL–1–3 POWER SUPPLY OPERATION
POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
SUPPLY
PWANDOR
FROM ALARM INTERFACE 7 URG RESET
ALARM INT. ALIMI MANAGEMENT
CAREMi 1–26
FROM UNIT TYPE OF
CTYPES 1–3 SWITCHING D 6 NURG +V
E INTERNAL
T
CTYPEM 1–2 TYPE OF E LOCAL
MATRIXES C 5 ALARM
T ATTD –V
O LED
PRESENCE R MANAGEMENT
OF UNITS S 4 ABN
CPI 1–8 P C
STATIONS ALARMS A O H 3 IND +12.1V
GATHERING A
R N N
A T +V FUSES +5.3V
INTERF. I/O D
CPO1–3 SENDING
L R L 2 –5.5V POWER
L A I –V
ALARM E C SUPPLY
SIGNALLING N
CPO 8 L T G GND
1
C
URG
436
REMOTE ALARM INT
3AL 36668 AA AA
NURG REMOTE
IND ALARMS
TORC
TANC
Figure 98. Block diagram : Equipment Controller SMEC 2A8R + 16F

TUP
CAND
UP 10
ALARM INT. 11
C
RURG RACK LED ALARMS
RACK LAMPS RNURG
M
TO/FROM
UNITS AND REMOTE INVENTORY
BUS
TERMINATION CLOCK / CALENDAR
259 / 436
3.2.16 Power Supply unit
(See Figure 99. on page 261 )

The Power supply unit converts the voltage received from a –48/–60 Vdc battery into three Vdc +5.3V,

–5.5V and –12.1 V voltages (stabilized and galvanically isolated from the battery).
There are two decoupler of the Battery inputs (–BATT1 and –BATT2), thus permitting a stand–by power
supply.
The following access points can be accessed on the power supply unit’s front coverplate:
• ON/OFF switch (2)
• green LED indicating the regular operation of the unit (1)
As shown in Figure 6.59 on page 188, the OR’ed and fuse–protected battery voltages are applied to the
input filter through the ON/OFF switch.
This filter must protect the power supply unit against abrupt variations or battery noise.
The voltage present after the ON/OFF switch is utilized as auxiliary power supply for the Pulse Width
Modulation circuit during the circuit switch–ON phase.
When the circuit is at steady state, the power supply is obtained after the power switch.
A voltage comparator inhibits the circuit operation if the input voltage value drops below an established
threshold.
The Pulse Width Modulation circuit establishes the conduction time of two power transistors thus
modulating the power sent to the outputs.
Modulation occurs through regulation loops detecting the two currents and voltages I1, I2, V1 and V2 at
outputs –5.5 and +5.3V.
The voltages are then rectified, filtered and output. The –12.1V voltage transits through the series
regulator which maintains the voltages and currents at the established output value.
The three voltages output are delivered decoupled and stabilized. This solution permits to parallel several
units without causing interferences.
During regular operating conditions, green LED is ON and a +5V voltage is present at the PFAIL
output pin.
If one of the voltages drops below an established threshold, a command is generated which reversibly
switch–off the unit. Moreover the green LED goes off and the PFAIL alarm arises (PFAIL output open).
An excessive increase of one of the output voltages generates the V3, or V4, or V5 commands. The latter
cause the irreversible protection circuit to intervene.
This condition:
• irreversibly blocks the unit operation
• switches off the green LED
• transmits the PFAIL alarm.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 260 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
–BATT1 2
07
F +5,3V
DECOUPLER DECOUPLER
STABILIZER
–BATT2
DECOUPLER
I1 V3
955.100.562 K
+BATT1
V1
BATTERY
+BATT2
+12,1V TO
V AUXILIARY SERIES DECOUPLER ALL
POWER SUPPLY REGULATOR STABILIZER UNITS
V4
–5,5V
SELF PULSE DECOUPLER
POWER SUPPLY WIDTH STABILIZER
MODULATION
I2
I1 V5
I2 REGULATION
V1 LOOP
V2
V2
IRREVERSIBLE
PROTECTION
PFAIL
Figure 99. Block Diagram: Power Supply Unit

> 1 EQ.
=
CONTR.
436
V3 V4 V5
3AL 36668 AA AA
1
REMOTE
INVENTORY
EQ. CONTR.
261 / 436
3.2.17 DS Futurebus Termination sub–unit
(See Figure 100. ).

This subunit adapts the levels on the LIECB and NIECB channels and the relevant CKL and CKN clocks

concerned with informative data exchanged between the Equipment Controller unit and the Card
Controller subunit mounted on the various units of the equipment.
Level adaptation is also carried out on the OHBUS streams exchanged between the units.
A serial EPROM is available for the Remote Inventory containing equipment inventory data (P/N., serial
number, construction date).
The sub–unit stores the ”MAC Address” of the equipment utilized for the TMN configuration.
Furthermore the Unit allows the transit of the LIECB channel that flows between SMEC unit and the
DROP SHELF 2 Mbit/s Tributaries.
S–CKL CKL
FROM S–DL DL
TO DROP SHELF
SMEC S–CKN CKN
S–DN DN
OH–BUS 5
TO VARIOUS UNITS
OH–BUS 1
L–IECB
+5V F +2V
FROM VOLTAGE CK–L
POWER REGULATOR TO ALL UNITS
SUPPLY N–IECB
CK–N
OH–BUS 5
TO VARIOUS UNITS
OH–BUS 1
L–IECB
F +2V CK–L
VOLTAGE TO ALL UNITS
REGULATOR N–IECB
CK–N
REMOTE TO EQUIPMENT
INVENTORY CONTROLLER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 100. Block diagram: Futurebus Termination
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 262 / 436
436
3.2.18 Alarm Interface Access Module

This Alarm Interface Access Module unit includes:

– AND/OR circuit.
– Future Bus Termination ( not used in this release).
– Remote Inventory. ( not used in this release).
– MAC Address function ( not used in this release).
– R.A.B. interface towards Rack Lamps.
– Remote alarms interface.
– Parallel Input/Serial Output MFAIL Alarms ( not used in this release).
• – AND/OR circuit.
The function of this unit is of detecting power supply failures on the station batteries or on the assemblies,
and of processing the criteria coming from the Equipment Controller.
These alarm statuses control the generation of the rack lamps command and remote alarms criteria.
The unit is powered from a Service Battery.Through setting options it can be adapted to the
–48 or –60 V voltages.
In case of faulty of the Service Battery that feeds this unit in which is housed the ANDOR function, the
PWANDOR criteria is generated and sent to the Equipment Controller unit to light up LED (6) NURG see
Figure 30. on page 89. and to light up the alarm ”LB” (Battery Control Failure / Missing) on the Operator
Manual ”A.S. & Control” application.
The alarm generated following station battery failure is due to a voltage drop of approx. 20% vs. nominal
value.
The alarm disappears upon restoring the nominal value, less the allowed tolerances.
The failure of both station batteries generates an AND criteria and the TAND remote alarm.
Moreover, the AND criteria is OR’ed with the CAND criteria received from the Equipment Controller unit.
The failure of only one battery generates the OR criteria which, upon being inhibited by the AND criteria,
delivers the TOR remote alarm and the ORALIM criteria to the Equipment Controller unit that lights up the
alarm ”LF” (Battery – Fuse/ Broken alarm) on the Operator Manual ”A.S. & Control” application.
The UP criteria is received from the Equipment Controller unit and when OR’ed with EUA, Equipment
Controller presence (settable) generates the AU signal.
The AND, OR and AU criteria are each stored in an appropriate memory circuit.
The rack lamps receive the RNURG and RURG output commands. The RURG command is the sum of
the power supply AND and AU criteria, and both are accessed at output A of the memory which
corresponds to the non–stored output.
The alarm statuses can be memorized through the C command activated through push–button (10) on
the Equipment Controller unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
In this case the output A of the store is de–activated thus causing the RURG and/or RNURG criteria to
disappear, while output M is activated thus concurring to the formation of the M criteria.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 263 / 436
436
If the alarm disappears all the criteria and remote alarms that might be active are automatically
de–activated.
The RURG, RNURG, M alarms operate like the alarms of the Equipment Controller towards the top rack

LEDs.

• Remote inventory ( not used in this release).
This function manages the Equipment data.

This function is performed by a serial EEPROM that stores the management data of the Equipment.
For this circuit is implemented a protection against short circuit by means of fuse resistors.
• MAC Address ( not used in this release).
This function manages the Equipment LAN address.

This function is performed by a serial EEPROM that stores the Lan Address of the Equipment.
For this circuit is implemented a protection against short circuit by means of fuse resistors.
• R/M interface
This function provides the necessary criteria to manage Rack Lamps.
• Remote Alarms
This function provides the necessary informations towards a 15 contacts connector to manage remote
alarms.
• Parallel input / Serial output module fail alarms ( not used in this release).
This function provides the alarm faults of all Access Module towards Equipment Controller.
• Switch Unit/Alarm Interface Access Module Presetting
The same Craft Terminal SW packet can be used for both Equipment 1651 SM ”Old Practice” that foresee
the Switch Unit (that is used for the EPS N+1 for the 34/45 or 140/155 electrical Trib) and for the ”New
Practice” version of the same Equipment that doesn’t house the former unit but however performs the
same protection functions by means the dedicated Access Module sub units. On the Craft Terminal the
same slot that allows to SW equip the Switch Unit is used to equip the type of Alarm Int. Acc. Module to
be used. This slot on the Craft Terminal becomes active only if an Hw setting has been made on
the Alarm Interface Access Module Unit .
Doing the HW presetting for the Alarm Interface Access Module unit as indicated in the Hardware setting
Section of this Technical Handbook the Subrack SW Configuration selection about the Switch Unit/Alarm
Interface Access Module slot on the Craft Terminal, is enabled and the User can choose if the EPS is to
be performed or not.
The HW presetting on the Alarm Interface Access Module Unit must be made when the EPS
1+N protection for the 34/45 or 140/155 electrical Tributaries is to be performed.
This unit is compliant with IEC–950 norms on electrical safety.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 264 / 436
436
OH–BUS
L–IECB TO AGGREGATES
+5V VOLTAGE +2V CKL
REGULATOR N–IECB TO ALL
CKN UNITS
(not used) OH–BUS

L–IECB
+5V VOLTAGE +2V CKL
REGULATOR N–IECB TO ALL
CKN UNITS
URG
NURG
INT
IND
FROM
LOS Q3
EQ
CONTR. TORC
TANC
TUP
& AND
–BATT1 RM
<1 < 1 RURG
= = INTERF.
M CONNECTOR
RNURG
POWER
ACCESS A
MODULE &
<1
= OR M M <1
= M
–BATT2
TOR
TOR
REMOTE
ALARMS
CAND CONNECTOR
TAND
ORALIMI
C
TO EUA AND A
<1
EQ = AU
CONTR. UP M M
MFAIL
FROM
ACCESS
MODULE
PWANDOR TO / FROM
PISO
EQ
CONTR.
–VSERV (not used)
–5V
RM
INTERF. +VSERV
–5V MAC ADDRESS TO / FROM
CONNECTOR
EQ
GND REMOTE INVENTORY CONTR.
(not used)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 101. Block diagram: Alarm Interface Access Module
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 265 / 436
436
3.2.19 Qx & Synchronism Access Module

This subunit is available in three versions:

Qx & Synch. 120 Access Module
Qx & Synch. 120 ohm or 1.0/2.3 interface
Qx & Synch. T43
The above modules are functionally identical except for the type of connector used for synchronism
signals connection.
The Qx & SYNCH. ACCESS MODULE makes the functionality of three different circuits:
QB3* interface (10–B2)
Synch. interface (SYNC)
Q2–LTS interface (Q INT)
Another circuit, named CARD FAIL ALARM that has the purpose of monitoring the functionality of the card,
is foreseen.
QB3* interface (10–B2)
The purpose of the QB3* interface is to convert the signals present on the back panel connectors to the
10Base2 option for LAN interfaces. The implementation is compliant with the IEE 802.3 standard for
CSMA/CD type of local area networks.
The ADM uses this module when the plant requires to connect a LAN cable to reach the centralized
Operation System: they can be directly connected to the same office LAN or can be reached through an
intermediate gateway equipment.
BNC thin–wire connectors constitutes the LAN side of QX module. They are compliant with the standard
10base2 electrical characteristics and can be directly attached to the LAN coax cable. The B2 connectors
are located on the front cover of the unit.
The QB3* Interface connects the equipment to the Telecommunication Management Network by means
the Thin Ethernet (10 base 2) cable through a BNC female connector.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 266 / 436
436
The Qx Interface consists of the following functional circuits:
1) DC/DC Converter and isolation transformers. They establish an electric isolation between the
coaxial cable and the transceiver cable.
2) Transceiver: it carries out the following functions as specified by the IEEE 802.3 standard
(Ethernet):
a) Transmit: the data received from the equipment (DO–A, DO–B differential signals) are
level adapted in compliancy with the coaxial cables utilized.
b) Receive: the data transiting over the coaxial cable are sent to the equipment (DI–A, DI–B
differential signals)
c) Collision detection: should two or more stations collide (following two or more stations
simultaneously transmitting) then the transmission of the CI–A and CI–B signals will fail.
d) Check length of the transmitted packets: a jabber timer interrupts transmission should the
length of the data packets exceed the maximum allowed standard. Failure of CI signal
transmission is detected.
The Control–out signal (CO), specified by the IEEE 802.3 standard to enable/disable transmission, is not
utilized and the module is always enabled (see Standard should signal fail).
Synchronism interface
This interface is realized by connectors that allow the connections between external synchronism and the
internal synchronisms according to ITU–T G.703 for 2 MHz signals , towards and from CRUs.
As already specified the connectors are of the following type:
One 120 ohms connectors mounted on the ”Qx & Synch. 120 Acc. Mod.” (see Figure 102. on page268 ).
Three 1.0/2.3 75 ohms connectors mounted on the ”Qx & Synch. 1.0/2.3 Acc. Mod.”
Three Type 43 75 ohms connectors mounted on the ”Qx & Synch. T43 Acc. mod.”
Q2–LTS Interface
Q2–LTS interface is a RS 485 interface that allows the dialogue from EC to a mediation device utilized for
network management operation (transfer and receive configuration data, alarm status and so on).
SeeFigure 102. on page 268.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 267 / 436
436
TX A
RX A
3
CK A
TX B
TO EQUIPMENT RX B Q2 LTS
CONTROLLER CKB INTERFACE
TX SH
RX SH
GND
DO–A
DO–B 1
DI–A
COAXIAL THIN
CABLE ETHERNET
DI–B
TRANSCEIVER
QB3*
CI–A
TO EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
CI–B
CO–A
CO–B
+12V +9V
CKA IN P 2
CKA IN N
CK OUT P
SYNCHRONISM
TO CRU CK OUT N
I /O
CKB IN P
CKB IN N
Figure 102. Block diagram: Qx & Synch. Access Module

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 268 / 436
436
3.2.20 Qx 10 BT & Synchronism Access Module

This unit is available in three versions:

Qx 10 BT & Synch. 120 Access Module
Qx 10 BT & Synch. 1.0/2.3
Qx 10 BT & Synch. T43
The above modules are functionally identical except for the type of connector used for synchronism
signals connection.
The Qx 10 BT & SYNCH. ACCESS MODULE makes the functionality of three different circuits:
10 BT interface
Synch. 120 ohm / 1.0–2.3 interface (SYNC)
Q2–LTS interface (Q int)
Another circuit, named Card Fail Alarm that has the purpose of monitoring the functionality of the card,
is foreseen.
– 10 BT interface
The10 BT function provides the electrical and functional interface between the IEEE 802.3 standard
Attachment Unit Interface (AUI) present on the back panel and the Twisted Pair cable.
This interface implements the Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) function for the Twisted pair Medium
as specified by the supplement to the IEEE 802.3 standard ( type 10 base T ).
The ADM uses this module when the plant requires to connect a LAN cable to reach the centralized
Operation System: they can be directly connected to the same office LAN or can be reached through
an intermediate gateway equipment.
The Twisted Pair side ( BT connector) of the Qx 10–BT & Synch access module is constituted by
an 8 pins RJ45 connector. It is compliant to the electrical characteristics of the 10 base T standard
and can be directly connected to the Twisted Pair cable.
The Qx Interface consists of the following functional circuits:
1) A specialized signal transformer provides electrical isolation between the I/O differential pair of
the Twisted Pair and the Twisted Pair Interface (TPI) internal circuits . Moreover it provides a
low–pass filter block on the TPI side signals.
2) Card fail alarm : it monitors the output voltage of he DC/DC converter. In case of fault of the
DC/DC converter the circuit provides an alarm (MFAIL) towards ALARM INTERFACE ACCESS
MODULE (not operative).
3) Power supply controller : interrupts the transceiver power voltage if the Equipment Controller
is extracted
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 269 / 436
436
4) Transceiver: it carries out the following functions as specified by the IEEE 802.3 standard (10
Base T):
a) Transmitter: it accepts data streams from the AUI interface and transmits it towards the

Twisted Pair cable.

b) Receiver: it receives data stream from the Twieted Pair cable and sends it to the AUI
interface.
c) Collision detection:it indicates to the AUI interface if there is a collision on the Twisted Pair
cable
d) The transceiver provides a number of features including transmit digital predistorsion,

receiver squelch, link status indication with automatic Twisted Pair receive polarity
detedction /correction and SQE test.
– Synchronism interface
This interface is realized by a 9 pin SUB–D connector (cod. 040.655.101) that allows the connections
between external synchronism and the internal synchronisms according to ITU–T G.703 for 2 MHz
signals with 120 ohm impedance, towards and from CRU.
Three 1.0/2.3 75 ohms connectors mounted on the ”Qx & Synch. 1.0/2.3 Acc. Mod.”
Three Type 43 75 ohms connectors mounted on the ”Qx & Synch. T43 Acc. mod.”
– Q2–LTS Interface (not operative in this release)
Q2–LTS interface is a RS 485 interface that allows the dialogue from EC to a mediation device utilized
for network management operation (transfer and receive configuration data, alarm status and so on).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 270 / 436
436
TX A
RX A
CK A
TX B Q2
TO EQUIPMENT
TX SH
CONTROLLER INTERFACE
RX B
RX SH
CKB
GND
DO–A
DO–B TPTXP
TWISTED
DI–A TPTXN
DI–B PAIR
CI–A INTERFACE TPRXP

TO EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER CI–B TPRXN
+5V +5V
FROM EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER +12 V
CKA IN P/N
CKB IN P/N SYNCHRONISM
TO CRU
I /O
CK OUT P/N
Figure 103. Block diagram: Qx 10–BT & Synch. Access Module

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 271 / 436
436
3.2.21 Power and Housekeeping Access Module
This module provides an external access for the Equipment Controller ( Houskeeping contacts) and the
power supply for the DC/DC converters. See Figure 104.

The module houses:
• Battery access
Connectors (1) on the front panel delivers the station voltage to the Power Supply units.
Two E.M.C. filters are placed between the battery voltage and ground.
• Housekeeping contacts
Front –panel connector (2) provides connections for the parallel contacts (housekeeping).
Two criteria are sent to the Alarm Interface to activate the AND/OR function.
CPI 1
CPI 2
CPI 3
CPI 4
CPI 5
CPI 6
CPI 7
2 CPI 8 TO/FROM
TO/FROM CPO 1 EQ. CONTROLLER
STATION CPO 2
CPO 3
CPO 4
CPO 5
CPO 6
CPO 7
+ BATT1
EMC TO POWER SUPPLY
– BATT1 FILTERS
TO ANDOR
1
FROM + BATT2
STATION EMC TO POWER SUPPLY
BATTERIES – BATT2 FILTERS
TO ANDOR
Figure 104. Power Access Module

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 272 / 436
436
3.2.22 Power and Housekeeping Access Module/2
(See Figure 105. on page 273 )

The module houses:

• Battery access
Connectors (1) on the front panel deliver the station voltage to the Power Supply units.
Two E.M.C. filters are placed between the battery voltage and ground.
• Housekeeping contacts
Front –panel connector (2) provide connection for the parallel contacts (housekeeping).
When using this module the AND/OR function is available by strapping.
CPI 1
CPI 2
CPI 3
CPI 4
CPI 5
CPI 6
CPI 7
2 CPI 8 TO/FROM
TO/FROM CPO 1 EQ. CONTROLLER
STATION CPO 2
CPO 3
CPO 4
CPO 5
CPO 6
CPO 7
+ BATT1
– BATT1 EMC TO POWER SUPPLY

FILTERS TO ANDOR
SZ
1
FROM + BATT2
STATION
EMC TO POWER SUPPLY
BATTERIES – BATT2
FILTERS
TO ANDOR
SZ
Figure 105. Power Access Module

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 273 / 436
436
3.2.23 Auxiliary Access Module
This module provides an external access for the AUX/EOW unit.

Three interfaces are present :

• 64 Kbit connections
• V11 connections
• EOW extension
3.2.24 Tributary Access Module sub–unit
The sub–units connect the tributary signals to the relevant units and switche onto the stand–by tributary
unit following switching command.
The type of sub–units used depend on the bit–rate of the tributary signal, on the impedance, on the
connectors and on the K20 standard protection.
3.2.24.1 21x2/1.5 Mbit/s Access Module
(See Figure 106. on page 275 ).
The description is applicable to the following kind of physical connection:
– 2 Mbit/s coax. connectors (75 ohm) – With Micro Siemens connectors 1.0 /2.3
– 2 Mbit/s 120 Ohm – K20 – 120 ohm modules with Sub–D connectors
and K20 protection
– 2 Mbit/s T43 (75 ohm) – 75 ohm module with Type T43 connector
– 2 Mbit/s 120 ohm – 120 ohm module with Sub–D connector
This subunit is available in two versions:
21x2 Mb/s Protected Access Module – 120 ohm
21x2 Mb/s Unprotected Access Module – 120 ohm
The 21x2 Mb/s PROT. ACC. MOD. 120 ohm is a unit that makes the connection from the 2 Mb/s Back
Panel signals to the external signals in accordance with ITU–T G.703 for 120 ohm impedance.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 274 / 436
436
The blocks of the switch module are:
• 2 Mb/s Analog interface (120 or 75 ohm) towards Tx and Rx physical connector access.
• K20 protection against lightning (only for Sub–unit with K20 indication)
• The 1+N EPS protection is SW set
• EPS switches, both for Tx and Rx side.

The MSW command, coming from the Equipment Controller, selects the connection with the
working or with the spare tributary unit.
• –Power failure detection and alarm generation. The Switch circuit have power protection, made
by fuse resistors with power failure detection and alarm generation. When power failure occurs
a alarm condition ( MFAIL) is sent to the ALARM INTERFACE unit.
The 21x2 Mb/s UNPROT. ACC. MOD. 120 ohm is a unit that makes the connection from the 2 Mb/s Back
Panel signals to the external signals in accordance with ITU–T G.703 for 120 ohm impedance. It uses
the same pcb of the 21x2 Mb/s PROT. ACC. MOD. 120 ohm with jumping resistors mounted instead of
relays when a unprotected configuration is foreseen.
The CARD FAIL ALARM and the SWITCH DRIVER circuits are not implemented on this unit.
D2E TO WORKING TRIB.

2 Mbit/s #1 IN
ANALOG D2ESPTO SPARE TRIB.
INTERFACE EPS
D2U FROM WORKING TRIB.
2 Mbit/s #1 OUT D2USPFROM SPARE TRIB.
TO ALARM MSW FROM EQUIPMENT

INT. MFAIL
ACCESS ALARM CONTROLLER
MODULE DETEC.
+5V +5,3V
FUSES POWER SUPPLY
–5V –5,5V
Figure 106. 21x2 Mbit/s Access Module block diagram (one of the 21 switch functions performed)
N.B. 21x2 Mbit/s Access Module (120 Ohm and 120 Ohm K20 type) can be used for 21x1.5 Mbit/s
Tributary connection too.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 275 / 436
436
3.2.24.2 TRMUX + 5x2 Mbit/s Access Module
(See Figure 107. )

The description is applicable to the following kind of physical connection :

– TRMUX & 5x2 Mbit/s Prot. Acc. Mod.120 Ohm – With SUB–D connectors for 2 Mbit/s signals
and Siemens connector for 34 Mbit/s signal
– TRMUX & 5x2 Mbit/s Prot. Acc. Mod. 75 Ohm – With Siemens connectors
The functional blocks of each module are :
• 34 Mbit/s interface towards the Tx and Rx coaxial connectors

• 2 Mbit/s interface towards the Tx and Rx SUB–D connectors / coaxial connectors.
• The 1+N EPS protection is SW set.
• EPS switches, for both Tx and Rx sides.
Two relays, one for Tx side an the other for Rx side , switch the I/O signals towards working or
spare tributary.
The MSW command sets the relay contacts to + 5 V for main tributary, to 0 V for protection and
high impedance to have no switching action.
• Power failure detection and alarm generation.
The access module has power protection, made by fuse resistors. A power failure detection
circuit and an alarm generation circuit are present. When power failure occurs an alarm
condition ( MFAIL) is sent to the ALARM INTERFACE ACCESS MODULE subunit.
2 Mbit/s #1 IN
D2E TO WORKING TRIB.
D2ESP TO SPARE TRIB.
EPS
2 Mbit/s #1 OUT D2U FROM WORKING TRIB.
D2USP FROM SPARE TRIB.
SW
SWITCH
MSW FROM EQUIPMENT
DRIVER CONTROLLER
EPS D34E1Ti ( 34 Mb IN TO WORK. TRIB)

34 IN D34E1SNi ( 34 Mb IN SPARE N+1)
D34E1Si (34 Mb IN SPARE 1+1)
ANALOG
INTERFACE
D34U1Ti ( 34 Mb OUT FROM WORK. TRIB
34 OUT
D34U1SNi ( 34 Mb OUT SPARE N+1)
D34U1Si ( 34 Mb OUT SPARE 1+1)
TO ALARM
INT.
SW
ACCESS ALARM
MODULE DETEC
MFAIL
+5V +5,3V
FUSES
–5V –5,5V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 107. TRMUX +5x2 Mbit/s block diagram
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 276 / 436
436
3.2.24.3 34/45 Mbit/s Access Module
(See Figure 108. ).

The description is applicable to:

– 3x34 Mbit/s Access Module T43 – With type 43 connector
– 3x34 Mbit/s Access Module – E – With Micro Siemens connectors 1.0/2.3
The switch module operates on 3x34 Mbit/s and 45 Mbit/s Tributaries. The blocks of each function switch
are:
• 34 Mbit/s interface towards the Tx and Rx coaxial connectors

The MSW command, coming from the Equipment Controller, selects the connection with the
working or with the spare tributary unit.
In 1+1 EPS the Main trib is connected with the spare and in N+1 EPS up to four working
tributaries are connected with the spare trib through the Access Module.
• The default factory EPS setting is to allow the N+1 protection.
• The kind of EPS to activate besides the SW selection carried out by means the Craft
Terminal, must be hardware set on this subunit (see the Hardware setting Section,
Table 26. on page 428).
• In order to activate this protection the User must define the consistent Hardware setting
also for the Alarm Interface Access Module. (see the Hardware setting Section, Table 26. on
page 428).
a alarm condition ( MFAIL) is sent to the ALARM INTERFACE ACCESS MODULE subunit.
The MSW command, coming from Equipment Controller unit, sets the relay contacts. This command is
set to + 5 V for main tributary, to 0 V for protection and high impedance to have no switching action.
D34E1Ti ( 34 Mb IN TO WORK. TRIB)

34 IN D34E1SNi ( 34 Mb IN SPARE N+1)
EPS
ANALOG SETTING
INTERFACE EPS
D34U1Ti ( 34 Mb OUT FROM WORK. TRIB
34 OUT
D34U1SNi ( 34 Mb OUT SPARE N+1)
D34U1Si ( 34 Mb OUT SPARE 1+1)
MSW (FROM EC)

TO ALARM MFAIL
INT. ALARM
ACCESS
DETEC
MODULE
+5V +5,3V
FUSES
–5V –5,5V
Figure 108. 34 Mbit/s Access Module – Switch block diagram (one of three switch function performed)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 277 / 436
436
3.2.24.4 140 Mbit/s Access Module
(See Figure 109. ).

The description is applicable to:

– Access Module 140 Mbit/s K20 – With Siemens Connections and K20 protection
– Access Module 140 Mbit/s T43 – With type 43 connections
– 140 Mbit/s Access Module – With all microsiemens connectors
The Access module operates: on 140 Mbit/s and STM1 electrical tributary.
The blocks of the switch module are:
• 140 Mb/s interface towards the Rx and Tx coaxial connectors

• K20 protection against lightning (only for sub–unit with K20 indication)
The MSW command, coming from the Equipment Controller selects the connection with the
working or the spare tributary unit.
In 1+1 EPS the spare trib is connected through the spare Unit and in N+1 EPS the spare trib.
is connected with the working tributaries through the Access Module.
• The default factory EPS setting is to allow the N+1 protection.
• The kind of EPS to activate besides the SW selection carried out by means the Craft
Terminal, must be hardware set on this subunit (see the Hardware setting Section,
Table 26. on page 428).
• In order to activate this protection the User must define the consistent Hardware setting
also for the Alarm Interface Access Module. (see the Hardware setting Section, Table 26. on
page 428).
a alarm condition ( MFAIL) is sent to the ALARM INTERFACE ACCESS MODULE subunit.
The +5V and –5.5V input power supply are fuse–protected.
K20
PROTEC.
D140ETi (140 Mb IN)
J1
140 IN
D140ESNi (140 Mb IN SPARE N+1)
EPS
ANALOG SETTING
J6 INTERFACE EPS
G703 D140UTi (140 Mb OUT)
CMI
140 OUT REGEN. D140USNi (140 Mb OUT SPARE N+1)
D34U1Si (140 Mb OUT SPARE 1+1)
MSW FROM EQUIPMENT
TO ALARM CONTROLLER
MFAIL
INT. ALARM
ACCESS DETEC
MODULE
+5V +5,3V
FUSES
–5V –5,5V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 109. 140 Mbit/s Access Module – Switch block diagram
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 278 / 436
436
4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Data indicated in the handbook must be considered as standard values

Data indicated in the contract must be considered as guaranteed values

4.1 General Characteristics
Optical Line bit rate (aggregates) 622 Mbit/s (STM–4) or 2488 Mbit/s (STM–16)
Optical tributaries bit rate 155 Mbit/s (STM–1)
Electrical tributaries bit rate 140 Mbit/s or 155 Mbit/s software settable,
34 Mbit/s,45 Mbit/s, 2 Mbit/s, 1.5 Mbit/s
Type of optical fiber Single–mode, Rec.G.652 / G.653 compliant
Aggregates Wavelength 1310 nm (2nd window) and 1550 nm (3rd window)

(Central, nominal)
Application code for Aggregate Interfaces S4.1, L4.1, L4.2 , L4.1 JE, L4.2 JE – S16.1, L16.1,
(see Table 15. on page 284 up to Table 16. L16.2, L16.2 JE.
on page 286).
Coloured Aggregates Wavelength (WDM 1531.90 – 1533.47 – 1535.04 –1536.61 – 1538.19 –

applications) 1539.77 – 1541.35 – 1542.94 (nm)
1547.72 – 1549.32 – 1550.92 –1552.52 – 1554.13 –
1555.75 – 1557.36 – 1558.98 (nm)
Application codes for Aggregate Interfaces S 16.1, L 16.1, L 16.2, L16.2 JE–1 (1900 ps/nm.), L16.2
(Table 1/G.957) JE–1.1, L16.2 JE–2 (3000 ps/nm), L16.3 JE–3 (4000
ps/nm)
L16.2 JE WDM (6400 ps/nm)
L16.2 JE WDM (12800 ps/nm)
Standard applied:
Electrical Interfaces Rec. G.703
SDH frame and multiplexing structure Recs. G.707, G.708, G.709
Equipment function Recs. G.782, G.783, G.784
Optical Interfaces Recs. G.957, G.958, G.653
Transmission quality Rec. G.784, G.826
System management functions (SW) Recs. X.733, X.734, X.736

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Jitter and wander Recs. G.783, G.823, G.825
MS SPRING Protection Recs. G.841
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 279 / 436
436
Drop–Insert capacity
140 Mbit/s, DVB, 155 Mbit/s Tributaries 8

24

34, 45 Mbit/s Tributaries

2 Mbit/s Tributaries 63 in the Line Shelf and further 3x63 2Mbit/s Tribs
supplied by 1641SM–D Drop Shelf
Tributari 1.5 Mbit/s 63
Cross–connection
Level VC4 Aggregate to Aggregate (only with Full Matrix)

Aggregate to Tributary
Tributary to Tributary (only with Full Matrix)
Level VC3 and VC12 With Full Matrix

In four VC4 of East Aggregate, four VC4 of the West
Aggregate (N.B.) eight Tributaries’ VC4s.
Aggregate to Aggregate
Between VC in one side Aggregate.
Tributaries to Tributary
Aggregate to Tributary
N.B. – With STM–16 Aggregate, also 8 distributed VC4

on the aggregate sides.
Worst transfer delay <100µsec. per traffic pathway ( aggregate to tributary)
Protections 1651 SM / 1661 SMC ; 1641SM–D (as for as

applicable)
SL–APS. Simplified linear APS for 1+1 unidirectional
line protection for aggregate and STM1 optical and
electrical tributary. Not revertive.
2 MS SPRING. Only for 1661SM–C, using 8 High
priority AU4.
1+1 EPS for CRU (not revertive) and FULL MATRIX
(revertive or not revertive) units
SNCP Unidirectional Subnetwork Connection
Protection on 2 fibers in ring networks (TU and AU4).
Revertive or not revertive
TRIBUTARIES EPS:
– 2/1.5 Mb/s:
• 1+N (3 max.) revertive.– 1615SM/1661SM–C
• 1+N (9 max.) revertive.– 1641SM–D
– 34 Mb/s or 140 Mb/s or STM1 electrical:
• 2 benchs with 1+N (4 max), revertive .And/or:
•
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
2 benchs with 1+1 EPS ,revertive .

2+1 power supply LINE SHELF protection
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 280 / 436
436
1+1 power supply DROP SHELF protection
DVB Tribs are not EPS protected.
Management Interface
Local: Craft Interface RS232

(Personal Computer) 9–pin D, PC compatible 9600 B/S
Remote Craft Interface IRS232 9–pin D, PC compatible 9600 B/S it handles up to

(Personal Computer) other 31 NEs via DCC.
Remote: Transmission Qx G.773 QB3 10 base 2 and base T, QECC G.784

Management Network
(TMN) Interface
Protocol Stack/ In this release QB3*/QECC* proprietary

Information Model (Alcatel 7.1 – 7.2 layers are adopted)
messages
Dual addressing to O.S.: It allows O.S redundancy
Local and Remote Management Alarms status checks, equipment, connection and TMN
Interfaces functions configurations, administrative function for security
(password and operator profile), maintenance memory for
all the equipment events, monitoring on performance.
Equipment software download on non–volatile memories

without traffic interruption.
Unit and Equipment acknowledgement Through Remote Inventory

(Company id, Unit Type, Unit Part Number, Serial Part
Number, Software Part Number, CLEI code,
Manufacturing Plant Date identifier, Date).
For detail refer to Operator Handbook .
Unit substitution characteristics
Tributary unit without interfering on other channels
Spare unit without interfering on traffic
Output Housekeeping signals and outputs CPO, not operative in this release + remote
Remote Alarms alarms.
Max. guaranteed current with closed 50 mA

condition
Max. allowed voltage with open condition –72 V
Voltage drop vs. ground with closed –2 V 0 V

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
condition
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 281 / 436
436
Input Housekeeping signals 8 inputs CPI (only three available for the customer)
Max. guaranteed current with closed 3mA

condition

Max. allowed voltage with open condition –72 V
Voltage drop vs. ground with closed –2 V 0 V

condition
4.1.1 Electrical and optical safety
Protection against lightning surges K20 (optional)
Optical Safety According to IEC 825 and ITU–T Rec. G.958 regarding
ALS. WARNING: Booster +17 dBm is a Class 3B
LASER. All Other Optical Interfaces are Class 3A
LASERS (Rec. IEC–825).
Electrical Safety
Safety status of the connections with other TNV (Telecommunication Network Voltage) for Remote
equipment alarms, Housekeeping (CPO,CPI) , Rack lamp (RM)
and for Tributary connections if K20 protected.
SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) for all the other.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 282 / 436
436
4.2 Unit Characteristics
The following specification are in addition to those specified in para. 4.1 on page 279.
4.2.1 STM–4 Aggregate units
Types of optical interfaces S–4.1, L–4.1, L–4.2 or L–4.2JE. Characteristics are given in
Table 15.
Optical connectors FC/PC, DIN or SC/PC.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 283 / 436
436
Table 15. Parameters specified for STM–4 Optical Interfaces
CHARACTERISTICS UNIT VALUES

DIGITAL SIGNAL STM–4 according to G.707 and G.958
Nominal bit rate Kbit/s 622.080
Application code (table 1 / G.957) S–4.1 L–4.1 L–4.2 L–4.2 JE
Operating wavelength range 1274–1356 1280–1335 1480–1580 1530–1560
TRANSMITTER AT REFERENCE POINT S
Source type MLM SLM SLM SLM
Special characteristics:
• maximum RMS width nm 2.5 – – –

• maximum –20 dB width nm – 1 1 0,8
• minimum side mode suppression ratio dB – 30 30 30
Mean launched power:
• maximum dBm –8 +2 +2 +2
• minimum dBm –15 –3 –3 –3
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2 10 10 10
OPTICAL PATH BETWEEN S AND R
Attenuation range dB 0–12 10–27 10–24 10–28
Maximum dispersion ps/nm 84 300 1900 2400
Minimum optical return loss of cable plant at S, including any

dB 14 20 24 24
connectors
Maximum discrete reflectance

dB –20 –25 –27 –27
between S and R
RECEIVER AT REFERENCE POINT R
Type of detector InGaAs PIN InGaAs PIN InGaAs PIN InGaAs PIN
Mean received power @ BER=1E –10: dB 1 1 1 1
• minimum (sensitivity) dBm –28 –31 –28 –32

• maximum (overload) dBm –8 –8 –8 –8
Maximum optical path penalty dB 1 1 1 1
Maximum reflectance of receiver

dB –20 –20 –27 –27
measured at R
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 284 / 436
436
4.2.2 STM–16 Aggregate units
Types of optical interfaces S–16.1, L–16.1, L–16–2 L–16–2 JE 1,2 and 3.

The single channel optical interface characteristics are given in
Table 16.
L–16.2 JE WDM multi channel characteristics are given in Table 17.

on page 287
Optical connectors FC/PC, DIN or SC/PC.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 285 / 436
436
Table 16. Parameters specified for STM–16 Optical Interfaces (Single Channel).

Nominal bit rate Kbit/s 2 488 320
L–16.2JE1 L–16.2 JE2 L–16.2 JE3

Application code (table 1 / G.957) S–16.1 L–16.1 L–16.2
NB1 NB2 NB3
Operating wavelength range 1270–1360 1280–1335 1500–1580 1530–1560 1550–1560 1550–1560
Source type SLM SLM SLM SLM SLM–IM SLM–IM
Special characteristics:
• maximum RMS width nm – – – – – –

• maximum –20 dB width nm 1 1 1 0.5 0.2 0.2
• minimum side m\ode dB 30 30 30 30 30 30
suppression ratio
• maximum dBm 0 +2 +2 +4 –1 –1
• minimum dBm –5 –2 –2 +1 –3 –3
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
Attenuation range dB 0–12 10–24 10–24 13–28 NB2 NB3

Maximum dispersion ps/nm 100 250 1600 1900 3200 4000
Minimum optical return loss of cable

dB 24 24 24 24 24 24
plant at S, including any connectors

dB –27 –27 –27 –27 –27 –27
between S and R
InGaAs InGaAs InGaAs InGaAs InGaAs InGaAs

Type of detector
PIN APD APD APD APD APD
Mean received power @

BER=1E–10:
• minimum (sensitivity) dBm –18 –27 –28 –29 –29 NB3

• maximum (overload) dBm 0 –8 –8 –9 –9 –9
Maximum optical path penalty dB 1 1 2 2 1 1

dB –27 –27 –27 –27 –27 –27
measured at R
NB1 To be used with Booster (Optical Amplifier) up to +15 dBm on G.653 fiber or in stand alone configuration
NB2 To be used with Booster (Optical Amplifier) on G.652 fiber; attenuation range according to output power of the Booster
NB3 To be used with Booster (Optical Amplifier) in conjunction with the 1664 OA Preamplifier on G.652 and G.653 fiber;
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
attenuation range according to Booster and Preamplifier power budget. Sensitivity value measured on Preamplifier.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 286 / 436
436
Table 17. Parameters specified for STM–16 Optical Interfaces (Multi Channel)

STM–16 according to G.707

DIGITAL SIGNAL
and G.958
Nominal bit rate kbit/s 2 488 320
Application code (Table 1/G.957) L–16.2 JE WDM 6400
Central operating wavelength nm NB1
Source type ILM
Spectral characteristics :
maximum RMS width nm –
maximum –20 dB width nm 0.2
minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 30
maximum dBm +2
minimum dBm –3
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
OPTICAL PATH BETWEEN S’ AND R’
Max loss budget dB NB2
Loss limited distance Km NB2
Maximum chromatic dispersion ps/nm 6400
Dispersion limited distance Km 320
Minimum optical return loss at S’, including any
dB 24
connectors
Total average PMD (1th order) ps 40
Operating wavelength range nm 1530–1561
Type of detector InGaAs APD
OSNR dB/0.1nm 17 (NB3)
Mean received power @ BER=1E–12 with fiber:
minimum (sensitivity) dBm –23
maximum (overload) dBm –10
Maximum reflectance of receiver, measured at R dB – 27
NOTES:
NB1 Trasmitters used up to 16 wavelenght Wdm system. The 16 wavelenght are (nm):
1547.72, 1549.32, 1550.92, 1552.52, 1554.13, 1555.75, 1557.36, 1558.98 (red)
1531.90, 1533.47, 1535.04, 1536.61, 1538.19, 1539.77, 1541.35, 1542.94 (blue)
NB2 Attenuation range and relevant limited distance depend on WDM system specs.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
NB3 For NOT “Enhanced” 6400 ps/nm Aggregate units is 19 dB/0.1nm.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 287 / 436
436
4.2.2.1 Example of a link specification using 1661 SMC with L–16.2 JE2 Aggregate and a 15
dBm Booster
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Booster (on 1664OA)


Aggregate Aggregate
STM16 STM16
Booster S R
Input
min –6dBm 15dBm –29dBm

max 4dBm 17dBm –9dBm
SPECIFICATIONS
Maximum chromatic dispersion 3200 (ps/nm)
Optical fiber used G.652
– fiber attenuation 0.25 dB/km
– chromatic dispersion of the fiber 18 ps/nm/km
– penalty 1 dB
Attenuation range
26 dB
min = +17–(–9)
43 dB
max = +15 –(–29)–1
Minimum span length (26dB/0.25) 104 Km
Maximum span length

172 Km
due to the attenuation (sensitivity) 43/0.25=172
Following there are the formulas to calculate the minimum and maximum span length. The maximum
length can be limited by the receiver sensitivity or by the maximum chromatic dispersion, whichever is
most restrictive; the minimum length is limited by the receiver overload.
The optical interface characteristics are deduced from Table 16. and Table 17. depending on the type
of interface.
The optical fiber characteristics are reported in rec. ITU–T G.957.
Span attenuation range:

Min Atten.= (max Tx Power)–(min. Rx Overload)=+17–(–9)=26dB
Max Atten.= (minTx Power)–(min. Rx Sensitivity)–(penalty)=+15–(–29)–1=43 dB
Minimum span length for overload = (Min Att.)/(fiber att.)=26/0.25=104 Km

Maximum span length for attenuation (sensitivity) = (Max Att.)/(fiber att.)=43/0.25=172 Km
Maximum span length for dispersion = (Max dispers.)/(fiber disp.)=3200/18=177.7 Km
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Thus the maximum fiber span length is limited for attenuation (sensitivity): 172 Km,
while the minimum span to avoid overload problems should be 104 Km.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 288 / 436
436
4.2.3 Example of a link specification using 1661 SMC with L–16.2 JE3 Aggregate , a 15 dBm
Booster and a Preamplifier unit.
Booster Preamplifier
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ

(on the 1664OA) (on the 1664OA)
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Aggregate
STM16
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Aggregate
STM16
Booster S R Preamplifier
Input Output
min –6dBm 15dBm –37dBm –15.5dBm

max 4dBm 17dBm –18dBm –12.5dBm
SPECIFICATIONS
Maximum chromatic dispersion 4000 (ps/nm)
Optical fiber used G.652
– fiber attenuation 0.25 dB/km
– chromatic dispersion of the fiber 18 ps/nm/km
– penalty 1 dB
Attenuation range
35 dB
min = +17–(–18)
51 dB
max = +15 –(–37)–1
Minimum span length (35dB/0.25) 140 Km
Maximum span length

204 Km
(due to attenuation: 51dB/0.25)
Note (*): Preamplifier Optical characteristics are reported in 1664OA Technical Handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 289 / 436
436
4.2.4 Optical Tributary units
Types of optical interfaces S–1.1, L–1.1, L–1.2 . Characteristics are given in Table 18.

Optical connectors FC/PC, SC/PC

Table 18. Parameters specified for STM–1 Optical Interfaces
Nominal bit rate Kbit/s 155 520
Application code (table 1 / G.957) S–1.1 L–1.1 L–1.2
Operating wavelength range 1261–1360 1280–1335 1480–1580
Source type MLM MLM SLM
Spectral characteristics:
• maximum RMS width nm 7.7 4 –

• maximum –20 dB width nm – – 1
• minimum side mode suppression ratio dB – – 30
• maximum dBm –8 0 0
• minimum dBm –15 –5 –5
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2 10 10
Attenuation range dB 0–12 10–28 10–28
Maximum dispersion ps/nm 100 250 1900
Minimum optical return loss of cable plant at S, including any connectors dB NA NA 20

dB NA NA –25
between S and R
Type of detector InGaAs PIN InGaAs PIN InGaAs PIN
Mean received power @ BER= 1E–10:
• minimum (sensitivity) dBm –28 –34 –34

• maximum (overload) dBm –8 –10 –10
Maximum optical path penalty dB 1 1 1

dB –14 –14 –25
measured at R
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Note :
NA = Not Applicable
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 290 / 436
436
4.2.5 140/STM1 Switch Tributary
Selection between 140 Mbit/s and STM1 Through SW setting

Type of Interface Electrical, ITU–T Rec. G.703 compliant
Bit rate 139264 Kbit/s ±15 ppm, or 155 520Kbit/s ±20ppm
Code CMI
Attenuation accepted on the incoming signal 0–12 dB at 70MHz with law f.
0–12.7 dB at 78MHz with law f.
Return loss 15dB at 7–210 MHz – 15dB at 8–240 MHz
Pulse shape G.703, Fig.19, 20 G.703, Fig.24, 25
4.2.6 3x34 Mbit/s TRIB.
Type of interface Electrical, according to ITU–T Rec. G703
Bit Rate 34368 Kbit/s 20 ppm
No. of tributaries 3
Code HDB3
Signal amplitude 1Vp/75ohms
Attenuation accepted on the incoming signal 0–12dB at 17.184kHz with law f
Return loss 12 dB 860–1720 kHz

18 dB 1720–34368 kHz
14 dB 34368–51550 kHz
Pulse shape as per Fig.17 of ITU–T Rec. G.703
4.2.7 3x45 Mbit/s TRIB.
Type of interface Electrical, according to ITU–T Rec. G703 and to

ANSI TS 102 Rec.
Bit rate 44.736 Kbit/s 20ppm
Code B3ZS
Signal amplitude According to ITU–T Rec. G.703 par.5.8 and ANSI

T1 102 Rec, Tab.5
Attenuation accepted on the incoming signal According to ANSI T1 102, Annex A2.5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Pulse shape as per Fig.14 of ITU–T Rec.G.703 or per Fig.14 of

ANSI T1 102 Rec.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 291 / 436
436
4.2.8 DVB TRIB.
Type of interface Electrical, according to EN 50083–9

Bit rate 270 Mbit/s
Code 8B /10B code
Signal amplitude 0.8 Vp/75 ohms
Managed bit rate 1.44 to 38.9 Mbit/s
4.2.9 21x2 Mbit/s Trib.
Bit rate 2048Kbit/s 50ppm
Code HDB3
Signal amplitude 3Vp/120ohms, or 2.37/75ohms (bal/unbal.)
Attenuation accepted on the incoming signal 0–6dB at 1024kHz with law f.
Return loss 12 dB 51–102 kHz

18 dB 102–2048 kHz
14 dB 2048–3072 kHz
Pulse shape as per Fig.15 of ITU–T Rec.G.703
4.2.10 21x1.5 Mbit/s TRIB.
Bit rate 1544 Kbit/s ± 50 ppm
Code B8ZS
Signal amplitude 3Vp/100 ohms
Pulse shape as per Fig.15 of ITU–T Rec.G.703

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 292 / 436
436
4.2.11 Clock Reference Units
Selectable input reference clock 2048 Kbit/s Tributaries,

Aggregates, STM–1 Tributaries and 2048 kHz
external clock 2
Number of selected clock (normal mode) 6 max Internal and 6 max external reference
Output clock (to external) 2048 kHz
Other local frequencies Free–run mode 4.6 ppm (CRU PLL without
reference)
Holdover mode drift 1.0 ppm max./day (CRU PLL
with stored frequency for more than half an hour, in
absence of selected input reference)
The ”Enhanced CRU” version has an holdover

stability of 0.37ppm max./day and complies with
ITU–T G.814.
Accepted drift 10 ppm
Switch free run/normal mode < 4 sec.
Time for which the holdover is maintained Permanent
External Clock characteristics
Frequency 2048 kHz 50 ppm
Pulse shape as per Fig.21 or ITU–T Rec. G.703
Input/output impedance 75 ohms or 120 ohms

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 293 / 436
436
4.2.12 AUX/EOW units
Speech Channel Interface Front–panel telephone jack / external access with

”Extension” AUX EOW Unit

Impedance 600 ohms
Operating current 8 mA
Tx level 0 dBr
Rx level –4 dBr
Code DTMF compliant with ITU–T Rec. Q.23

• selective call=10 99
• conference call=00
Analog EOW Extension (with AUX/EOW Extension unit only)
Impedance 600 ohms
Bandwidth 300–3400 Hz
Tx level 0 dBr ±0.5 dB
Rx level 0 dBr ±0.5 dB
Externally accessible data channel. 3x64 Kbit/s, G.703 codirectional

3x9600 baud, V11 contradirectional
64 Kbit/s Codirectional Interface
Bit rate 64 Kbit/s 100 ppm
Timing signals 64 Kbit/s and 8 kHz transmitted in a codirectional

manner together with the informative signal
Tx bearer Two balanced pairs (120 ohms): one per route
Code Conversion rules CCITT Rec. G.703
Outgoing symbol rate 256 Kbaud
Outgoing pulse shape as per Fig.5 of CCITT Rec.G.703
Output Interface characteristics As per CCITT Rec. G.703, Table 1.
Incoming Interface characteristics as per the outgoing interface but modified by the
characteristics of the interconnection pair.
The input circuit can accept an 0 – 3 dB attenuated
signal at 128 kHz.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 294 / 436
436
64Kbit/s oversampled 9600baud contradirectional interface
Type electrical, according to CCITT Rec. V11 (X.27

Input Receivers impedance < 6Kohms

Rx Receivers levels ”1” or ”OFF” < –0.3V

”0” or ”ON” > +0.3V
The receives are provided with a settable 120ohms line termination resistance
Differential drivers output 2v (Min)
Max DTE–DCE distance 1000m

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 295 / 436
436
4.3 Power Supply Characteristics

No. of power supply units 2+1 stand–by

Input voltage –48/–60Vdc. Allowed variations:
–38–57 Vdc, –50–72 Vdc
Power drained by load 220W

(1651SM equipped with three 21x2 Mbit/s Trib.
units, and four 140/155 Mbit/s Trib. units)
Power supply units’ output voltages +5.3V 3%

–5.5V 3%
+12.1 3%
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 296 / 436
436
4.4 Alarm Characteristics
Each unit of the equipment (excluding the DC/DC converter) is provided with a red LED on the front
coverplate. This LED glows to indicate a failure inside the unit; the green LED on the DC/DC converter
darkens to indicate failure.

The green LED on the Aggregate unit and the 140/STM–1 Switch Tributary glows to indicate regular
operation.
All the alarms detected on the units are collected by the Equipment Controller unit which will deliver
centralized optical indications. Specifically:
• Red LED (7) : detection of an urgent alarm

• Red LED (6) : detection of a not urgent alarm
• Yellow LED (4) : detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition. Type: active loopbacks,
forcing the unit into service, laser forced ON or OFF, try to restore after ALS
• Yellow LED (3) : detection of an indication alarm
The generation of the RNURG and RURG commands on behalf of the Equipment Controller and
ANDOR function housed in the Alarm & Service Access Module subunit depends on the type of alarm
detected. The commands light up the relative general red alarm LEDs at the top of the rack housing the
equipment.
The detected alarm condition can be stored through push–button (10). This operation will turn OFF the
general red LEDs and light up the yellow LED on the rack and yellow LED (5) on the Equipment Controller
unit.
The detected alarm can be automatically stored, when one or both station batteries fail.
The Equipment Controller unit delivers remote alarms.
Refer to para 5.3.4.1 on page 345 for the detailed list.
The ANDOR function housed in the Alarm & Service Access Module subunit delivers the following remote
alarms:
• TOR : Failure or loss of one station battery
• TAND : Failure or loss of both station batteries
The alarm condition is GROUND contact, except for the TUP (open contact)
Eight (the first three available to the customer ) incoming contacts CPI, and the outgoing contacts CPO,
are used for alarm indication (CPO are not operative in this release).
Characteristics of the cited remote alarms and Housekeeping contacts interface (EM type) are inserted
in Chapter 4.1 on page 279.
The Equipment Controller unit has been designed to dialogue with a Personal Computer (PC) in order to
service, activate and trouble–shoot the equipment.
All these function are described in the Operator’s handbook, detailing the alarms of each card and relevant
indications.
Connection with the PC is achieved through connector (9) available on the unit.
The unit can be connected to an Operation System associated to the Transmission Management Network
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
in order to execute operations similar to those carried out by the PC.
The characteristics of the management interfaces are specified in para 4.1 on page 279 .
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 297 / 436
436
The unit can be connected to an Operation System associated to the Transmission Management Network
in order to execute operations similar to those carried out by the PC.
The characteristics of the management interfaces are specified in para 4.1 on page 279 .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 298 / 436
436
4.5 Mechanical Characteristics
Mechanical compatibility ETSI ETS/EE3, S9

Dimensions 483 Wx280 Dx788 H mm
Weight 40–45 Kg. depending on configuration
Cooling Natural
Wiring accessible from the front

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 299 / 436
436
4.6 Environmental conditions
4.6.1 Climatic for operating conditions

The Equipment meets the requirements of ETSI Stand. without use of fans.
The functionality of the 1651SM Equipment, Vs. Temperature, is in compliance with :
ETS 300 019–1–3 :1992 , class 3.2.
Class 3.2 : Partly temperature–controlled locations.
This class applies to a closed location having neither temperature nor humidity control.
(see climatogram on Figure 110. on page 301)
When STM–16 aggregates is used, the system is in compliance with:
ETS 300 019–1–3 : 1992, class 3.1
Class 3.1 Temperature–controlled locations.
4.6.1.1 Class 3.2: partly Temperature controlled locations
This applies to locations:
– where installed equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and heat radiation. They may also be
exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts in buildings, e.g. through open
windows. They may be subjected to condensed water and to water from sources other than rain and
icing. They are not subjected to precipitation;
– where mould growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur;
– with normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban areas with industrial activities scattered
over the whole area and/or with heavy traffic;
– In close proximity to sources of sand or dust;
– with vibration of low significance, e.g. for products fastened to light supporting structures subjected
to negligible vibrations.
The conditions of this class may be found in :
– entrances and staircases of buildings;
– garages;
– cellars;
– certain workshops;
– buildings in factories and industrial process plants;
– unattended equipment stations;

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– certain telecommunication buildings;
– ordinary storage rooms for frost resistant products and farm buildings, ect.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 300 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
5
955.100.562 K
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
Figure 110. Climatogram for Class 3.2 : Partly temperature controlled locations
95
29
301 / 436
4.6.1.2 Class 3.1:Temperature–controlled locations
This class is a combination of classes 3K3/3Z2/3Z4/3B1/3C2(3C1)/3S2/3M1 in IEC standard 721–3–3 [3].

This class applies to a permanently temperature controlled closed location. Humidity is usually not

controlled. The climatogram is shown in Figure 111.
60
50
45
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
40
35
30
25
ABSOLUTE AIR HUMIDITY g/m3

AIR TEMPERATURE 0C
20
20
10
5
0
–5
–10
1.5
1.0
–20
–30
–40
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
85
RELATIVE AIR HUMIDITY %
Exceptional climatic limits.
Normal climatic limits: Values outside these limits
ÇÇÇÇ
have a probability of occurrence of less than 1%
ÇÇÇÇ Values outside this field have a probability of oc-

currence of less than 10%(see IEC standard
721–3–0 [2], Class 4)
NOTE: Exceptional conditions may occur following the failure of the temperature controlling system
Figure 111. Climatogram for Class 3.1: Temperature–controlled locations
Heating. cooling, forced ventilation and humidification are used as necessary to maintain the required
conditions – especially where there is a significant difference between the room environment and the
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
external high or low temperatures are prevented.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 302 / 436
436
This class applies to locations:
– where installed equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and to heat radiation. It may also be
exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts in buildings. They are not subjected
to condensed water, precipitation, water from source other than rain or icing;
– without particular risks of biological attacks. This includes protective measures, e.g. special product
design, or installations at locations of such construction that module growth and attacks by animals,
etc. are not probable;
over the whole area and/or with heavy traffic;
– without special precautions to minimize the presence of sand or dust, but which are not situated in
proximity to sources of sand or dust;
– with insignificant vibration and shock.
The conditions of this class may be found in :
– normal living or working areas, e.g. living rooms, rooms for general use (theatres, restaurants);
– offices;
– shops;
– workshops for electronic assemblies and other electrotechnical products;
– telecommunication centers;
– storage rooms for valuable and sensitive products.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 303 / 436
436
4.6.2 Storage
The 1651SM /1661SM–C and 1641SM–D equipment meet the following requirements Vs. Storage :

ETS 300 019–1–1 : 1992, class 1.2

Class 1.2 : weatherprotected, not temper. controlled storage location.
This class applies to weatherprotected storage having neither temperature nor humidity control. The
location may have openings directly to the open air, i.e., it may be only partly weatherproofed. The
climatogram is shown on Figure 112. on page 305.
This class applies to storage locations :
– where equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and temporarily to heat radiation: They may also
be exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts, e.g. through doors, windows or
other openings. They may be subjected to condensed water, dripping water and to icing. They may
also be subjected to limited wind–driven precipitation including snow;
– where mould growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur;
over the whole area, ad/or with heavy traffic;
– in areas with sources of sand or dust, including urban areas;
– with vibration of low significance and insignificant shock.
The conditions of this class may occur in :
– unattended buildings ;
– some entrances of buildings ;
– some garages and shacks.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 304 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
Figure 112. Climatogram for Class 1.2: not temperature controlled storage location
29
305 / 436
4.6.3 Transportation
The 1641SM equipment meets the following requirements Vs. transportation :

ETS 300 019–1–2 : 1992, class 2.2
Class 2.2 : Careful transportation (see Table 19. on page 307 ).
This class applies to transportation where special cars has been taken e.g. with respect to low temperature
and handling.
Class 2.2 covers the condition of class 2.1. In addition class 2.2 includes transportation in all types of lorries
and trailers in areas with well–developed road system.
It also includes transportation by ship and by train specially designed, shock–reducing buffers. Manual
loading and unloading of to 20 Kg is included.
Extension of extreme low temperature during transportation is permitted for the 1651SM/1661SM–C
equipment in its standard packing :
AT –40° C for 72 Hours maximum
without damaging the Optical interfaces.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 306 / 436
436
Table 19. Transportation climatic
Environmental parameter Unit 2.1 and 2.2 2.3

(A) low temperature air °C – 25 – 40
high temperature, air in unventilated

(B) °C + 70 + 70
enclosures (NOTE 1)
high temperature, air in ventilated enclosures

(C) °C + 40 + 40
or outdoor air (NOTE 2)
(D) change of temperature air/air (NOTE 3) °C –25 / +30 –40 / +30
(E) change of temperature air/water (NOTE 3) °C +40 / +5 +40 / +5
relative humidity, not combined with rapid % 95 95

(F)
temperature changes °C +40 +45
relative humidity, combined with rapid % 95 95

(G) temperature changes air/air, at high relative
humidity (NOTE 3 , 6) °C –25 / +30 –40 / +30
absolute humidity, combined with rapid s/m3 60 60

(H) temperature changes : air/air at high water
content (NOTE 4) °C +70 / +15 +70 / +15
(I) low air pressure KPa 70 70
(J) change of air pressure KPa/min no no
(K) movement of the surrounding medium, air m/s 20 20
(L) precipitation rain mm/min 6 (NOTE 7) 6
(M) radiation, solar W/m2 1120 1120
(N) radiation, heat W/m2 600 600
(O) water from sources other than rain (NOTE 5) m/s 1 (NOTE 7) 1
(P) wetness none conditions of wet surfaces
Notes on next page.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 307 / 436
436
Notes to Table 19. :
NOTE 1 : The high temperature of the surfaces of a product may be influenced by both the

surrounding air temperature, given here, and the solar radiation through a window or

another opening.
NOTE 2 : The high temperature of the surface of a product is influenced by the surrounding air
temperature, given here, and the solar radiation defined below.
NOTE 3 : A direct transfer of the product between the two given temperature is presumed.
NOTE 4 : The product is assumed to be subjected to a rapid decrease of temperature only (no
rapid increase). The figures of water content apply to temperatures down to the
dew–point; at lower temperatures the relative humidity is assumed to be approximately
100 %.
NOTE 5 : The figure indicates the velocity of water and not the height of water accumulated.
NOTE 6 : Occurrence of condensation.
NOTE 7 : For short duration only.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 308 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
INSTALLATION
309 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
310 / 436
5 INSTALLATION
ATTENTION EMC NORMS

WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE THE NORMS STATED IN PARA.
4.1.1 on page 31.
SAFETY RULES
Carefully observe the front panel labels prior working on optical connections
while the equipment is in–service.
N.B. A multilingual ( Italian, Spanish, French, German) Safety label is included in the STM–N
Optical Units prepacking. The user can substitute the default English label with one of the
available.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 311 / 436
436
5.1 Unpacking and Warehousing
SAFETY RULES

DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Brace top of rack/subrack during
movement to prevent tipping and to avoid strains that can twist or damage
backplane.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Combined equipment weight exceeds

50 Kg. Use material-handling equipment to lift equipment.
5.1.1 General
The following procedures have been issued and must be observed when unpacking the equipment.
The reciprocal operation must be done for repacking. In such case it is recommended to use the original
packing material.
The following sturdy outer packing material is utilized in order to protect the equipment against mechanical
and climatic stresses to which they are subjected:
wooden crates for transport by ship, air, on road for periods longer than 60 days
ply–wood crates for transport by ship, air, on road for periods of 30 to 60 days
cardboard boxes for transport by air or on road for periods of less than 30 days
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 312 / 436
436
5.1.2 Unpacking
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
The following information should be printed on the outer crate:

• International symbols
side up :
keep dry
fragile
• trade mark/address of the manufacturing company;

• labels (or templated marks) indicating information on the contract and destination site of
the product;
• an envelope holding among others the packing list
Upon receipt check:

• that the final destination of the crates is that indicated on the label;
• that no damage was made to the cases
Report any shipping damages to the Company’s representative or the Shipping Agent.
UNPACKING
When having to unpack proceed as follows:
• Make sure that the paking has been properly positioned, refer to the symbol
• open the case;
• remove the shockproof material;
• remove the goods from the case;
• remove prepacking, the polyethylene bag and any other protection;
• remove the plastic bags cellotaped to the rack and containing accessories;
• remove the dehydrating bags;
• ascertain that the goods are not damaged and that they correspond to those indicated on the
packing list enclosed in the envelope. Conversely, contact the agency’s representative.
N.B.
When unpacking it is advisable to handle the packing material with care; it might be reused for packing
again if it must be reshipped.
5.1.3 Warehousing
If having to store the packed material, the following requirements must be met:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• the cardboard boxes must be placed indoors in airy rooms;

• the wooden or plywood cases can be placed outdoors, provided they are protected against rain
and direct sunlight.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 313 / 436
436
5.2 Mechanical Installation
SAFETY RULES

DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Brace top of rack/subrack during
movement to prevent tipping and to avoid strains that can twist or damage
backplane.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Combined equipment weight exceeds

50 Kg. Use material-handling equipment to lift equipment.
5.2.1 Subrack insertion into the rack
The subracks can be inserted into the 19” standard racks or in the 21” N3–LC, S9 and Optinex rack.
The paragraphs that follow illustrate the procedure adopted for all.
5.2.1.1 19” racks
• Insert the subrack into the position assigned to it.
• Fasten the subrack to the rack by inserting the screws (7) into the holes on the joint plates (8)
and screw them fasting to the corresponding holes on the brackets (1) of the rack.
5.2.1.2 21” rack (N3–LC, S9 and Optinex)
SAFETY RULES
Subrack fastening to the rack ensures ground protection in that the rack is
wire–connected to the station protection ground.
S9 Rack
• Screw (7) fasten the 19”/21” adaptors (9) to the subrack joint plate (8).
• Insert the retainer nuts (2) into the four holes on the brackets (1).
• NOTE – to easily install the subrack onto the rack, tightly fasten the two special screws (11) to
the rack by means of additional retainer nuts (2) set next to one of the two internal holes on the
19”/21” adaptor (9).
• Place the subrack onto the special slotted screws (11)
• Fasten the subrack to the rack by inserting the screws (10) into the holes on the 19”/21” adaptors
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
(9) and screw them fast into the corresponding holes (with retainer nuts) on the brackets (1)
of the rack.
• Remove the special screws (11)
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 314 / 436
436
N3–LC Rack
• Locate the four holes on the bracket (1) used to fasten the subrack.
•
Carry out the following operations only on the two upper fastening holes ( see detail on
Figure 113. ):
Insert the retainer nuts (2) into the square (3) and into the bracket (1).
Fasten the square (3) to the bracket by inserting the screw (4) into the hole (5) and tighten
it into the corresponding hole (6).
• N.B. to easily install the subrack onto the rack, tightly fasten the two special screws (11) to the
rack by means of additional retainer nuts (2) set next to one of the two internal holes on the
19”/21” adaptor (9).
• Place the subrack onto the special slotted screws (11).
• Insert the other two retainer nuts into the two lower fastening holes.
• Fasten the subrack to the rack by inserting the screws (10) into the holes on the 19”/21” adaptors
(9) and screw them fast into the corresponding holes (with retainer nuts) on the brackets (1)
of the rack.
• Remove the special screws (11).
1
11
1 2
3 5 2
4 9
10
6 7
1
FOR N3–LC RACK ONLY
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 113. Subrack insertion into the rack
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 315 / 436
436
Optinex Rack


• N.B. to easily install the subrack onto the rack, tightly fasten the two special screws (4) to the
rack set next to one of the two internal holes on the 19”/21” adaptor (2).
• Place the subrack onto the special slotted screws (4)
• Fasten the subrack to the rack by inserting the screws (5) into the holes on the 19”/21”
adaptors (2) and screw them fast into the corresponding holes on the brackets (6) of the rack.
• Remove the special screws (4).
2
6
3 6
5
1
1 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 114. Subrack insertion into Optinex rack
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 316 / 436
436
5.2.2 Mounting the Union Duct for the fiber–guide duct
(See Figure 115. ).

The subrack is supplied with the fiber–guide cable duct already mounted.
As regards mounting the right and left union duct it is enough to remove the cable–duct cover and fasten
the union duct as indicated in the figure.
The union duct are inserted in the various ”Installation Set” (see Table 21. on page 324).
The figure only refer to an S9 type rack, the N3 rack is inserted like S9 but concavity is different.
1
COVER
LEFT UNION DUCT
RIGHT
UNION DUCT
Figure 115. Mounting the union duct for the fiber–guide duct
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 317 / 436
436
5.2.3 Mechanical Structure
The subrack is fitted with particular mechanical devices which permit to obtain functions in compliancy
with the International Norms associated to EMC.

Some of these devices are illustrated and cross–referred to in Figure 116. The relative reference numbers

are within brackets [ ].
The subrack consists of:
• Mechanical structure consisting of two side walls (8) joined by six plates (4)
• Rear p.c.b. (2) utilized for the subrack wiring
The front part of space (9) and that of the subrack base can accommodate a cable duct for the optical
fibers connected to the units front panels.
• Rear cover (1) for the protection of the rear p.c.b. (2)
• Cellular protection shields [3] to protect the equipment against interferences and at the same
time permitting air to circulate inside
• Guides (7) facilitating unit (13) vertical insertion. Special mechanical devices are provided to
prevent the unit from being inserted up–side down
• Lugs (5) provided with holes (6) into which the fixing screws are inserted.
• Guides (14) facilitating access modules vertical insertion.
To withdraw one unit (13) first unscrew (10), grip the levers (11) and then pull out the unit.
The unit is provided with a finger [12] which guarantees continuity to the ground connections between the
unit and the subrack. Another way to guarantee continuity to the ground connections is to tighten the
screws (10) on all the unit front cover panels.
To withdraw an access module , first unscrew (15) , grip the lever (16) and then pull out the unit.
With regard to sub equipped subracks, the empty spaces are covered with dummy plates.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 318 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
8
9
1
07
2
955.100.562 K
7
6
3
14
12
13
Figure 116. Mechanical structure of the subrack

15
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
16
10
11
319 / 436
5.3 Electrical and Optical Installation

SAFETY RULES

The whole installation must be executed without powering the equipment.
Protection ground connection must be the first operation.
Power Supply connection must be the last to be executed.
FIXING THE UNITS (AND MODULES) INTO THE SUBRACK

The screw tightening torque for fixing the units (and modules, if any and if fixed by screws) into
the subrack must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.
WARNING FOR STM-16 AGGREGATES

Locking and unlocking the coaxial cables carrying out the pass-through function on STM-16
aggregates must be done using the special tool P/N 1AD 02412 0001 (Factory P/N
245.701.833R).
Carrying out this operation with different tools may result in cable damage.
HANDLING OPTICAL FIBERS

When handling optical fibers, there is a possibility of equipment damage. Observe the following
warnings:
– Avoid twisting or crossing one cable over another.
– Do not bend or dress cables at less than 1-inch bend radius.
– Avoid excess cable length in breakout area.
– Avoid bunching cables in a tight clump with cable clamp or tie strap.
– Place excess fiber-optic cable into fiber storage. Optical fibers located inside optical
modules are delicate and can easily be damaged. Use extreme care when handling optical
fibers.
ESD PROTECTION

The equipment is supplied with several connectors (services, alarms, housekeeping, etc)
covered by ”protection cups” (ESD protection). The installer must respect the ESD precaution
presented at para.4.2 on page 33. At the end of the installation phase all the previous
connectors not used for cabling must be covered with the relevant ”protection cups”.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 320 / 436
436
The installation wiring is connected at the top of the subrack through the terminal tagblocks and connectors
mounted on Access Modules subunits inserted on the subrack’s back–panel. The optical connections,
those of the aggregate and those of the STM–1 optical tributary are directly wired on the units. Also the
STM–16 Aggregate pass–through connection are directly wired on the units.
Figure 117. on page 322 illustrates all the connection points on the equipment.
Table 20. on page 323 reports the connection points number for each function, and the paragraph where
it is described.
Each paragraph also indicates:
• pin assignment table
• information on the adaptors/connectors supplied with the equipment to mount on the relevant
Access Module.
Connections are established through the connectors situated on the Access Modules front coverplate.
The Access Modules are inserted into the slots assigned to them and in compliancy with the configuration
of the tributaries to connect.
The relationship between Tributaries and Access Module Slots are illustrated in Figure 119. on page 329.
Table 21. on page 324 shows the parts making up the installation sets.
Table 22. on page 327 shows the cables suggested to set–up the connections.
The tables associated to each terminal connector also refer to these cables.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 321 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
WITH STM–16 AGG
07
5
6
7
8
955.100.562 K
F
SLOT
HG
G
G
Figure 117. Connection points for installation

I
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
L M
SLOT
9
WITH STM–4 AGGREGATE WITH OPTICAL STM1 TRIBUTARY
or DVB TRIB
322 / 436
Table 20. Numbering, functions and paragraphs referred to the Connection Points
ACCESS
MODULE CONNECTOR
FUNCTION PARA
SLOT OR ACRONYM
ACCESS
POINT
– – Ground Connection 5.3.1
21x1.5 Mbit/s Tributary
G – 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary
34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s 120 Ohm Conn. 5.3.2
3x34/45 Mbit/s
H –
140/155 Mbit/s
Q INT QX & Synch. Interface Acc. Mod.– Q2 Interface
I SYNC QX & Synch. Interface Acc. Mod.– Synch. Interf. 5.3.3
10–B2 / 10–BT QX & Synch. Interface Acc. Mod.– QB3 Interf.
RA Alarm Interf. Acc. Mod. – Remote Alarm

L 5.3.4
R/M Alarm Interf. Acc. Mod. – RM int. (Rack Lamps)
– Voice Channel
F V11 Auxiliary Data Channel Connection 5.3.5
64 K Auxiliary Data Channel Connection
(3), (4) DVB Tributaries Connections 5.3.6
(1), (2), STM4 Aggregate and STM1 tributary Optical

5.3.7
(3), (4) Connections
(5), (6) STM–16 Aggregate Optical Connections 5.3.8
STM16 Aggregate pass–through electrical con-

(7) 5.3.8.2
nections
(8) IECB electrical connection to/from DROP SHELF 5.3.9
(9) Interface F connection for local P.C. 5.3.10
HK Battery & Housek. Acc. Mod. – Housekeeping
M BATT 1 Battery & Housek. Acc. Mod. – Station Battery 1 5.3.11
BATT 2 Battery & Housek. Acc. Mod. – Station Battery 2

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 323 / 436
436
Table 21. Parts making up the installation set
Max.

NAME PART No.

Q.ty

S9 Installation set 299.701.454 U
Made up of: (3AL 34259 AA)
040.311.550 T
SUB.D–15P fixed male connector 2
(1AB 00311 0022)
040.395.140 V
Connector holder 2
(1AB 00603 0063)
041.931.011 R
Cord, plug, Alarms (S9) 1
(3AL 34289 AA)
041.931.031 M
Cord, plug, Alim/2 (S9) 2
(3AL 37789 AA)
232.790.019 L
Retainer Nut M6 S = 1.7/2.7 8
(1AD 00292 0016)
231.901.051 F
Special screws 2
(3AN 41257 AA)
209.001.111 Q
Right Union for Duct 2
(3AN 42967 AA)
209001112 R
Left Union for Duct 2
(3AN 42968 AA)
ETSI Installation set 299.701.475 Z

040.311.550 T
(1AB 00311 0022)
040.300.923 X
NC 3–p.SUB–D female connector 2
(1AB 04097 0009)
040.325.550 Z
H.P. female contact 4
(1AB 05009 0003)
040.315.551 L
H.P. male contact 2
(1AB 05009 0002)
040.395.140 V
Connector holder 4
(1AB 00603 0063)
041.710.004 R
Cord, alarms 1
(3AL 34964 AA)
232.790.016 H
Retainer Nut M6 S=1.7/2.5 8
(1AD 00292 0002)
231.901.051 F
Special screws 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
(3AN41257AA––)
(continues)
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 324 / 436
436
Max.
NAME PART No.
Q.ty
041.991.609K
GND cord 1
(3AL37409AA––)
209001113 J
(3AN 43233 AA)
209001114 D
(3AN 43234 AA)
Optinex installation kit 299.701.598 V

Made up of: (3AL37982AA––)
040.311.550 T
(1AB003110022)
040.395.140 V
Connector holder 2
(1AB006030063)
041.710.004 R
Cord, Alarms 1
(3AL34964AA––)
041.931.031 M
Cord plug, Alim/2 S9 2
(3AL37789AA––)
231.901.051 F
Special screws 2
(3AN41257AA––)
209.001.111 Q
(3AN 42967 AA)
209001112 R
(3AN 42968 AA)
(continues)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 325 / 436
436
Max.
NAME PART No.
Q.ty
CONNECTORS FOR TRIBS. and SYNCH

120 ohm connector kit (9 pins) 543.159.606 Z
3
040.310.952 V
Male connector 9–ways 1
(1AB 00311 0045)
040.395.141 J
Sub.D–9P metal holder 1
(1AB 00603 0062)
120 ohm connector kit (15 pins) 299.701.407W

23
040.311.550 T
Male connector 15–ways 1
(1AB 003110022)
040.395.140 V
Sub.D–15P metal holder 1
(1AB 00603 0063)
coax.connector:
040.142.080 P
1.5/5.6 male coax. connector 8.5 mm 51
(1AB 00987 0005)
040.142.067 M
1.5/5.6 male coax. connector 5.9 mm 51
(1AB 00987 0004)
040.144.001 N
1.0/2.3 (3 mm) male coax. connector 177
(1AB 06122 0003)
040.144.002 P
1.0/2.3 (6 mm) male coax. connector 177
(1AB 06122 0004)
OPTICAL CONNECTIONS
041.897.045 S
15m. long SM 1A FC / PC single fiber splice 24
(1AB 07983 0001)
041.897.043 Y
SM JUMPER FC/PC ( 20m. fiber splice ) 24
(1AB 07984 0001)
041.897.012 R
10m. single fiber splice with FC/PC connector 24
(1AB 07984 0002)
OTHER PARTS
001.700.121 J
16A Circuit Breaker 2
(1AB 02438 0012)
001.791.356 L
Circuit Breaker 15A 72 Vdc 2
(1AB 16271 0006)
245.701.833 R
Hook/Unhook Tool 1
(1AD 02412 0001)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
end table
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 326 / 436
436
Table 22. Suggested cabling
DIA (mm) or SECT.

(mm2)
CONNECTION TY- TELETTRA P/N.

REF CABLE TYPE NOTE

PE (NV / PN)
INT. EXT.
Coax. 75 Ohm 049.475.400 Y

1 solder/crimp – 3.1 max. 1
3mm (1AC 00110 0013)
Coax. 75 Ohm 049.475.406 J

2 solder/crimp – 5.9 max. 1
6mm (1AC 00788 0001)
049.720.406 T
3 8–pair shielded wire wrap 0.4 7.5 max. 1
(1AC014910008)
Shielded power 049.613.400 S

4 solder 1.5 6 max. 1,2
cable pair (1AC011900001)
8–pair shielded 049.722.400 X

5 wire wrap 0.6 9.5 max. 1,2
wire wrap (1AC014260004)
6 Coax. 75 Ohm solder/crimp 0.5 4.8 max. 049.475.403P 1
049.450.407 W
7 Coax. cable crimp – 2.8 max. 1
(1AC009310001)
2–pair twisted
8 Crimp 0.5 –– 1AC003450001 3
shield
NOTE :
1 = terminate with connectors supplied
2 = connect shield to holder
3 = terminate with RJ45 shielded connector ( 1AB074610007 )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 327 / 436
436
5.3.1 Protection ground connections

SAFETY RULES

This connections has priority over all the others.
N3–LC racks
(see Figure 118. )
Connect the yellow/green ground cord (1) to screw (2) and the rack ground bar (3)
The ground cord (041.991.609 K) is comprised in ETSI installation set (see Table 21. on page 324.)
Other rack types
Ground protection is ensured by the subrack’s mechanical fastening.
See para 5.2.1 ”Subrack insertion into the rack” on page 314.
3
2
FRONT VIEW LEFT SIDE
Figure 118. Protection ground connections for N3 –LC racks

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 328 / 436
436
5.3.2 Electrical Tributary connections
F G G G H I L M
S
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
S L
L O
O T
T
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 E
DC – DC CONVERTER
TRIBUTARY SPARE 1
TRIBUTARY SPARE 2
FULL MATRIX SPARE
FULL MATRIX MAIN
TRIBUTARY
TRIBUTARY
TRIBUTARY
TRIBUTARY
TRIBUTARY
TRIBUTARY
TRIBUTARY
TRIBUTARY
TRIBUTARY ACCESS MODULE

TRIB. TYPE NOTE
RELEVANT SLOT
SLOT
21x2/1.5 Mbit/s o
When the Access Module
Tmux 5 x 2 Mbit/s 2 first G
slots G are utilised
to house 21x2MB Access
(120 Ω or 75 Ω 3 second G Module, the first tree H
With 1.0/2.3 or T.43 Connection) slots have not to be used.
4 third G Slot 6 is used
for N+1 Spare
34 / 45, 140/155 Mb/s
2 to 5 & 9 to12 H (*) Slot 6 and 13 are used
(75 Ω With 1.0/2.3 or T.43 or (*) for N+1 Spare
1.6/5.6 Connection )
(*) The TRIB Slots and the relevant Access Module Slots are univocally determined: Slot 2 connected to the first Slot H .. Slot 12
connected to the last Slot H.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 119. Tributary units and Access Module subunits relationship
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 329 / 436
436
5.3.2.1 1.5 Mbit/s (100 ohms) Tributary Connection
– Mount the Access Module onto the slots involved as indicated on Figure 117. on page 322 .

– Wire the tributaries onto module using the SUB–D 15–pole.

– Close the connector into the relevant holder.
The SUB–D 15–pole connector and holder are inside the ”120 ohms Connector Kit” (see Table 21. on
page 324).
Insert the male SUB–D connectors into the female ones .
Figure 120. on page 331, provides data on modules and pins.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 330 / 436
436
PIN FUNCTION (NB1) CABLE
1 GND
2 TRIBUTARY 7 , NEGATIVE SIDE


Tx Rx
8 TRIBUTARY 1 , NEGATIVE SIDE 5
9 TRIBUTARY 7 , POSITIVE SIDE
1 GND
2 TRIBUTARY 14, NEGATIVE SIDE
1 GND
12 TRIBUTARY18 , POSITIVE SIDE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 120. 1.5 Mbit/s (100 Ohm) Tributary Connections
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 331 / 436
436
5.3.2.2 2 Mbit/s Tributary Connection
Refer to the Chapter 2 ”Configuration” on page 65.

The 21x2 Mbit/s Tributaries can be connected through the Access Modules carrying the following

connector type:
– Coax 75 OHM
– Balanced 120 OHM conn.
5.3.2.2.1 2 Mbit/s Tributary Connection – 75 OHM
See :Figure 121.
– Mount the Access Module onto the ”G” slot involved.
Wire the tributaries onto the modules utilizing either:
– the 1.0/2.3 75 ohms male coax. connector for 3mm. cable (see Table 21. on page 324.)
– the coax. T43 connector cable
Figure 121. , shows data on modules and pins.
NOTE: For ”type 43” module no type of connector is supplied for tributary wiring.
2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY CONNECTION

8
1 16 PIN FUNCTION (NB1) CABLE (*)
J1
J1 TRIBUTARY 1
J2 TRIBUTARY 2
J3 TRIBUTARY 3
J4 TRIBUTARY 4
J5 TRIBUTARY 5
J6 TRIBUTARY 6
J7 TRIBUTARY 7
J8 TRIBUTARY 8
J9 TRIBUTARY 9
J10 TRIBUTARY 10 1 or 2
J21 J11 TRIBUTARY 11
15
J12 TRIBUTARY 12
7 21
J13 TRIBUTARY 13
J14 TRIBUTARY 14
8 J15 TRIBUTARY 15
1 16 J16 TRIBUTARY 16
J17 TRIBUTARY 17
J18 TRIBUTARY 18
J19 TRIBUTARY 19
J1
J20 TRIBUTARY 20
J21 TRIBUTARY 21
NB 1: TX AND RX TRIBUTARY CONNECTION
NOTE: (*) – the cable number is referred to Table 22. on page 327.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 121. 2 Mbit/s (75 ohms) Tributary Connections
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 332 / 436
436
5.3.2.2.2 2 Mbit/s (120 ohms) Tributary Connections
See:Figure 122. on page 334.

– Wire the tributaries onto module using the SUB–D 15–pole for the 21x 2 Mbit/s

The SUB–D 15–pole connector and holder are inside the 120 ohms Connector Kit (seeTable 21. on
page 324.
Insert the male sub D connector into the female one.
Figure 122. on page 334, provides data on modules and pins.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 333 / 436
436
PIN FUNCTION (NB1) CABLE (*)
1 GND


1 1
1 GND
2 TRIBUTARY 14, NEGATIVE SIDE
8 8 4 TRIBUTARY 12 , NEGATIVE SIDE
14 14
15 15
21 21
1 GND
12 TRIBUTARY18 , POSITIVE SIDE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 122. 2 Mbit/s (120 Ohm) Tributary Connections
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 334 / 436
436
5.3.2.3 34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary Connections
Refer to the Chapter 2 on page 65.

The Trans Mux Tributaries can be connected through the Access Modules carrying the following
connector type:
– Coax 75 OHM
– Balanced 120 OHM conn.
5.3.2.3.1 34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s – 75 Ohm
– Mount the Access Module onto ”G” slot involved.
The type of module depends on the type of connector.
Wire the tributaries onto the modules utilizing either:
– the 1.0/2.3 75 ohms male coax. connector for 3mm. cable (seeTable 21. on page 324).
For type 43 module, no type of connector is supplied for tributary wiring.
5.3.2.3.2 34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s – 120 Ohm
See :Figure 123. on page 336
Wire the 2 Mbit/s channel onto the first module using the SUB–D 15–pole.

The SUB–D 15–pole connector and holder are inside the 120 ohms Connector Kit (seeTable 21. on
page 324).
Wire the 34 Mbit/s stream onto the modules utilizing either:
– the 1.0/2.3 75 ohms male coax. connector for 3mm. cable (seeTable 21. on page 324).
Figure 123. on page 336 shows data on modules and pins for both 2 Mbit/s and 34 Mbit/s streams.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 335 / 436
436
34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s 120 Ohm 1 GND

2 GND
3
1 1 9 GND
10 GND
5 5 14 TRIBUTARY 2 , POSITIVE SIDE
J1 TRIBUTARY 6 TO 34 Mbit/s 1 or 2
Figure 123. 34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary connections – 120 Ohm.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 336 / 436
436
5.3.2.4 3x34/45 Mbit/s, 140 and STM1 Tributary Connections
See :Figure 124. on page 338.

– Mount the Access Module onto the terminal tagblock assigned to the ”H” slot involved.
The type of module depends on the frequency of the tributary and on the type of connector.
Wire the tributaries onto the modules utilizing either (seeTable 21. on page 324).:
– the 1.0/2.3 75 ohms male coax. connector for 3mm. cable
– the 1.0/2.3 75 ohms male coax. connector for 6mm. cable
– the 1.6/5.6 75 ohms male coax. connector for 4,8mm. cable
Figure 124. on page 338 and Figure 125. on page 338 provide data on modules and pins.
For type 43 module, no type of connector is supplied for tributary wiring.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 337 / 436
436
34/45 Mbit/s TRIBUTAYR CONNECTION
J1
J2 J1 TRIBUTARY 1 Tx
J2 TRIBUTARY 2 Tx
J3 J3 TRIBUTARY 3 Tx
1 or 2
J4 TRIBUTARY 1 Rx
J5 TRIBUTARY 2 Rx
J6 TRIBUTARY 3 Rx
J4
J5
J6
Figure 124. 34 or 45 Mbit/s Tributary connections
J1
140/155 Mbit/s Tributary Connection
J4 PIN FUNCTION CABLE (*)
J1 TRIBUTARY 1 Tx 1 or 2
J4 TRIBUTARY 1 Rx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 125. 140/155 Mbit/s Tributary connections
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 338 / 436
436
5.3.3 Qx & Synch. Interface Access Module
(Refer to Figure 126. and to Figure 127. on page 340 )

Qx and Synchronism signal connections are directly made on the connectors mounted on the Access
Module inserted into slot I.
The subunit P/Ns are given in the Chapter 2 on page 65.
A detailed description of the connections are given in para 5.3.3.1 on page 341, 5.3.3.2 on page 342,
5.3.3.3 on page 343, 5.3.3.3.1 on page 343 and para 5.3.3.3.2 on page 343.
There are two alternative subunits according to connector type housed on the Access Module to connect
the Synchronism signals (3), (4) with reference with the Figure 126.
As shown in Figure 126. on page 339, ref. (1), (2) and Figure 127. on page 340, ref (1) the The Qx &
Synch. and Qx 10 BT & Synch. access modules differ by the connector type of the interface towards the
TMN ( 10 base 2 or 10 Base T respectively) .
S
L
O
T
I
Q INT Q INT
5 5
SYNC
I1 SYNC
4 I2
3
OUT
2 2
10–B2 10–B2
1 1
MANAGEMENT CONNECTION BOARD MODULE 75 Ω MANAGEMENT CONNECTION BOARD

1.0/2.3 OR TYPE 43 MODULE 120 Ω
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 126. Management of Qx & Sync Access Module Connectors
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 339 / 436
436
SLOT I
5
5
4 3
1 1
MANAGEMENT CONNECTION BOARD MODULE 75 Ω MANAGEMENT CONNECTION BOARD

1.0/2.3 OR TYPE 43 MODULE 120 Ω
Figure 127. Management of Access Module Connectors Qx 10 BT & Synch

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 340 / 436
436
5.3.3.1 Q2 Interface Connections
(Refer to Figure 126. on page 339 . and to Figure 128. )

These connections are possible through the use of terminal tagblock (5) and the relevant 15–p. male
connector and suitable long cable.

(Refer toTable 21. on page 324).
CONN. ACRONYM
PIN ACRONYM FUNCTION CABLE(*)
”Q INT”
1 GND Ground
2 TxA 19.2 Kbit/s data Tx, A
4 RxA 19.2 Kbit/s data Rx, A

15 8
6 CkA Clock A
9 TxB 19.2 Kbit/s data Tx, B

3
9 10 TxSH Input data shield
1
11 RxB 19.2 Kbit/s data Rx, B
12 RxSH Output data shield

FRONT VIEW 13 CkB Clock B
14 GND Ground
Figure 128. Q2 Interface connections

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 341 / 436
436
5.3.3.2 Synchronism Interface
(Refer to Figure 126. on page 339 )

– Wire–connect synch. onto the modules utilizing either:

• the 1.0/2.3 75 ohms male coax. connector and the 3mm. cable.
• the 1.0/2.3 75 ohms male coax. connector and the 6mm. cable.
• the coax Type 43 connector.
• the subd–9–p. fixed male connector available in the 120 ohms Connector (9–pin) kit
(see Table 21. on page 324).
Figure 129. provides data on modules and pins.
NOTE – As regards Type 43 modules, no type of connectors are supplied for synch. wiring.
75 ohms SYNCHRONISMS CONNECTION
CONN. ACRONYM
PIN FUNCTION CABLE(*)
”SYNC”
I1 I1 Incoming Synchronism ”A”
I2 I2 1 or 6
Incoming synchronism ”B”
OUT OUT
Outgoing Synchronism
120 ohms SYNCHRONISMS CONNECTION
CONN. ACRONYM
” SYNC”
1 CKOUTC Positive output clock
2 GND Ground
5
9
3 CKINCB Positive input clock B
1 4 CKINCA Positive input clock A

6
5 GND Ground 5
6 CKOUTF Negative output clock
7 GND Ground
8 CKINFB Negative input clock B

FRONT VIEW
9 CKINFA Negative input clock A
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 129. Synchronism Connections
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 342 / 436
436
5.3.3.3 QB3 Interface Connection
5.3.3.3.1 10 base 2 Interface Connection

(Refer to Figure 126. on page 339)

– Connect the BNC connector–terminated coax. cable (10 base 2, thin ethernet cable (7) ) onto
connectors (1) and (2).
5.3.3.3.2 10–BT interface connection
Connect the twisted pair cable with male connector RJ45 to the female connector 10–BT of the Qx 10 BT
& Synch. access module as shown below:
CONN. ACRONYM
”10–BT”
1 TPTXP
Differential pair for data TX (towards the
2 TPTXN Twisted Pair cable)
3 TPRXP 8
Differential pair for data RX ( from Twisted
6 TPRXN pair cable)
8 VC Ground
Figure 130. 10 – BT connection.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 343 / 436
436
5.3.4 Alarm Interface Access Module Connections
(Refer to Figure 131. )

Remote Alarm and Rack Lamp signal connections are directly made on the connectors mounted on the

Access Module inserted into slot ” L ”.
Details are given in Chapter 2 on page 65.
A detailed description of the connections is given in para.5.3.4.1 on page 345, 5.3.4.2 on page 346,
RA
R/M
Figure 131. Management of Alarm Interface access module

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 344 / 436
436
5.3.4.1 Remote Alarm Connections
(Refer to Figure 131. on page 344 and to Figure 132. on page 345 )
The connector and holder are inserted in the N3– ETSI Installation set, or in the S9 Installation set, or in
the Optinex Installation kit, depending on the type of rack utilized.
– Wire–connect the remote alarms onto the SUB.D–15P fixed male connectors.
– Close the connector into its holder.
– Insert the male connector into the female one (5).
CONN. ACRONYM
”RA”
1 INT OR’ing of all units local alarms
2 NURG OR’ing of all units not Urgent alarms
3 URG OR’ing of all unit Urgent alarms
4 EXT External remote alarm
5 –
6 IND OR’ing of all indicative alarms
15 8 7 LOSQ2 No connection with the TMN (Interf.Q3)
Remote alarm indicating one station Battery

8 TOR
failure
3
9 Remote alarm indicating two station Batter-
1 9 TAND
ies failure
10 –
FRONT VIEW 11 –
12 C Alarm storing command
13 TUP Equipment Controller internal alarm
OR’ing of both subrack’s power supply fail

14 TORC
alarms
15 TANC Both subrack’s power supply fail all AND’ing.
Figure 132. Remote Alarms Connections

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 345 / 436
436
5.3.4.2 R/M Interface connections (Rack lamps)
(Refer to Figure 131. on page 344 and to Figure 133. )

The connections are established between the module’s connector (4) and the terminal tagblock at the top

of the rack (see rack documentation).
A connector–terminated cable is utilized with:
N3 rack Cord alarms , terminated with SUB.D–9P female connector (module side) and with
SUB.D–9P male connector (rack side)
Contained in the N3 installation set.
S9 rack S9 cord plug, alarms terminated with SUB.D–25P female connector on the module side,
and with SUB.D–25P fixed male connector on the rack side.
Material is inside the S9 installation set.
Optinex rack Cord alarms (P/N.041.710.004 R) terminated with SUB.D–9P female connector side
on the M102 side, and with SUB.D–9P fixed male connector on the rack side.
Material is inside the Optinex installation kit.
Each connector is provided with a metal holder for the 9–pin one, and for the 25–pin one.
ACRONYM
TAGBLOCK (4) PIN ACRONYM FUNCTION
”R / M”
1 VSERVP Positive of service battery
2 C Alarm storing command
1 3 M Yellow storing LED switch–on command

6
4 RURG Red urgent LED switch–on command
5
9
5 RNURG Red not urgent LED switch–on command
6 VSERVN Negative of service battery
Green LED switch–on command, call received from auxiliary

7 CH
channels
FRONT VIEW 8 TOR OR of battery source
9 GND Ground
Figure 133. RAB – Rack Lamps Interface connections

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 346 / 436
436
5.3.5 Auxiliary Data Channel Connections

Auxiliary Data Channel signal connections are directly made on the connectors mounted on the Access
Module inserted into slot ” F”.
Details are given in Chapter 2 on page 65.
A detailed description of the connections are given in para. 5.3.5.1 on page 348 , 5.3.5.2 on page 349,
V11
64K
Figure 134. Management of Auxiliary Data Channel Access module

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 347 / 436
436
5.3.5.1 EOW Extension – Voice Channel connections
(Refer to Figure 134. and to Figure 135. on page 348)

• Wire–connect EOW extension channels onto the 120 ohm connector (9–pins).

• Close each connector inside the metal holder (for SUB–D 9–pin).
• Insert the connector into the (3) of Figure 134. one.
CONNECTOR
(3)
1 EFEP Analog extension positive input
5 2 EFUP Analog extension positive output

9
1 3
6 5 GND Ground
6 EFEN Analog extension negative Input
7 EFUN Analog extension negative output

FRONT VIEW
Figure 135. EOW extension connections

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 348 / 436
436
5.3.5.2 Auxiliary Data Connections (V11 & 64 Kb)
(Refer to Figure 134. on page 347 and to Figure 136. )

The SUB–D15–p. fixed male connectors and holders are inside the 120ohms Connection (15–p) set
(Refer toTable 21. on page 324).

– Wire–connect the Data channels onto the two SUB–D–15 pin fixed male connectors (15 pins)
respectively for ”V11” (see Figure 136. ) and ”64 K” data connections (see Figure 137. on page
350 ).
– Close each connector inside its holder .
– Insert the connectors into tagblock (2) and (1) with reference to the unit front cover shown in
Figure 31. on page 90..
– Insert the male connector into the female one (2) with the acronym ”V11” or female connector (1)
with the acronym ”64 K” .
CONN. (2) ACRO-

NYM ” V11 ”
1 V11EP1 POS. V11 Tx data input
2 V11UP1 POS. V11 Rx data output
3 V11EP2 POS. V11 Tx data input
5 V11 EP3 POS. V11 Tx data input

15 8
7 –
8 GND Ground 3
9
1 9 V11EN1 NEG. V11 Tx data input
10 V11UN1 NEG. V11 Rx data output
FRONT VIEW 11 V11EN2 NEG. V11 Tx data input
13 V11EN3 NEG. V11 Tx data input
15 –
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 136. V11 auxiliary channels connections
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 349 / 436
436
CONN. (1) ACRONYM
” 64 K ”
1 D64EP1 POS. 64 Tx data input

2 D64UP1 POS. 64 Rx data output
4 D64UP2 POS. 64 Rx data output
15 8 6 D64UP3 POS. 64 Rx data output
7 –
8 – Ground 3
9
1
9 D64EN1 NEG. 64 Tx data input
10 D64UN1 NEG. 64 Rx data output
FRONT VIEW 11 D64EN2 NEG. 64 Tx data input
13 D64EN3 NEG. 64 Tx data input
15 –
Figure 137. 64 KBit/s auxiliary channels connections

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 350 / 436
436
5.3.6 DVB Tributaries Connections
The connections are made directly on the units which are provided with electrical BNC connector in the
following manner:
• Insert the DVB units into the assigned positions as indicated in Chapter 2 on page 65
• Connect the cables (Tx side or Rx side for each channell) terminated with a BNC 90ø male
coax. connectors onto the connectors on the unit’s front coverplate (see Figure 138. )
Channel input, Tx side
Channel output , Rx side
1 1 1
2 2 2
3 3 3
Figure 138. DVB Tributary Connections

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 351 / 436
436
5.3.7 STM4, STM1 Optical Connections

The connections are made directly on the units provided with optical interface in the following manner:

• Insert the units with optical interfaces into the assigned positions as indicated in ”Chapter 2
CONFIGURATION ” on page 65.
The units can either be the Aggregates (at the bottom) or the STM1 optical tributaries
(at the top).
• Loosen screw (2) to remove the optical splice protection (1) from the unit.
This protection not only mechanically protects the optical connectors, but acts as a protective
shield against EMI.
• Remove the cover from the optical fiber duct. The fiber ducts are both at the top of the structure
(for optical tributary connections) and at the bottom (for the optical aggregate connections).
Figure 139. on page 353 illustrates a typical fiber duct used at the top.
• Lay the Tx/Rx single fiber splices into the ducts. The optical fiber splices are specified on
Table 21. on page 324
• Pull the single fiber splices out from the holes situated next to the units to which they will be
connected.
• Insert the single fiber splice connector onto the corresponding one on the unit’s front coverplate
1) – Aggregate, Input Rx side
2) – Aggregate, Output Tx side
3) – Tributary, Input Tx side
4) – Tributary, Output Rx side
• Place the optical splice protection (1) back onto the unit as follows:
– Insert the bottom part (3) of the optical splice protection (1) into the slot on the unit’s front
coverplate.
– Insert the screw (2) into the hole (4) on th unit’s front coverplate.
WARNING ! when carrying out this operation make sure that the single fiber splices are
properly situated in slot (5)
• Tighten screw (2) so as to obtain a good mechanical contact between the optical splice
protection and the unit’s front cover.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 352 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
CABLE DUCT COVER
Figure 139. STM–4 Optical connections
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
353 / 436
5.3.7.1 ETSI Optical Connector dimensions
Figure 140. illustrates the max. allowed optical connector dimensions (fiber side) that can be utilized for
the optical connections.

1
max. 7,8 mm.
max. 39 mm.
max. 0/ 10,3 mm.
max. 32,5mm
max. 46 mm.
max. 0/ 7,3 mm.
max. 40 mm.
max. 60 mm.
LEGENDA
1 SC–PC
2 FC–PC
3 DIN
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 140. ETSI Optical Connector dimensions
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 354 / 436
436
5.3.8 STM–16 Optical Connections and pass–through connections
(Refer to Figure 141. on page 356).

5.3.8.1 STM–16 Optical Connections
The connections are made directly on the units in the following manner:
• Insert the STM–16 Aggregate units into the assigned positions as indicated in ”Chapter 2
CONFIGURATION” on page 65.
• Loosen screws (2) to remove the optical splice protection (1) from the unit. This protection
mechanically protects the optical connectors.
• Remove the cover from the optical fiber duct at the bottom of the structure.
• Lay the Tx/Rx single fiber splices into the duct. The optical fiber splices are specified on
Table 21. on page 324
• Pull the single fiber splices out from the holes situated next to the Aggregate units to which
they will be connected.
• Insert the single fiber splice connector onto the corresponding one (Tx/Rx) on the Aggregate
unit’s front coverplate (see Figure 117. on page 322).
• Place the optical splice protection (1) back onto the unit as follows:
– Insert the optical splice protection (1) on the unit’s front coverplate making run the left side
under the handle.
WARNING when carrying out this operation make sure that the single fiber splices are
properly situated under the protection.
– Tighten screw (2) so as to obtain a good mechanical contact between the optical splice
protection and the unit’s front cover.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 355 / 436
436
5.3.8.2 Pass–Through connections STM–16 AGGREGATE
These Pass–through connections are mandatories and they have to be done by means the Coaxial
Jumper Kit which Part Number is cited on Chapter 2 ”Physical Configuration” on page 65, Table 8. ” Main

Part List”.

In order to do the pass–through connections for the STM–16 Aggregates see the Figure 141. on page 356.
and only for HM1 Aggregate Pass–Through, refer to the Figure 142. on page 357.
• Make the pass–through Tx and Rx cables run through the cooling wings and under the handle
as indicated in Figure 141. and in Figure 142. on page 357.
The cables are connected and protected against erroneous extraction. To disconnect the
pass–through connections use the relevant extractor (Unhook Tool, see Chapter Equipment Part List
Table 10. on page 77). If not available, use a screw–driver to lever off the ring nut from the pass–through
cable’s connector.
EAST WEST
Rx1 A Rx1 E
Rx2 B Rx2 F
Rx3 C Rx3 G
Rx4 D Rx4 H
Tx1 E Tx1 A
Tx2 F Tx2 B
Tx3 G Tx3 C
Tx4 H Tx4 D
CABLE DUCT COVER
Figure 141. STM–16 Optical Connection and pass–through

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 356 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
1
EAST
07
955.100.562 K
Tx4
Tx3
Tx2
Tx1
Rx4
Rx3
Rx2
Rx1
ON
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
WEST
Figure 142. HM1 STM–16 pass–through

Tx4
Tx3
Tx2
Tx1
Rx4
Rx3
Rx2
Rx1
ON
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
F
B
A
E
D
C
H
G
357 / 436
5.3.9 IECB connection to/from DROP SHELF
(Refer to Figure 117. on page 322 and Figure 143. )

The connection is made on the front plate of the DS Future Bus Termination unit inserted in the slot ”A”

by means of four 50 OHM coaxial connectors (Refer to the Figure 29. on page 88, in Chapter 2
”CONFIGURATION” on page 65 and to the Figure 143. ) devoted to the IECBs bus interfacement with
the DROP SHELF FUTUREBUS TERMINATION MODULE. ( see Figure 117. on page 322)
– Wire the IECB connection as indicated in Figure 143. using the cable suggested in Table 22. on
page 327 and the connector supplied with the DROP SHELF equipment and inserted in the DROP
SHELF S9/N3 Connection kit.
TAGBLOCK PIN ACRONYM FUNCTION CABLE(*)

(1 – 4)
CKL CKL LOCAL BUS CLOCK

CKL
DL
7
DL DL LOCAL BUS DATA
CKN
CKN CKN NETWORK BUS CLOCK
DN DN DN NETWORK BUS DATA
Figure 143. IECBS BUS Connections.
5.3.10 Interface F connections for local P.C.
The connection is made on the front plate of the Equipment Controller unit (9) of Figure 117. on page 322)
with the 9–pin male connector–terminated cable supplied with the Personal Computer.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 358 / 436
436
5.3.11 Power and Housekeeping Access Module Connections
Battery and Housekeeping signal connections are directly made on the connectors mounted on the
Access Module inserted into slot ” M”.
Details are given in Figure 144. and in Chapter 2 on page 65.
A detailed description of the connections is given in para. 5.3.11.1 on page 360 and para.5.3.11.2 on page
361.
HK
BATT1
BATT2
Figure 144. Management of Battery & Houskeeping Access Module

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 359 / 436
436
5.3.11.1 Housekeeping connections

The connector and holder are inside the N3 installation set, or the installation set S9, or in the Optinex

Installation kit, depending on the type of rack utilized.
– Wire connect the Housekeeping alarms onto SUB.D–15P fixed male connectors
– Close the connector into its holder
– Insert the connector into the module’s (8) with the acronym ”HK”.
NB 1) CPI 5, 6, 7 are assigned to the alarms of the Optical Amplifier eventually connected to the 1651
SM Equipment; CPI 4 is dedicated to an eventual SSU Eq. and CPI 8 is reserved to the DROP
SHELF AND BATTERY alarm.
NB 2) The CPI inputs are enabled to receive ground contacts.

The open/close Housekeeping signals coming from other equipment, like Optical
Amplifier for example, must be changed into ground criteria.
NB 3) CP0 are not operative.
CONN. ACRONYM CABLE(*)

PIN ACRONYM FUNCTION
”HK”
1 CPI1 Parallel contact input
4 SSU–FAIL OR of alarms of Synchronisation Supply Unit
5 OFA–URG Urgent alarm of external OFA
6 OFA–ABN Abnormal condition on external OFA

15 8
7 OFA–NURG Not urgent alarm on external OFA
8 AND BATT Station power supply alarm on external OFA

3
EXT
9 1
9 CPO1 Parallel contact output
FRONT VIEW 11 CPO3 Parallel contact output
13 CKOFA Parallel contact output

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 145. Housekeeping Connections
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 360 / 436
436
5.3.11.2 Power Connections
SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by

–48 V dc. Ensure battery power cables are not connected to office battery
power.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage,

low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns
and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before
working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input
terminals
(See Figure 144. on page 359, Figure 146. on page 361, Table 21. on page 324. and Table 22. on page
327. )
POWER SUPPLY
CONN. ACRONYM ” BATT1 ” CONN. ACRONYM ” BATT2”
PIN ACRONYM FUNCTION CABLE(*) PIN ACRONYM FUNCTION CABLE(*)
3 1 VC BATT 1 + Battery 1 VC BATT 2 + Battery

2
1 Not Not
2 NC 4 2 NC 4
connected connected
3 VS BATT 1 – Battery 3 VS BATT 2 – Battery
Figure 146. Power Supply Connections
With ETSI rack:
The contacts and the connector body are inside the N3 Installation Set; see Table 21. on page 324.
• Connect the power supply cable coming from the station batteries onto the H.P. Female
contacts.
• Insert the above cited contacts onto the NC 3p. SUB – D female connector.
• Unsheathe the cable braid (for a max length of 12 mm) and fasten it with the cable holder of the
Connector Holder in order to electrically connect them.
• Do not connect the braid to the pins of the connector.
• Close the connector into its holder.
• Plug–in the connector into the module terminal tagblocks (6), (7) with the acronym ”BATT1”,
”BATT2” of the Figure 144. on page 359 .
SAFETY RULES
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
For external subrack protection (upstream power station distribution frame) two
16A circuit breakers (main battery) and 1A circuit breakers (service battery) are
suggested.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 361 / 436
436
With S9 rack:
The components are listed in Table 21. on page 324.

If instead, the equipment is housed in an S9 rack then insert the Power supply cord plug alim./2 (S9)

directly onto terminal tagblock (6), (7). The power supply cord plug is inside the S9 Installation Set.
SAFETY RULES
16A Circuit Breaker

This device constitutes the protection breaking point for the station power
supply. Two circuit breakers are supplied with the subrack and are mounted at
the top of the rack S9 (see the relevant documentation).
With Optinex rack
The components are listed in Table 21. page 324.
Insert the Power supply cord plug alim./2 (S9) directly onto terminal tagblock (6), (7). The power supply
cord plug is inside the Optinex Installation kit .
SAFETY RULES
15A Circuit Breaker

This device constitutes the protection breaking point for the station power
supply. Two circuit breakers are supplied with the subrack and are mounted at
the Top Rack Unit of the Optinex rack (see the relevant documentation).
IN GENERAL:
SAFETY RULES
Due to possible very high currents in case of short–circuit at the battery power
input, it is essential that the battery power distribution line shall be provided with
a short circuit back–up protection with adequate breaking capacity.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 362 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
TURN–ON, TEST AND OPERATION
363 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
364 / 436
6 INITIAL TURN–ON, TESTS AND OPERATION
ATTENTION EMC NORMS

WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE THE NORMS STATES IN PARA.
4.1.2 ON PAGE 32
6.1 General safety rules
The Safety Rules stated in para.3.2 on page 23 describe the operations and/or precautions to observe
to safeguard operating personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety.
Please read them with accuracy before to start every action on the equipments.
SAFETY RULES
Carefully observe the front–panel warning labels prior to working on
optical connections while the equipment is in–service.
SAFETY RULES

–48 V dc.

terminals.
SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of eyes damage: read carefully and strictly observe the
rules pointed out in para.3.2.4.2 on page 27.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 365 / 436
436
6.2 General
The following operations are required to activate the equipment:

• Hardware settings

• Unit insertion into the subrack

2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %

• Check on protection ground connection and optical connection
• Power supply tests
• Installation in the P.C. of:

– Equipment management Craft Terminal SW kits
– Equipment software kit
• Equipment SW download ( only if not updated).
• Software settings
• Local tests
• Checks on the link
It might occur that when testing use is made of setting options that are not compliant with the plant
settings. These setting options are defined everytime a test is executed.
Moreover before operating, the equipment must be preset according to the plant requirements.
To reduce time for test and avoid wrong SW configuration due to tests it is important to:
• Perform each test only on the part of equipment (circuits, units) dedicated to that function
(ie.: not operate pass–through test on TU used in Drop/insert)
• Don’t modify the plant SW configuration. Save and Send NEW Configuration files for tests and
Delete them after use.
Information is given on the conditions present and on the operations to carry out during regular equipment
operations.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
245.701.833R).
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 366 / 436
436
6.3 Setting Options
The setting options are of the hardware (HW) and software (SW) type.
With regard to the HW setting options refer to the HARDWARE SETTING section.
With regard to the SW setting options refer to the P.C. Operator’s Handbook. Anyway, before executing
the software setting options,perform the power supply tests described at para 6.5.2 on page 370
To perform the setting options proceed as follows:
• Define the equipment’s station configuration

• Compare the equipment’s station configuration with the list of settable units
( see Unit Documentation section ) and choose the ones required.
• Compare the equipment’s plant specifications with the tables indicated in the unit circuit
schematics and define the functions to preset.
• Execute all the hardware setting options
• Install the units into the subracks in the assigned positions
• Install the Switch Module sub–units in the upper part of the subrack (access panel)
A label is present on the 34 and 140Mbit/s/STM1 electrical Switch Modules indicating the setting
made. Settings 1+1 MAIN and 1+1 SPARE are given.
When 1+N setting is performed, do not insert any indication (factory setting).
• Check the protection ground connection and the optical connection as specified in para 6.5.1
on page 369.
• Power supply the equipment as specified in ” Power supply checks” para 6.5.2 on page 370.
• Install the management SW applicatives of the Craft terminal onto the P.C..
• Install the Equipment software of the relevant release onto the P.C.
• Download the Equipment software on the equipment and activate it.
(This operation is carried out only if the equipment release is not updated).
• SW configure with the P.C.
PC local operations can be remotely executed with the Operation System.

The installation, loading and software configuration procedures are described in the Operator’s Manual.
The Part number of the disks to be used are indicated in ” Chapter 2 ” on page 65.
ATTENTION: Save the operative software configuration in a disk / diskette.

This is important for maintenance purposes (example : Equipment Controller substitution
with a spare).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 367 / 436
436
6.4 Instruments and Accessories
Table 23. Instruments and Accessories

REF. INSTRUMENT Q.TY CHARACTERISTICS
Signals available:
64Kbit/s codirectional
1544Kbit/s code B8ZS (100 ohms)
(A) Pattern Generator/Error Detector 1 2048Kbit/s code HDB3 (120/75 ohms)
34368Kbit/s code HDB3
139264Kbit/s code CMI
G.957 compliant STM–1 electrical/optical
2nd window
(B) Optical power tester (radiometer) 1
3rd window
Single–mode variable optical Variable attenuator within the 0–50dB, 2nd
(C) 1
attenuator and 3rd window
(D) Digital multimeter 1
Craft terminal See the operator’s handbook.
(E)
(Personal Computer) It can be supplied by ALCATEL.
Tx rate up to 19200 baud
(F) Data Tester 1
CCITT interface V11
terminations:
• instrument side depending on (A)
(G) Coaxial Cables 2
• equipment side depending on type
of tributary
Terminations dependent on unit
(H) Single–mode single–fiber splices 4
connectors, radiometer and attenuator
termination:
(I) Shielded pair 2 • instrument (F)/(A)
• SUB.D 15–pin male connector
termination:
(L) shielded pair 2 • instrument (A)
• SUB.D 9–pin male connector
termination:
(M) Distribution frame cables 2 • instrument (A)
• Tributary distribution frame
(N) Frequency counter 1 10 MHz 1 hz
termination:
• instrument (N)
(O) Cables for synchronism 1
• Synchronism termination
(120 or 75 ohm)
(P) 8 Twisted shiekded pairs 1 The same type used for installation
(S) MPEG–2 ASI Generator 1 –
MPEG–2 ASI Measurement
(T) 1 –
Decoder
(Z) Lamp 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 368 / 436
436
6.5 Local Checks
The test which follow describe the procedures relative to the initial turn–on of the units housed in the
mechanical structure.
The test circuits shows standard equipment.
To configure the test circuits, the equipment must be preset through Craft terminal.
The test are carried out through direct wiring to the equipment. These connections can be also made on
the station distribution frames.
The loop connections indicated in the following test are realized by means wiring. It is possible to activate
them with SW command, using the Alarms, Status and Remote Control application of the Craft Terminal.
NOTE To test properly, refer to Chapter 2 on page 65, as regard to references to unit, numbering (n),
and to Chapter 5 on page 311. for the connections to make.
6.5.1 Check on Protection Ground Connections and Optical Connection
SAFETY RULES
Check in the ETSI rack that the subrack and rack have been grounded.
For all types of racks, verify that subrack has been screw fastened to rack.
The latter operation guarantees protection ground connection (on the rack).
Check that the optical connection on the equipment are correctly made, as
indicated at para 5.3.7 on page 352 and at para 5.3.8.1 on page 355 .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 369 / 436
436
6.5.2 Power supply checks
1) Check if all the units and subunits have been removed from the subrack with the exception of
the Power supply unit.

2) Switch on the unit through switch (2)
3) Check if green LED (1) is ON. If the LED does not light up, check if the battery voltage is present
and if necessary replace the unit.
4) Repeat the above tests on the other power supply unit.
5) Repeat all the tests described above after having inserted again all the units
.If green LED (1) does not light up, it indicates that either the power supply units are faulty or
one of the inserted units causes a short–circuit on the power supply outputs.
6.5.3 Lamp Test
The efficiency of the equipment LEDs can also be checked. By pressing push–button (11) on the
Equipment Controller unit the LEDs must light up, except for LEDs (5) and (6) of the AUX/EOW unit, and
Power Supply LED (1). If otherwise, replace the relevant unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 370 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
371 / 436
6.5.4 Aggregate Tx optical power check
• Test circuit of Figure 147. on page 373

• Instruments and accessories to utilize (see Table 23. on page 368)

– Radiometer (B)
– Single–fiber splices (H)
– Personal Computer (E)
1) Set up the test circuit.

Insert the units involved.
Connect the Aggregate unit’s Tx optical connector (4) to the Radiometer through the
Single–fiber splice (H).
2) By means of P.C. (E) set the ALS optical protection to be able to carry out manual for test
operation
3) Press push–button (5) on the unit for more than 12 secs.

The operator has 90 secs. available to carry out the test.
4) Switch on the radiometer and check if the Tx optical power value is within the range indicated
in para 4.2. on page 283.
It otherwise replace the aggregate unit.
5) Repeat this test for each of the Aggregate units.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 372 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
4
B
07
METER
POWER
H
955.100.562 K
AGGREGATE
5
CRU
Figure 147. Tx optical power check
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
E
POWER SUPPLY
373 / 436
6.5.5 Multi–demultiplexing check and AIS forwarding to the electrical Tributaries
• Set up the test circuit of Figure 148. on page 375.

• Instruments and accessories of Table 23. on page 368

– Pattern Generator/Error Detector (A)
– Coaxial cables (G) or shielded pair (L)
– Variable optical attenuators (C)
1) Set up the test circuit. Use P.C. (E) to set up the required configurations (tributary in
Drop/Insert).
A typical connection is shown between the tributary and the Pattern Generator/Error Detector
through cables (G) (for 75 ohms connections) or cables (L) (for 120 ohms connections).
The aggregate is looped utilizing fiber splices (H) and the Variable Optical Attenuator (C)
(preset with a 10dB attenuation).
The units inserted are specified in the Figure 148. on page 375
2) Preset the instrument to transmit a signal (depending on the type of tributary used) with the
following requirements:
Bit rate 1544 Kbit/s 50 ppm or 2048 Kbit/s 50 ppm or 34368 Kbit/s 20 ppm
Code B8ZS HDB3 HDB3
Sequence 215 –1 pseudorandom 215 –1 pseudorandom 215 –1 pseudorandom
Level 3Vp (100ohms) 2.3Vp/75ohms or3Vp (120ohms) 1Vp (75ohms)
Bit rate or 44736Kbit/s 20 ppm or 39264 Kbit/s 15 ppm or 155 520 Kbit/s
Code B3ZS CMI Code/Interface CMI
Sequence 215 –1 pseudorandom 223 –1 pseudorandom
Level 0.85Vp (75ohms) 1Vpp (75ohms)
Type STM–1 electrical
3) Check that the Error Detector has read no errors and that there are no alarm indications on the
units concerned.
In case of errors/alarms, trouble–shoot with the Personal Computer to detect the type of alarm
and eventually replace the Tributary, Matrices, Aggregates, Switch module, CRU units.
N.B. All the tributaries can be simultaneously checked by loop cascading the tributaries.
To this concern use the relevant cables.
4) Disconnect the Pattern Generator output from the tributary input and check if the AIS signal
(all ONES) is present (sent from the Tx side of the tributary involved to the Error Detector).
If this condition is not detected, replace the TRIB unit of the tributary involved.
5) Connect again the Pattern Generator output to the tributary input and disconnect the multiple
loop (H). Check on the Error detector the presence of the AIS signal (all ONES) received from
the Rx side.
6) Reset the link at multiple level and repeat the checks on all the other tributaries.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
NOTE: This test can also check tributaries with ”Cross–connection” configurations (Trib–to trib).
In this case the optical loop connection is not important.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 374 / 436
436
A
PATTERN
GENERATOR
G or L
ERROR
DETECTOR
TRIBUTARIES
MATRIX
C IN
9
OPTICAL 4
ATTENUATOR H
OUT
3
AGGREGATE
LOOP
AGGREGATE POWER SUPPLY

CRU
Figure 148. Test on multi–demultiplexing and AIS for electrical tributaries

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 375 / 436
436
6.5.6 Multi–demultiplexing check and AIS forwarding to the DVB Tributaries
• Set up the test circuit of Figure 149. on page 377 .

• Instruments and accessories to utilize (see Table 23. on page 368 ) :

– MPEG–2 ASI Generator (S)
– MPEG–2 ASI Measurement Decoder (T)
– Variable optical attenuators (C)
– Personal computer (E)

Two DVB tributaries are necessary to perform the test, one working as Tx and the other working
as Rx. To that purpose preset the tributaries as described in the Hardware setting section.
(preset with a 10dB attenuation).
The units inserted are specified in Figure 149. on page 377.
2) Preset the instrument to transmit a video signal
• Bite Rate 270 Mbit/s
• Managed bit rate 2 to 40 Mbit/s
• Code 8B/10B
• Level 800 mVpp/75ohms
3) Check that the MPEG–2 ASI Measurement Decoder has read no errors and that there are no
alarm indications on the units involved.
In case of errors/alarms, trouble–shoot with the Personal Computer to detect the type of alarm
and eventually replace the Tributary, Aggregates, CRU units.
4) With the MPEG–2 ASI Generator go out of the managed range and check if the AIS signal
(all ONES) is present on the Measurement Detector. If this condition is not detected, replace
the DVB working as Rx and perform the test again.
If the AIS condition is no more revealed , substitute the DVB card working as TX.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 376 / 436
436
T
S
MPEG–2 ASI
MPEG–2 ASI MEASUREMENT
GENERATOR
DECODER
1 1
2 2
E
DVB TRIBUTARY
3 3
C IN
9
OPTICAL 4
ATTENUATOR H
OUT
3
AGGREGATE
LOOP

CRU
Figure 149. Test on multi–demultiplexing and AIS for DVB tributary

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 377 / 436
436
6.5.7 Check on the receiver sensitivity
• Test circuit of Figure 150. on page 379


– Radiometer (B)
– Variable optical attenuator (C)
– Coaxial cables (G) or shielded pair (L) (not required when using the optical tributary).
1) By means of the P.C. (E) preset the optical protection (ALS) to carry out manual for test
operations.

through cables (G) (for 75 ohms connections) or cables (L) (for 120 ohms connections).
With regard to the STM–1 optical tributary the above cables are substituted with two other
optical fiber splices (H).The aggregates are looped through the optical fiber splices and the
variable optical attenuator (C).
3) Set the instrument in accordance with the type of tributary involved and with the characteristics
specified in para. ” Multi–demultiplexing check and AIS forwarding to the electrical Tributaries”
on page 321.
4) The optical attenuator must attenuate 10dB
5) Check that the Error Detector reads no errors.
6) Gradually increase the attenuation of the Optical attenuator until a 1x10–10 BER is read on the
Error Detector.
7) Disconnect the single–fiber splice from the Rx unit optical connector (3) and connect it to the
radiometer (detail 1 of the Figure 150. on page 379)

The operator has 90 secs. available to carry out the test.
9) Check if the Rx optical power level on the Radiometer is within the sensitivity level indicated
in par. 4.2 on page 283.
If otherwise replace the Aggregate unit.
10 ) Repeat the test for each of the Aggregate units.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 378 / 436
436
A
PATTERN
GENERATOR
G or L
ERROR
DETECTOR
TRIBUTARIES
MATRIX
DETAIL 1
E
POWER B
METER
C IN 5
9
OPTICAL
ATTENUATOR H 4
OUT 7

CRU
Figure 150. Receiver sensitivity check

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 379 / 436
436
6.5.8 Check on the efficiency of the optical protection (ALS)
• Set up the test circuit of Figure 150. on page 379


– Radiometer (B)
– Coaxial cables (G) or shielded pair (L). Not required when utilizing the optical tributary.
2) Set the attenuation of the variable optical attenuator to approx. 10dB.
3) Refer to the P.C. (E) applications operator’s handbook and check if the automatic and manual
optical protections of the Aggregate unit are inserted. If not proceed to program them.
4) Disconnect the single–fiber splice (H) ( connected to the Tx optical connector (4) ) from the
optical attenuator and connect it to the radiometer so as to measure the transmitted optical
power.
This condition causes red LED (6) on the Equipment Controller unit to light up, and the AIS
criteria to be received on the Error Detector.
5) Check that the LASER power is null. Moreover check if a power reset is attempted after approx.
180 secs.. This condition must last approx. 2secs.
If these conditions do not occur, replace the Aggregate unit
6) Reset the test circuit by connecting again the attenuator
7) Repeat what stated at point 5; disconnect the attenuator and connect the radiometer.
8) Check if the Tx optical power is null. Press push–button (5) on the Aggregate unit’s front
coverplate and check that a power reset is attempted for approx. 2 secs.
If otherwise replace the unit.
9) Press push–button (5) for more than 12 secs again and check if an optical power reset is
attempted for approx. 90 secs. (MANUAL FORTEST function).
If otherwise replace the unit.
10 ) Repeat the test for each of the Aggregate units.
ATTENTION
The optical protection provided to the optical tributaries is tested in a similar manner and
with relevant connections.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 380 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
381 / 436
6.5.9 Test on Tx optical power transmitted by the Optical 155Mbit/s Tributary

• Instruments and accessories to utilize (Table 23. on page 368)

– Variable Optical Attenuator (C)
– Radiometer (B)

Insert the units involved.
Connect the TRIB. unit’s optical connector (5) to the Radiometer through the Single–fiber
splice (H).
2) By means of P.C. (E) set the ALS optical protection to be able to carry out manual for test
operation.
4) Switch on the radiometer and check if the Tx optical power value is within the range indicated
in para 4.2 on page 283.
If otherwise replace the optical tributary unit.
5) Repeat the test for each of the Optical Tributaries.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 382 / 436
436
POWER
METER
E
3
STM–1 OPTICAL
TRIBUTARY
C IN 5
9
OPTICAL
ATTENUATOR H 4
OUT
3
AGGREGATE
LOOP

CRU
Figure 151. Check on the optical power transmitted by the Optical Tributary
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 383 / 436
436
6.5.10 Multi–demultiplexing and AIS tests on the optical 155Mbit/s tributary


1) Set up the test circuit and insert the relevant units. Specifically, connect the Pattern Generator
output to the input optical connector (4) and the error detector to the output optical connector
(5) on the optical tributary unit through the single–fiber splices (H).
Loop the Tx (4) and Rx (3) optical connectors of the Aggregate unit through the single–fiber
splices (H) and the variable optical attenuator (C) set to 10dB. Use the P.C. (E) to set up the
required configurations (Tributary in drop/insert).
2) Preset the instrument to transmit a signal with the following requirements:
Bit rate 155.52 Mbit/s
Interface S–1.1 or L–1.1
Type SDH (STM–1) optical
3) Check that no error is read on the Error Detector.

If errors are detected, trouble–shoot the electrical connections or replace the TRIB unit or
Aggregate unit.
4) Disconnect the Pattern Generator from the optical connector (4) of the Optical Trib., and
check that the AIS signal (all ONES) is present on the Error Detector.
If this condition is not detected, replace the TRIB unit.
5) Connect again the Pattern Generator output to the optical connector (4) and disconnect
the multiple loop.
Check if the AIS signal (all ONES) is present on the Error Detector.
6) Reset the connection at 155Mbit/s level and repeat all the checks on all the other 155 Mbit/s
optical tributaries (if any).
7) Repeat the test for each of the Optical Tributaries.
NOTE: This test and also check tributaries with ”Cross–connection” configurations (trib to trib).
In this case the optical aggregate loop connection is not important.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 384 / 436
436
A
MATRIX
PATTERN
GENERATOR
H
ERROR
DETECTOR
E
4
STM–1 OPTICAL
TRIBUTARY
C IN
9
OPTICAL
ATTENUATOR H 4
OUT
AGGREGATE 3
LOOP

CRU
Figure 152. Test on multi–demultiplexing and AIS for optical tributaries

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 385 / 436
436
6.5.11 Check on the 64 Kbit/s auxiliary channels


– Pattern generator/Error detector (A)
– Shielded pair (I)
1) Set the test circuit.
• Through shielded pairs (I) connect the Pattern Generator/Error Detector (A) to the
connector 64 Kbit/s of the Auxiliary access module.
• Connect the single–fiber splices (H) to the Tx and Rx optical connectors (3) and (4)
of the Aggregate unit.
• Connect the other ends of the single–fiber splices to the variable optical attenuator
(C) set to 10dB.
• Use the P.C. (E) to set up the required configurations
2) Transmit a 64Kbit/s signal with G703 interface through the Pattern generator.
3) Check if no error is present on the Error detector. If errors are detected, trouble–shoot the
electrical connections or replace one at a time the AUX unit and the Aggregate unit.
4) Disconnect the Pattern Generator from the 64Kbit/s connector and check if the AIS signal (all
ONES) is on the Error Detector. If this condition is not detected, replace the AUX unit.
5) Repeat the checks on all the other 64Kbit/s channels.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 386 / 436
436
A
i
PATTERN
GENERATOR
ERROR
DETECTOR
C IN
9
OPTICAL
ATTENUATOR H 4
OUT
AUX POWER SUPPLY

AGGREGATE
CRU
Figure 153. Kbit/s auxiliary channels check

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 387 / 436
436
6.5.12 Check on the V11 auxiliary channels


– Data Tester (F)
– Shielded pair (I)
1) Set the test circuit
• Through shielded pairs (I) connect the Data Tester (F) to the V11 Auxiliary Access
Module
• Connect the single–fiber splices (H) to the Tx and Rx optical connectors (3) and (4)
of the Aggregate unit.
• Connect the other ends of the single–fiber splices to the 10dB variable optical
attenuator.
• Use the P.C. (E) to set up the required configurations
2) Transmit the V11 signal through the Data Tester (I) with the following value:
• PRBS signal
• bit–rate 9600 baud
• code NRZ
• pattern 29–1
• clock source INTERNAL
3) Check that no error is present on the Data Tester (I)

If otherwise, replace the AUX/EOW unit or the Aggregate unit.
4) Disconnect the Data tester transmission from the input of the connector and check if the AIS
signal (all ONES) is received.
If otherwise, replace the AUX/EOW unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 388 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
F
07
ERROR
PATTERN
DETECTOR
GENERATOR
OPTICAL
IN
ATTENUATOR
OUT
i
955.100.562 K
AUX
AGGREGATE
CRU
3
4
9
Figure 154. V11 auxiliary channels check
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
E
POWER SUPPLY
389 / 436
6.5.13 STM–4 Aggregate APS Protection check

• Instruments and accessories of Table 23. on page 368:

– Coaxial cable (G) or shielded pair (L)
– Single–filter splices (H)
1) Set up the test circuit

Two Aggregates of the same side are looped (with attenuator fixed or variable, 10 dB) by
means fiber splices (H)
Use P.C (E) to set up the required configurations.
The units inserted are specified in the Figure 155. on page 391.
2) Preset the instrument to transmit a signal according the tributary requirements (as for the
previous chapters)
3) Check that the Error Detector has read no errors and that there are no alarm indications on
the unit concerned.
4) Disconnect the Loop on the Aggregate in service
5) After a transient condition (with AIS indication) verify that no error are present on the Error
Detector
6) Repeat the test on the other Aggregate.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 390 / 436
436
PATTERN
GENERATOR
G or L
ERROR
DETECTOR
TRIBUTARIES
MATRIX
4
H AGGREGATE
LOOP
3
AGGREGATE
LOOP
CRU
Figure 155. Test on Aggregate Protection (APS)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 391 / 436
436
6.5.14 Tributary EPS Protection Check
The following Test Circuits are indicated for each type of protection involved.

Figure 156. on page 393 For Trib 21x2 Mbit/s – EPS N+1
The example shows the connection with 2 Mb/s Trib. 1 of unit 1 (slot 2).
Figure 157. on page 394 For Trib 3x34 Mbit/s or 3x45 Mbit/s or 140/STM1 electrical – EPS N+1
The example shows the connection with 140 Mb/s Trib. 1 (slot 2).
Therefore, SPARE 1 is the stand–by one.
Figure 158. on page 395 For Trib 3x34 Mbit/s or 3x45 Mbit/s or 140/STM1 electrical – EPS 1+1
The example shows the 140 Mb/s 1+1 switch on the first two units
(slots 2 and 3).
The connections required on the switch modules are indicated.
• Instruments and accessories shown on Table 23. on page 368
– Coaxial cables (G) or shielded cables (L)
– Fiber splices (H)

Aggregate looping is obtained through the Optical Attenuator (C) (set to a 10 dB attenuation)
Configure as required using the PC (E) (Drop/Insert tributaries)

The Switch Modules too must be set according to the EPS configuration.
The units concerned are specified on the figure.
2) Set instrument (A) to send a signal compliant with the Tributary concerned.
3) Check that the Error Detector reads no errors and that there is no alarm indication on the unit
involved.
4) Remove the in–service Tributary unit and check, after a transient condition, that no errors are
read by the error detector (the stand–by unit is now operating).
5) Place back the Tributary unit and then remove the stand–by Tributary unit (now in service).
Check after a transient condition that no errors are read by the Error Detector.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 392 / 436
436
PATTERN
GENERATOR
G or L
ERROR
DETECTOR
21x2Mbit/s
TRIBUTARIES
MATRIX
21x2Mbit/s
SPARE
TRIBUTARY
C IN
9
OPTICAL 4
ATTENUATOR H
OUT
3
AGGREGATE
LOOP

CRU
Figure 156. Test on 21 x 2 Mbit/s trib. N+1 EPS protection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 393 / 436
436
A
PATTERN
GENERATOR
G
ERROR
DETECTOR
34Mbit/s or
140/ STM1 el
TRIBUTARIES MATRIX
3x34MbitS or
140/STM1 el SPARE S S
TRIBUTARIES P P
A A
R R E
E E
1 2
SWITCH
UNITS
C IN 9
OPTICAL
ATTENUATOR H
4
OUT
AGGREGATE 3
LOOP

CRU
Figure 157. Test on 34 or 140/STM1 trib. N+1 EPS protection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 394 / 436
436
PATTERN
GENERATOR
G
ERROR
DETECTOR
34Mbit/s or
140/ STM1 el
TRIBUTARIES
MATRIX
C IN 9
OPTICAL
ATTENUATOR H
4
OUT
AGGREGATE 3
LOOP

CRU
Figure 158. Test on 34 or 140/STM1 trib. 1+1 EPS protection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 395 / 436
436
6.5.15 CRU’s EPS Protection check


– Frequency Counter (N)
– Cable for synchronism (O)
• Use cable (O) to connect to the outgoing synch. point (CK OUT) on M150
• Configure the 1+1 protected CRU and the other correct selections the P.C.
2) Check for presence of output synch. frequency
3) Remove the CRU configured to operate as Main
4) Check for the presence of a output synch. frequency after a transient condition
5) Re–insert the Main CRU
6) Remove the Spare CRU
7) Check for the presence of the output synch. frequency after a transient condition.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 396 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
AGGREGATE
CRU
Figure 159. Test on CRU EPS protection
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
O
9
N
COUNTER
POWER SUPPLY
FREQUENCY
397 / 436
6.5.16 Full Matrix EPS protection check

• Instrument and accessories of Table 23. on page 368

– Coaxial Cable (G) or Shielded pair (L)

through cables (G) (for 75 ohm connections) or cables (L) (for 120 ohm connections).
(present with a 10 dB attenuation).
Use PC (E) to set up the required configurations.
The units inserted are specified in Figure 160. on page 399
2) Preset the instrument to transmit a signal according the tributary requirements.
3) Check that the Error Detector has read no errors and that there are no alarm indications on
the unit concerned.
4) Remove the Main Full Matrix
5) After a transient condition (with AIS indication) verify that no error are present on the Error
Detector.
6) Re–insert the Main Full Matrix
7) Remove the Spare Full Matrix
8) Verify that, after a transient condition, no errors are present on the Error Detector.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 398 / 436
436
PATTERN
GENERATOR
G or L
ERROR
DETECTOR
TRIBUTARIES
MATRIX
MATRICES
C IN 9
OPTICAL
ATTENUATOR H
4
OUT
AGGREGATE 3
LOOP

CRU
Figure 160. Test on Full Matrix EPS protection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 399 / 436
436
6.5.17 Check on External free running synchronism


– Frequency counter (N)
– Personal computer (E)
– Cable for synchronism (O)
• Through cable (O) connect the CKOUT synchronism of M150 to the frequency counter
• Use the P.C. (E) to work in the free running mode in the Equipment configurations.
2) Check the free running frequency at 2048 KHz 4.6 ppm (from 2047990.58 to 2048009.42
Hz).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 400 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
CRU
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
Figure 161. Check on External free running synchronism
O
9
N
COUNTER
FREQUENCY
POWER SUPPLY
401 / 436
6.5.18 Remote Alarms check


– Optical Attenuator (C)
– Digital Multimeter (D)
– Coaxial Cables (G) or shielded pair (L)
– Single fiber splice (H)
– Lamp (Z), that could be consisting of a LED, connected to a –Vtest voltage generator
whose ground is common with the equipment, and a series resistance Rs, whose value
is given by: Rs=(Vtest)/10 mA.
N.B. Vtest must not exceed 72V, and the output current from the pin must not exceed 50 mA, further
the used LED should bear a 10 mA current.

The Aggregate is looped and connected to the variable attenuator preset at 10 dB.
2) Preset the Pattern Generator to transmit a signal according to the tributary requirements
(as for the previous chapters).Check on (A) that no errors or alarms are detected.
3) Connect the lamp (Z) to the pin to be tested on the RA tagblock on the Alarm Interface Access
Module and, operating as for Table 24. on page 402. Verify that the relevant alarm is present,
by observing that the lamp (Z) turns ON and by checking that the voltage measured on the
Digital Multimeter (D) is in the range 0V ÷ –2V. Note: this latter voltage must be measured
between the pin and the equipment ground. Test all the other remote alarms by proceeding in
the same way.
Table 24. Remote Alarms activation
Remote Alarms Simulation
INT Extract one unit (in service)
URG + EXT Disconnect the Aggregate Loop
NURG Increase the attenuation with the optical attenuator
IND Transmit all ”1” with the Pattern Generator
TOR Disconnect one station battery(the Alarm Interface Access Module

performing the AND/OR function must be equipped)
TAND Disconnect two station batteries(the Alarm Interface Access Module

performing the AND/OR function must be equipped)
TORC Turn off one Power supply unit
TANC Turn off two Power Supply units

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
LOS Q2 Disconnect the QB3 LAN from the Qx & Sync access module
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 402 / 436
436
–Vtest
LED Rs
Z
DIGITAL
MULTIMETER
A
P D
PATTERN
GENERATOR
G or L
ERROR
DETECTOR
TRIBUTARIES
C IN 9
OPTICAL
ATTENUATOR H
4
OUT

CRU
Figure 162. Test on remote alarms

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 403 / 436
436
6.6 Check on the Link
N.B. To test correctly refer to Chapter 2 on page 65 as regards to references made to positions (P)
and numbering (n), and to Chapter 5 on page 311 as regards to wiring.

6.6.1 Multi–demultiplexing check on the link
– Distribution frame cabling (M)
The check must be made on all the tributary streams which do not transit through the equipment
involved, i.e., all the tributaries in ”terminal”configurations, and the drop/insert tributaries in add–drop
configurations.
Further on the test can also be made to check ”Cross–connection” aggregate configurations.
In this case the Equipment is stations (2) will be SW configured to cross connect TU or AU4 within the
same side Aggregate.
Tributary loop are not important.
The functional block is indicated with ”*” in the Figure 163. on page 405.
The example of the Figure 163. on page 405 is applicable (function–wise) to all tributaries.

The tributaries are looped on the station distribution frame (2).
Connect the Pattern Generator output to the input of the 1st tributary and the input of the Error
Detector to the output of the latter using cables (M).
2) Check if the level of the connected tributary signals is coherent. If otherwise preset it.
3) Adjust the rate and level of the (A) instrument with the tributary involved.
4) Check that no optical alarm indications are present on the equipment nor errors are read on
instrument (A).
If alarms and/or errors are detected and if all the local checks have been made, the failure is
due to external causes. If the local checks have not been executed, proceed according to the
instructions given in para. 6.5 on page 369.
5) Repeat the checks on the other tributaries if necessary.
NOTE – All the tributaries can be simultaneously tested by cascade–connecting the tributaries of station
1, and by looping the tributaries in station 2.
For this operation use proper wiring.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 404 / 436
436
1 2
TRIBUTARY LINE LINE TRIBUTARY

DISTRIBUTION DISTRIBUTION DISTRIBUTION DISTRIBUTION
M FRAME FRAME FRAME FRAME
A 1 1
PATTERN 2 2
GENERATOR 1651–SM 1651–SM
or LINE or
1661 SM–C 1661 SM–C
ERROR
DETECTOR
N N
MUX TO
DEMUX or
AU4
AGG. STM–16
1651–SM or 1661 SM–C
Figure 163. Multi–demultiplexing tests on the link

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 405 / 436
436
6.6.2 Transit (pass–through) check on the link


The check must be executed on all the tributary streams involved in transit operations.
The example of the Figure 164. on page 407 is applicable (function–wise) to all tributaries.
This example shows the check of n–th trib. streams connected between station (1) and (3) through the
station (2) ”transits”.
To set up a real link wire as instructed below:

The tributary is looped on the station distribution frame (3).
Instrument (A) is connected to the Tx side of the first tributary (Tx side) and to the Rx side of
the latter in station (1) through cables (M).
This link permits to check the equipment transits through station (2) connected to the other
stations through sides WEST and EAST.
2) Check if the level of the connected tributary signals is compliant. If otherwise preset it.
3) Adjust the rate and level of the (A) instrument according to the tributaries involved.
4) Check that no optical alarm indications nor errors are read on instrument (A).
If alarms and/or errors are detected and if all the local checks have been made, the failure is
due to external causes, or to the erroneous pass–through operation.
If the local checks have not been executed, proceed as indicated in para.6.5 on page 369.
5) Repeat the tests on all the other tributaries inside the equipment.
NOTE – All the tributaries can be simultaneously tested by cascade–connecting the tributaries of station
1, and by looping the tributaries in station 3.
For this operation use proper wiring.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 406 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
1 2 3
LINE
TRIBUTARY DISTRIBUTION
TRIBUTARY LINE DISTRIBUTION LINE TRIBUTARY
FRAME DISTRIBUTION DISTRIBUTION
DISTRIBUTION DISTRIBUTION FRAME
M FRAME FRAME FRAME FRAME
A 1 1
PATTERN 2 2
GENERATOR
1651 SM LINE 1651 SM LINE 1651 SM
or or or
ERROR 1661 SM–C 1661 SM–C 1661 SM–C
DETECTOR
N N
Figure 164. ”Transits” check on the link
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
407 / 436
6.6.3 TU path–protection check on a ring connection


The example shown in Figure 165. on page 409 is applicable to all types of tributaries and to all types of
ring–connections.
• Set up the test circuit
• Starting from station 1 connect the Pattern Generator/Error Detector (A) to tributary 1.
In accordance to the software configuration of the three stations, this tributary must be assigned
to station 2 and station 3 must be considered as spare.
(The tributary transits through station 3).
Loop tributary 1 onto station 2
• Set instrument (A) according to the tributary involved.
• Check that no optical alarm indications are present on the equipment, nor errors are read on
instrument (A).
• Disconnect, from the relevant distribution frame, the optical fiber splice between stations
1 and 2.
• After a transient period ascertain that no errors are read on instrument (A).
• Repeat the tests on all the other tributaries.
6.6.4 Check on the EOW channel
This check must be executed on the real link after having performed all the checks previously described.
After having activated all the equipment of the link, proceed according to the instructions stated in
para.6.7.1 on page 411 . The procedure is set from one of the two stations involved.
Repeat the operations from the opposite direction of the link
If a link cannot be set up, even though all the operations have been correctly executed, replace the
AUX/EOW unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 408 / 436
436
A
PATTERN
GENERATOR
M
ERROR
DETECTOR
FRAME
TRIBUTARY
N 2 1 DISTRIBUTION
1 1651–SM
or
1661 SM–C
W E
LINE
DISTRIBUTION
FRAME
LINE LINE
3 2
TRIBUTARY LINE LINE TRIBUTARY

DISTRIBUTION DISTRIBUTION DISTRIBUTION DISTRIBUTION
FRAME FRAME FRAME FRAME
1 1
2 E W 2
1651–SM 1651–SM
or or
1661SM–C 1661SM–C
LINE
N N
W E
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 165. TU cross–over check on a ring–connection
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 409 / 436
436
6.7 Operation
N.B. To properly execute the test refer to ”Chapter 2 ” on page 65 which cross–refers to unit number
assignment (n).

When the equipment operates regularly, the green LEDs (1) are ON to indicate that the Power supply
units are working.
Green LED (7) on the AUX/EOW unit is also ON to indicate engineering order–wire operation.
The following conditions can occur:
Green LED (2) ON on the Aggregate unit or Indicates unit in–service

140/STM–1 Switch Tributary unit
Equipment Controller unit
Yellow LED (4) glowing indicates abnormal condition (active loopbacks,

forging unit into service, Laser forced ON or OFF,
try to restart after ALS)
AUX/EOW unit
Yellow LED (6) ON indicates busy line
Yellow LED (6) flashing indicates reception of the selective call
Yellow LED (5) ON indicates conference call
The lighting up of other LEDs indicates mulfunction conditions
By pressing push–button (11) on the Equipment Controller check that all the equipment LEDs light–up
(except (5) and (6) of the AUX/EOW or (1) of POWER SUPPLY units) without causing alarm.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 410 / 436
436
6.7.1 Engineering Order Wire channel
The following procedure permits to set up service speech connections between two equipment installed
in opposite stations.
Numerical reference concern the AUX/EOW unit.
• Insert the telephone handset with keypad into socket (2) on the calling equipment.
• Check if green LED (7) is ON and yellow LEDs (6) and (5) OFF.
• Hook off the telephone handset through the relative switch
• The free tone must be received.
• Press push–button ”J” (4) which seizes the line
• Ckeck if green LED (7) goes off and yellow LED (6) lights up.
• In these conditions, a busy tone will be heard by the other parties when the telephone handset
is inserted and hooked off.
• Select the number involved on the keypad of the calling telephone handset
• The buzzer rings and the yellow LED (6) flashes in the station where the selected EOW channel
is present.
• The called party must insert and hook off the telephone handset. In this condition, the buzzer
must stop ringing.
• Both telephone handsets must be hooked on again and verify that the line has released, i.e.,
the green LED must be ON and the yellow LEDs must be off on both equipment.
• Select ”conference call” (number 00) on the keypad of the calling Telephone handset.
• The buzzer ring and the yellow led (5) is ON in all the other stations.
• In all the stations in which the operator insert and hook off the telephone handset, the buzzer
must stop ringing, yellow led (5) is OFF and yellow led (6) is ON.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 411 / 436
436
6.7.2 Download of the equipment software release
The equipment allows to update the software version according to equipment evolution.
The download software is executed with the equipment working. The operation is executed locally through

the Craft Terminal containing the Equipment applicative to load or remotely by means Operation System.

SW download is executed both on the Equipment Controller and on the Card Controllers of the various
units.
All the relevant operations are fully detailed in the Operator’s Manual.
6.7.3 Craft terminal–managed equipment
During the operating phase too, the Operator can utilize the application phases made available by the Craft
terminal and described in the relevant Operator’s Manual.
Specifically:
• Administrative application allows to set–up new operator functions
• Configuration applications allows to check and modify software settings.
• The Alarms and Maintenance Memory application inform on the current and previous
equipment status.
• Performance Monitoring application allows network surveillance checking the values of errors
parameters and obtaining data on the quality of the links on path and section.
• Remote Inventory application informs on data of the unit inserted (identification, construction
data, serial number, etc).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 412 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
MAINTENANCE
413 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
414 / 436
7 MAINTENANCE
ATTENTION EMC NORMS

WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE THE NORMS STATED IN PARA.
4.1.3 on page 32
7.1 General safety rules
The Safety Rules stated in para.3.2 on page 23 describe the operations and/or precautions to observe
to safeguard operating personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety.
Please read them with accuracy before to start every action on the equipments.
SAFETY RULES
Carefully observe the front–panel warning labels prior to working on optical

connections while the equipment is in–service.
Should it be necessary to cut off power during the maintenance phase, proceed
to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream
(rack or station distribution frame)
SAFETY RULES

–48 V dc.

terminals.
SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of eyes damage: read carefully and strictly observe the
rules pointed out in para.3.2.4.2 on page 27.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 415 / 436
436
7.2 Maintenance Aspects
Maintenance consists of a set of operations which maintain or bring back the assembly to optimum
operating conditions in a very short time, with the aim of obtaining maximum operational availability.

Maintenance is classified as:
• ROUTINE
• CORRECTIVE
7.3 Instruments And Accessories
There is a local terminal (PC) which permits to display all the alarms and manages the Equipment.
The relative processing is described in the operator’s handbook.
When TMN is implemented, an Operation System display alarms and manages all the Equipments
connected.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 416 / 436
436
7.4 Routine Maintenance
Routine maintenance is a periodic set of measurements and checks. This maintenance discovers those
devices whose function has deteriorated with time and therefore need adjustment or replacement.
Typically, digital equipment requires no routine maintenance.
The equipment allows to assess the quality of the connection links for SECTION and PATH on tributaries
and aggregates, by counting the errored events and obtaining performance data.
The Performance Monitoring Application, described in the Operator’s Handbook, allows this function.
7.4.1 Routine Maintenance every year
SAFETY RULES

–48 V dc.

terminals.
It is suggested to carry out the following operations yearly:
• Check that the cable (N3 rack) is perfectly safety grounded (FASTON, see
5.3.1 on page 328).
• Make sure that the subrack has been tightly fastened to the rack with
screws, to guarantee grounding (the rack is connected to the station
ground).
By pressing push–button (11), see in Chapter 2 the Figure 30. on page 89 , on the Equipment Controller
check that all the equipment LEDs light–up (except (5) and (6) of the AUX/EOW or (1) of POWER SUPPLY
units) without causing alarm.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 417 / 436
436
7.5 Corrective Maintenance (Trouble/Shooting)
The complete Troubleshooting description in given in the Maintenance Section of the Operator’s
Handbook.


2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %


245.701.833R).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 418 / 436
436
7.6 Set of spare parts
7.6.1 Suggested Spare Parts

The overall number of spares depends on Customer requirements, and should be based on the average
amount of transmission circuits available to be accounted for not only during MTBF but also during MTTR;
the latter depending on the amount of spare parts available.
The set of spare parts is inclusive of a minimum number of spares for each type of replaceable plug–in
unit (see unit list in Chapter 2 on page 65).
7.6.2 General rules on spare parts management
Before storing the spare units make sure that they are working by inserting them in an operating equipment
It is suggested to periodically check those spare units have not been utilized for over a year.
If the spare parts and the equipment are stored in the same environment, make sure that the spare parts
are placed in cabinets to safeguard them from dust and damp.
Moreover, they should also be well grounded to avoid electrostatic discharges.
If the spare parts are stored in another room, or have to be moved from another place, building or site,
make sure that the following is observed:
– the spare parts must be wrapped in anti–static and padded envelopes;
– the spare parts must not touch wet surfaces or chemical agents that might demage them (e.g. gas);
– if during transport the temperature is lower than that of the room where they had been kept, make
sure that before using them they pass a certain period in a climatic chamber to prevent thermal
shocks and/or the possibility of steaming up.
When replacing a unit/sub–unit, make sure that the spare unit/sub–unit is set exactly as the
replaced one. For the presettings procedures see para.6.3 on page 367.
7.6.3 Particular rules on spare parts management
Whenever some units with flash-memories are common to different kinds of equipment or to different
versions of the same type of equipment, it is possible to maintain one spare part only: this allows spare
part stock saving, even though software downloading will be necessary when the software loaded into the
unit (program part or data part) is different from that necessary in the equipment where the spare unit must
be used.
At the end of the commissioning phase or after an equipment data change, it is suggested to save the
equipment data, e.g. on floppy disk, and store this floppy disk in the spare part stock pointing out the
equipment it refers to.
7.7 Repair Form
To facilitate repair operation, data on the faulty unit must be reported on the form shown in Figure 166. on
page 420.
The repair form must be filled–in with as much data as possible and returned to Alcatel together with the
faulty unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 419 / 436
436
ALCATE L
REPAIR FORM
Fill in this form and affix it to the faulty unit to be returned to Alcatel

CUSTOMER NAME ORDER NUMBER/CONTRACT NUMBER
SITE BRANCH/UNIT/COUNTRY
SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT PRODUCT RELEASE EQUIPMENT SOFTWARE PART NUMBER
STATION/RACK SUBRACK SLOT

TO BE FILLED IN BY THE SENDER
MNEMONIC ALCATEL PART NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER FAULTY UNIT SOFTWARE VERSION
FAULT PHASE REASON FOR REPAIR PRESUMED CAUSE
INSTALLATION / CLEAR FAULT DROP IN PERFORMANCE INTERNAL

TURN ON
LIGHTNING
OPERATION INTERMITTENT FAULT UPGRADE/QUALITY ALERT
EXTERNAL AIR COND.
MAINTENANCE TEMPERATURE FAULT OTHER
DATE NAME OF SENDER

FAULT STILL PRESENT
AFTER REPAIR
COMMENTS
PROCESSING FAULTS DETECTED

TO BE FILLED IN BY THE REPAIR OPERATOR
NO FAULTS FOUND UPGRADE SOLDERING / COMPONENT ADJUSTMENT

WIRING
A I C F–L P
STANDARD REPAIRING NOT REPAIRABLE MECHANICAL PRINTED DIRT

(REJECTED) CIRCUIT BOARD
B–D M V1 V1 V2
QUALITY ALERT SUBSTITUTED CORROSION OTHER
I S–X V3
NOTE : LETTERS ARE FOR FACTORY USE
COMMENTS
DATE REPAIRING NUMBER REPAIRING CENTRE NAME OF REPAIR OPERATOR

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Figure 166. Repair form
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 420 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
APPENDICES
421 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
No Appendices are enclosed in this Handbook
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
422 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION
423 / 436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
424 / 436
UNIT DOCUMENTATION LIST
This section contains the documents sheets to refer to for unit/sub–unit hardware setting options.
The list of the enclosed documents is given in Table 26. on page 428 according to the ANV part number.
TABLE EXPLANATION:
– UNIT IDENTIFICATION P/Ns AND CHANGE STATUS
Each unit or sub-unit is distinguished by:
• a dual Part No.:
– Factory P/N (4xx.xxx.xxx x)
– ANV P/N (xxx.xxxxx xx) (NOTE)
NOTE The last two ANV-P/N letters (in the following stated as ’suffix’) stand for a ”feasible
alternative”, they might differentiate two units even though still functionally
compatible. For this reason the indicated ANV P/N does not include the last two
letters.
For example : the units having P/Ns ”3AL–34065–AAAA” and ”3AL–34065–AABA”
are functionally compatible and, as regards to hardware settings, the MSxxx
document (described hereafter) 3AL–34065–AAAA-MSxxx is applicable for both.
• and by a pair of design & production series (change status):
– CS, associated to the Factory P/N (4xx.xxx.xxx x)
– ICS, associated to ANV P/N (xxx.xxxxx xx)
The following table shows an example of correspondence between ”FACTORY P/N + CS” and
”ANV P/N + ICS”
Table 25. Example of correspondence between CS and ’suffix + ICS’
N.B. The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment part
list!
FACTORY CODE ANV CODE
P/N CS P/N ICS
487.156.612 01 3AL 34422 AA AA 01
487.156.612 02 3AL 34422 AA AB 01
487.156.612 03 3AL 34422 AA AC 01
In this example you can see that the production series is identified only by the CS as far as the
Factory code is concerned, and by the ’suffix + ICS’ if the ANV code is referred to.
Some of the possible positions of the label indicating the unit’s P/Ns and CS–ICS are illustrated
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
in para. 4.4 on page 34.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 425 / 436
436
– CROSS–REFERENCE
• Id. Unit alphabetical notation. It indicates the unit containing one or more subunits.

• App. It reports the unit notation (Id) to which the sub–unit belongs.

The hardware settings can be executed after having checked all the sub–units belonging to a unit,
by considering the above cited cross–reference, and by using the presetting documents indicated
in the table and presented in the following point.
– ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS
For each type of unit or sub-unit having customizable setting options, the document
”ANV P/N”–MSxxx
is annexed to this handbook (in the case of Documentation on CD-ROM the MSxxx documents may
be given in a CD-ROM different from that containing this Technical Handbook).
The MSxxx documents are enclosed in numerical order. The Edition of the enclosed MSxxx
document is the highest available on the date on which the Technical Handbook is assembled.
Use of the document MSxxx:
• MSxxx means ”document for hardware presetting options” (the MSxxx document’s Part No.
is as that of the unit or sub-unit and its MS acronym defines type).
The xxx part of MSxxx is relevant to ANV internal identification codes.
• As the Customer may have to manage many units of the same type (same P/N) but with different
CS–ICS, the document MSxxx describes with possible different chapters the different setting
options, according to all the possible CSs–ICSs. For this purpose, a table at the beginning of
document (PREFACE) indicates the chapter to be used according to the CS or the
corresponding ’suffix + ICS’, taking into account that:
– a change of the production series does not necessarily imply a change in the setting
options;
– a change of the ANV P/N suffix does not imply a new MSxxx document;
– the CS, SUFFIX and ICS must be meant as:
• from specified CS, SUFFIX or ICS (included)
• to next CS, SUFFIX or ICS (excluded) if listed
– the sequence of CSs is increasing from alphanumeric to numeric (e.g. CS=A0 is lower
than CS=01).
Each chapter contains:
– one or more tables defining the relationship between the functions achievable and the
setting options to make;
– the unit layout drawing which shows the exact location of all the setting options.
N.B. IDENTIFIES PIN 1 OF COMPONENT
The setting options described in the documents MSxxx must be used according to
3AL377470001 (962.000.022 F) MSxxx document, inserted in Table 26. on page 428, which
shows the ’ON’ (closed) position of microswitches.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Those setting options that on the table are indicated by the caption For factory use only should
never be modified.
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 426 / 436
436
EXAMPLE
N.B. The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment part
list!
Taking into account the same unit of Table 25. on page 425:
P/N CS P/N ICS
487.156.612 01 3AL 34422 AAAA 01
487.156.612 02 3AL 34422 AAAB 01
487.156.612 03 3AL 34422 AAAC 01
and supposing that the setting options valid for CS=01 are equal to those for CS=02, but change
for CS=03, the table at the beginning of the document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ will be:
FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CODICE DI FABBRICA CODICE ANV
CHAPTER
CAPITOLO FROM CS FROM SUFFIX FROM ICS
DA CS DA SUFFISSO DA ICS
1 01 ––AA 01
2 03 ––AC 01
If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data:
P/N CS P/N ICS
487.156.612 01 3AL 34422 AAAA 01
487.156.612 02 3AL 34422 AAAB 01
you will use Chapter 1 of document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ
If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data:
P/N CS P/N ICS
487.156.612 03 3AL 34422 AAAC 01

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
487.156.612 04 3AL 34422 AAAD 01
you will use Chapter 2 of document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 427 / 436
436
Table 26. Hardware presetting documentation
The edition of the documents (listed in this table) that are physically enclosed in the handbook is

the highest available when this handbook is assembled. The edition of enclosed documents is

not specified in this table.
Document
Id NAME App PARTS No. for hardware
presettings
3AL 34065 AA– –
a 3 x 34 Mbit/s TRIB. –
(411.100.120 B)
3AL 34066 AA––
b 140/STM–1 Switch Tributary –
(411.100.129 G)
3AL 34069 AA––
c L–4.2 STM–4 Aggregate Port –
(411.100.134 V )
3AL 34069 AB––
d L–4.2 Aggregate Port SC –
(411.100.406 F)
3AL 34072 AA––
e Full Matrix –
(411.100.142 D)
3AL 34075 AB––
f 21x2 Mbit/s 75 ohm TRIB –
(411.100.331 A)
3AL 34075 AC––
g 21x2 Mbit/s 120 ohm TRIB –
(411.100.330 M)
3AL 34077 AA––
h L–1.1 Trib. SC –
(411.100.158 M)
3AL 34080AA––
i 3 x 45 Mbit/s TRIB. –
(411.100.162H)
3AL 34277 AA––
j S–1.1 Trib. FC. –
( 411.100.171 A)
3AL 34278 AA––
k S–1.1 Trib. DIN –
( 411.100.172 B)
3AL 34279 AA––
l L–1.1 Trib. DIN –
( 411.100.173 C)
3AL 34280 AA––
m L–1.1 Trib. FC –
(411.100.174 D)
3AL 34291 AA––
n L–4.1 STM–4 Aggregate Port –
(411.100.153 G)
3AL 34292 AA––
o S–4.1 STM–4 Aggregate Port –
(411.100.154 H)
3AL 34293 AA––
p S–4.1 Aggregate Port DIN –
(411.100.168 P)
3AL 34294 AA––
q L–4.1 Aggregate Port DIN –
(411.100.169 Q)
3AL 34295 AA––
r L–4.2 Aggregate Port DIN –
(411.100.170 M)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 34296 AA––

s S–1.1 Trib. 600 –
(411.100.185 Z)
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 428 / 436
436
Document
presettings
3AL 34324 AA––

t S–1.1 Trib. SC –
(411.100.160 k)
3AL 34437 AA––
u L–1.1 Trib. 600 –
(411.100.247 N)
3AL 34453 AE––
v AUX EOW UNIT –
(411.100.483 U)
3AL 34453 AF––
w AUX EOW Extension –
(411.100.484 V)
34/2 TRANS.MUX & 5x2 Mbit/s 3AL 34474 AA––
x –
Trib. (411.100.236 B)
3AL 34652 AA––
y S–4.1 Aggregate Port SC –
(411.100.243 J)
3AL 34653 AA––
z L–4.1 Aggregate Port SC –
(411.100.244 K)
3AL 34732 AA––
aa SMEC 2A 8R+16F –
(411.100.301M)
3AL 34733 AA––
ab L–4.2JE STM–4 Aggregate Port –
(411.100.302 N)
3AL 34733AB––
ac L–4.2 JE Aggregate Port DIN –
(411.100.390J)
3AL 34733AC––
ad L–4.2 JE Aggregate Port SC –
(411.100.431 X)
3AL 34787 AA––
ae ENHANCED CRU 0.37 PPM –
(411.100.306 J)
3AL34804AA––
af S–1.1 Trib. 600 SC –
(411.100.245 L )
3AL 34805 AA––
ag L–1.1 Trib. 600 SC –
(411.100.246 M)
3AL 34918 AA––
ah L–1.2 TRIB FC –
(411.100.325 C)
3AL 34918 AC––
ai L–1.2 TRIB SC –
(411.100.788 M)
3AL 35714 AA––
aj L–1.2 TRIB 600 –
(411.100.358 V)
3AL 35808 AA––
ak ENHANCED CRU –
(411.100.363J)
3AL 35810 AA––
al L–16.1 HM1 Aggregate –
(411.100.349U)
3AL 35810AB––
am L–16.1 HM1 Aggregate SC –
(411.100.459 K)
3AL 35811 AA––
an L–16.2 HM1 Aggregate –
(411.100.361Q)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 35811AB––
ao L–16.2 HM1 Aggregate SC –
(411.100.460 Q)
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 429 / 436
436
Document
presettings

3AL 35853 AA––
ap L–16.1 HM1 Aggregate –
(411.100.372K)
3AL 35853AB––
aq S–16.1 HM1 Aggregate SC –
(411.100.458 J)
3AL 35854 AA––
ar L–16.2 JE1 HM1 Aggregate –
(411.100.373L)
3AL 35854AB––
as L–16.2 JE1 HM1 Aggregate SC –
(411.100.461 D)
3AL 35855 AA––
at L–16.2 JE2 HM1 Aggregate –
(411.100.374M)
3AL 35855AB––
au L–16.2 JE2 HM1 Aggregate SC –
(411.100.462 E)
21x2 Mbit/s 75 ohm RETIMING 3AL 35905 AB
av –
TRIB (411.100.656 Q)
21x2 Mbit/s 120 ohm RETIMING 3AL 35905 AC
aw –
TRIB (411.100.657 R)
3X34/45 Prot. Access Module 3AL 36155AA––
ax –
1.0 (487.156.448 G)
3X34/45 Prot. Access Module 3AL 36155AB––
ay –
1.6 (487.156.444 U)
3X34/45 Prot. Access Module 3AL 36155AC––
az –
T43 (487.156.449 H)
140/STM–1 Prot. Access Module 3AL 36156AA––
ba –
1.0 (487.156.445 V)
140/STM–1 Prot. Access Module 3AL 36156AB––
bb –
1.6 (487.156.446 W)
140/STM–1 Prot. Access Module 3AL 36156AC––
bc –
T43 (487.156.447 X)
L–16.2 JE1.1 HM1 Aggregate 3AL36516 AA––
bd –
SC (411.100.507 C)
3AL36516 AB––
be S–16.1 ID Aggregate SC –
(411.100.513 Z)
3AL36516 BA––
bf S–16.1 Aggr. 61 FC ENHANC. –
(411.100.969 J)
3AL36516 BB––
bg S–16.1 Aggr. 61 SC ENHANC. –
(411.100.975 G)
3AL36517 AA––
bh L–16.1 ID Aggregate FC –
(411.100.508 M)
3AL36517 AB––
bi L–16.1 ID Aggregate SC –
(411.100.514 S)
3AL36517 BA––
bj L–16.1 Aggr. 61 FC ENHANC. –
(411.100.970 P)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL36517 BB––
bk L–16.1 Aggr. 61 SC ENHANC. –
(411.100.976 H)
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 430 / 436
436
Document
presettings
3AL36518 AA––
bl L–16.2 ID Aggregate FC –
(411.100.509 N)
3AL36518 AB––
bm L–16.2 ID Aggregate SC –
(411.100.515 T)
L–16.2 Aggr. 61 ENHANC. 3AL36518 BA––
bn –
FC (411.100.971 C)
L–16.2 Aggr. 61 ENHANC. 3AL36518 BB––
bo –
SC (411.100.977 A)
3AL36519 AA––
bp L–16.2 JE1 ID Aggregate FC –
(411.100.510 A)
3AL36519 AB––
bq L–16.2 JE1 ID Aggregate SC –
(411.100.516 U)
L–16.2 JE1 Aggr.61 3AL36519 BA––
br –
ENHANCED FC (411.100.972 D)
L–16.2 JE1 Aggr.61 3AL36519 BB––
bs –
ENHANCED SC (411.100.978 K)
3AL36520 AA––
bt L–16.2 JE2 ID Aggregate FC –
(411.100.511 X)
3AL36520 AB––
bu L–16.2 JE2 ID Aggregate SC –
(411.100.517 V)
L–16.2 JE2 Aggr.61 3AL36520 BA––
bv –
ENHANCED FC (411.100.973 E)
L–16.2 JE2 Aggr.61 3AL36520 BB––
bw –
ENHANCED SC (411.100.979 L)
3AL36521 AA––
bx L–16.2 JE3 ID Aggregate FC –
(411.100.512 Y)
3AL36521 AB––
by L–16.2 JE3 ID Aggregate SC –
(411.100.518 E)
L–16.2 JE3 Aggr.61 3AL36521 BA––
bz –
ENHANCED FC (411.100.974 F)
L–16.2 JE3 Aggr.61 3AL36521 BB––
ca –
ENHANCED SC (411.100.980 A)
3AL36561AA––
cb L–16.2 JE3 HM1 Aggregate SC –
(411.100.520C)
3AL36561AB––
cc L–16.2 JE3 HM1 Aggregate FC –
(411.100.643 K)
3AL 37450AA––
cd DVB Tributary –
(411.100.641 R)
3AL37615 AA––
ce L–16 Agg. 192.3 SC 6400 –
(411.100.710 J)
3AL37615 AB––
cf L–16 Agg. 192.5 SC 6400 –
(411.100.711 F)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL37615 AC––
cg L–16 Agg. 192.7 SC 6400 –
(411.100.712 G)
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 431 / 436
436
Document
presettings

3AL37615 AD––
ch L–16 Agg. 192.9 SC 6400 –
(411.100.713 H)
3AL37615 AE––
ci L–16 Agg. 193.1 SC 6400 –
(411.100.714 A)
3AL37615 AF––
cj L–16 Agg. 193.3 SC 6400 –
(411.100.715 B)
3AL37615 AG––
ck L–16 Agg. 193.5 SC 6400 –
(411.100.716 C)
3AL37615 AH––
cl L–16 Agg. 193.7 SC 6400 –
(411.100.717 D)
3AL37615 AL––
cm L–16 Agg. 194.3 SC 6400 –
(411.100.718 N)
3AL37615 AM––
cn L–16 Agg. 194.5 SC 6400 –
(411.100.719 P)
3AL37615 AN––
co L–16 Agg. 194.7 SC 6400 –
(411.100.720 L)
3AL37615 AP––
cp L–16 Agg. 194.9 SC 6400 –
(411.100.721 H)
3AL37615 AQ––
cq L–16 Agg. 195.1 SC 6400 –
(411.100.722 A)
3AL37615 AR––
cr L–16 Agg. 195.3 SC 6400 –
(411.100.723 B)
3AL37615 AS––
cs L–16 Agg. 195.5 SC 6400 –
(411.100.724 C)
3AL37615 AT––
ct L–16 Agg. 195.7 SC 6400 –
(411.100.725 D)
STM16 Agg.61 192.3/6400 3AL37615 BA––
cu –
ENHANCED SC (411.100.981 X)
STM16 Agg.61 192.5/6400 3AL37615 BB––
cv –
ENHANCED SC (411.100.982 Y)
STM16 Agg.61 192.7/6400 3AL37615 BC––
cw –
ENHANCED SC (411.100.983 Z)
STM16 Agg.61 192.9/6400 3AL37615 BD––
cx –
ENHANCED SC (411.100.984 S)
STM16 Agg.61 193.1/6400 3AL37615 BE––
cy –
ENHANCED SC (411.100.985 T)
STM16 Agg.61 193.3/6400 3AL37615 BF––
cz –
ENHANCED SC (411.100.986 U)
STM16 Agg.61 193.5/6400 3AL37615 BG––
da –
ENHANCED SC (411.100.987 V)
STM16 Agg.61 193.7/6400 3AL37615 BH––
db –
ENHANCED SC (411.100.988 E)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
STM16 Agg.61 194.3/6400 3AL37615 BL––

dc –
ENHANCED SC (411.100.989 F)
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 432 / 436
436
Document
presettings
STM16 Agg.61 194.5/6400 3AL37615 BM––

dd –
ENHANCED SC (411.100.990 C)
STM16 Agg.61 194.7/6400 3AL37615 BN––
de –
ENHANCED SC (411.100.991 Z)
STM16 Agg.61 194.9/6400 3AL37615 BP––
df –
ENHANCED SC (411.100.992 S)
STM16 Agg.61 195.1/6400 3AL37615 BQ––
dg –
ENHANCED SC (411.100.993 T)
STM16 Agg.61 195.3/6400 3AL37615 BR––
dh –
ENHANCED SC (411.100.994 U)
STM16 Agg.61 195.5/6400 3AL37615 BS––
di –
ENHANCED SC (411.100.995 V)
STM16 Agg.61 195.7/6400 3AL37615 BT––
dj –
ENHANCED SC (411.100.996 W)
3AL37718 AA––
dk 21x1.5 Mbit/s Tributary –
(411.100.871 G)
3AL 34020 AA–– 3AL 34020 AAAA
3x34 Mbit/s Trib. a
(487.155.306 H) MSZZQ
3AL 34024 AA–– 3AL 34024 AAAA
DS Future Bus Termination
(487.156.367E) MSZZQ
3AL 34025 AA–– 3AL 34025 AAAA
3x45 Mbit/s TRIB i
(487.156.313 Y) MSZZQ
x–a–f
i–e 3AL 34055 AA–– 3AL 34055 AAAA
Card Controller TRIB/2 g– ae–ak– (483.100.046 H) MSZZQ
v–w–av–aw–cd
h–k–l–s–t–af–ag 3AL 34056 AAAA
3AL 34056 AA––
Card Controller LAP 1/2 u–b–j
(483.100.047 A) MSZZQ
m–ah–aj–ai
3AL 34335 AA–– 3AL 34335 AAAA
140/STM1 Tributary b
(483.100.067 E) MSZZQ
34/2 TRANS.MUX & 5x2 Mbit/s 3AL 34477 AA–– 3AL 34477 AAAA
x
Trib. (483.100.081 V) MSZZQ
3AL 34649AA–– 3AL 34649 AAAA
Equipment Controller SMEC2 aa
(487.156.720C) MSZZQ
3AL 34691 AA–– 3AL 34691 AAAA
21x2 Mbit/s TRIB 120 ohm g
(487.156.343 E) MSZZQ
3AL 34693 AA–– 3AL 34693 AAAA
21x2 Mbit/s TRIB 75 ohm f
(487.156.344 F) MSZZQ
3AL 34788 AA–– 3AL 34788 AAAA
Enhanced CRU ae
(487.156.617 Z) MSZZQ
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3AL 34919 AA–– 3AL 34919 AAAA

L–1.2 Trib. FC –ah
(487.156.358 M) MSZZQ
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 433 / 436
436
Document
presettings

3AL 34963 AA–– 3AL 34963 AAAB
Power Supply
(478.120.804 L) MSZZQ
3AL 35715 AA–– 3AL 35715 AAAA
L–1.2 Trib. Optic 600 aj
(487.156.366 D) MSZZQ
al–an–ap 3AL 35798 AAAA
3AL 35798 AA––
STM–16 HM1 Aggregate ar–at–cb–aq–am
(487.156.371A) MSZZQ
–ao–as–au–cc
3AL 35809AA–– 3AL 35809 AAAA
Enhanced CRU ak
(487.156.383X) MSZZQ
3AL 35906 AA
21 x 2 Mbit/s Trib. 120 OHM Re- 3AL 35906 AAAA
aw (483.100.125 V)
timing MSZZQ
3AL 36009 AA–– 3AL 36009 AAAA

PBA Optical Trib 600 s–u–af–ag–
(487.156.398 E) MSZZQ
bd–be–bf–bg–bh
–bi–bj–bk–bl–bm
–bn–bo–bp–bq–
bs–br–bt–bu–bx
–bv–by–bz–ca–
ce–cf–cg–ch–ci– 3AL 36110 AA–– 3AL 36110 AAAA
PBA LAP_QE
cj–ck–cl–cm–cn– (483.100.134 W) MSZZQ
co–cp–cq–cr–cs
–ct–cu–cv–cw–
cx–cy–cz–da–db
–dc–dd–de–df–
dg–dh–di–dj
3AL 36162 AA–– 3AL 36162 AAAA
Alarm Interface Acc. Module
(487.156.443 T) MSZZQ
3AL 36166 AA–– 3AL 36166 AAAA
Switch Module 34 Mbit/s ay–ax–az
(487.156.622 W) MSZZQ
c–d–n–o–p–q–r– 3AL 36264 AA–– 3AL 36264 AAAA
STM 4 Aggregate
y–z–ab–ac–ad– (487.156.509 E) MSZZQ
3AL 36340 AA–– 3AL 36340 AAAA
AUX EOW unit v–w
(483.100.157 D) MSZZQ
bd–be–bh–bi–bl–
bm–bp–bq–bt–
bu–bx–by–ce–cf 3AL 36389 AA–– 3AL 36389 AAAA
STM 16 ID Aggregate
–cg–ch–ci–cj–ck (487.156.511 P) MSZZQ
–cl–cm–cn–co–
cp–cq–cr–cs–ct
3AL 37290 AA–– 3AL 37290 AAAA
Optical STM1 Trib h–j–k–l–m–t–ah
(487.156.553 Z ) MSZZQ
3AL 37422AA–– 3AL 37422 AAAA
DVB Tributary cd
(483.100.180 H) MSZZQ
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
21 x 2 Mbit/s Trib. 75 OHM 3AL 37472 AA 3AL 37472 AAAA

av
Retiming (483.100.186 T) MSZZQ
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 434 / 436
436
Document
presettings
3AL 37474 AA–– 3AL 37474 AAAA

CMI Switch Module (140 Mbit/s) ba–bb–bc
(487.156.652C) MSZZQ
3AL 37480 AA–– 3AL 37480 AAAA
Power Access Module/2
(487.156.563 T) MSZZQ
bd–be–bf–bg–bh
–bi–bj–bk–bl–bm
–bn–bo–bp–bq–
br–bs–bt–bu–bv
–bw–bx–by–bz–
ca–ce–cf–cg–ch 3AL 37486AA–– 3AL 37486 AAAA
PBA Colored Expansion
–ci–cj–ck–cl–cm (483.100.189 E) MSZZQ
–cn–co–cp–cq–
cr–cs–ct–cu–cv–
cw–cx–cy–cz–da
–db–dc–dd–de–
df–dg–dh–di–dj-
3AL 37717AA –– 3AL 37717 AAAA
21x1.5 Mbit/s Tributary dk
(487.156.487 Q) MSZZQ
3AL 37747 0001 3AL 37747 0001
Microswitches ”ON” position
(962.000.022 F) MSZZQ
bf–bg–bj–bk–bn–
bo–br–bs–bv–bw
–bz–ca–cu–cv– 3AL 37756 AA–– 3AL 37756 AAAA
STM 16 ID Aggregate Enhanced
cw–cx–cy–cz–da (487.156.594 K) MSZZQ
–db–dc–dd–de–
df–dg–dh–di–dj-
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 07
955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 435 / 436
436
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
07
955.100.562 K
END OF DOCUMENT
436
3AL 36668 AA AA
436 / 436

Vdocuments - MX 1651sm 1661smc Operator Handbook r251 r151

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Vdocuments - MX 1651sm 1661smc Operator Handbook r251 r151

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK

COD.MANUALE HDBK P/N: 955.100.562 K Ed.07 3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07

INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA - ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

Vedere lista da pagina: No documenti MSZZQ

TOTALE PAGINE A4 (FACCIATE) TOTAL A4 PAGES: 438

TOTALE FOGLI A4 TOTAL A4 SHEETS: 219

WARNING FOR A-UNITS OTHER THAN A-ITALY

955.100.562 TQZZA 3AL 36668 AAAA TQZZA Y 1/ 4

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Nome G.CAPRIOLI E.CORRADINI

– ORIGINALE SU FILE: ALICE 6.10

955.100.562 K Ed.07 3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07

955.100.562 TQZZA 3AL 36668 AAAA TQZZA Y 2/ 4

622 Mbit/s Add–Drop Multiplexer

955.100.562 K Ed.07 3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07

1651SM Rel. 2.5.1

1651SM Rel. 2.5.1

1651SM Rel. 2.5.1

955.100.562 TQZZA 3AL 36668 AAAA TQZZA Y 3/ 4

955.100.562 K Ed.07 3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

2 COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

3 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

4 OTHER NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

07 001016 SC00100201 G.CAPRIOLI ITAVE C.FAVERO ITAVE

955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 1 / 436

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

6 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

3.2.4 34/2 Tran. Mux and 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 2 / 436

3.2.11 STM4 Aggregate unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

3.2.12 STM–16 Aggregate unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

5.2 Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 3 / 436

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

TURN–ON, TEST AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 4 / 436

7.5 Corrective Maintenance (Trouble/Shooting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

7.6 Set of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 5 / 436

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 6 / 436

Figure 54. Drop and Continue D/C W INS W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Figure 55. Drop and Continue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Figure 100. Block diagram: Futurebus Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 7 / 436

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Figure 153. Kbit/s auxiliary channels check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 8 / 436

Figure 161. Check on External free running synchronism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Figure 162. Test on remote alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

955.100.562 K 3AL 36668 AA AA 9 / 436

1.1 General information

1.2 Handbook applicability

This handbook applies to the following product-releases:

PRODUCT ANV P/N FACTORY P/N